Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Esta es una copia digital de un libro que, durante generaciones, se ha conservado en las estanteras de una biblioteca, hasta que Google ha decidido
escanearlo como parte de un proyecto que pretende que sea posible descubrir en lnea libros de todo el mundo.
Ha sobrevivido tantos aos como para que los derechos de autor hayan expirado y el libro pase a ser de dominio pblico. El que un libro sea de
dominio pblico significa que nunca ha estado protegido por derechos de autor, o bien que el perodo legal de estos derechos ya ha expirado. Es
posible que una misma obra sea de dominio pblico en unos pases y, sin embargo, no lo sea en otros. Los libros de dominio pblico son nuestras
puertas hacia el pasado, suponen un patrimonio histrico, cultural y de conocimientos que, a menudo, resulta difcil de descubrir.
Todas las anotaciones, marcas y otras seales en los mrgenes que estn presentes en el volumen original aparecern tambin en este archivo como
testimonio del largo viaje que el libro ha recorrido desde el editor hasta la biblioteca y, finalmente, hasta usted.
Normas de uso
Google se enorgullece de poder colaborar con distintas bibliotecas para digitalizar los materiales de dominio pblico a fin de hacerlos accesibles
a todo el mundo. Los libros de dominio pblico son patrimonio de todos, nosotros somos sus humildes guardianes. No obstante, se trata de un
trabajo caro. Por este motivo, y para poder ofrecer este recurso, hemos tomado medidas para evitar que se produzca un abuso por parte de terceros
con fines comerciales, y hemos incluido restricciones tcnicas sobre las solicitudes automatizadas.
Asimismo, le pedimos que:
+ Haga un uso exclusivamente no comercial de estos archivos Hemos diseado la Bsqueda de libros de Google para el uso de particulares;
como tal, le pedimos que utilice estos archivos con fines personales, y no comerciales.
+ No enve solicitudes automatizadas Por favor, no enve solicitudes automatizadas de ningn tipo al sistema de Google. Si est llevando a
cabo una investigacin sobre traduccin automtica, reconocimiento ptico de caracteres u otros campos para los que resulte til disfrutar
de acceso a una gran cantidad de texto, por favor, envenos un mensaje. Fomentamos el uso de materiales de dominio pblico con estos
propsitos y seguro que podremos ayudarle.
+ Conserve la atribucin La filigrana de Google que ver en todos los archivos es fundamental para informar a los usuarios sobre este proyecto
y ayudarles a encontrar materiales adicionales en la Bsqueda de libros de Google. Por favor, no la elimine.
+ Mantngase siempre dentro de la legalidad Sea cual sea el uso que haga de estos materiales, recuerde que es responsable de asegurarse de
que todo lo que hace es legal. No d por sentado que, por el hecho de que una obra se considere de dominio pblico para los usuarios de
los Estados Unidos, lo ser tambin para los usuarios de otros pases. La legislacin sobre derechos de autor vara de un pas a otro, y no
podemos facilitar informacin sobre si est permitido un uso especfico de algn libro. Por favor, no suponga que la aparicin de un libro en
nuestro programa significa que se puede utilizar de igual manera en todo el mundo. La responsabilidad ante la infraccin de los derechos de
autor puede ser muy grave.
Acerca de la Bsqueda de libros de Google
El objetivo de Google consiste en organizar informacin procedente de todo el mundo y hacerla accesible y til de forma universal. El programa de
Bsqueda de libros de Google ayuda a los lectores a descubrir los libros de todo el mundo a la vez que ayuda a autores y editores a llegar a nuevas
audiencias. Podr realizar bsquedas en el texto completo de este libro en la web, en la pgina http://books.google.com
http://books.google.com
INTERMEDIATE OR LARGER
GREEK
GRAMMAR,
D. BOILEAU, Esq.
WITH
A BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE OF THE AUTHOR:
LONDON:
PRISTED FOR THE EDITOR,
PUBLISHED BY BLACK, YOUNG, AND YOUNG,
2, TAVISTOCK STREET.
MBCCCXXXIII.
R 310313
LONDON:
FMNTID BT WILLIAM OLOWRS,
Stamford Street.
TO THE
Rev. Dr. KEATE,
HEAD-MASTER OF ETON-SCHOOL,
THE FOLLOWING
GRAMMAR,
NOW FIRST TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH,
IS DEDICATED
RY HIS FAITHFUL AND RESPECTFUL SERVANT,
THE EDITOR.
PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.
vi
vii
viii
ix
xi
xii
Xlii
forward simultaneously with his own mind, free from doubt and
difficulty ; he never overlays his subject with a mass of autho
rities, but is often content with a solitary, because striking exam
ple; you are never arrested by fanciful theories, which may
amuse idle curiosity, and exercise youthful ingenuity ; the table
spread before you exhibits a great variety of solid food for men,
but yet with nutritious dainties for tender stomachs ; there is no
ambitious display of learning in a multitude of references, but so
much is given, as each topic seems naturally to demand from an
intelligent pen, and even in cases, where he delivers his opinions
without the sanction of recorded criticism,the mere results of
his own individual observation, and unaided research,you feel
yourself in the presence of a master, to whose authority you are
ready to bow, because the reasons, on which he founds his opi
nions, are such as could have occurred only to one, who is well
qualified to decide on grammatical questions by the extent of his
acquirements, the profoundness of his views, the niceness of his
taste, the acuteness of his remarks, the soundness of his judgment,
the candor and impartiality, which pervade his mind, and the love
of truth, by which he is everywhere actuated without contending
for the palm of victory in ingenuity, or the triumph of argument
ation in discussion.
8. The pretensions, then, of this work entitle it to the careful
examination of all those Masters of Schools and Tutors, who
are anxious for the improvement of their pupils, and desirous to
march forward in the spirit of the times, improving and improved.
One serious objection to the universal use of Matthias Gram
mar, excellent as it is, is its large bulk, and its high price :
Students are perhaps often deterred from the examination of it by
its magnitude, and their finances frequently do not enable them to
purchase it. The book now offered to their notice combines the
opposite advantages, and will thus, it is presumed, be favorably
received alike by the Master and the Student.
E. H. Barker.
Thetford, Sept. 8, 1832,
Xiv
XV
a near affinity with them : such are mXsiAiwniu, bellaturio, 'I have
a desire [to 'make war,' fipwazlco, esurio, 1 1 long to eat.' As all
beginnings have reference to what is future, hence we see how
properly these verbs are formed, the Greek ones from a future
verb, the Latin from a future participle. From mXeix-nau and
@pwoa> come iroXenTiatlco and jSquauu : from bellaturus and esurus
come bellaturio and esurio. See Macrobius, p. 691. ed. Var.
Plato Phced. Ou nam ys pie vuv S ye\aaelovra tTMWas yeXxaaa."
J. Harris's Hermes, {Works, 1801. 4to. V. I. p. 284.)
III. Intensive A\$a.
Dr. Lud. Doederlein has published a tract on this subject,
which I have had no opportunity of inspecting, or it would have
been noticed in the proper place, Commentatio cie"AX<p Intensivo
Sermonis Gr^ci, Erlang*, 1830.
Whatever requires a
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR
OF
Dr. PHILIP BUTTMANN,
WITU REMARKS OS HIS WRITINGS.
XX
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR
Xxi
xxii
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR
xxiii
XXIV
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Of the Noun.
32. Gender.
33. Declensions.
34. First Declension.
3537. Second Declension ; Contracta; Attic leeond Declension.
38. Third Declension.
38. Gender; 3942. Inflection; 43. Paradigms.
44. Accus. Sing. ; 45. Vocative; 46. Dative Plural.
47. Syncope of some Nouns in *(.
4855. Contracted (third) Declension ; Attic Genitive, &c.
56. Anomalous Declension ; Heteroclita; Metaplasmus, &c.
(Final Syllable $>,, 56. 04s. 9.)
57. Defectiva; Indeclinabilia, &c.
58. List of Irregular Nouns.
59. Adjectives.
6569. Degrees of Comparison, (Gradus Comparationis.)
70, 71. Numerals.
72. Pronouns, and 75. Articles.
78, 79. Pronomina et Adjectiva Correlativa.
80. Annexes; i demonstrativum.
c
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Of the Verb.
{ 81. Of the Greek Verb in general ; Division of Tenses; (Principal and
Historical Tenses.)
8286. Augment.
87. Numbers and Persons.
88. Moods and Participles.
89. Activum ; Passivum ; Medium.
9092. Tenses, Characteristic ; Double Themes: (seealso J 111. 112.)
93. Formation of the Tenses.
$ 95. Futurum Act.
96. Aoristus 1 et 2 Act.
$ 97. Perfectum 1 et 2.
J 98. Perfectum Passivi.
99. Futurum 3.
$ 100. Aoristus 1 et 2 Pass.
$ 101. Verbs in x, /*, , {.
102. Verbal Adjectives in t!{ and V.
$ 103. Verbum Barytonon ; Paradigm rurru : Paradigms of other Verbs;
Paradigm iyyi^M : Remarks on all the Paradigms.
104. Tenses in use, and not in use.
J 105. Contracted Conjugation.
Irregular Conjugation.
106, 107. Verbs in
108. "ltlfU,rHfuu,EnvfulEl/<u,?Zfii.
109. *tifu, KiT/uu, OTSa, Clrnfu.)
110113. Anomaly of Verbs; Double Themes; Syncopated Forms;
Metathesis.
113. Anomaly of Signification ; Causativa et Immediativa.
114. List of Irregular Verbs.
115. Particles and their Degrees of Comparison.
116. ParliculcB Correlatives ; $ 117. Anastrophe.
7
1 18, 1 19. Formation of Words by Terminations, (I. Verbs, II. Substan
tives, III. Adjectives, IV. Adverbs.)
121. Compound Words.
Syntax.
122. General View ; $ 123. of the Noun.
124 127. Article and Pronouns.
128. Neuter of the Adjectives in general.
129. Subject and Predicate.
$
J
$
$
$
TABLE OF CONTENTS'.
130.
J
$
$
}
$
xxvii
GREEK
GRAMMAR.
tice ; but the later poet, having these predecessors before him,
would not be debarred from such treasures, and thus what had
been originally a real dialect, and is justly considered as such,
became a poetical peculiarity, or what is called a poetical
licence s.
6. In all civilised nations one of their dialects generally becomes
the foundation of their common written language, and the lan
guage of polished society. This was not immediately the case
with the Greeks. They became civilised, when they still formed
distinct locally and politically separated states. Nearly up to the
time of Alexander, the Greeks wrote in the dialect, in which they
had been brought up, or to which they were most partial ; and
thus arose Ionic, MoYic, Doric, and Attic poets and prose-writers,
whose works are more or less extant.
Obi. 3. Only great works, which attracted general attention, as epic and dramatic
poems, formed an exception. Their authors unquestionably wrote in the dialect of
their country ; but an imitation of them in another dialect, which, besides, would
have required an almost equal creative talent, would not have been well received,
because all the tribes of Greeks were already familiarised to the language proper
for this species of composition, and could not separate one from the other. The
dialect, in which the first masterpieces of any species of writing were composed,
continued to be the dialect of that species. (See the Text, 10. II.)
Obs. 4. The most ancient poets, Homer, Hesiod, Theognis, and others, wrote in
the Ionic dialect; but their language is rather that apparently mixed one, which
comes nearer to the oldest language, and afterwards continued to be the poetical
dialect used in most species of poetry. The real, but more modern Ionic dialect is
to be found in the prose-writers, of whom Herodotus and Hippocrates are the most
conspicuous, though both Dorians by origin. The Ionic dialect, owing to its pectt*
liar softness and early improvement, had already become pretty general, even iu
prose, especially in Asia Minor.
Obi. 5. The lyrics are the only poets of that time, who wrote in all the dialects.
Bnt the oldest and most celebrated of them were jEoKanS ; at their head are
Sappho and Alcseus, of whom some few scanty remains have been handed down to
ns in fragments. Anacreo, (of whom we have also but a few, partly crippled, and
partly questionable, remains,) wrote in the Ionic dialect. Most of the other lyrio,
poets wrote in the Doric dialect; out of the manifold forms of this widely diffused
dialect, they selected those which suited them, and created, as it were, each his own
! But this must not be understood, as if every expression of the ancient poet*
had actually been once in common use. The privilege which, even in the most
copious language, a modern poet enjoys of forming new words, and giving new
inflections to the existing ones, must have been still more largely allowed to the
ancient poets, at a time when the language was poor. The materials, however, out
of which, and the form according to which, he models his expressions, are not of
the poet's creation, but derived from the stock, and conformable to the analogy of
the language. Neither can a slight polishing of the usual forms, practised in com
mon life even by ordinary men, be denied to him, to whom harmony is a duty, and
rhythmical metre a chain.
B 2
language. Pindar is the only one of these latter, of whom we have some entire
poems.
Obt. 6. The few prose-writings, which we have in the Doric dialect, are mostly on
mathematical and philosophical subjects. With regard to Attic writers, see the
following Obitrvaliom.
7. In the mean time Athens rose to such a political height,
that it maintained for a while a kind of supremacy over all Greece,
and became the centre of all scientific culture. The democratic
constitution, nowhere so unmixed, introduced to the Attic forum,
and the Attic stage, that freedom of speech, which, in con
nection with other advantages, was alone sufficient to raise, not
only these branches of literature, but also those congenial ones,
history and philosophy, to the highest pitch, and impart to the
Attic idiom a perfection and capaciousness, which no other dialect
attained.
Obi. 7. The most distinguished prose-writers of Greece, (we treat separately of
its poets,) of this golden age of Attic literature, are Thucydides, Xenopho, Plato,
Lysias, Isocrates, Demosthenes, and the other orators.
8. Greeks of all tribes repaired to Athens for improvement ;
and Attic masterpieces served as models in the most extensive
fields of literature. The consequence was that the Attic dialect,
which maintained its pre-eminence over all others, became soon
after, when Greece acquired a complete political unity under the
Macedonian monarchs, the court-language and the general lan
guage of books, in which the prose-writers of all the Greek tribes
and countries composed almost exclusively. This language was
now taught in schools, and grammarians pronounced, according
to these Attic models, on what was genuine, or not genuine Attic.
The central point of this later Greek literature was under the
Ptolemies at Alexandria in Egypt.
9. But in proportion as the Attic dialect became general, it
naturally also began gradually to degenerate, partly because
authors indulged in an admixture of their own provincial dialects,
and partly because they substituted for anomalies and apparently
affected expressions peculiar to the Athenians, more regular and
natural ones, or introduced, instead of a simple term more or less
obsolete in common life, a derivative one, which was now more
generally used8. Grammarians, however, (this class of them
are called Atticists,) often endeavoured, with much pedantry and
* Ex, $r, wi#ir9<n for tut, ' to swim ;' i(tr(ift for fym, ' to plough.'
Church. New barbarisms of all kinds crept into this language in the middle age,
when Constantinople, the ancient Byzantium, vw the seat of the Greek empire,
and the centre of the literature of that time ; hence arose the language of the Byzanfine writers, and lastly the Modern Greet.
10. Rut the Attic dialect was not general with regard to poetry ;
the Athenians were models only in one species, the dramatic ;
and as dramatic poetry from its nature merely is, even in tragedy,
the ennobled language of real life, no other dialect reigned on
the Athenian stage than the Attic, which was in the sequel re
tained by all the other Greek theatres 4. In the dialogued part
of the drama, and especially in that which consisted of Trimetries
or Senaries, poets, though indulging in the frequent use of the
apostrophus, and of contractions, allowed themselves but few
poetical licences and changes of forms.
Obs. 11. These licences least indulged in were, as maybe supposed, by comic
writers ? but many a Homeric form would suit the tragic Senary. Of the Greek
dramatists none have been handed down to us but genuine and old Attic writers,
viz. the tragic poets, yEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and the comic poet Ari
stophanes.
11. Homer and the other ancient Ionic poets, whose works
were read in schools, continued uninterruptedly to be models for
all other species of poems, especially those composed in hexametres, the epic, didactic, and elegiac ; and through these poems
the old Ionic or Homeric idiom was preserved with all its pecu
liarities, and antiquated forms. It thus became what the Attic
was for prose-writers, the prevailing dialect or general language
for epic, didactic, and elegiac poetry in the Alexandrian period
and at a later time, when it was no longer readily intelligible to
the common people, and required a learned education to be
completely understood and relished. This language may be
denominated the Epic idiom, as it was derived entirely from epic
poetry.
Obi. 12. The most eminent poets of this class in the Alexandrian period, are
Apollonius, Callimachus, Aratus ; and later, Nicander, Oppian, Quintus, and others.
12. But the Doric dialect was by no means excluded from
poetry even in later times. It maintained itself in light and
especially rural and jocose poetry, partly because there were
predecessors in this line, and probably also because several of
these poems describe the manners and expressions of country See Obi. 3.
FIRST PART.
GRAMMATICAL
FORMS.
2.Alphabetical Letters.
The Greeks received most of their letters from the Phenicians ;
this is evident from the oriental names, by which they are called.
They are the following :
PRONOUNCED
NAMED
alpha
a, aw
A
a
Brirx
beta
b,
a c
B
gamma
v r
r
&
d,
delta
AeXtoe
e, a short
*E ^.Xov epsilon 1
E
G
Ztjto;
zeta
ds,
Z
?
n
e, a long
"Hrcc
eta
H
ijTSI
theta
th,
0
M
'luiTZ
iota, (notjota,)
i, ee
I
i
Kiwt
cappa
K
k,
K
Ao/a/So* lambda
\
I.
A
MO
m,
my
M
Nu
N
V
a,
ny
xi
x,
E
S7
I
*0 /jiixphv omicron, (short 0,)
o short
O
0
nr
Pi
it,
vs
n
P
Ps
r, rh
rho
p
2, C a, i
8,
sigma
Tau
T
t,
tau
V
U, 00
T
ypsilon 1
<Dr
f,
phi
X
xr
ch,
chi
X
*
*r
ps,
psi
01
o long
n
omega, (long 0.)
1 *E ^iX> and T ^<Xo> take the additional ^iXii, that is tene, not aspirate, because
in ancient Greek writings the figure 1 was at the same time one of the marks of the
PRONUNCIATION.
Obi. 1. The double way of writing some letters, is used indiscriminately, except
the small e and i : a stands only in the beginning and in the middle of a word, and
t is employed merely at the end8: this s must not be confounded with ?, see the
following Obs.
Obi. 2. These letters have given rise to a number of abbreviations and flourishes,
many of which occupy more space than the common character, which they are to
supply. Hence they have been rarely employed of late, and there is little difficulty
to be encountered in modern editions, in remembering that
h stands for tu
for is
r* for trr
for r3
^ for e%
^ for ).
In some the letters are but little altered, as of, J, for mi, xai, ^ for xx, &c.
Obi. 3. The Greeks employed their alphabetical letters also as numerals ; but to
have a sufficiency of them, inserted after the t the r, after the * the and after
the u the 3 *. All letters when used as numerals, are distinguished by a stroke at
the top in this manner: ' 1, g 2, 6, { 10, ul 11, x' 20,
26, 100, </ 200,
rX/3' 232, &c. The thousands begin again with , but with a stroke underneath,
a 1000, /3, &c, X0' 2232.
3.Pronunciation.
1. The ancient pronunciation can no longer be accurately ascer
tained. Of the modern ways of pronouncing the Greek, the two
principal are those of Reuchlin and Erasmus. We follow the
latter, which not only is becoming more general every day, but
also has most internal grounds in its favor, and is greatly con
firmed by the way in which Greek names and words are written
by the Latins, and Latin ones by the Greeks. Reuchlin's pronun
ciation agrees chiefly with the pronunciation of the modern Greeks,
who persist in defending it as the true and ancient way of pro
nouncing the Greek.
Obs. 1. The manner of writing Greek with Latin characters may be seen in the
names of the letters, which we have given above in Latin characters, and may be
learned from what is stated in this section, and in 5 and 6. According to Reuch
lin's pronunciation, the is sounded like i, ee, the diphthong au like ce, and the
sounds ii, ii, v, and vi are not distinguished from i : the u in all diphthongs, (except
v,) is pronounced like v or f, as airit, aftos, Ziuc, Zeus. This pronunciation appears
to be really built in the main on ancient pronunciation ; but never can have been
the pronunciation of the prevailing dialect. This is unquestionably evident from
the manner, in which the Greeks wrote Latin words and names : eiiCn, Thebe, Pomspiritut atper, (h,) and v represented also the Digamma, (or Latin V, see 6. Obs. 3.)
The epithet \f-iX was intended to distinguish them, when they were mere vowels,
from the Bigns of aspiration.
1 With some moderns also at the end of syllables: this practice, when it goes
beyond the usual compounds, cum encliticis, and with wjif, n'f, if, and perhaps )vf,
offers great difficulties.
* This character or flourish is called sti, and sometimes also stigma.
* These three numerical characters, of which the first r agrees only accidentally
with the modern abbreviation r, were originally letters of an antiquated alphabet.
10
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
pejut, Vcfurvias, C/audiia, KXi!3/. Were the modern way of pronouncing the m
like i correct, the Latins could not have made Pozat of Ylnixt, or the Greeks KkuXia
of Ciotlia; and even Kxtiixm, K*irn(, for Citcilius, Cmtar, &c, is not decisive in liehalf of <b for m, as we have no positive information respecting the pronunciation of
the Latin diphthongs. As this method of pronouncing assimilates so many sounds
to that of the iota, it is called iolaciimw, (or, from ita for eta,) itacismui ; that of
Erasmus is called etaciamus.
2. With regard to some letters, it may be observed that
7 before another y, and before the other dentals, (x, ^. ?>) is pro
nounced like ng, ex. gr. syyvs, eng-gus, (or like the Latin
angustus,) avyxpiais, syncrisis ; 'Ayytfons, Anchises ; 2(p!yJ;,
Sphinx
must not be pronounced like ts, but like ds, or the French z, dz.
In the ancient language it was sounded sd *.
m is by some constantly pronounced like <b. It is barely possible
that it was pronounced as ce or 6 according as it was derived
from a. or e.
& is generally not distinguished from r : but among the ancients
it belonged to the aspirate, and is still pronounced lisping by
the modern Greeks, like the English th.
i is merely the i vowel, not the j consonant ; and Sa/AjSor, 'lewta
must therefore be pronounced i-ambos, I-onia. Yet the
Greeks employed it in foreign names for the j : for instance
'lovXios, Julius; ITojUOTjior, Pompejus.
x is always expressed in Latin even before e and i by a c, and the
Latin c is constantly ax in the Greek ; for instance Kfatw,
Cimo, Cicero, Ktxipuv, because the Romans pronounced
the c before all vowels like a x.
v. See its pronunciation at the end of words, 25, 06s. 4.
g. See about its aspiration p (rh,) 6, 3.
a in general may be pronounced like the French q with e> cedille,
or like a sharp s.
t before i with another vowel must not be pronounced like a z as
in Latin. Say YaXxrla, Galalia, not Galazia. Kpirlas,
Critics, TegEvrioy, Terentius.
v was in modern times long pronounced like (, but it is well as
certained that the Greeks and the Latins, who made it a y,
pronounced it like the French w. In Latin names it fre' In all these cases the Latin n has the pronunciation of ng : from an inveterate
mistake we say An-chites instead of Ang-chisea.
* This sound with the progress of time became much softer, resembling the
French z ; the modem Greeks still pronounce it in this way.
11
12
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
P X *
0 v 5
It X T
correspond lo each other in both directions, horizontal and per
pendicular.
3. Of the liquid consonants, /a, v, are nasal sounds belonging
to the two first organs ; the y before another palatal consonant
being attended with a nasal sound, is the same for the third organ,
( 3, 2.) as may be seen on comparing syllabic combinations like
EpLTTCC EVTa EyXCt.
There are thus in each organ four letters, which correspond one
to another ; the lingual organ alone, owing to the greater mobi
lity of the foretongue, and to the operation of the teeth, has a few
sounds more ; in Greek X, g, a.
4. No genuine Greek word can end in any consonant but one
of the three semivowels, a, v, p , for and \J> belong to the a. Only
ex and owe constitute an exception ; but they can be used in this
form merely before other words, with which they coalesce in pro
nunciation. (See 26.)
5.Diphthongs.
1. The ancient pronunciation of the Greek diphthongs is far
from having been ascertained ; hence we pronounce most of them
separately or distinctly but in one syllable. The manner, in which
they were rendered by the Latins, will appear from the following
examples :
ai pronounced ai, <ba.l$pof, Faidros, Phcedrus.
c
SPIRITUS, BREATHING.
13
04*. 1. Bat the Latins are not steady in their manner of writing the diphthong
ii, as is proved by their writing 'Ifiyinm, Iphigenia, MijJuo, Medea, 'HfaxXnrn;, Heraclilut, nakvx*.u<ris, Polyclettu. Some few words in cut, im, undergo no change in
Latin, excepting' that the i vowel is changed into the / consonant : M/, 'A^/>
TftU, Maja, Achaja, Troj'a.
2. The improper diphthongs are written with an iota, (iota subscriptum,) underneath the three following vowels :
?> Vt VThis changes nothing in their pronunciation, and merely serves
to point at the etymology of the word, in which they occur ; but
originally it influenced the pronunciation. The ancients also
wrote it in the line, and this is still done with capital letters : as,
THI 204>IAI, -rf) <To<p/$r, to)"AiSti or aSVi.
Obt. 2. The old national Greek grammarians likewise rank nv, tie, and tit, among
the improper diphthongs, of which they say, that one of their vowels is long, and
the other short, whilst all the others contain but two rapidly pronounced short
vowels. Hence it appears that in order to distinguish nu from iv, the ( must he
sounded stronger, and the same ought to be observed with regard to an and im. It
is likewise very evident that the case must have been the same with a, , , at the
time, when the i was sounded with them, which must have been the usual pronun
ciation in the strictly classical times, as is proved by the Latins writing Iragoedut,
comoedut, for roxyvits, xv/ttiSif. But it is also eq\ially manifest from the words
adopted at a later period, as prosodia, ode, for TeosyVm, tfSit, that * was then no
longer distinguished from . We now adhere thoroughly to this equally genuine
pronunciation ; and as an improper diphthong can only be a diphthong, in which
the two vowels are not sounded, the far more practical division, which we have
adopted above, is fully justified.
Obt. 3. The tv, indeed, sounds only as one vowel, and therefore is no real diph
thong ; but we leave it in its old place, because it also differs essentially from the
three others, in which there is only one of the two written vowels sounded, whilst in
bu there is, as it were, a third mixed sound of t and v, just as a has a sound between
a and e. The short u was also in the oldest language, and remained in the j3?olic
dialect, and in Latin, as the idiom most nearly related to that dialect. It was ex
pressed by the kindred letters and u, and in later times probably by the , a com
pound of both letters. The Homeric lUktrSt is of this description. See Verb, Anom.
V. $ov\o(*ett.
6.Spiritus, Breathing.
1. The Greek letters have 2 signs or marks :
' Spiritus lenis, (wvsD/xa \},iXov, the slight aspirate,)
' Spiritus asper, (wveu/Aa $xau, the strong aspirate.)
The Spir. asper is the h aspirate : the lenis is used when other
languages begin the word simply with the vowel, as, lyu, ego :
"Opvipoi, Homerus. But in Prosody and Grammar both kinds
of words are considered as beginning merely with a vowel : thus
14
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
PROSODY.
15
7.Prosody.
1. Prosody, according to the modern acceptation of the word, is
the theory of the quantity of syllables, that is to say, their length,
(productio,) or their shortness, (correptio.) 1
2. Every word and grammatical form had for each syllable,
with very few exceptions, a fixed quantity, which regulated the
pronunciation of the Greeks in their common intercourse, and
must therefore be known to pronounce the Greek correctly.
Obs. 1. Hence it is evident how greatly they err, who detach Prosody from
Grammar, and consider it merely as a theory necessary for the understanding of
poetry. The error proceeds from the circumstance, that hearing no longer the
common pronunciation of the ancients, we learn the quantity of syllables from the
works of the poets, who indulged in peculiarities and licences. Thus we have in
many instances, along with the fixed quantity, a poetical quantity, of which the
most important points are stated in the Obtervationt.
3. Grammar notes the quantity of syllables with the following
two marks over the vowel, ( " ) long, ( " ) short ; for instance,
a short a, at long a.
a. doubtful or fluctuating.
4. Any syllable, the length of which is not distinctly ascer
tained, is presumed to be short.
5. A syllable is long either 1. by the nature of the vowel, or
2. by position.
6. A syllable is 1. long by nature, when its vowel is a long
one, as, for instance, the middle syllable of amare, docere, in
Latin. This is denoted in Greek partly by the characters them
selves j of the simple vowels
*j and at are always long,
e and o always short.
They therefore require no comment. But the three others,
a, , v,
are, like all Latin vowels, both long and short, and hence are called
doubtful or fluctuating, in Latin ancipites.
Ohi. 2, But this must not be understood as if there were in the nature of the
sounds a, i, u, something fluctuating between length and shortness. All vowels are
fixedly, (positively,) long in some words, and fixedly short in others ; but it is only
for e and o that the Greeks have particular characters in either case. The quantity
of a, i, u, is learned in the same way as we learn it, in Latin, of all the five vowels.
But if one of the three vowels be actually fluctuating in some Greek words, ex. gr.
1 But the ancient Greek grammarians comprise In
' whatever affects the
sound of a syllable,' and consequently alio ' both accents and spiritus.'
1(3
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
the x in xxxls, the i in it'm, the case is the same with e and o heing written in two
ways in the same words, as in rpx&v and rgu%dvt cZtt and
and visr, which
cannot be distinguished in the most ancient writing.
7. With respect to the length by nature, it is a general rule
that two vowels, giving but one sound, constitute a long syllable.
Hence
1. ) All diphthongs, without exception, are long ; ex. gr. the
penultima in fiatolXetos, kitxtu.
2. ) All contractions are long, and in this instance the fluctu
ating vowels are constantly long, ex. gr. the a in Saim for dix.av,
the i in Ipls for Upos, the v in the accus. fiorpvs for fiorpuxs. See
28.
Obs. 3. But elisions, (e-r. gr. iriyu for rj,) must be carefully distinguished
from contractions, as is stated in 2830.
8. A syllable is long 2. even with a short vowel by position,
that is to say when it is followed by two or more consonants, or
a double letter ; ex. gr. the penultima in
/xeyurTor, xai\xu,
/Se'Xe/lavov, a-^appos, x.a$i%ai, vo/jLt^ui.
Obs. 4. There is frequently a long vowel along with the position. In this case
it is a very customary fault to be satisfied with the length by position without
lengthening the vowel in pronunciation. It ought, however, to be lengthened not
only in An^>, (pronounce LeAmnos,) 'lptn\, XajsJvSa,-, &c, not only where there is
a circumflex, ( 11. i.) as in /ixkXn,
but also in v(xttu, srfaSw, the length of
whose x is obvious from the kindred forms, which have the circumflex, (trS|if,
Tfiyfix,) whilst the x in txttk, ragw, is short as in rx\it . And just as we distinguish
the final syllables of KinXjnp and Kiut^i we must observe the same distinction in
were the first syllable is long, (gen. 9(*f,) and in alxag, where it is short,
(gen. xSxixcs.) The length and shortness of the fluctuating vowels before a posi
tion, to obtain a correct pronunciation, must be learned by attending to the accents
according to Obs. 1 1, and by consulting the kindred forms of the word in the way,
which we have just stated.
9. Muta cum liquida, ( 4.) in general does not make a posi
tion ; hence the penultima in cstexvos-, SiSpayrjAos, yEVE'SXT), $u<s<j[oti>.os,
&c. is short. Only poets sometimes also use these syllables as
long, whence the common assertion that muta cum liquida makes
a doubtful syllable.
Obi. 5. Hence beginners ought to be extremely careful to ascertain whether the
vowel in such a word be not possibly long by nature, for in that case it remains
long of course, as, for instance, in v'tvTxSxts, which comes from 9a, (a contrac
tion of xtSxa,) and consequently has a long x. It is the same with -f'vxfis, the v
of which is long, because it comes from ^v^u, (see Obs. 8.) Learners are very apt
to fancy that muta cum liquida has the power of rendering the syllable doubtful.
10. The medice, medials, (/3, y, 5,) when before the three liquids
t\, (a, v, form, however, an exception to the preceding rule, and
PROSODY.
17
18
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tixti, victory.
Xiplf, i, hunger.
bed, couch,
pitet, fi, shin.
whirlpool.
Xtros, tmall.
\vvat, common, mutual.
Si/pot, 0, mind.
xvQos, crooked, bent,
r. - o, pole of a carriage.
^vX^t soul.
X"r"fi j"'cei *"P'
fv\ii, tribe, troop.
nXif, S, juice.
ukn, forest, materials.
Tfflo;, a, cheese.
Xvxfi, grief.
Twflf1, o, wheat.
Tvyri, buttocks.
XevrSr gold.
ffdruf, member of the same tribe,
irn, harm, ruin.
cf^ay);, fi, seal.
iaXes, o, firebrand.
r^ax^Sj rough,
(uxaii, little, small in stature.
In the verbs, which end simply with an annexed to the radical word, the i and v
are constantly long, (ex. gr. t(!I3*i, ei$t>, -\ix,) excepting yXuQai, to carve, engrave.
But the a, (ex.gr. in ay, y^afu,) is short. See the quantity of the final syllable
of the Present Tense of the Verbs in aw, i'w, i/w, 112. Obs. Of the verbs liable
to contraction we particularly notice as having the first syllable long :
xmu, to stt in motion.
}i$av, to dive, search,
ptyiw, to shudder.
ev\aa>, to plunder,
jnyau, to shiver.
Qutav, to blow, breathe,
ffiyaat, to be silent.
The knowledge of these words is useful not only for usual compounds, as an/ic;,
a^vx't, (?t{i/3s,) "iiaT^u. IfifyAiif, arvXct, &c, but also for many proper names, as
Hermotimus, Demonicus, Ertphyle, &c.
' There is likewise some assistance to be derived from the Ionic dialect for the
quantity of the a, as that dialect frequently changes a into n, ex.gr. SrvftfriXac,
3 But ri(if, the gen. of xH(, <ra,fire.
PROSODY.
19
Obs. 9. The Nouns Substantive and Adjective derived from verbs, and retaining
their characteristic, may be assumed to be of the same quantity with these verbs,
until the contrary be perfectly ascertained ; for some of these nouns have not the
long vowel of the Present Tense, but the short one of the Aor. 2. This is the case :
a. with some substantives in , T{?/3n, JiarfijW, im^u^ti, Tutfa^C^ii. But
^'X'i (u/.)
b. with some adjectives in lis, gen. its, tlxgms, irtffai, raXitrftfint, &c, and
the substantive muifr^r.;.
Obs. 10.The rule that a vowel before another vowel is short, which is unsafe in
Latin, is still less to be depended on in Greek. A long vowel before a vowel I(,
however, more rare than before a simple consonant, and especially the many nouns
in its, i", and /, are always short, except
xxXtsl, nest, aixtx, indignity, etna, sorrow, xavtx, dust ;
and the two last occur also as short in the Epic poets. Vowel before vowel was probably
In many cases doubtful even in the common language, and poets, and more particu
larly the Epics, enjoyed a great latitude in this respect *. Hence, as we learn the
quantity of syllables from poets only, we are left in uncertainty in many instances,
especially respecting the final syllable of the Present Tense "of the verbs in uv and
m>, most of which we are forced to leave to individual observation. Many of those)
which have a long vowel in the Future, are also constantly used as long in the
Present Tense in the Senarius, viz., o*xxavu, fimvv, Irxvu, xXuv, Jiw, Bum, p<J, Xvu,
'in, <-;/, %(i*. But several of them are fluctuating in other species of poetry. The
deserves to be remembered as long, particularly in
Xxis, if nation j
fetes, t, temple,
xiu, (for xxtu,) to burn.
nXtist, (for xXxIv,) to weep.
Long are also the penultima in 'Eviat, Bellona, and all those words in im and iut,
which take an t in the gen. ; consequently all comparatives, (fx. gr. (ZiXrlm,) and
many proper names, ex. gr. 'A/ifun, "tvitfm, Hx^inr, 'ApvSim, gen. ms but the
i is short in AtuxxXinv, tmuw, gen. ,- That proper names compounded with
Xxii, are long, is a matter of course; but remember that
'Ay.pacKs; is long, oWop&ts short.
See about the particular cases, in which long vowels are employed as short in verses,
Obs. 19.
Obs. 11.Much of what regards the prosody of the ancients, concerns us only
in the reciting of verses or what is called Scansion ; and a great deal, as we
observed before, depends on the peculiarities and licences of the poets, which
we shall denominate poetical usage, observing only that the various kinds of poetry
and verses have a vast influence on Greek prosody, the laws of which differ con
siderably in the Hexametre of the Ionic epic poem, and the Iambic Trimetrc or
Senarius, the principal verse of the Attic drama, to which the Iambic and Tro
chaic verses of this kind of poetry conform. Attic poets indulged in but few poeti
cal licences, and conformed themselvesin the main to the actual pronunciation of
the people of Athens ; whilst the Hexametre, grounded on the ancient pronuncia
tion of the Ionians, allowed great freedom to the poet in particular instances. The
other species of poetry lay between these two ; hence the parts of the drama itself,
wherein an increasing emotion forsakes the common language, and above all the
Lyric passages and choruses, admitted more or less the freedom of Kpic poetry along
with its forms. Even the Senarius of tragedy differed in this respect from the
' They might lengthen the t for the take of the metre, even in 'ArxXwi, 'lxln,
in/tiit, &c. See Obs. 15.
C 3
20
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Senarius of comedy, the language of which came nearer to that of common life.
Compare 1. 10. 11.
Ob: 12.The difference is particularly sensible with regard to position. The
meeting of mula cum liquida was rather harsh in the soft Ionic dialect; hence it
generally makes a true position in the Epic poets, and especially in the ancient ones.
But with the Attics the instances of short syllables stated above, (Text 9. 10.) are
always observed as short in the Senarius of comedy, whilst Tragic poets frequently
conform to the Epic usage.
Obi. 13.Position has also its effects in two words following close one on the
other. This is without exception whenever the two consonants are divided between
the two words, as fiXn rixtt. But when the second word begins with the two con
sonants, the position is indeedjustifiable, ex.gr. Homer, "E3 ] ripiv xxri, X*T{i |
Ji/V, II. (. 73, xZrt | TjJif, yet of rare occurrence, unless the Ictut comes to its
assistance. See OA*. 16. In the Attics it is more particularly attended to; but in.
this case mula cum liquida commonly makes no position, ex.gr. Eur.7/)/t. Tour. 131 7>
pf ; t/ *tiu- | pa.
Obi. 14.It is another peculiarity of the Hexametre, that it also varies with
respect to quantity by nature, (Text 6. 7.) The words
xttXts, beautiful, lew, equal,
constantly short with the Attic poets, are long with the Epics, who therefore write
JV5. There are several other words, the quantity of which is fluctuating with the
Epics, especially
ccrnf, man, "Afwf, Mart,
of which the first syllable else generally is short. In the exclamation TA{i,-, "Ajif,
which frequently occurs in Homer, the two words, though placed together, differ in
quantity.
Obt. 15.In other instances it is clearly seen that a word had its fixed and usual
quantity, and that the deviation is caused merely by the exigency of the rhythmus.
But the licence of the old Epic poets must not be supposed to have been unbounded ;
this would have destroyed the charm of their masterly compositions. Their own
feelings confined them within proper bounds, so that it was only with regard to
certain words and forms, or to particular cases, that they indulged in this freedom.
They resorted to it especially,
1.) in proper names: 'AraXXrvf, with a long *, 'EXsiwm'Saa, with the first i
short, {Hymn. Ccr. 105. cf. 95.)
2.) in words with over-many short syllables, as in itrn'urthu, iSiv/trtf, the first
syllable of which was made long ; hence this rhythmus of i3a*T was after
wards steadily adopted by all poets.
3.) in the beginning of an hexametre: Homer has even 'Em | titand fJi'Xi
xx- | eiyvn- | fl-.
ACCENTS.
21
22
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ACCBNTS.
23
Obi. The audible utterance of this difference in pronunciation has some difficul
ties. We barely warn against the two principal faults. Kvery accented long vowel,
( or ,) must be carefully distinguished from the unaccented one, (grave .) for
instance, in v9{flr, without, however, making it short (a.)* But the opposite
fault of lengthening accented short vowels, must equally be guarded against : twu,
for instance, must not be pronounced like iVif8.
10.
1. The acute accent and the circumflex can fall only on one
of the three last syllables ; the acute accent, indeed, may fall on
any of the three, but the circumflex can take place only on the
last syllable, or on the penultimate.
The 2d Obs. of 14. shews that cSnvi and such words consti
tute but a seeming exception.
2. It is the nature of the last syllable in particular, which gives
to the whole word its grammatical denomination with regard to
the accent. According as this last syllable has 1. the acute accent,
2. the circumflex, or 3. no accent, (viz. according to viii. 2.
when it has the grave accent,) the word is called
Oxytdnon, as for instance, &eoc, or, Ttrvtyws.
Perispomenon .... <pCKSi, voSr.
Baryfonon
rvitrw, itpayiux, <npiytx.a.rx.
3. Again, any dissyllabic or polysyllabic barytonon, according
as it has 1. the acute accent on the penultimate syllable, or 2. on
the antepenultimate, or 3. the circumflex on the penultimate, is
called
Paroxytunon, . . .
rvitru, nrv^iws.
Proparoxytdnon .
Twroptsvor, &v6pwaos.
Properispdmenon . .
xpaypia, q>i\ouox.
See about the seeming barytona, as i^yfi, nrvfyws, etc., and
about the atona or unaccented wards, 13.
* The first syllable of ayS/vra may be accented, and yet the second syllabic
lengthened, as is done with Almighty.
* The attempt to give the tone to a short vowel has the same effect with us as dou
bling the following consonant,which creates a great difficulty, since it must obviously
be supposed that the ancients distinguished iVi from irn, and fcixi from fixXXi. Hut
in the first place this alteration of the sound is neither so frequent, nor so offensive,
as when
filXtf, for instance, are pronounced ins, /3?X, and, in the second place,
persevering application may certainly succeed at least in lessening the difficulty.
To pronounce Xox^crn; compare this word with three similar German monosyllables,
to hit er, 'so has he,' the middle one of which is short, and may yet be accented.
These words obviously differ from so that er, ' so did he,' and are nearly like so halt'
cr, ' so had ho.' To pronounce ofla without lengthening the ', appears more diffi
cult ; but not only the German wit, ' how,' but even the French Ji, ' fie !' may be
accented ; it merely requires some little practice to pronounce a short accented syl
lable immediately before another vowel.
24
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
11.
The place of the accent in words is best learned through atten
tion and practice, and at first from the Dictionary. The following
general rules may, however, be attended to :
1. The circumflex requires a syllable long by nature, (viz. by
its vowel, and not by mere position :) ( 7. 8.) ex. gr.
xr,$or, <fus, rityjis, ouros, ay.v\yt/-oL,
and
because the uncertain vowels, ( 7. 6.) a, i, v, are long in these
words. Hence a short vowel, when accented, can only take the
acute accent : as trepos, pirns, ha, Tipos, itoXv, mXiyixa.
Oil. 1.
has the circumflex only on account of the , not because of the
position yp. And as, for instance, t-.S.-,i/., ^s>.>., have the circumflex, it shews
that x is here long by itself, not on account of yp and XX : pronouucc prnghma,
mahllon.
2. But the acute accent may also stand on a long vowel : as
ootywrtpos, SitrEpos, (peuyu), Ti/Ari, fixaiXius, tydip.
3. Whenever the last syllable, being naturally long, is to have
the accent, it may be the circumflex ; and in case of a contrac
tion, as in dX-nbios, aX-n^ovs, Troiiu, vmu, it almost always is the
circumflex, for the reasons stated below, 28. Obs., but else it is
not often the case. Several monosyllabic words, as itvp, (iovs,
nots, oJv, vtv, have the circumflex. But in polysyllabic words, ex
cepting the contraction, whenever the final syllable is accented,
the circumflex is placed only on
a. ) the adverbial termination us. See 115.
b. ) the terminations of the gen. and dat. See 33. Obs. 9.
c. ) the terminations eu and o7 of the vocat. See 45.
4. If the penultimate syllable, being naturally long, is to be
accented, it must be the circumflex, whenever the last syllable is
short, or long only by position ; as
pr,ixa, altos, -^vyps, j3<ZXa, gen. axos.
Obt.2. This rule does not apply to words joined together with enclitics;
hence we write UTt, tin, iSo-a-i}, fan, rovrii, &c. (See 14. Obt. 2.) The particles
101 and Hugi, (not
which are but and mi lengthened, arc the only ex
ceptions.
5. But whenever the last syllable is naturally long, the penul
timate cannot take the circumflex ; we write
prtrup, oi'vr),
^wpofc, gen. axos.
ACCENTS,
25
2G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
% 12.
When a word is changed by its declension or conjugation, or in
any other way, this change influences its accentuation in many
cases :
1. ) It has a necessary influence, when the word undergoes such
a change, as to prevent the accent being continued the same as
it is on the principal form of the word, conformably to the rules
stated above ; in that case
The circumflex is converted into the acute accent, as olvos, gen.
01W,
11. 5.) prifjux, gen. prt(J.a.ros, ( 10. 1.)
The acute into the circumflex ; as ripco), gen. rums,
11. 3. 6.)
(pevyco, imper. (peuye, ( 11. 4.)
Or the accent passes from the antepenultimate to the penulti
mate syllable ; a aifopantos, gen. xvbpdnou, apovqa., gen. agoupas,
(11.6.)
2.) But even when it is not necessary in conformity with the
above rules, the accent, though never changed, is yet sometimes
transposed ;
a.) The accent is removed backwards chiefly, 1.) when the
word has before it an augment of any kind, as rvitru, Tvnn
etmtte, oSor,ouvoSos, z}M$evTos}aital^ivros : 2.) when the reason,
which attached the accent in the principal form to the penulti
mate syllable, ( 11. 6.) disappears ; as zyouliua, imper. iraiSsvs.
More precise information and exceptions will be stated in the
Obs. sub 1. to 103. and in the Theory of Compounds, 121.
b.) The accent is only moved forward chiefly, when the word
receives one of the terminations, which either always are accented,
as the parlic. perf. in us : rirutpoc, partic. rervtpus, 4 or which
take the accent under peculiar circumstances, as bip, bnpos,
according to 43. Obs. 4.
Obs. With regard to the transposition of the accent, see in the anastrophe, 1 17.
2.; with the apostrophus, 30. Obs.; and on casting off the augment, Obs. 1. to
103.
13.
1. Hitherto we have considered the accent merely as it is regu
lated in itself by every word and form ; but it is also influenced
by the connection of words, but in a grammatical respect only in
* To these must be added some common terminations in the formation of words :
as, for instance, the verbal substantives in pit, (kcyirp.lt,) the adjectives iu *, tit,
to,-, rut, and some others.
ACCENTS.
27
28
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
14. Enclitics.
1. A number of monosyllabic and dissyllabic words, owing to
their signification and pronunciation, may be so closely joined with
the preceding word, as to throw the accent on that word. And
as these words in that case lean or incline, as it were, (l^xX/yeo-Sai,)
on the preceding word, they are called Enclitics ; whilst, every
word, which is accented by itself, and every enclitic, when it retains
its accent, is called Orthotonon, (fy&oTovot//x6vov, a word, as it were,
with upright accent.)
2. Such enclitics are :
1. ) the indefinite Pronoun ris, ri, through all its cases, with
toD, Tii, as belonging to it. (77.)
2.) The following oblique cases of the personal Pronouns :
lj.ov, lAot, fA} aov, aol, as, oJ5, oT, , /xiv, v!v, and those begin
ning with up with some exceptions. ( 72. Obs.)
3. ) The Indicative Present of ei/xl and <pr\y.l, excepting the
monosyllabic second pers. sing. ( 108. IV. 109. I.)
4.) The indefinite adverbs zjus, srw, woJ, ttou, noSi, noSh, zsors,
which differ from the similar interrogatives, (iras ; hots,
&c.) merely by their enclitical accents, ( 116.)
5.) The particles vu, re, rut,
yl, xtv or xl, vlv or w1,
Tzlp, pat, with the inseparable Sc.(See Obs. 2.)
3. When the word before the enclitic, (compare below, 7.) is a
proparoxytonon , (aiSpviro*,) or a 'properispomenon, (owna.,) the
enclitic throws its accent, which always is the acute accent, on the
final syllable of that word, as,
avSpwltos Ian, aui\t.i y.ov,
and when it is preceded by an unaccented word, as for instance ii,
it throws its accent on this word : 11 nr.
4. But if the preceding word has already of itself an accent
on its final syllable, or the acute accent on the penultimate, the
same accent likewise serves for the enclitic, and the acute accent
of such a final syllable does not in that case dwindle into the
grave accent ; 13. 2. ex. gr.
atrip Tir- xa aof
<pt\u of yvta.iy.Sii rnwv* avXga te" Xiyen n '.
1 Thii particle, (igitur,) contradistinguishes itself by this accent from the adverb
of time *vt, {nunc, 1 now.')
* The accentuation of ymunSt rnm and Srramr, and some other cases, which appear
opposed to the general rules of accentuation, is not considered by modern gramma
rians as enclitic. See Buttmann's Complete Greet Grammar.
PUNCTUATION.
29
30
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ASPIRATJE.
31
32
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ACCUMULATION OF CONSONANTS.
Obs. 2. The passive termination 3n, and what is derived from it, operates only
on the preceding 3 of the verbs i>i!i, to sacrifice, Siirxi, ' place, iS>tx, \<rl$tn, tiSu',-.
There is no change in any other verb ; for instance, \x,int, agSwSw, (from 3>,)
SitfSiif, i3{i^ny, ttXixSni.The aor. 1. of the imper. pass, is the only certain in
stance with regard to the termination 3< of the imper. See below the verb tISh/ii,
J 107- Obs. 1. 5. The imper. ifiQi from fti/i), and the Homeric t$i*3i, (see SvVx,)
are deviations.All other terminations afford no examples for this rule ; for we
find SUSt, KgS<&, t>7av9i, &c.
Obti 3. In compound words the rule is followed only in ixi^nj/a, armitlice, from
VtT*J an^
*rtr'X"i see the anomalous verb
, AmfJW, where the requi
site aspiration, (according to 17- 2-) the before the spiritus atper, (ifii, ifi;,') ia
omitted. There is no change in any other compound ; iQvfxiva, i/npi^v^tis, a>9fi(H, &c. '
Obi. 4. This law extended also to the tpiritus asper, which it converted into a
/rail, as may be clearly seen in the following verb :
Root 'EX, preterit
I have, fut.
deriv. \xmxif.
But the spiritus generally remains unchanged ; as, &fii, ifaim, fei, tStt.
ACCUMULATION OF CONSONANTS.
19.
1. The immediate meeting of consonants produces a kind of
harshness, which the Greek language avoids.
2. Three consonants, or one consonant and a double letter,
cannot, (except in compounds, as Suaip^apros, 'ixirruois, ex4>vx<>>,)
stand together, unless the first or last be a liquid, or unless there
be a y before a palatal letter; as for instance iteyifoeis, axknpos;
riy^a. In other cases Greek writers either strive to avoid this
accumulation, or one of the consonants must give way ; see in
stances below about the perf. of the pass, voice ; ex. gr. iatpik-aSai,
3. But even the meeting of two consonants only may produce
a harshness, and there are some fixed rules to avoid it, stated ia
the following .
Obt. 1. The introduction even of a third consonant facilitates the pronunciation
in some rarely occurring instances. When through the omission of a vowel the
liquid ft or comes to stand immediately before the liquid X or (, the media (/3, S,)
which is of a kin to the first, is introduced ; as from
comes ^irn^/Sji'a, mid.
day ; from fci/tixvrxt arose the Epic /tlftfiXtrxi : Mf has gen. itlftf.
Obs. 2. Transposition sometimes, but equally rarely, puts a consonant in a
more convenient place. Thus the nomin. xr<4 comes from the root riTKN, retained
in the formation of the cases tuxnt, rvxi), (see the Anomalous Declensions.) But
transpositions not suggested by euphony, especially in the pronunciation of liquids,
will sometimes occur in all idioms, some of which the polished language does not
scruple to use, as in the formation of the aor. 2., xi{9a/, ?sr{a3, or for the sake of
the metre, MfsXst for xjJi' : and also versa vicej aja^ris for ir(**tf, liie}if>s fr
Af<W, etc.
D
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obt. 8. The meeting of two consonants was still more frequent in the old lan
guage j one of them was subsequently dropped, but poets often retained such a con
sonant for the sake of the metre, or to strengthen the sound of a word, as <rr<Xi,t;,
irriXw, and their compounds, instead of n'kt/tif, tri'kn. This also serves to explain
how xxptii, on the ground, and %SzfixXif, low, are connected.
Ois. 4. The r, on the contrary, frequently creeps in before other consonants ; as
for instance the Ionic-Attic ituikoIs for /nxfif, and thus arose the forms
exilav,
fi'ityv, SrirSit, and many others, from the more ancient
xiScw, Mirn, (whence
fuyuit &0.) cr&iy, Sec.
20.
1. Two mutce of different organs can meet, in Greek only, when
the second is a lingual. Hence the steady rule :
A tenuis can stand only before a tenuis, an aspirata only
before an aspirata, and a media before a media,
ex. gr. surd, vuxror, ayftos, (fi&i'vw, (?&zkvpos.
2. Hence when two heterogeneous consonants meet in the
formation of a word, the first generally must assume the property
of the second. For instance, the addition of the syllables ror, Im,
&Eir, makes
of ypdpu, I write,ypznros, *j3o]V,
of wXe'xai, I plait,nXtyfids.
3. In case of two combined homogeneous consonants, no change
is undergone by one alone, but always by both. Thus Ima, ox.ru,
give e^ofjuos, 07SW, and when of two tenues, the second, owing to
the spir. asp. ( 17. 2. 3.) is changed into an aspirata, the first
undergoes the same change ; as
ewTct, 7)ix.epa^<pv)f/.tpos, lasting seven days,
wxrx
wyfi' oXw, the whole night.
4. Only the prep. Ix remains unchanged before all consonants ;
as Ix&E~yai, Ix&ouvai, Exj3aXXe<v, IxyEVEO&ai, extpeiyw. See 26. 6.
21.
1. The reduplication of a consonant is not so frequent in the
Greek, as for instance in the Germ, language, and beside the
semivowels X, /a, v, p, and a, it is the r, which is most frequently
doubled.
2. Whenever there is a simple vowel placed before the p in the
formation or composition of a word, the beginning p of the word,
from which it is derived, is always doubled ; as
eppsww, apptnw, from piiru with s and a
we/x'^oojfrom Kept and few.
,. .
ACCUMULATION OF CONSONANTS.
See 82. and 120. 6. But this is not the case with diphthongs ;
as evpuaror, (from tZ and ptivyv/ju.)
3. The aspirates are never doubled, but take the kindred tenuis
before; as
Zaar^w, Botxj^or, Ylir^evs.
Obt. 1. The non-Attic poets frequently double the consonant for the sake of the
metre ; for instance, Smt, Srri, irrcn, ii<rt, for , &c. i and
rxirfm, for
'X> rmi$$s. This, however, is not done arbitrarily, but frequently in some words,
and never in others, (as Hn,'tnj, tttm, an/us,) yet mostly with semi-vowels. {See
also about these reduplications, } 27. Obt. 14.)
OAs. 2. Sometimes, but much less frequently, they employ a simple consonant,
where the usual language has a double one ; as 'A^iXiut, 'oWiiif, (for 'A^jXXi^,
'Ofcrnfe,) and hence they also neglect doubling the {, as
from pit*.
| 22.
1. When the letters /3, ic, <f, and y, x, stand before an a, they
are converted along with this a into the kindred double letters 4or
ex. gr. the termination of <su of the fut. makes of
\eliru Xtl-^/u, yp&tpu ypi-\u,
\iyu \iifii, seixco fii^cu,
and the termination m, mv, of the dat. pi., makes of
"Apafief Apa4"> xipax.es x6pa%tv.
2. But here the prep, ex is likewise excepted : for instance
ixowt^u. See 26. 6.
Obs. 1. It must not be supposed that the ^, when it proceeds from fir and ft, and
the J, when it proceeds from yt and x'i were always pronounced like bi or/>, gt
or cht. If that were the case, the double letters would have been a useless inven
tion. The fact is, that before the r the letters y and x are changed into x, and fi
and f into sr, and are then written together in the form of and ^. This is clearly
proved by a comparison with the Latin tcribo, acripsi.
Obs. 2. Though the ? is likewise a double letter proceeding from *i, ( 3.) yet in
the formation and inflection of words it never occurs as proceeding from these letters,
except in some adverbs of place formed with the addition of the syllable it, as
A3'wji for ath, ( 116.)
23.
1. Labials before an v in the middle of a word, are constantly
changed into pt, as (in the perf. of the pass, voice, and in the for
mation of words,)
yq&Qco yQxy.-n,-fi.
2. The palatals and Unguals are likewise frequently changed
before y., viz. x and % into y, as
nXixw nhiy'iMt, Ttv%o> tirvypax,
D2
36
and S, &, r,
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
into <r, as
0J. But in the general formation of words, the palatal and lingual consonants
are frequently left unchanged before ft, as ix/tii, I&a*, H/ft, xtuS/tin, rir/u; . there
are also other instances peculiar to some dialects ; as !$>, ((wn,) gives /om'ce Siftri,
and usually <r/uh
24.
1. The Unguals
&, t, , can stand only before liquids, only
before y. they are frequently converted into a, according to the
preceding .
2. Before other Unguals they are changed into <s, as
r$tti ViS-hm, TTifocO WENT-Te'oV.
3. They are generally dropped before a, ex. gr.
aSai jjc-au, OTEi'Sa; sstl-ou, auixarm au^n-ai,
Obt. With regard to the changes of r in the abbreviations of xxra, see 117. Obt.
25.
1. The consonant v usually remains unchanged only before
S, &, and t. Before labials it is converted into /x, and before
palatal letters it is changed into y, which is pronounced like vg.
Thus, for instance, the compounds of aim and ev become
ovi/.ltiayju, kfx.ficilvio, av^L^u, /*4'fXor>
eyxotXv, ovyyttris, 7XiEigi&>, *7XJUObt. 1. The addition of an enclitic, (J 14. Obt. 2.) constitutes an exception for the
sake of distinctness, but only in writing ; as rhyi, oW(.
2. Before liquids the v is changed into the same liquid, as
avKKtyu, eXXei'sw, e/H/ae'wu, avpfinru,
but the prep, ev generally remains unchanged before j, IvgaVrw.
3. Before a and the v is partly retained in compounds, partly
converted into a, and partly thrown off", (see Obs. 2.) but in inflec
tions the v generally disappears before a, for instance in the
dat. pi.
4. If in addition to the v, a S, 5, or v, (according to 24.) has
been rejected along with it, the short vowel becomes a long
one; as
"ssivr-is, 9r-ov rv+avrsr, tv\JW, ( 46.)
37
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tions, conformably to ancient HISS, and inscriptions, without any regard to the
word which follows, at the end of sections and hooks ; in short, wherever the word
is not closely connected with the subsequent one.1
Obs. 2. This last circumstance clearly shews that this > is not, as is commonly
taught, a mere contrivance for euphony's sake ; but this , as well as the other final
letters of the same kind, really is an ancient grammatical form, which was dropped
before consonants, when the language was polished. Hence there are also other
forms, which cast off their final letter in the Ionic dialect, or for the metre's sake,
as the adverbial terminations Sin and xn : for instance, &>.Xe3t for HxXtSit, trtXXxxi
for mkkaxti, irgi/ix and arfifixi.The in compounds with the alpha privalivum
is exactly of the same nature with the f lfi\xurixi>, as for instance, italrui. (See
below, 120.)
6. The particle o, not, no, takes a x before consonants, and
consequently a x before the spiritus asper, ex. gr.
ou taaqifn, ovx. Eveyiv, oi/j(, Sgreriv.
But -when it closes a sentence, the x is dropped ; ex. gr. toDto 8'
ou, but this not. Ou, dkX' oravNo : but if
6. The prep. IS;, out, has this form merely before vowels, and
at the close of a sentence, ex. gr.
1% tfMov, eQotou, xaxwv e'S; :
but the a, which sticks in the is dropped before all consonants,
and it remains a x, hence
. ex rovrov, ex otka<j<ms, ex yrii.
And this x continues unchanged, at least in writing, even in com
pounds, in which it constitutes the exceptions stated, 20. 4. and
22. 2.
Obi. 3. That the two words six and ix end in a , is no real exception to the rule
of 4. 4. for both, being unaccented, belong to those little words, which are so
closely combined with the next, that they form a separate word only for the mind,
not for the ear. Hence one throws off its x at the end of a sentence, and the other
employs in that case the fuller form in J.
27.Of the Interchange of the Vowels.
1. Vowels are mutable in Greek as in other languages, with
out being subject to any steady law. The change is made through
either inflection, or derivation ; as rplitu, I turn, %Tpqniov, I turned,
rpbno!, a turn, mode.
2. This mutability comprises also the shortening and lengthen
ing of a vowel, commonly attended with some. other change. Thus
when e and o are lengthened for some reason or other, they are
1 Metrical motives induce modern critics to place this also at the end of most
kinds of verses, though the following verse begins with a consonant.
39
40
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
(see 74.3.) Stiupx, r;*^., The simple airh is unchanged by genuine Ionic
writers ; and u'utIi is used merely for i cuiris. (See 29. Obi. 6.)
12. Instances of other changes are : rx/ixXis, Dorice TcfixXjf,Srt/t*, jEolice
hvfut,iri*, Ionice ir'm, hearth.
Observation on the lengthening of Syllables in general, (to 21 , and 27-)
13. The mere poetical lengthening of i and e is commonly effected in the Ionic
way, by changing them into u and nr. (04j. 1.) The is very seldom converted into
u, as "hit, Axiwts, for id, bmvres.When , i, v, in common language short, are
long in the ancient or poetical language, (as 'lkito with the middle syllable long,
ini with the long a, and some others,) it is not apparent in writing, except some
times through the accent, as in 7$ for Iris.
14. But in the most ancient writing they had no means to denote the lengthen
ing of a syllable, the letters i and serving at the same time for n and u, and for i
and mi, and the consonants, (according to $ 21. Obt. 1.) not being written double.
The writing continued uncertain until the grammarians settled it at least for the
language in common use.
15. The grammarians also introduced into the ancient poets signs to denote
syllables metrically lengthened by reduplication, or long vowels and diphthongs.
But the practice was never perfectly settled. Such words were frequently written
in the common way, and the correct metrical pronunciation was left to the learned
reader*. There are many traces of this in the poetical works handed down to us :
as ixitt, ( //. . 342. %. 5.) with a long syllable in the middle, and tn/teifan, ( Od. . 434.)
where the p ought to be sounded double, and to be written double, as in iupttSit.
And when we find in Homer the first syllable of 'Atro'AXwre;, xTentrSxi, 0-vn%ls, fy't,
employed as a long one, it may be doubted whether this was done by lengthening
the vowel, or doubling the consonant.
10. In modern times it has frequently been proposed to restore the ancient cus
tom so far as not to double the consonants ; which proposal has indeed been partly
adopted, but in a very wavering and uncertain way. Beginners ought to be informed of this circumstance, that they may not be misled on finding sometimes
mnXXHytit, and sometimes irtXnym with the same quantity, and seeing in the same
editions the reduplication observed in some words, and not in others.
But there is also frequently a double consonant close to a long vowel ; as ftmXXn,
sVvtoftj Hrrvv, Krufris, 'T/uiTTts, \\v**w, xguV***, xftirrtn. This is likewise the case
with
(Ion. irg^rr*,) Hx^xgro;, (Ion. Tlopnvfflt^) KtiQirrif, in which the vowel
must be lengthened. Several editors prefer the ancient orthography in proper
names, and write Kmris, Uxetnris, Kxfiris, &c. The proper names of places in drrx
come from -tier* : 3x#T#w"r, ntinxuvrrcu, *A^yniirexi, &c. But Ii^ixivnu .evftts,
with ?i>(xxirit( short, were already in use among the ancients.(See Buttmann'i
Complete Greek Grammar, 21. Oil. 9.)
28. Contraction.
1. A vowel, before which is another vowel in the same word,
is called vocalis pura, because it sounds pure, that is to say,
without being introduced by a consonant ; and especially the
end-syllables beginning with a vowel, as a, or, w, &c. are called
pure, when they are preceded by another vowel, as in ooipia,
8 The same was done in the opposite case, when long vowels were to be shortened.
See $ 7. Obi.
CONTRACTION.
41
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
HIATUS
CRASIS.
43
in many nttanoea in the works of the ancient poets, especially the Kpics, ex. gr.
II. 282. Apjtny 3i rtf9i, where the terminations f(in aud dta must be pronounced
as one syllable, a<peu>i Ji f'5> : /3. 490.
Si pa Jraj btln, (pronounce
In the Attics we have frequently in this way 3iif, Biiy, which else never occurs as a
contraction, and some proper names as NioyrAi/M?. See about Xu^axa, ot>au in the
list of Anomalous Verbs; and about a synizesis between two words, 29. the last Obs.
Obs. 7. That kind of contraction stated under d. (fixiu, pxii, and such like,)
might be considered as an elision, (viz. the dropping of the 1,) but it is more correct
to give that name only to those cases, in which one vowel is merely thrown off
without intending a mixed sound. This, (excepting such compounds as Way* for
ixi-aym,) occurs in the middle of words chiefly only in some Ionic abbreviations,
as <pofiio for ftput. (see y 105. Obs.) But in the first-mentioned instances the lan-<
guage evidently intended a mixed sound,as is shown by the analogy of the other
cases, and the circumflex where it takes place, (Obs. 9.)aud the already existing
one long vowel was retained for that purpose.
Accent and Quantity.
Obs. 8. When neither of the two syllables, which are to be contracted, is accented,
the mixed sound generally is also not accented ; as -rigi'rJ.a, iriftatt, emit r. <rifm-Aai/;,
triftuv.
. Obs. 9. But if one of the two original syllables has the accent, the mixed sound
also takes this accent, which, if it be the penultimate or antepen. syllable, is regu
lated by the general rule, ( 10. and 11.) If it be on the last syllable, it takes the
circumflex, (tits mt, fiXiet fiXa, &c.) unless the original form had the acute accent
on the last syllable, which, however, is seldom the case, and then the acute accent
is retained, as !%r, irrxitio-toW, Suit S<. Both is grounded on the theory
stated in 9. 3. and in the Obs., aud exceptions in either instance are rare, (see,
for instance, the actus, in i, $ 49.)
Obs. 10. In some few contractions the accent is transposed ; as atfyesi(yi;,
( 120. Obs. 6.) hxieerttiiXnros, &c. ( 41. Obs. 7 ) X!"""XV"""> &c- ( 60- 6.)
See also the other cases of irijiVxauf, &c, 36. Obs.
Obs. 11. Though every mixed sound is essentially long, yet the pronunciation in
some declensions, which have a contracted at or /, has again obscured this sound, so
that it is sometimes short. This is the case with the neuter pi. in , asri^i, (see
J 64. Obs.) and a few datives, as KXi/3i from Kxi/3*f, (in Herod.) to which must
be added iat, ft) and a few similar Epic forms, (see 50. Obs. 6.) But some of
these instances at least may also be considered as elisions of the first vowel, as may
be seen in the 06*. to 53.
29.Hiatus Crasis.
1. When of two words immediately following each other, the
first ends with a vowel, and the second begins with a vowel, the
spiritus, which is heard between them, be it the asper or the
le2iis, produces an effect called a hiatus, still more disagreeable to
the ear of the Greeks, and especially the Athenians, than the
accumulation of vowels in the middle of a word.
This hiatus was not much tolerated in poetry, and hardly ever
suffered in Attic poetry. But even in prose, (excepting the
Ionic,) its frequent recurrence was not liked. ,
44
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obi. 1. The Attic verse allowed the hiatus only after the interrogative rt, after
the particles in and o-igi, and in the expressions ei>3i i!s, unit 7f, ( 70- 1.) i5
&c. &c.
2. The natural remedy against the hiatus is the coalition of
two syllables into one1 ; which is of two kinds: 1.) when one of
the vowels is entirely removed, it is an elision by an apostrophus,
30. 2.) when both are blended together into one sound or
syllable, it is a crasis. The latter, especially in prose, applies
only to a limited number of cases, which will be stated in the
Obs. to this .
Obs. 2. With regard to the crasit, there are first three circumstances to be
noticed:
a.) Every craiii renders the syllable long, ($ 7- 7-0 this distinguishes several of
its instances from the elision through the apostrophus, ex. gr. riXtiSit, xx^itti, (for
ti ix. xxl i(. with a short a.) Hence such as ritlfit must be lengthened in pro
nunciation, and t>.xx, (for rk aAXa,) must be marked with the circumflex, which
some grammarians will not allow, though they accent rakXa. But other cases, like
rctbri, rxirx, (for ri nM, tA kvtcc,) must be treated in the same way for the sake of
uniformity. (Compare $ 28. Obi. 7 )
b.) The iota lubtcriptum takes place only when the i is the last of the vowels,
which are to be contracted ; therefore it is used in from xxl utx, but not is
xit from xxi >*.
c.) There is commonly a ' over the crasis, which sign is called a coronis.
Obi. 3. The crasis is most used with the article : as
oiix, mrl, for i ix, i ixJ,
TaitYxtr'itVj rtZvst, for ro fvavr/ov, ri Xxtf,
Ttntfus, for ri oVo/eoe,
rxttct. rxxl. for rk iuM, ra lor),
1 ., ,
.
, .. txWx,
... tor
. Tn..ayxzx,
a< TX,
, (with
a long
rxyx3a,
xXXx,
>
m , see the preceding
TsXtidif, rxltxof, for Tff X. aS.
J
ortrxiTvt, itri^for a xirxtrut, i ftvflf 8,
with which the less frequent craiis of the ar/i'c. poslposiliv. or pronoun relative
neuter agrees : as
for ii Tsc%i, &i for <3 , &c.
Oil. 4. A crasis is not easily recognised, when diphthongs are absorbed : as
aufMt, for tl iptl,
ixxirims, for tl irx^rStrts,
(see 04s. 2. a.) and
txvt9v} txvtZj (& 7^0 a,r' Txvrofixrev. and such like,
or when d is used on account of the spir. asp. ( 17. 06*. 2.) as for instance,
1 That the r ifiXxufixn cannot be considered as a remedy against the hiatus, may
be seen 26. Obs. 2.
* This rule, through a needless striving for distinctness, is frequently deviated
from, and the writing of x, xxvtutx, and such like, adopted.
' It is unquestionable, that, at least in the most obvious instances, as itrp &Krof,
Oixptt, the only usual contraction of the Attic dialect is that of J with a into a long
i, as im(, (pronounce h/inir,) and wherever we find merely
and the meaning
requires the article, it ought to be xthf, and is mostly written thus in all new
editions. This practice, however, is not safe, the article being also frequently
omitted before &ri(, &t\x. See Heind. ad rial. Phadon. 108.
HIATUS
CRASIS.
45
46
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
30.Of the Apostrophus.
GENDER.
That the datives fu), >, were elided, is still very questionable. See Bnttmann's
Complete Greek Grammar. Whatever else is stated as long syllables, which have
undergone an elision, especially xi and , ( 29. Obi. 7- 8.) belongs to Grant, and
o does the teeming elision of ri, ri, >\ 29. Obi. 2. a.) and that of initial vowels (in
the same , Obt. 10.)
With regard to the apocope in if, {, At, (instead of ,) before a consonant,
see below 117. Ob:
31.-0/ the Parts of Speech.
1. There are, strictly speaking, but three principal parts of
speech. For every word, which names or denotes an object, is a
Noun ; the word, by which something is predicated of an object,
is called a Verb ; and all the words, by which the speech thus
formed is particularised, connected, and animated, are comprised
under the name of Particles.
2. But these three principal parts of speech are generally
subdivided, so as to form eight parts of speech in the languages,
with which we are best acquainted. 1.) The Noun, which is
either substantive or adjective, gives 2.) the Pronoun, which also
includes the article ', and 3.) the Participle, which with regard
to syntax is part of the verb. 4.) The Verb remains undivided ;
the Particles are 5.) the Adverb, 6.) the Preposition, 7.) the
Conjunction, and 8.) the Interjection ; but Greek gram
marians commonly rank the latter among the adverbs.
OF THE NOUN AND ITS DECLENSIONS.
32. Of the Gender.
1. The masc. and neut. Gender of the noun is mostly shown by
the terminations, and will be noticed in each decl. It is indicated
in the grammar by the article, b, (he,) w, (she,) to, (it.) See its
declension, 75.
2. Personal denominations, (man, woman, god, goddess, &c.)
always agree with the natural sex, be the termination what it may :
for instance ft hvyimp, daughter, ri mhos, the daughter-in-laiv.
The diminutives in ov are, however, excepted, being always of the
neuter gender ; as to 71/vaiov, little woman, from ywfi, womany,
to (Mtpaxiov, little youth, from [jizTp at, youth.
are, therefore, to be considered as crasn, conformably to the rules laid down in the
preceding ; but, (if the syllable is not written in full as a synizesis,) the apostrophus must be used for the sake of distinctness ; in one case thus, yiHr
for
yiitcu ifuti, (long ,) in the other thus, yifiai soifi, (iirn{i.)
1 See the reason in the Note to 75.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 1. In the class of diminutives mast also be ranked to rixm, or ri rixn,
child, and the pi. raiiixa, used instead of the sing, to denote darling. All
words, however, which are not in immediate contact with such personal neuters,
are always construed in reference to the real sex and number. Homer even says
rlxtn flXi. The word ri itirtitreim, slave, is scarcely to be mentioned here, be
cause this denomination denotes the slave as a thing, and not as a person.
Obs. 2. Hence every personal denomination, common to both sexes, is also generis
communis in grammar: for instance, instead of
(Aic homo,) a woman is
called A xtBfwrm, (hcec fcemina.) It is the same with i and fi
god and goddess,
S and ti Tfapif, tutor and nurse, I and h fuXal, male &ni\ female keeper or guard,
&c., though several of these words have also their own peculiar feminine appella
tions, as n Stu, goddess, which are not so readily used by Attic writers.
Obs. 3. Several names of animals are likewise generis communis, as, for instance,
I and A fiiui, (ox, cow,) i and n Isrircs, (horse.) With regard to most animals, one
and the same gender serves for both sexes; and this gender, when it ismasc.or fem.,
is called genus epiccenum, (as for instance i \ixtt, wolf; i xXarrl, fux.) But even
in those, which are generis communis, one of the two genders applies to the species ;
as o TutTM is a horse in general and in an indefinite way, but a\ a!yn applies to the
whole species. The fem. is mostly preferred ; thus at, t&u, (but only in the pi.)
most commonly denotes horned cattle in general. "Aj*r, bear, and xa/wXts, camel,
when the sex is of no particular importance, are always employed as of the fem.
gender, (A xfxmi, i xapnXts,) even in speaking of the male ; and this is also fre
quently the case with ixafa, stag, and aim, dog. The fem. h iVr signifies like
wise horse, cavalry.
3. The names of trees, as t> (pnybs, beech-tree, 4> virus, pine ; and
of towns and countries, as fi Kd^iv&or, ri Klyvitros, fi Aaxetial/Am,
are of the fem. gender, with very few exceptions.
Obs. 4. Of trees, i filr& palm-tree; ixx^xtts, cherry-lree ; I i(mis, wild fig-tree ;
i ximtf, wild olive-tree, are of the masc gender ; and of the names of towns in ts,
'Of^a^u'flf constantly is masc, llvXet, 'E<r*3yjaf, 'AXta^rlt, 'o^M-ej, are commonly
so, and some others are sometimes masc. : the plurals in a, like ilxmai, and owing
to the constantly masc. termination of tut, Zs, gen. wurai, at, gen. avrtt, as e iavtrivt,
i SiXiSf, Tifxs. Vet there are also some in cut and as of the fem. gender ; but
perhaps in ancient authors only in poetry, (Pindarus makes 'Or'ms for 'OtrtVf, and
Ax(yas always masc.) else only in later writers, as Slrabo, &c. The names in **
are uncertain, but those most known are fem. : BafivXav is always so, and ZiKvur
commonly. Names of towns ending in tt and , gen. mi, also remain of the neuter
gender; as ri iuvXixw, ri "Atyi.
33.Declension.
1. The Greek declension has the five known cases of other
languages, without any particular form for the Latin ablative,
which is supplied partly by the gen., and partly by the dat.
2. There is an additional number in both the Greek declensions
and conjugations, viz. the dual, when the question is of two. Yet
it is not always used ; many authors do not employ it at all. It
is mostly employed by the Attic writers.
FinST DECLENSION.
3. The dual has only two terminations, one for the nomin., acc,
and vocat. ; the other for the gen. and dat.
4. The Greek grammar has three declensions^ which correspond
to the three first Latin declensions, and the terminations of which
are stated jointly in the following table :
Sing.
2d Dec!.
Nom.
os, Neuter ov
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual.
N.A.V
G.D.
PI.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
DO
COi
0V
e, Neuter ov
or (ojs)
i
a. or v, Neuter like
the Nomin.
u
OIV
E
OIV
a
aiv
at
Si
ais
is
ax
oi, Neuter a
My
01s
ovs, Neuter a
oi, Neuter a
3d Decl.
sr,
on
ffiv
is,
Ef,
Neuter a
or at
Neuter a.
Neuter %
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
50
other oases are annexed to the last syllable of the nomin., and commonly with some
alterations. These cases have, therefore, one syllable more than the nomin.; hence
the third declension is also called vt^irToirCwxfa!, and the other two teoevkXttfai.
Obt. 8. The Dual properly is only an old abbreviated form of the pi., which cus
tom afterwards confined to the num!>er 2. This is proved by the conformity of the
pt. ciftftt, Sftfu, (see 72- Obt. (i. 10.) with the dual of the third decl. Jlence we
find especially in Epic poets unquestioned instances of the dual instead of the pi.
They are, however, chiefly in verbs. (See below, 87. Obt. 0.) and in participles,
(//. i. 487. Hymn, in Apoll. 487, &c.)
Obt. 9. With regard to accents, a general rule is, that the terminations of the
gen. and dal., when long and accented, always take the circumflex, but the nomin.,
accut. and vocal, take the acute accent. Let it only be remembered that in the
third decl. the termination of the nomin. and vocal, ting, is not the termination of
a case, according to 30.
34.First Declension.
1. The words in w and as are all masculine, and those in n and
!A feminine.
2. The words in a have in the gen. as, and retain their a in all
the terminations of the sing., when there is a vowel before it, (a
purum, 28. 1.) as <so$la, or an g, as vi^x. The contracted
nouns also retain it, as pt-va, (see Obs. I.) also akxXx, gen. as,
{war-shout,) and some proper names : AriSa, 'AvSgo/xc'Sa, <f>i\oV-ri'Ka, Ti\a, Aion'/xa, which likewise have a long a in the nomin.
3. All the other words in a have ns in the gen., ri in the dat.,
but they resume their a in the acc. and voc. (See MoDua.)
4. The four terminations agree in the pi. and dual. See the
following examples, in which the changes, which the accent un
dergoes according to the general rules, have been attended to.
Sing. 1 h,
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual
N.A.V.
G.D.
Plur.
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
TIpUUV
aoipla
ootyiaiv
MotW
MotWiv
isaklra.
TroXiVaiv
teavlx
VEan'aiv
Ti/xa!
ti/xv
Tip< ais
Tiptar
Tfpta!
ootylxi
oolpiwv
ontplais
ootplas
oo<fiai
Moi/<7iZv
"Mouaais
Movaas
nol-Xrai
WohirZv
nokirats
noXiras
veaviai
VEanaJv
VIXVIXIS
veavtas
VEvt'a
FIRST DECLENSION.
Sing. 4i,(rujht,) ^.(optnton,) vi,{trident,)
Nom.
oYxn
Tgiaiva
y.iyjx\pa.
Gen.
yiuy.rii
retains
Dat.
TQialvri
SlXT)
yvuiLvn
Acc.
Si'xw
Voc.
St'xM
Dual
N.A.V. S.'xa
fgia/va
Tgiai'vaty
G.D.
S/xaiv
Plur.
/JLaXcupcci
Nom.
yvu'i/.ai
oYxai
tAXXatpav
Gen.
SlXO/V
lAa-Xot-ipous
TQtalvan
yvdix.au
Dat.
S/xaif
IA%xatpxr
TgiaiWy
yvdifAai
Acc.
oYxaf
Tgi'ayyaj
yvui^xi
Si'xa*
Voc.
51
o,(Atride,)
'Arqzll'ws'Argfi'Sou
'At^e/oV]
'A-rge/Syiv
'At|St]
'Argsi'Sa;
'ArgEi'Saiy
'ArgETSau
"ArgEiSa/y
'ArgEi'Saiif
'At^ei'cW
'ArgeTSai.
52
-A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SECOND DECLENSION.
53
5. The Iouians on the contrary made of it1, (see J 27. Obs. 10.) hut the u'
has no influence on the accent: *t\Wi, ( 12. Obs. 4.) and of k>un, imvtiui.
Hence the common language has retained this gen. sing, in the names of a few
Ionians, as 6aXu>, Airxui.When these terminations are preceded by a vowel, the
may be dropped in verses ; as for instance, ii^iAi'w from iip/tiXim, Btguu from
C. Not only the ancient dialects, but also the Attic poets, and sometimes even the
ancient Attic prose, (as in Plato,) have the old form of the dat. pi. am, urn, ( 33.
Obs. 3.) as ri/uuri, Heimtit, &c. (and the same in the second decl. un, urn.)The
Ionic dialect has wr<, yn, and ks. But poets vary with the shorter form and r,;.
These Ionic forms are employed at times by the Attic dramatists.
7- The Ionic accus, hrxcrix,
are heteroclites, J 56. Obs. 4.
35. The Second Declension.
All the words in ov are of the neuter gender ; those in as com
monly are of the masc. There are, however, many feminine in
os, independent of the names of persons, animals, trees, and
towns, stated in 32. See below a list of them in the Appendix.
There are besides several substantives of the fern, gender in or,
which properly are adjectives, the substantive being omitted, as
h SidXexros, dialect, (sc. (pavw,) rt oW/xsTgor, diameter, (sc. yeia^y-rt,)
7) aromas, atom, (sc. ovalct,) h avvtiqos, desert, yj^aos, and rj wsigor,
continent, (sc. %ue<x.,) n avyxXmros, (sc. fiovX*,) senate ; and se
veral others.
Sing. h,(discourse,) 7i,(beech,) b,(people,) i, (man,)
Nom.
5r,f/.or
avSqajiros
\6yos
(pyyos
Gen.
Xiyov
<f>ryov
Dat.
Xoyai
(pyycb
Acc.
Xoyov
(pnyov
Xoye
Voc.
Qyys
Dual
*'
ivSgtuVat
N.A.V.
Xoy&i
tynyw
irilji.oiv
(pnyoiv
G.D.
Xoyoiy
Plur.
Nom.
(priyol
Xoyoi
Gen.
Xoyay
dvSqcinruv
(prtyav
Sriptoir duSquinois
\6yois
Dat.
Xiyous
(pnyous
otvhgunovs
Acc.
\6yoi
Qnyol
Voc.
ri,(fg.)
avxov
avx.au
ai/xcii
avxov
avxov
auxo)
ovxoti
auxx
auxcuy
ouxots
avxa
avxa.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
54
% The vocative is sometimes like the nomin. partly for the sake
of euphony, as in Ssor, and partly without any such reason, espe
cially in the Attic writers, as a (p/Xor, (Aristoph. Nub. 1167.)
3. Quantity and accent require no particular notice ; the final
a is short as in Latin ; the circumflex on the gen. and dot., (see
(fnyos,) has been mentioned, 33. Obs. 9.
4. Dialects, a.) In the oldest language the gen. ov was pro
bably resolved into oo, whence what is called the Thcssalian yen.
in oio in Epic and Lyric poets : Xoyoto, <p-nyo7o.
b.) The Doric dialect has in the gen. a>, and in the acc. pi.
us, as o yojiAoryen. ru toy.u, acc. pi. ran vo^us : less frequently as
in the acc. pi. Theocr. makes of 5 XtWrus Xvkos, instead of
robs Xukovs.
c. ) The neut. pi. in a appears to have had the gen. in out in
the oldest language. See Hesiod, Sc. 7. Hence the Homeric
exuiv from Tst EA, goods, possessions. (See the Anom. em.)
d. ) See about the dat. pi. in oim, oktiv, (\6yotai, tynyoTaw,) 34.
Obs. IV. 6.The Epic poets lengthen the gen. and dat. of the
dual oiv to ony, as for instance Innow.
36.Contracted Nouns of the Second Declension.
Several words in oor and oov, bos and eov, are generally con
tracted, (as okoTta&vi, 33. 5.) according to the rules stated 28.
except that the a of the neut. gender absorbs the preceding e or o
in the contraction, and becomes long : oyeac oya, iiiKoa. LiiKa..
(Compare below the adjectives in 59.)
o, (navigation,)
Plur.
Sing
Nom. wXow, ji\ous wXooi, ttXch
Gen. TtXoov, TrXou wXoo/v, TrXeDv
wXooir, wXoiV
Dat. wXoci), n\>
Acc. wXoov, ffXoyv icXoovs, m\oX>s
Voc. wXoe, wXof1 wXoot, rcXoi'
rb, (bone,)
Plur.
Sing.
oys'ov, oyoyv oftat, oya
asiov, oyoS oYewv, oyaJv
6s"e'o), 6r<5
osiois, 6s"oIV
oje'ov, oyoDv oVe'ce, os"a
oje'ov, oyoyv oye'at, oya
Dual.
N.A.
G.D.
IcXou, wXai
wXo'oiv, ffXoiy
oH<,
OfEOIV, &s-oiv.
1 This regular vocal, is stated here for the sake of some proper names, as XliySsoi,
vocal. UxtSou. The vocal, of Sa*y|aaf, ay;, is in Aristophanes with the elision of the a,
2af*i. (Compare Note 3, p. 65.) Else the vocal, of a proper name is of rare occur
rence.
* See Buttmann's Complete Greek Grammar.
55
OA*. Compounds of the monosyllables rXms, wit, &c, have the accent in their
resolved form, according to the general rule, ( 13. 2. a.) on the preceding syllable,
as TijiVXaot, Tt^'trXov; : and they retain it on that syllable even in all those cases,
in which it is moved forward in the resolved form, as m^iVxni/, (resolved mgnr-Xsgv,)
contrary to the general rule, ( 28. Obs. 8.) and thiB syllable, when it is naturally
long, takes the circumflex before the contracted , as for instance iltoi from iStws,
(resolved tints, it>,) but the accent cannot be removed back to the antepenultimate
syllable; hence we have ti{/-Am, xxx'mi, (from xxxitevs, evil-minded3^)
37. Attic Second Declension.
The decl. of several words in a/r, (masc. and fern.) and uv,
(neuter,) is usually appended to the second decl. by the name of
the Attic second decl. It has in all its cases an u instead of the
vowels and diphthongs of the common second decl. and an iota
subscription, where this declension has oi or u. The vocat. is
constantly like the nomin.
(temple,)
Sing. Dual Plur.
Nom.
USUI
VEci
Gen. no)
VSU1V VEcSy
Dat.
veais
vew
Acc.
YECUV
veoj?
vecJ
Voc. veclf
Obs. 1 . The expression Attic decl. must not be understood as if the Attics had
usually declined the words in is in this manner. It is rather a peculiar ancient
decl. of a very limited number of words, a few of which follow likewise the com
mon second decl., but with many variations ; as i \xis, ( people,} axis,\tiis, tiiis,
S \xyiii, (hare,) Ion. i \xyuls and Xxyif. Others also follow the third decl. (as
Mi'wf, gen. Miw, and Miiats :) others agree only in some parts now with this, and
now with that decl. See about all these points 5G. Obs. G. It is called the Attic
decl. merely because, when there are two forms of this decl., that of which we treat
here, is generally peculiar to the Attics.
Obi. 2. The words of this decl. have also a peculiar
Accus. in ti,
sometimes in addition to the regular one, (as ts Xxym, and Xxyai,) less frequently
indeed in some instances, but exclusively (or nearly so,) in others. This is the case
with the names of towns, KSs, Vitus, litis," Aims, and With ri 'ins, (aurora, accus. *w ?,)
which is the Attic form of the Ionic bus, (of the contracted third decl.) The neuter
(nomin. and accus.) of some adjectives is likewise in u, particularly &yti(tis, (not
subject to old age,) neut. ayifu,
Obs. 3. The gen. in tit of this decl. corresponds with the Epic gen. in m, as srirwr,
gen. mrixs, (Homer.)
3 In common life the contractions in cos degenerated almost all into abbreviations
in is. Hence the proper names in >eus have also the forms of , which, however,
constantly lengthen the preceding syllable, as for instance Y,v$iw; and El/tuns, 'Af<mvc and 'Allies, KmXWiks properly KcAAimc. See Ruunken, Hist. Oral. Or. p. xlii.
56
A GREEK C1RAMMAH.
Obs. 4. See about the anomalous accent of this decl. J 12.8. Another deviation
from the rule is that the gen. ting., whenever the end-syllable is accented, is an
orytonon, (rev mu,) contrary to J 33. Oil. 9.
38. TJiird DeclensionGender.
1. The terminations of the words belonging to this decl. are
too various to allow of any rule, and must be remembered indi
vidually. There are, however, a few, which are pretty steady.
See the Obs.
2. The final s, on the whole, is more the characteristic of the
masc. &ndfem. and a short vowel in the end- syllable is generally
the characteristic of the neut. gender. There are no neuters
whatever in 3; and \}/.
Obs. We will now state the terminations, which may in some degree be depended
on for the gender. No regard is had in the exceptions to personal denominations
like /': ,' '->;-. mother, it H/taf, wife, the gender of which is a matter of course, ( 32,
2.) But where we say ' without exception,' there are no personal denominations of
a different gender.
Of the Masculine Gender are
The words in tus, as I ifius, mule, ifuft(iiis, amphora, without exception.
The substantives, which have ires in the gen., I rim, nres, tendon, i litis, cms,
tooth, i S/tit, tares, leather-strap ; except the names of a few towns, $ 30. b. Obs. i.
Those in (, as Zue-r)i(, except the fern, i yacrr>(, belly, h xii^fate, and with poets
also h
and n aUh(, and the contracted neuters, which see below.
Of the Feminine Gender are
The words in , as
without exception.
Those in as, which have aies in the gen., as fi karris, torch, with the exception of a
few adjectives generis communis, as Xeyis, e-r-e^as, 58. 5.
Those in is, as v ii\is, ti x'("t except the masc. Sfis, serpent, i%is, viper, x'eeis, bug,
(X'i> testicle, ft***;, a measure of liquids, {yen. ia>s,) x)s, wood-worm, Xis, lion, (lis,)
SfX^i;, (7ves :) and i, it, eevis, (Ses,) h, e riyeis, (ies,) , e Bis, 0f,) heap, shore.
Abstract substantives in rns, (Latin las,) as h /nxfirns, ' littleness,' parvitas, with
out exception.
Of the Neuter Gender are
The words in a, , /, v, as t rS/ta, body, xi^n, head, fiiki, honey, aurv, city, without
exception.
Those, which have a short end-syllable with t and e, without exception, as ri riT^es,
co r, raj, and the neuter adjectives in is, a, .
Those in at, as ri wr*{, ri tixrat, with those contracted from -tag into *jj, as T0 ",
r.(, spring, ri xia(, *5{, heart, ri cr'tof, e-r!i(, suet, fat. Only i ^ap, starling, is
excepted.
The words in {, which are not personal denominations, as ri S!iv(, ri r'txfuie, &c.,
except i >x*ti (yore, matter, water of the blood,) and
(running soreness of
the head.)
Those in as gen. arts and aes, as ri rieas, ares, prodigy, ri i'tras, aes, goblet; except
o kas, kits, stone, and c or ri KPA2, xgxris, head.
There are no other neuters of this decl. beside ri seZ^fire, ri <p*s, light, ri els, ear,
ri prats, dough.
The words in as are generally masc, when the gen. is aire;fern, when it is aits
and neut., when it is arts and ass.
THIRD DECLEN8I0N.
57
58
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
THIRD DECLENSION.
59
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
above, generally are like the penultimate of the gen. Hence, (with a few excep
tions in poets,) %wf
xtiXis, (long t,) 7$os, tbu&v, "(long ,) avo;. And in similar
instances the length must be observed in pronunciation before I, $ : the accent
frequently shews it, as, S!{? *, (/on. Sa^nj; *,) in p*h<t Tntt, xriw* vxii, (with
later writers
SfJi) on l'ie contrary aJx{
&c.
Obs. 3. All monosyllabic nomin., excepting the pronoun r)s, are long; hence
04*. 4. The few words, which have &s in the gen., throw off only the 9 before
the s of the nomin., and retain, contrary to the usual practice of the Greek lan
guage, the t, as IXfutt, iX/tn&t, (earth-worm,)
Ti{i/v&f.
04*. 5. If there be an n or before the termination ur, it, the contraction gene
rally takes place ; as riftmis mpmmi, contracted n/ifs 4 n/imm, laXirins itmi
contr. pikmv; mrm. It is the same with the names of towns in oi$, with, as
'Oraui, &c.
04s. 6. The contractions, which take place in the participles of the contracted
conjugation,
fiXtitrti, vifun n/tStra, Sec.) are best learned in the paradigms
of this conjugation. We only 6bserve that such proper names as Swap**, aims,
originate in this contraction.
04. 7- Another contraction takes place, when the termination etj is preceded by i,
as xix/i xS{, (Aearl,) gen. xuifts
and also tag?;, (ipring,) of which word we have
in prose the resolved form in the nomin., and in the gen. and dat. the contracted
form, (fag, Zfts.) The same contraction occurs in some, which have a r in the
gen., but in these the accent does not conform to.the rules of contraction, and
takes a more convenient place, thus : rri<{ criarts, contracted r?f -u?, (suet,)
0
Qi'tivrts fpnrii, (well,) SiAiij, gen. hxUtrH iiktirtt, (bait, decoy.) Compare
j 28. 04i. 9. 10. with 43. 04. 4.
42.
1. Those words, which have a vowel before the termination of
the casus, (or according to 28. 1., or purum in the yen.,) take
almost all an r in the nomin., excepting only a few neuters in t
and v, and feminines in u.
2. And as, according to 38. 06s., neuters only can end in
syllables, which are short through e and o, the masc. and fern.
make of the s and o of their other casus their nominatives in or
bv, u or OV.
3. Thus arises in particular
the yen. in aos of the neuters in as, (aiXas aiXaos,)
,, ,, ios and for of the nomin. in ir, i, and vs, v,
(x!r xior, Saxgy, for,)
j) 5> i, ojos of the nomin. in us, (o)s, Swbr,)
{the nomin. in our, (/3our, /3o,)
the /em. in w and us,
(/iX,*, oor, a!5cir, oor,)
4 11. i. C05. according to Wolf't reading, which is alone correct.
Gl
TIIIfiD DECLENSION.
o, {wild
beast,)
v)pos
&)/>
S-npz
rip
r,pg
SripoTv
cu&ve
xliimm
Sripss
aiasvss
SvipSv
aivvan
Snpat, (v,) xtZn, (v,)
Swpxs
ananas
Sripss
almss
oaipwvoiv
Sot.lfjt.Qves
Sxtfj,6vaiv
Sxliiovas
b, (giant,)
ylyas
ylyxvros
yiyxvri
ylyxvrx
ylyXV
Xs'oVTE
X.E0VT0IV
ylyxvre
yiytttrw
\iovns
Xe'ovtwv
Xiovai, (v,)
Xiovrxs
Xiovres
ylyxvres
yiyctvTuv
yiyiai, (y,)
ylyavrxs
yiytxvns
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Sing.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual
N.A.V.
G. D.
Plur.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Xlt/
Xioly
xopxxe
xogixoiv
HXldc
wxiSoTv
xopxxts
XOf>XXUV
xog<z$;i,(v,)
xogxxar
xogaxEj
itaXSes
buis
Xl'cf
icxiScov
buUV
XlcZv
noual, (v,) bust, (v,) Xlffi, (v,)
nxC&as
xixs
Suits
nauits
xUs
(thing.)
Trqxy/xx
Trpxy/juxros
irpiyixxri
Trpxy/xx
Trpxy/xx
irpdyfAxri
irpxytMbroiv
Tipxyi^aTx
TTpxyv-xTcov
ttpxyiuxai, (v,)
HQzy^xxx
nqxy^xrx.
ACCUSATIVE SINQULAR.
G3
long as its nature allows it, on the same syllable where it is in the
nomin. (See above, x.opa%, xiwv.)
2. ) Monosyllabic words throw the accent in the gen. and diit.
of the three numbers on the termination of the casus. On the
termination o/v it becomes, conformably to 33. Obs. 9. a cir
cumflex. (See above,
x/r.)
3. ) The nomin. accus. and vocat. on the contrary, never have
the accent on the termination of a casus '.
From the second rule are excepted,
a.) the participles, as Sets Sivros, uy ovtos, &c.
b.) the pi. of the adj. wots, way, (irxvros, wavTi,) gen. pi. ttxvruv,
dat. itoimv :
c. ) some -which are become monosyllables by contractions,
\axs Xr, gen. "Kotos, (see below the Anom.) tap rip, ni%p
xrip, gen. wpos, xypos : but not all, see above 41. Obs. 7.,
and below oTs, 50. 06s. 6.
d. ) the gen. pi. and dual of the following nine words : nous,
ws, h i/j-ais, (slave,) bTpus, (Trojan,") to (pas, (light,)
r> tyus, (burn,) 7i Sjtr, (torch,) to KPA2, (head,) and of the
anomalous to oZs, (ear,) b aits, (moth :) hence wa/Swv,
Saiuv, S/jLuiav, Tpvw, (puiTOiv, Qwl'm, SjtSoiv, xpdruv, wruv,
nicov, and in the dual wai'Soiv, &c. *
e.) the lengthened Epic dat. pi. in tat, cast, 46. Obs.
% 44.Of the Accusative Singular.
1. The principal termination of the accus. in this decl. is at s
but the words in is, vs, avs, ovs, have
the accus. in v,
changing simply the s of the nomin. into v, as in the other declen
sions, and retaining the quantity. This is the only form in those
words, which have a vowel before the termination of the casus,
as fiovs, (gen. /3oor,)o5v, oqvs, (Iqios,)Sgvv, and the same with
JjG&i<v, wokm, ypavv, ike.
2. But (hose, which have an additional consonant in the gen.,
1 It ought, however, to be remembered that in this decl. the final syllable of the
word, (euT-nt,) is constantly different from the final syllable of the casus, (Vai-Sf-ac.)
$39. 1.
* The accentuation of several of these words is still a vestige of a contraction from
the older forms, zri'ii, ip*U,
KPAAS, *f : in the others it proceeds from the
wish to distinguish them from the gen. of the words, ai TjJ, i/taai, Sub, (j>enal<y,)
i <fli, (man,) which have the same sound.
G4
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
DATIVE PLURAL.
G3
Obt. 3. When the accent is in the nomin. on the penultimate syllable, it may be
moved farther back in the vocal. ( 12. 2. a.) on shortening the final syllable ; but
this is done only in some words, (Jsaxjatrif, "AsrtA.Xw,) not in others, as for instance,
Obt. 4. It may easily be supposed that the names of objects, which usually are
not apostrophised, when once the case occurs, retain preferably the form of the
nomin., as <S <twt, Zirixis, and such like. But this is also frequently done, especi
ally by Attic writers, with such words and names, as KsSm, Afar, raXug, ruriu, and
such like.
Ob$. 5. The word ivu$, (king,) has, on petitioning a divinity, a peculiar vocat.
u am, (cralii, um,) else it is u
46. Of the Dative Plural.
1. When the termination <nv, at, of the dat. pi. is preceded by
a consonant, the same general rules are observed, ( 41.) as with
the s of the nomin. See above xogal;, nous, aim, likewise A/>a\f/
&c.
2. If in these instances the vowel of the oblique casus differs
from the vowel of the nomin., it continues so in the dat. pi. (5aifjuuv, ovos, Sal/x.oo'i,Trous, nobos, Ttoaiv,iXdnfn^, exos, aXtoiti%iv.)
But, if vt is dropped, the vowel is, according to 25. 4. necessa
rily lengthened ; see above Xicov, yiyas : hence also oSour, ovror,
SSovat,rvitiis, ivros, ruwiiaiv. But when the v alone is dropped,
the vowel remains short, x.ri\s, xrevor, xte<t/v.
04s. I. The adjectives, (not the participles,) in ui, urn, have merely t, as fwrltn,
3. When there is a vowel immediately before the endsyllable o-iv, n, consequently when there is os purum in the gen.,
the vowel remains unchanged as in the other oblique casus,
(jzkriSw, e'or, aXySiai,ruypi, tos, retreat,Spvt, Spi/os, Spuaiv.)
But when the nomin. sing, has a diphthong, the dat. pi. likewise
has the diphthong ; as
Baoikevs, eus,
fiaaikMvoi
y^avs, ygaor,
ygxuai
$ovs, ftoos,
fiovolv.
Obi. 2. The old and Epic language has in all words instead of n, (?,) -irti, (,)
more rarely -in, (,) and as this termination begins with a vowel, it is appended
exactly like that of the other casus, as l%u-tffct, xfaxem, irufttfti, frit**!, /3a?AiOT/v,
it&xnn. In monosyllabic words this form of the dat. retains the accent on the first
syllable ; as raHtrrn, "nn, from ra~s, "t. See the dat. in ari in the following and
other exceptions below in the words in tit, and in the Anom. Mi and
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
47.Syncope of some words in r,%.
1. Some words in np, gen. egor, drop the in the gen. and dat.
ting, and in the dat. pi., and introduce an a after the % instead of
the in the dat. pi. only, as Ttaryp, {father.')
Gen. (noLripos,) -nar^os, dat. (vaript,) irarqi, accus. iraripx,
vocat. Tfirtp,
PI. ttaripts, gen. irarsptuv, dat. narpxat, accus. irareqac.
2. The following, (with some anomalies in the accent,) are
declined in the same way :
(M-Timf, (/unrago?-,) t^nrpos, (mother,)
r, yaarfiq, (yaari^os,) yaarpos, (belly , stomach,)
hvyx-rnp, (^uyari^os,) bvyarpos, (daughter,)
AwpniTrij, (An/Aompr,) A?i/x7)Tgoy, (Ceres:)
the last of which also makes its accus. AvKwrpa. according to this
rule. See about iv-hp the Anom.
Ob$. 1. Poets sometimes neglect this syncope, and say, fur instance,
Suyurl'iriri, and sometimes employ it where it usually does not occur, as SuyxTfti,
Svyetr^uj, &c, frTjw, (Homer.)
(Ms. 2. The accent of these forms is very anomalous : 1.) in the full form, (ex
cepting the compound ^n/nim(,) it always is on the i, and hence is removed on it in
pirns, 9wyarf, 2.) after the i has been thrown out of most of the gen. and da/.
the accent goes over to the termination, (/tnrm, uyxT(Z*, SvyaT(iri,) which else
occurs only in words with a monosyllabic nomin. ; 3.) Avur.rn; on the contrary
draws the accent back in all syncopated forms Aiptirsif, &c, but Bvydrnf, when it is
syncopated by poets, only in the nomin. and accus. (SuyaTja, 6y*r?n, Svyargati.)
Obs. 3. Tatris has in the dat. pi. yarT^atriv and yBurinpn. Even arris, iset, (s'or,)
which else is not syncopated, lias yet ioTcirn.
48.Contracted Declension.
1. There are but few of the words, which have or purum in the
gen., which are not contracted in some of their forms, though it
is by no means the case in all the forms, to which the contraction
might apply in conformity to the general rules.
2. Their contraction indeed differs in some respects from the
general rules ; a deviation of this kind is stated in the following
rule :
The contracted accus.pl. of the third decl. is constantly
like the contracted nomin. pi.
Ohi. 1. Thus, for instance, iXntiii, /tits, are regularly contracted UnitTf, lUZs,
and the contraction of the accus. iktilias, fiUti, is, contrary to the general rules,
exactly the same, even in words, which commonly are not contracted in the nomin.
pi. See the only exception from this rule 53. 2.
CONTRACTED DFXLENSION.
67
OAs. 2. There can be, properly speaking, no l\txa.(n ( 33. 5.) in thin decl.,
because the nomin. hag no particular end-syllable like the other casus. But the
termination of the nomin. may be pure of itself, and therefore subject to contrac
tion. This must then be considered as occurring in the root, and not in the decl.
(*i<t{
'On'uf 'Orivt,) and when the gen., which is contracted in the same way,
is known, {*r, xjja;, 'Or, wr;,) the rest of the decl. proceeds as usual. Hence
this contraction has already been noticed above, 41. (Hit. 5-7. It is only when
both the terminations of the word and the casus are pure, and afford a double
capability of being contracted, that it cannot be separated fr(m the usual contrac
tion ; see below, 53. 3.
Examples for the practice of the following principal instances of contraction,
are given in the Appendix.
49.
The words in ns and es, gen. eos, (which properly are all adjec
tives,) the neuters in or, gen. eos, and the fem. in ca and us, gen. oos,
are contracted in all the casus, in which two vowels meet.
Sing.
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G. D.
Plur.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
n, (o trireme,)
rpiripvis
rpinqeos, rptvigovs
TglTJ^El", Tgll^EI
Tgnigsa, rqiripyi
rpiriQis
to, (a wall,)
riiy/is
niy^ios, Ttl%ovs
ril-xfis
hX"
Second decl.
rpinqee, r^tripn
rpmqioiv, TgrnpoXv
rpt-npees, rpiypets
Tpmqiaiv, rpm^uv
rptriqeai, (y,)
rqi-nps
Tgl!/J
rqmpees, TgiTjgeiy
n, (an echo,)
n%u
h%oos, n%ovs
n%6%, nxoX
r)Xa>
riX0'
TEij^Ea, relxn
TElJ^ElWy, TEIJ^WV
tei'xeiti, (,)
TEi'xEa, rtixn
Second decl.
68
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
60
CONTRACTED DECLENSION.
which is very remarkable. And even when the quantity is different, the accent at
least does not always inform us of it; as i fieTfiis, and vols fairpts.
Obs. 5. Besides x)s, none retain, in common language, the formation in is, us, but
a few isolated forms of *'iy(is, tiger, -ti^ris, heifer, Tons, husband, fi /tr,ns, wrath,
h roi*is, keel, (which also partly take a S in the yen., see $ 50. Obt. 5.) farther a few
proper names like rlp, and the adjectives in and /, (see C3. 1 .) The larger
number of the remaining words in is, which do not take a consonant, are declined
entirely according to the following .
Obs. C. The word Kit, (sheep,) also follows the above decl. (Text 2.) and conse
quently has theyffn. oies, norm, and accut.pl. SV, (long <:) but the nom. ting, generally
is contracted, n Us. The decl. then, is gen. sits, dat. di, aecus. 7v, pi. tJts, c!xs, contr.
Tf, (likewise A, , and ris .) Homer has, however, in the dat. pi. Sunt, viz. in
stead of sin according to the following .
Obs. 7. Most words in m follow the second contracted decl. like tXoZs, fids, wit.
There are only two words declined like fins, viz. x'"'> (see the -Anom.) and ftSfi
when it signifies sumach, yet both without any contraction.
51.
1 . Most words in is and i, and a few in v$ and u, retain the
vowel of the nomin. in common language only in the nomin.
, accus. and vocai. sing. ; in all the other cases they change it
into a, and then the dat. si becomes ei, and the pi. ess and eas
become eis, and the neuter i becomes m : but there is no other
contraction.
2. The substantives in is and vs besides have what is called
the Attic Gen.
by making the gen. sing, us, (instead of ov,) and in the dual an ',
(instead of oiv,) and accenting the three gen., as if the last syl
lable were short. (See 11. 5. and 8.)3. Neuters in v and t have the usual gen. aarv iareos, dariuv :
viltipt neniptos.
4. Hence arises for substantives the following usual decl. :
Sing.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Plural
r,,(a city,) o,(an ell) to, (a town,)
nbhtis
noKis
am
ifh%zis
aarv
TtohSUV
\di-euv
noKzus
tfhyjiws aarz-os
noKtai{y) Tcrtyzai (v) a^sai (v)
VOKit
darzi
ni\zis n-hyjus
woXiv
am
aarv
ttoKhs nrixms
aroXi
aarv
a%-n
Dual N. A.
G. D.
aS"EE
zsoksuv
1 Grammarians state it as Attic ; but in our Attic works we have ymriotr and
Kiiwr'itn, &c.
70
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
CONTRACTED DECLENSION.
71
53.
1. There are some deviations in the Attic contraction of the
third decl., when there is a vowel either before or after an e. The
termination sa then is not contracted into
but into a, as vyms,
(sound,) accus. sing, and neut. pi. vyiia, contr. uyia, (and the
same with Evipua, evXeS,) xXeos, pi. xXiex, xXia.
2. Even those terminations of the words in svs, which com
monly are not contracted, absorb in this way the e before %, as,
and m, in some words ; as yj>*us, (measure of liquids, see the
Anotn. ypvs,) gen. %ous, (for %oi(os,) accus. %o2, accus. pi. %o%s :
HstQxiels, gen. ricipcaws, accus. Ylsipzici : dyunus, rovs ayuiZLs, and
a few more.
3. This produces in proper names ending in xXlws, contr. xXys,
a double contraction, but commonly merely in the dat., as
Nom. TlepixXiwHe^ixXtis
Gen. YlspixXiios, con tr. IlspixXious
Dat. TlE^ixXisi YlspixXistTlEpixXsT
Acc. Ue^ixXsesYlegixXex
Voc. Tle^ixXieaTltplxkus
Decline in the same way 'H^xxXris, (Hercules,) and others.
Obi. 1. The doubly contracted accut. occurs seldom ; for instance, 'HfaxXn. That
we also meet with 'u^xxXh, (but only in later writers,) may be accounted for from
what is stated, J 56. Olis. 4.
Obi. 2. Sometimes there is, instead of a contraction, an elition of one of the
vowels, for instance, vocal. "HjaxXis, (by way of exclamation in the later prosewriters,) and in the poets the gen.
dat. 'Hja*xiij Homer uirijjia, (instead
of i,) for imoi'Aa from -thf, tnrirvt for erivrri.
OAs. 3. This elision may also serve to account for the unaccented termination a,
ex. gr. in ra xkia, which, because of the contraction, should be long, being short in
the Epic poets. Compare 28. Obs. l\.
Obi. 4. The learner must carefully notice which words, and which terminations
of each word, have the usual form, or this peculiar contraction. We constantly find
iXiix, iXiixt, (from kXnii), but of iymt the accus. pi. iyiui, never -ii.
Obi. 5. The Ionic dialect always has iyiix, 'IWxAita,
&c. and the ancient
poets contract the two first i into u or : for instance, from xXics, rir'ui, we find the
gen. x\ues, pi. xXtTx, dat. mil and srSi', farther 'HjoxXiw, i, ijx. See the Anum.
about %(us, xt'iif.
54.
1. Of the neuters in as these two, xspxs, horn, and ripas, pro
digy, have aros in the gen., but cast off the r in the Ion. dialect;
xiparos, xipaos, ripxvos, ripaos,
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
72
and the three following, y'ipas, old age, ytqas, honor, xtkas, flesh,
constantly have merely aos.
2. This produces the following contraction :
Sing.
N. A. V. xegar
Gen. xi^aos, xequs
Dat. xeqgc'i, xiqa
Dual.
xsQote, xiqx
xepxoiv, xipZv
Plural,
xipaa, xiqa
xipdav, Xcpuv
xiqxat, (v.)
Obt. 1. The word rifxi admits the contraction only in the pi. (t!;, ti{,) the
Attics use solely ri^xTi; in the ting. ; and of xi^xs also the form xnt has continued
in use along with the contraction. The three others commonly occur only con.
tracted ; cui is in all writers a mere Ionic form.
3. The remaining neuters in as, aos, take only .the forms a
and a, for instance, ai\as, (light,) Siitas, (goblet,) rai ai\a, iiira,
pi. ra. ai\a, Siirx. It is the same with Sepas, oQtKas, and others.
Obt. 2. The middle syllable (x is originally long in xi;at(, (x!{t, Anacr. 2.
Eurip. Bacch. 919.) Hence the lengthened xifixrx and ri(wr< of the (later)
Epics.
Obt. 3. But the end-syllable, for instance, of ri ylcx, *!<*, is also used as short,
(see 28. Obt. 11., and more particularly, Buttm. Cumplele Gr. Gr.) In Homer
xfix is likewise a monosyllable, (see 5 28. Obt. 6.)
Obt. 4. The of these words is often changed in the decl. into an i by the
lonians, as if the nomin. were in : for instance, xtfw, rk yiftx, xf'uren, and
others. Some old words hare barely this form, see the Anom. fifirxf, iHmt, and
partly xr'if&i.
55.
1. The comparatives in uv, neut. ov, gen. ovos, ( 67. 68.) drop
the v in the accus. sing, and in the nomin. accus. and vocat. pi.
and contract the two vowels, but without this contraction the v
never is dropped, not even by the lonians ; ex. gr.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Sing.
/xe/^cuv, (greater,)
tEiovor
/u,ei'ovi
/AEi'^ova, contr. {mi'm
/AEi^OV
Plur.
{ae/^ovej, contr. petrous
txtltpai, (v,)
tx.iiZpvas, contr. (jit'ityus
(Aei^ons, contr. nelsons
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
73
harsh, the accus. of the two names 'AwoXXwv, wos, and Yloust^m,
urns, (Neptune.)
Accus. 'AntiXKum 'AwoXXw, IToireiSa/va TIoub^u.
Obi. The poets also have xuxiai*, {drink of various ingredients,') xvx'uitxxoxim,
(Epic, xoxuS.)Compare about this construction, and some similar ones, ilxin, Min,
the following . Oh. 6. d. Obi."].
56.Anomalous Declension.
1. There is an anomaly in a decl., when one or more cases of a
noun are declined in a particular way different from the nomin.;
see, for instance,
xvwv, yaka, in the list of Anomalous or
Irregular Nouns.
Obi. 1. Among these mere deviations of the decl. must also be ranked the decl.
of foreign and later Greek names in with a long vowel, as
tiXni, gen. *<A.?, dot. *iA>j, accus. *jXij, vocal. *iA?,
'lrireut, gen. 'Invov, accus. 'Ijjrsuv, vocat. 'Irtcw.
2. But most deviations from the regular formation consist in
what is called an interchange of forms. In the Greek language
one and the same word, especially in the old Greek, frequently
had more than one form of inflection, though its signification did
not vary. It is true that in the polished language there was but
one of these forms in use; yet the other often maintained itself,
sometimes for the sake of euphony, and sometimes by mere chance,
especially in poetry ; for instance, A^-hrnp and Ari/x7iTa, (Ceres;)
Hxpuov, anciently Sdxpv, vos, (tear.)
Obs. 2. Under this head must also be ranked when a masc. in is at the same
time a neuter in as of the third decl., as, i and to xxtros, darkness, exvQas, a drinking
vessel, Sx'i, chariot ; farther prolongations of the fern, endings of the first decl., as
riAn'rq, atiyxn, Ion. rtXtirxtn, imyxxlt, 'ASmi, (Minerva,") with Epics 'ASu'wi,
Ion. 'a9hu', and a number of female names in n with the Epic form u : Tlnnxixr,,
UmiX'frua, Tli^ifntix, Ti{^/^(i/, Sec.Several proper names have already double
forms in the nomin., (for instance, -Xnt and -xXic, 'IfixXHt and "JfrnXt,) and poets
may use sometimes one form, sometimes the other, as the verse requires ; Homer
always has UaT(txXns in the nomin., but in the accus. nirfcxXm and UxrftxXw, in
the vocal. nir^x\t and Uarfcxkus ; and yet this cannot be considered as a mela.
plasm, of which we are going to treat presently.
3. As such double forms originated at a time, when people had
no idea of grammar, but every form and termination was always
alone before their eyes without any regard to the others, it natu
rally followed that of two inflections, especially in declensions,
they used in one case one, and in another the other, and thus the
noun in use became a true anomalon; for instance ywfi should
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
follow the first decl., but makes -yuvaixoy in the gen. from the un
used nomin. TTNAIH : vavs has in the accxis. vaSv, but in the
dat. vr/(, (from the form v-nus, which is merely Ionic.) See these
words below in the list, and compare Zeus-, vb'ojp, yow, Se'vfyov, wvp.
4. But frequently these double forms were used, more or less,
together in one casus, as vVos, gen. uhv, and, (after a nomin. of
the third decl.) v\ios: see this word in the list, and compare also
j Howl/Is, ogvir, yovs . Such a word is called in Latin abundant.1
5. When such double forms presuppose but one nomin., from
which they differ in their decl., the word is called a
Heterocliton:
for instance OWnrovs, gen. OiSiwoSor, and after the contracted
second decl. OiSi'woy. But when one casus presupposes an obso
lete nomin., it is called a
Meiaplasmus :
for instance, fc'vfyov, ov, dat. pi. Ss'vfyoir, and (as from to AENAP02,) iiyipean.
6. It is likewise a metaplasm, when neuters pi. in a are made
of masc. in or, which is done in proseespecially with
These forms are used in some particular connections instead of
ol isa[/.ol, &c.
\ Obi. 3. The greatest part of the common and poetical anomalous nouns consists
of Heterociites and Melaplasms, or is a mixture of both. Those, which must he
noticed separately, are stated in alphabetical order in 68. hut we will previously
bring several classes, to which many belong, under one point of view.
Obs. 4. Heleroclitei are the words in ns, which are declined after the first and third
decl., some throughout, as /tvxtii, mushroom, gen. au and htk : especially proper names,
as Aafii,-, gen.tu and r,m : (see Anom. eXiij :) others in part. All compound proper
names in particular, which have in the gen., form the acc. in n and : 2ux(xths,
gen.
ws, acc. lui^irn, (Plato,) and Sa*{tTi, (Xenopho.)And the Ionians
form versa vice, the acc. sing, and pi. of the words in n; of the first decl. after the
third, as,
-ray h&rortu, pi. Tovi liwrorutf, from hff-ro'rns, so,
Hikrte&ia from bliXriefitii, cu?
Obi. 5. Some words in if, which partly take a J in the inflection, and partly not,
constitute another kind of Helerocliles ; for instance, /<>>;, (wrath,) u v.r,;, and
1 Many, however, can only he said to be (abundantia,) abounding for us in the
grammar, since we are under the necessity of noticing at once In the aggregate,
what was the practice at different periods, in different dialects, or of different writers ;
for instance, the various inflections of Sipii.
! Names formed like patronymics, as M<XtiiS>i,-. eJjiti Jw, and most of those which
are not compounds, like 2>iTi, &c, as AiV^/W, Bi^st, Tiymwith the excep
tion of this Ioniim, constantly follow in Greek the first decl., though they are
declined in Latin entirely after the third, (</ai. Milliadis, Xtrxis, &c)
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
75
pmila;, and several proper names, m 'Aii^xtxis, itss, (Aristotle,) and iut, (Plutarch,)
and the feminine) in is, iS, a* xxnyvei;, fuSnti*l*H> dins, &c. commonly have ins in
the Doric and Ionic dialect.Under this head must also he reckoned some Epic
datives with the shortened i, (according to 28, Obs. 11.) as iai for ixtii.
Obs. G. The nominatives ending in us, wv. , occasion likewise several changes,
in some of which it is, however, doubtful whether one of the forms ought not rather
to he considered as a contraction. Of this kind are
8.) Nom. us and as. Even s^us, urns, (desire, love,') which clearly is of the third
decl., has a poetical double form, Ifst, acc.
It, therefore, cannot sur
prise us, if some words of the Attic second decl. have cases of the common
second decl. ; for instance, mis, nomin., pi. tJ and rani. See also Anom.
xiXus, and ylXus.
h.) us, gen. u and uos. Thus M/r, vrxrous, finr^us, yet in the pi. commonly
r r^uts, &c. See Anom. xfcXus, and compare fyus.
c.) us, yen. arcs. These words sometimes drop the r : i fyus, (sweat.) Slaun,
Hiurx, has an Attic double form rS i$p, rit Heu, considered as a contrac
tion, (like xUxn, *>>) hut agrees likewise with the forms of the Attic
second decl., just as {t;, xt?> {Anom. %(u;.) See a more obvious transi.
tion to the Attic second decl. in the Anom. yiXui, and omo adjectives
(iu{u'j[ijf, &c.) 63. Obs. 5.
d.) Nom. us and xn. Here the change partly takes place already in the nomin. ;
o txus, gen. u, and rxuv, gen. uves, {peacock,) h <rvQus, u and ru f-.v, uves,
{whirlwind,) n alXus, {thrashing-floor,) gen. u and uos, also xXuv, unsi The
forms of the third decl. are more usual with all of them in the pi.) The
areas. 'AtriXXu, iltnim, xoxiu, 55. may be compared with them.
e.) The forms ix,>(>
{water of the blood,) acc. i^ija, and (Homer) iia
likewise point to a nomin. in us and a.
Obs. 7. Some feminines in ui have a collateral form in *, gen. tits : yXfaut, ""<!
(pennyroyal,)yx%ii, els, Tt^yin, ins, in old authors Vsoyu, tus. Thus it is ac
counted for, when
of ilxuv, his, {image,) we find also gen. tixtvs, acc. ilxu, acc. pi. ilxeis,
of xnbuv, erss, (nightingale,)gen. Sauf,
of iXiJ, o, (swallow,)voc.
though we might also assume a contraction in the manner of /ullut, &c.
Obs. 8. Lastly we find in Epic and Lyric poets, instead of the usual termina
tions in the eases of some words, others of a shorter or simpler form, the analogous
nomin, of which Is wanting ; especially forms of the third decl. with the termina
tions of, i, , is, ifi, instead of the usual ones after the first and second decl. ; for
instance,
instead of iXxy, (of iXxv, strength,) iXxi of AAH
xgixrjy, (of
woof in weaving,)x^ixx of KPOS
,, iittv, itiS*, &tim, (of i itins, infernal regions,)iiies, &ih, ailx of
'AIS
,, xXxiu, (of i xXx&ss, twig,)xXx"Si, pi. xXxhtiri of KAA2
., x^oxto^ois, (of rro ailoa.'Xoiai, slave,)avt^xToilirffi as if of ANAPAnors
3 All these appearances are cleared up, when we have correct notions of the
uniformity of all the decl., and perceive that the first and second decl., with their
double forms, are properly nothing but old contractions and mutilations of the third.
Thus the acc. u of the Attic second decl. is connected with the contracted acc. u of
the third ; that in v of the third with the first and second ; the Ion. aVs-oVsa appears,
less irregular, &c. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gram. 33. 04s. 3.
76
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
77
78
A GREEK GRAMMAS.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
70
lyiXn, (a, laughter,) gen. urn, acc. yixura, and, (according to the Attic second decl.)
yix*., ( 56. Obs. 6. c.)
Homer has also the dat. yiXy, and in Oil. v. 34G. the acc. yiXiy, hut with
the various reading ytXu, ( 37- Obs. 2. and 5C. Obs. 6. a.)
5,Xaa5, ^ 57. Obi. 3.
|
&6770W, (to, Ae knee,) gen. yovxror, &c. da/, pi. yovao-o-iv, (as if of
TONA2 :) compare S6pv, Sogaror.
Jon. yau'*arf, &C. and with poets yovvos, yetn), pi. yovia, yevwv. Compare
Tfy*,, $ 56. Obs. 7.
ymr\, (wife,) yuvaixor, yvvaixi, yvmtxtx, Z yuvm, pi. yvvuiMS, at,
yv\quY.uiv, yuvai^lv, (of TTNAIS.)
Compare the two. yimi with Sue, 45. Obs. 5. The accent in yintuias is an
exception from 43. 04j. 4.
iaf, $ 56. 0J. 5.
|
itTia, $ 73.
tivtipov, (to, iree,) has the dat. pi. commonly SevS^eui of to Se'vSgor,
which occurs in Ionic writers : compare xg/vov.
The pi. iiti(ix, Js5;6'i;, comes from another Ionic form, and occurs like
wise in common prose.
Aiof, Ail', see Z^r.
lo^u, (to, spear,) gen. lopotrot, &c. dat. pi. Sopaoi, (of AOPA2 :)
compare yovu, yivarot.
Jon. iiv(xrnf, &c. Tlie (rather poetical) casus J{$, iati, Ion. itofit, iet/e),
pi. tivfte, hvoat, Icviiw, come from a still simpler form. Compare ydtu.
voc. see 61. note.
I
l, 57. Obs. 3.
fog, H(tsi see 41. Obs. 7.
I
'*, see lit.
ly%iKvs, (f>, eel,) vos, has in the pi. Ion. ly%iKvst, &c. Alt.
lyXt\i\s, lyyjXtan, ( 51. Obs. 1.)
iinin, 56. 06. 7.
Its, (good,) an Epic word, of which there is only the gen. inn acc. Itt. Also, ivt,
acc. r,i>, neut. it. The 'Epic gen. pi. ieun, (see 33. a. Obs. i.e.) comes from
another form, EOS, , and its neui. />/. i EA, {goods.)
lat, $ 37. Oi. 2.
Zeit, (Jupiter,) gen. Aior, da. Ait, acc. A/a, (as if from AI2,)
and a still less frequent form, Znvor, Zwi, Zjva, (from
ZHN,) voc. Zeu.
1 The gen. iUtt in Homer was formerly distinguished from it hy the spiritus,
where the sense seemed to require the pron. possessive thy ; for instance, miit
ir,m, of thy son. It was then considered as the gen. of an old form 'ETS for his,
which, like other forms of the third pers. (see the Syntax, 127. 04s. 5.) was used
for the pron. poss. of the second pers. But tms is the only correct reading. The
pronoun here is not expressed, and the adjective iif supplies it in some degree ; just
as iff-3xf, (excellent,) is sometimes very ingeniously employed where the pron. poss.
might he used ; for instance, //. i. 469. t. 573. Compare especially Od. y.
with
//. . 422. See Buttm. Lexilogus, I. 23.
80
A GRKEK GRAMMAR.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
81
82
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
OAs. 5.) The Dorians said S(tTx'i, (*ix*> &c. ( 16. Obi, 1. a) without
making the nomin. in .
left, nom. and acc. (eye,) is a dual only ; it makes the gen. and dat. merely after
the second decl. in a pi. form : oafm, Sfftotf, weaan.
elias, (to, ground,) eShii, eShi, (6 54. Oif. 4.)
o?r, (to, ear,) jren. wros, &c. jen. pZ. tov, ( 43. 06s. 4.)
pi.
dalv, contr. from ovccs, am, Doric nom. us.
vtdis, (child, boy,) waiSor, has in the dissyllabic Epic form rsxis,
Tfzh in the accus.
**t{(, 56. OAs. 6. b.
|
Xlu^aiis, gen. 53.
7l\ies, 68. G.
nwi,, (fi, the place where the people hold their assemblies,) made
anciently zsvmos, wwcvi, zsukvo. ; afterwards also zsvukqs, &c.
jrtxis, 64.
IIoo-eiSiSv, Sjvos, acc. HoastSu, voc. Hoasiiov, ( 45. Obs. 2. 55. 2.)
The oldest form is, n/>>, em, Dor. nwuiav or n#r!<Sv, ,-, Ion. nwiitrim, 50. 04s. 5. and 6 51. 04s. 3.
vetfUt, vr^etvf, 6 64. 2.
nqiofius, (5,) when it signifies oW man, has only the acc. -nqtofiuv,
voc. Tspiafiv. As ambassador, it is used only in the pi. (o
zjgiafieis, datf. zzpiafizuu.) Its deficiencies are supplied by
itfiiofcvrris, old man, and npt(s^,tvrr\s, ambassador.
Isolated and poetical instances, as v\<r$uit, of the ambassador, Aristoph.
Acharn. 93. irfafcvws, old men, Soul. Here. 245. prove nothing against the
common use.
iffwirtt) i, face,) pi. Epic v^ncuxecra, x^offaiiraffti. Compare ovuocv.
vr^oyrpos, (ji, ewer,) Attic <n^>y^pvs, gen. zspoyrpv, ( 36. Obs.)
passes over to the third decl. in the pi. : dat. pi. tspo%ou<sn,
(Aristoph. Nub. 272. Eurip. Ion. 434.) like /3oyr, fioueiv.
zsvp, (ro, fire,) makes its plural after the second decl. ra. tsvoa.,
dat. 'asv^oTs, (Xen. Anab. 7, 2.)
citts, ffSf, 64. 3.
evt, (J, moth,) gen- nit, pi. r'w, r'tas, gen. nit, 43. 04s. 4. In later times, tnrlt, Sec.
ffxi/f, (, ordure,) gen. emurtt, Sec- (see 23>{.)
tyu3', (, weal,) makes rfuliiyym, &c.
nrlot, J 53. 04s. 2, and 5.
(rrayit, J 56. OAs. 8.
|
tr'ut^, rr(, gen. trnrit, 41. OAs. 7.
*T'Xi> (?) rr'Xf) 5 66. OAs. 8.
;, 64. 3.
|
(rurtig, ooc. J 45. OAs. 2.
Tv, a rav, (a salutation in common life, O thou!* rarely O ye!)
8 The reading S 'rat rests on the absurd derivation from hm, friend, u im.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
63
84
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
59. Of the Adjectives.
ADJECTIVES.
85
86
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ADJECTIVES.
87
as ixia, p9iit,' (Homer.) Of V'"*i (half,) the older Attics also made k/Amm
instead of npletnt. See the note to Plato Mcno. 17. and Buttm. Complete Gr. Or.
Obs. 2. There is a compound of Uiv, ;*, (involuntary,") which is contracted
iixuv, tma, ixa*. The neut. sr5 is long, merely because it is a monosyllable; but in
its compounds it is, conformably to analogy, short, {{,, Sriirx,
(all taken to
gether.) With regard to the accent of r-iimn, trxei, see 6 43. OA*. 4.
Obs. 3. The adjectives in u; give rise to contracted adjectives ; nm, mrrx, m>, ars
contracted into ji, nmt, mand ens,
, into
eue-e-x, o-jv, for instance,
rtftris, <Tt(Ln*'eit, Tipw, gen. <rtft.viiTesfrom np.r,us, honored.
ptXirevs, fitXirwffffx, ftiknem, gen. f&tXtrevvresfrom pi\irous,full of homy.
gee about them tj 41. Obs. 5.
63.Adjectives of one and two terminations.
1. Adjectives of two terminations all follow the third decl.
They are
1. nr, neut. Efas aa-tyris, aa<pet, clear,
(gen. ios, contr. /$,) gen. o-Ktyovs-.
Examples : ih-nQw, true, dyevvris, ignoble, Scx^ris. accurate,
aiSaJnr, (long a,) proud, Sypicloris, brutal, n\r\pns, full,
xhris, amassed, ^vlw, false, zs%m%s, bending forward,
dywf, see 53.
2. cov, neuter ov as niitm, Tfeirov, ripe,
(gen. ovor,)
gen. nittmos.
Examples : iixi^uv, (long v,) blameless, iit^iytLut, idle,
ilyyai/jLcov, well-meaning.
3. it, neuter i as iSgir, topi, knowing, gen. TSptos,
{gen. ior,) has very few examples.
4. The following isolated one :
appm or apaviv, neut. appev, auv, masculine,
gen. uppwos, agtfEvor.
2. But beside these, there are adjectives compounded with
subst., of which they retain the final syllable and declension, as
far as it is possible, as is best seen from the examples. They all
are communis generis, and have a neut. gender, when it can be
formed agreeably to analogy ; for instance,
ivyji^s, tvxctpi, graceful, gen. tros, from w mips, tros,
aSxxgvs, al'ctxpu, tearless, gen. vos, from to Saxpu, vos.
Sometimes the conversion of -n into co, and t into o, takes place in
the final syllable ; for instance,
from zsar-hq, epos, comes iitirup, op, fatherless, gen. oqos,
from (ppriv, ipgEvbr, comes aw$%m, oy, icise, gen. ows.
3. If no analogous neut. gender can be formed, the adjective
88
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ADJECTIVES.
89
Sing.M. F.
niyas, /JueyiXm,
lAsydXou, lAiy&kw,
fjLsyz'Kcfi, i^eyiKrt,
/xeyav, /xeyaXw,
N.
txiya,
fJ.Byx\ov,
t^iyikta,
fidryot.
M.
F.
N.
irohut, vtoWri, ?[o\u,
noWov, itokyjris, 7ToXKovt
itoXKu, noWr), nok\it>,
The dual and pi. are regular like those of adjectives in or : (Asyd\co,
a, u, fj.syx'kot, act, a, otoXXoi, cu, a, &c.
Obs. 1. The forms -rokkts, mXkit, are Ionic, and the regular forms of taXus are
found in Epic poets ; for instance, rcXus, rsXtt;, ui, &c. They hare also xtuXtii,
mvkl, and employ the mate, likewise as fern. (ex. gr. II. x. 27.)
2. Utfos, mild, is employed in this form only in the masc. and
neuter sing. : the whole fern, and neut. pi. are borrowed from
dialects, as upabs, (Ion. irp-nbs,) fern. ir^aeTa, neut. pi. zjpxix. We
also find the masc. pi. nomin. wgjioi and n$a.iis, gen. merely icpaim,
dat. it^-xois, and Trpasaiv.
3. 2<Zy, (safe,) contr. from 2A02, has of this form only aus,
(communis generis,) acc. and neuter awv, acc. pi. aZs. Rarely
fern. sing, and neut. pi. <sa. All the rest is of awos, a, ov, (Ion.
coos.)
Obs. 2. The acc. pi. nZs is easily accounted for as coming from SAOTS. But the
nomin. pi. trvi, which also occurs, points to the third decl. irs, rits : just as 2AOS
produced ait, ZA02 produced the Homeric
whence the common gf. (Com
pare the verbs rixia, J, i
S^am.)
4. The principal defective adjectives i
a.) ax\7)Xv, 74.
b. ) ayJ^ta, 78.
c.) (ppovSos, gone, evanescent, which is used merely in the
nomin. of all genders and numbers, (see 151.)
Obs. 3. We notice also a few rare and poetical occurrences, as
1. rirriK, in the Epic poets xtm, (venerable, mistress,) only fern.
2. ftixx(, (blessed^) is communis generis, but has also pita^a. in thefern. The
neuter does not occur.
3. A few adjectives masc. have a less frequent derivative form for the fern.
x'tnit?* of Trim, T{i/3{ of trfUjiiis,
90
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
4. Some cnmmon ones have a similar collateral form, (see aboveua. for those
in ns :) rUipa of I, n vim, (fat,*) ffyftttv* of a, n vre&Q^M, (kind.)
0. There are also older poetical simple forms, such as we have noticed of sub
stantives, (and which are likewise erroneously considered as abbreviations,)
trgitrfia for rgio-fitiftt, kts for \t?ari, (smooth?)
6. About its and fits, see the list of Anomalous Noun:
1. The facility, with which, (according to 63. 2. &c.) adjectives may be formed
of substantives, induced poets to make them as often as it suited their
convenience, and to use them with isolated casus, of which the nomin.
sing, frequently cannot even be presupposed, conformably to any correct
analogy : as iauirei^f*atTis "tttst, (from
ttros,) srtXva^n %o\fv*, from the
gen. <{,) and the like.
65. Of the Degrees of Comparison.
(GRADUS COMPARATIONIS.)
1. The Greek language has, like the Latin and English, positive,
(long,) comparative, (longer,) and superlative, (longest,) each of
which is formed in the same way for the three genders, and
differs only in the terminations of the genders.
2. The most usual forms of comparison are the terminations
-reqos, a, ov, for the compar. and
-txtos, *), ov, for the superl.
3. Adjectives in or reject the r before these terminations, and
retain the o unchanged, if they be preceded by a long syllable ;
as s?aios\, /3sjSaioTSoy, hyju^ore^os, miaraxafos \ and also after a
muta cum liquida, for instance, ofyobgos atpoSgoraros, nvxvos zsvxvorsgor, (see Buttm. Complete Greek Grammar, 65. Obs. 2.)
4. But when these terminations are preceded by a short syllable,
o is changed into a>, ex. gr, o-opor ootywregos, xa/gior xxtpiwTxros,
e^vqdrepof, xada^urarof, &C.
Obs. 1. There are, however, exceptions for the sake of the metre: the occurs
in Epic poetry after a long syllable, as si'^aroror, xaxoguvaVigu, Homer, and in the
Attic poets after mula cum liquida, as }ti<rirorfirtzrts, Kurip.
Obs. 2. In some adjectives in a there is more commonly at or i; or if inserted
instead of this t or tt, especially by the Attics ; for instance, pitts /uetiirxm, \p"pufunt i'ppxfi%>'irri(s, XaXts XtXlrrtfH' The first form is peculiar to the Attics, the
second to the Ionians, the third is the least frequent ; but the common form is also
in use along with them.
Obs. 3. Some adjectives in mts, viz. yt(aics, old, txXhiis, ancient, <rx'Xa7ss, slow,
generally drop the of the termination : yi(<tlri(iS, rxXairxTtsObs. 4.
(dear,) commonly does the same, or introduces at: flkrtfn, p'Xrmrt,
or piXaintts, fiXxlrans. For the Doric fimfts, see 16. Obs. I. d.
Obs. 6. Contracted adjectives in ifm change us into , for instance, srsjpvji*runs, Teffu^rxTiis, but those in cmw( according to Obs. 2. take u in the resolved
form irXetf, ixXntrarts : hence the contraction is ixKns, arXsitrcms.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
91
Obs. G. That the degrees of comparison in are sometimes communis generis, has
been noticed above, 60. Obs. 4.
66.
1. Adjectives in vs barely drop the s: evqvs, ev^vrepos, ivqvraros.
2. Those in as, gen. avor, do the same, but resuming the v, which
has been rejected before the s : as /^iXxs, (gen. jusXavor,) f^i\dvTtQOf.
3. Adjectives in wr and sir convert those terminations into ss,
for instance xfcnSris, (gen. ios,) aXrfyiararos, ni-ins, (gen. wror,)
vriviaraTos, y^aptsis, /jzpiiara.ros.
4. All other adjectives take the form iartpos, less frequently
ianpos, and undergo the same change as before the final syllables
of the cases ; for instance, aipgcuv, (atppovos,) &Qpov-areQos, 'ipitaS,
(ipTlxyoi ,) a. pnot,y-loTgt.TOS* .
Obi. 1. The end-syllable m of the first decl. being, as we have seen above, 63.
Obs. 7.) frequently an adjective termination, allows a comparison, which always is
-ifrarsf, as xXi*rlffraTcf from x\%iwis, {thief.) Only v^eiffTvis, {insutter,) has for
euphony's sake ifyrriri(ts.
Obs. 2. ^mJiif, in, {false,) also has-iVri{, and according to the doctrine of
grammarians the case is the same with ixfirhs, {immoderate^) because ix.(tr'wrif>i
is the compar. of Sixains, {pure.) But in our editions, at least, we also meet with
ax^xTiimfof from the former word, {e.r. gr. Xenoph. Mem. 1, 2, 12.) just as we have
iyx^xTtffTi^ae from lyx^artis, {moderate.)
Obs. 3. The simplest form is in paxec^ fietxdfTxrts, ^xaits oixaVtr'Ttt0^
67.
1. Another, but far less frequent, form of comparison is :
'lav, neuter iov, for the compar.
-kttos, m, ov, for the superl.
See above in 55. the decl. of this compar.
2. This form of comparison is used in
1. ) Some adjectives in vs, in this way, ribs, vfiiesy, ^taros:
2. ) Some in pos, dropping the p, as alaxphs, a.\<syjm,
aioyyoros :
3. In some compar. of this form the preceding consonant along
with the i is changed into aa, or tt, see Obs. 7. The adjective
1 In Xenoph. Mem. we twice meet with fiXaxmn^ts, *tt, (3, 13, 4. and 4, 2,
20.) from 0x*{. This is unquestionably wrong, because of the *>, since the in
jSiUg, /3x*jtf, is long. The correct reading unquestionably is (IXaxixun^i, txtis :
for whenever a word did not readily admit the degrees of comparison, they were
generally made of the derivative form ixis. Compare 63. Obs. 3.
92
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
and
1 "Arm, the God of War, probably identical with it, and the abstract subst. iftrti,
are still evidences of the positive.
1
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
93
94
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
7. xx\os (beautiful,)
xaWiaiv,
xaKKiaros.
8. pg^ios, (easy,)
p?w,
pharos.
The Ionians, with whom the positive is pnihos, have pnim,
prt'iaros, the Epics p-nireqos, raros, all from PA12, PHI2 : and
from its neut. pi. PHI A came the adv. pua, pia, (easily.)
9. uXytivos, (grievous,)
dXylaiv,
aKytaros.
But the regular form aXysivorepos, raros, is more usual in the
masc. and fem.
10. vsiituv, (ripe,)
zsmatrepos,
osnia'tra.ros.
11. vtian, (Jat,)
zstoripos,
zsioraros.
Obs. The old superl. in t is peculiar to poets, furxTt, (middlemost,) from
pitcs, and of , (new,) t'txm, mW, (last,) of which the contracted /n. mith de
notes, in prose, the lowest, (with us /Ae highest,) string of a musical instrument.
69.
1. There are also defective degrees of comparison without any
positive, (see the 06s.) and several of the above anomalous forms
Tike r,rrm, xptirruv, XSioros, &c, may be considered as such.
2. Under this head must also be ranked those, which are de
rived from particles, and those which denote a sequence : for
instance, ss'K'naiairsqos, raros, from wXWov, (near, like the Latin
prope, propior, proximus ;)zs^oreqos, who is before, prior, zspwros,
the first, from zspo, (before ;) vmionpos, raros, tmAvnaros, higher,
highest, from Cuep, (over, above;)\oyjx.ros, extreme, outermost,
from e, (out of;) varsgos, Taror, (later, last,) and others'.
3. Sometimes degrees of comparison are given to substantives,
which may be taken in an adjective sense ; for instance iraTpos,
(friend,) makes eraiqoraros, yXinrms, (thief,) yXiisriareuros. (See
66. 06s. 1.)
Obs. 1. Some old grammarians erroneously ranked among compar. and super/.,
made of substantives, some defective ones in out and imt, of which there is a kin
dred abstract subst. in , as 'ity'im, (more horrible,) xi(iirm, (most cra/ty.) i^itnt,
(most high;) substantives, <rl fyn, (shuddering,) x'tfin, (cunning,) Sl^n, (height,) and
some of the above-mentioned deviations are explained in the same way ; for instance,
i%Stvrot from to i^Sos, (hatred,) /u-nxio-rts from prixes, (length,) xaWttros from xaXXo,-,
(beauty,) &c But it is unquestionable that these subst. and those compar. and
superl. rather presuppose a corresponding positive, and this is so much the more
certain, since the positive of some few of them may actually be found in the old
poets; ex. gr. xfxrv;, from which comes xfxnmi, and ri xfini, IXtyx'ut, (shameful,)
\tiyxiims, and ri !ktyXeS. Compare 119. 3. e. and 10. d.
1 We frequently meet with compar. and superl. of i, Mm, &C. as iwrifn, i'3.
txtu. &c but they are in-many places obvious corruptions of_the adverbial form
JMvr((w. See 115. and 125.
NUMERALS.
95
Obt. 2. The poets, especially the Epics, have several of those degrees of comparison
belonging to this section ; for instance, <fsjn , ifi^totx, and tp'tprm, (braver, most
excellent,') which may be considered as belonging to iytSis :kiWijus, (more impu
dent,') from xCuv, xvtof, [iu7u-iC-:i'><. (more powerful,) from fixfiXius, Trvpxrot, ftv^trtt,
itrkirifn, and others, which are sufficiently explained in dictionaries.
Obt. 3. We meet, but very rarely, with compar. and super/, made of a word,
which already expresses a degree of comparison ; they give greater intensity to its
signification ; for instance, irxanirecrst, ifiritrts. Expressions of this kind are
found in later writers, not Attics. When Epic poets at times combine both forms
of a compar. as X"ZT'zh puirseei, it is done for the sake of the metre, and not to
strengthen the expression.
OF NUMERALS.
70.Cardinal Numbers.
1. sis, iiia, v, gen. Ivor, p.lis, ivhs, * one.''
There is an anomalous change of accent in ilia, iiias, iiif, iilav.
Epic poets have also instead of ihlsfem. "a, gen. Ins.
From the composition of this word with the negations oi5Ss
and /iwSe arise the negative adjectives,
ovdeis, oude/iix, oudh, and
/iridsls, iiribtiiia, [inidev, no one, none.
They retain in their decl. the accent of sis : oudevls, ouSspuSr, &c.
The separation of ovSe els, /i-nde ?v, &c, in writing, gives inten
sity to the negative signification, not even one, not the least. Se
veral Greek writers, mostly later ones, have also ouSus, ncut, ev,
but the fern, as usual.
2. duo, (nomin. acc.) Suotv, (gen. dat.) two.
The Attics have duiiv, but merely in the gen. : they also use
duo as indeclinable in the gen. and dat. Un-Attic are
N. A. duu, G. luuv, D. dual, dualv : Ion. duoHo-iv : Epic
Soici and Soioi, which is completely declined. The word
aiiQw, (both,) is noticed below, 78.
3. TQtis, (comm.) rpia, (neut.) three, gen. ryuv, dat. rptol, (v.)
acc. like the nom.
4. resaaqes or ri-rra^es, four, neuL a, gen. m, dat. riaaapai,
rirrapai, (poet, rerpaai,) acc. as, a.
Ion. rlaatqss, Dor. rirropes, reropss, old and iEol. -alaupes.
The remaining simple numbers up to ten, and the decimal ones
up to a hundred, are not declined at all.
96
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
10 I
... 60
t%
6 uxoat or <tiv ... 20
iQ'&oiA-nxovToi . . 70
luri
7 rpixxotrx
30
oySo^xovra .... 80
bxTw
8 reaaxpxxovra . . 40
bvctwcovt* .... 90
E*ve'a
9 irevTiixovTa . . . . 50
ixarov
100
Not only the long a in tqixxovtx, but also the short one in tetjzqxxovtx, is converted by the Ionians into n ; rqi-nxovrx, naasp-nxovra. Other Ionic and Epic forms are eei'xo<h, oyWxovra, ewjXOVTCt, Doric
5, EIXaTl, 20.
The compounds with ten commonly are
evSex*
11
reaaxpterxxltiixx 14 iirraacxlo'exx . . . 17
.... 12
15 oxrwxx&exx . . , 18
13
ixxcwdEXa . . ...16 EWEatxa/Sexa . . 19
AExaTgEir, SExamrEVTE, &c, occur, but seldom, T^eIV and riaoxpis
are also declined in these compositions ; for instance, riaax^xxai
liexx, rtnax^aixxiitxx, ^ixxr^iuv, &C.
AuuSexx and Suoxxfiexx are Ionic and poetical. The forms
Tgiffxa/SExa, Exxai'SEx*, shew that the rest of the numbers com
bined by xxl up to 19, must not be written separate. Ttaatpiaxxlltxx is indeclinable in Ionic, (ex.gr. Herod. 1, 86. has it twice.)
The rest of the compound numbers are usually written separate,
and when the small number precedes, the two are joined by xxl :
if it comes last, the conjunction generally is omitted ; for instance,
we'vte xal sYxoatv, or eixoiri tte'vte.
The round numbers after 100 are regularly declined :
diasxojioi, at, a
,
800
200
oxraxoaioi
rpixxoatot ........ ,
300
envaxoMoi (without e, not 900
TETgaXOlTIOI
400
EVVEz)
WEVTaxomoi
500
Xioi, mpxxia%l\iot, i 1000
it/xxoaiai
600
irevrxxtiy^iXtoi, &C. . . '
Ihtux6<sioi
700
(liipioi1, hafiipim, &a, 10,000. (Compare 71. 2.)
The a in 5ia and rpiaxoaioi is long : Ionice lir,xo<sioi, &c., Evve'aX<">-oi, $Exaxf^01 a|*e old forms in Homer. These large numbers
may be used as collcctiva in the sing. : Sixxoolx tmtos, (r> iWor,
cava/rt/.)
Obs. 1. Instead or the numbers compounded with 8 and 9, a frequent use is made
of a circumlocution ; for instance, instead of 49, we find iris Hn-rn, (or piis Suvnir,)
nirriwra., viz. 50 lest one, or wanting one, ius7 iinrmt xiirrixnra., 48, and also iris or
iuiit i'tmrn, the verb tut signifying both to be in want of and to want.
1 Mvgi'u, many, numbcr/est, is contradistinguished from it by the accent.
NUMERALS.
97
Obs. 2. When other words are compounded with these numbers, the Greek has
for the unit ftsw(gtmti single,) for 2 itfor 3 r^tand for 4 vtr^a, as /uhii^iv,
iixifu;, iiruXXafaf, turns, (<t,) itufitXn, (l(io\ii,) rfirevi, Tir^ursvs, &c.s The rest
of the numbers are generally joined with a and o, as ritri-ftirpet, i^d-yutc;, thutmr
iSjflf, Tiirnxwri~yvMt IxarBrra-pvates, ^iXM-rfltXawtff. Vet we also find ^rtrruttta,
\xaTifi-*u\tis, ixrnxvf, (!?,) and the like. The Ionians make of ima uiirx,"s> &c.
In these combinations the a sometimes remains before a vowel, and sometimes not ;
the o is always dropped or contracted in the compounds with ins, {year;) hence we
have isrrairn;, (of leven year*,) better Wrirns, ramxsvTxirni or r^utxunmrm, (for
c'tTtit?) Observe likewise ittnirns, (of nine years, nine yean old,") and
(for or
during nine days.)
71.Ordinal Numbers and other derived ones.
1. The two first ordinal numbers are two defective forms of
comparison : npuros, first, primus, or in speaking of two, aponqos,
prior; and hvrepos, second'. The others are: rpiros, rirapros,
mifj-itros, exros, efSoftor, oy$oos, evvcctos, ^ixaros, htiixaros, SojiSixaros,
rpiaxaiiixaros, reaaaqaxatiixaros, &C. s'ixogtos, (20,) rpiaxoaros,
(30,) TEJiTagaxourof, ixxroaros, (100,) SiaxoffiouTor, &c. jciXiouTor,
ixupioaros. In compositions the small number with xal again pre
cedes, or it is placed last commonly without xal, (rpiaxoaros npuros,
or npwros xal rpiaxoaros.) The interrogative mwros, quolus ? is
answered by an ordinal number '.
Tirparos is used instead of rirapros for the sake of the metre ;
the Ionians have slvai-or instead of evvaros, 'haras : the
Epics have rptraros, efod/xaTor, oyZoaros : the Dorians
ttparos for irpairos.
2. The numeral adverbs answering the question, jE/oic many
times ? are : Sm^, (once,) Sir, rg<V, Tfrgaxir, nevraxis, oxrdxis,
hvtaxis or Ewaxir, IxarovTaxir, j^iXiaxir, &c. {poet, -xi.) Interroga
tive, iroffaxj*.
3. Multiples answering the question, /iou> manifold? are aTrXoor,
contr. <XoSf, (simple,) oWXoCj-, TgiwXour, reTgawXoIk, &c. (see
60.) or also SiTrXafftor, &c.
4. Numbers as subst. all end in as,' gen. doos, as: 71 y.ows,
* The composition with in-, t(h-, is used only when the meaning of Jif, rfU,
twice, thrice, must be expressed, as in ittrSmiif, (Homer,) ittfki^tu, VeifSm, rfiriS>usf,
and the like.
3 These words have it;, ivs, in the gen. and are generis communis; but they also
have a fern, in ts, <rftaxoitrovrtiis rvrevieii.
1 The superl. hirxTti, {last,) made of it, is merely poetical.
' Farther rtXXnr<rii, one of many, iXtytrris, one offew, Uence ri xiXXart' /<(>,
one of many parts, via. a very small part.
H
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
98
We both,
vui, vw,
vcSi'y, vyv,
the Latin Se
o5
you two,
PL
We,
you,
elpeTr, neut. atpeot
Nom.
(J.WV
Gen.
a/pwv
hfj.iv
a(ptai, (v.)
Vf/AV
Dat.
oifais, neut. atfitx.
T,IJ.0CS
1/y.a.s
Acc.
Obt. 2. The oblique cases of the second and third person are enclitical, yet, ac
cording to the principles of $ 14. Obi. 1. they may also be orthotoned. It is only
the monosyllabic form of the cases of iyu, which is enclitic ; the disyllabic form
must be used, when orthotoned. Of the forms beginning with ftp, only the oblique
cases of the third person, and the forms of dialects noticed in the sixth Observation,
are enclitic ; yet trip and ripZ; with the circumflex, are excepted, but in their
resolved form, (rfin, rf'uct, Obi. 6. 8.) and when efas is made short by Poets, they
also are enclitic.
1 See about this very rare nomin. and its actual occurrence in Attic writers,
Buttm, Complete Gr. Gr.
PRONOUNS.
99
Obs. 3. When one of these pronouns has a preposition prefixed, it generally con
tinues orthotoned, as -rigi rtv, iv til, m(i rfirn, and consequently, (of iyi,)hit'
Obs. 4. The particle yi, (6 150. 2.) is often appended to these pronouns for the
sake of emphasis, in which case iyZ, i/wi, and iui throw the accent back : tyayt,
(equidem,') i/uiyi, iptyt, riyt, &C.
Obs. 5. The oblique cases r.ud; and iuiis are, according to grammarians, equally
capable of being inclined, and, in every instance, when they are enclitics, instead of
throwing their accent on the preceding word, they remove it : r,/mr, fiftri, tfut, &c.
which rule, however, is not generally observed in our editions.
Obs. 6. Dialects.
1. The Dorians and Epics have an old form iyvt for \yi.
2. The Dorians have tu for n, and in the enclitic acc. again ri. The acc. ri
occurs rarely, and only orthotoned, (Theocr. 1, 5.) even the Dorians and
JJolians retain n instead of it. Ti is an old form of the nomin. with
the Epics.
3. In the dat. the Dorians and Ionians have * for ni, but only when it is
enclitic.
4. The gen. co of these pronouns comes from to, hence the Epic poets have
iuio. <r'le, is,
or ifuio, rue, i7o, whence the Ionians and Dorians have IptS, /ctu, riv, iJ,
(see 28. Obs. 5.) and the Dorians instead of rtZ also tiS and tws. The
gen. ruu for s'sc, <ri7c, 11. 9-. 37. is quite anomalous.
5. The Poets make use of a peculiar gen. formed by the appendage of, (compare
116.) the syllabled:
whereof VS-ir, in its direct meaning, (Obs. 1.) is enclitical, for instance,
11. a. 114.
6. 'E,Ki, Tin, or tiiV, "i, (with the sp. lenis,) are orthotoned, ( 14.) Doric datives
for tfui, 7, . (Yet lit sometimes is also acc. Theocr. 11.)
7. The old Ionism of the Epics lengthens the pronoun of the third person with
an i, gen. ivo, dot. \o7, acc. U. This form, (like t^otj,) always is orthotoned.
8. The Ionians resolve the contraction of the pi. and say n/tuc, v/t'us, cp'i'Si
gen. rip.inv, &c. (Epice, xpuuv, &c.) acc. r.uiu:. &c.
9. Poets shorten the end-syllables and asfi/uit, iifiiv, kua;, i/tii, rfit. If
enclitic (Obs. 5.) they are written S/in, &c.
10. The final syllable of the nomin. i/nif, Ifits, is also shortened by the Dorians,
and in the acc. they take the (dual) termination i
i/A, for i/tStt,
ifias, all with the a and u long. This change of pronunciation and accent
gives the following old .lEolic form, which the Epic poets have retained :
A 'in. appii, CfjLfiiSi
Dal. uftuTv, vfj.ji.ty, or afj/zTf vfiftt,
Acc. eifAfii, Z/iftt.
If ifii or ti/ipt also occurs instead of IfH, (Theocr. II, 42.) it is the same
figure by means of which l/ius often is used for iyu. Compare Obs. 7. 2.
1 1. There is a similar abbreviation of the pi. of the third person,
Dat. trip) or '7r',
Acc. ft,
* Some grammarians excepted only
fit, and it really occurs mostly thus in
the Attic writers. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. and Jacob's Prasf. ad Anthol.
100
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
both enclitic. The Attic poets also make use of the ace. rf\, but in all
numbers, (for xiri>, hi, i, and ulrevs, is, a.)
is very rarely used for
the sing. See Buttm. Lejci/ogus, I. 17. 14.
12. Lastly there is another enclitic ace. of the third person,
Ion. fiii, Dor. and All. th,
which also is used for all genders and numbers, but only in the direct
meaning, (Obt. 1.) of him, her, il, pl./Aem. The Attics make use of their
>) merely in poetry.
PRONOUNS.
101
74.
1. The following four pronomina adjectiva are regularly declined,
except that they have o in the neuter:
avros, avr-h, avro, himself, herself, itself;
exsTvos, ixelm, exeivo, this, that, yon ;
aXKos, XX*i, aXKo, other;
os, vi, o, see 75.
Obt. 1. The Ionians are fond of introducing an t in some forms of alrls, as alrU,
svtm. ( 28. Obt. 3.)
Obt. 2. 'Exiivts comes from Ixu, gander, in that place. The Ionic form is xi'ttf, n, ,
and the Doric rwts, a, . The JEoMc was xrms-See J 29. Ob. 6. about ikkti for
ci iXXei.
2. The pronoun avros has three significations: 1.) self; 2.) in
the oblique cases him, her, it; 3.) with the article the same. See
the Syntax. We merely observe that in the last signification it
frequently coalesces with the article, (according to 29. Obs. 4.)
ravrov, ravru, ravrri, for Toy adrov, &c, and in this instance the
neuter is both in bv and 6 :
raiirb and ravrov, for to avro.
The forms ra&ry and ravri, especially when the coronis ' is
wanting, must not be confounded with ravr-r, and ratine from
olros. 76.See about the Ionisms uvros, ravro, 29. 06s. 6.
3. It is with avros that is formed
the pronoun reflective,
which being compounded with the acc. of the pronouns personal
(e/ae, as, ,) is declined thus in the oblique cases :
gen. lyMvrov, \y.avrr\s, dat. enavrZ, ri, acc. iy.avrbi, w, of my
self, to myself, myself,
gen. atavrov, or axvrov, &c. ofthyself, to thyself, thyself
gen. eavrov or avrov, &c. of himself, or herself, &c.
The pronoun of the third person has also an acc. neut. kavro,
avro, and is declined in the plural : kavrZv, iavrovs, &c. The
two words are written separately in the pi. of the pronouns of the
two first persons : rii*uv and viiwv avrwv, &c.
OAs. 3. Originally the ring, was also naturally written separate. Homer still has
J cumZ, ii xln-S. We likewise find separately in his works, l ctirm. i/i aire; &C,
II. a. 271. ?. 1C2. . 490. ; and Od. \. 185. <ra c aiinu, <r" airif, (or cruirov, Jf) is con
sidered as an elision of ri o-i.
Obs. 4. In these compositions the Ionians have tin instead of mi, ( 27. Obi. 1. 11.)
and commonly do not elide the i in the first person, They say IptviiTtu, riMrtrj
Uvrw, &cSee about ivvrim, &c. Qbt. 1,
102
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ARTICLES.
103
2.) not only the neuter, as in the adj. pronouns, but also the
masc. in the nom. sing, ends in o, (5.)
The other is the
Articulus postpositivus,
os, w, Sj who, which.
This is declined exactly like the pronomina adjectiva, 74. 1.
Articulus praspositivus,
the,
Sing.
M.
F.
N.
<
Nom.
0,
TO,
D>
Gen.
TVS,
TOV,
TOV,
Dat.
TV,
tSi,
Acc.
rm,
TO.
TOV,
Dual,
N. A.
ret,
To),
TU,
rah,
G. D.
To7v,
TOiy,
Plur.
Nom.
01,
XI,<
rat,
TcifVj
tSv,
Gen.
tx7s,
Tols,
TOIS,
Dat.
robs,
txs,
TX.
Acc.
Articulus postpositivus,
who, which,
M.
N.
F.
.\
*
OS,
n.
*
OU,
oi,
fc>
t
r
D,
v>
A
ov,
S,
oh,
J
ah,
oh,
oi,
uv,
ois,
ovs,
at,
3>v,
als,
*
as,
<\
a,
r
01V,
ois,
It
X.
Obs. I . The deviations in the dialects are the same as in the end-syllables of the
first and second decl. ; for instance, rue for rev, i for fi, ras for rrit, &c. Homer has,
though but rarely, eeu for the gen. oZ of the articulus postpositivus.
Obs. 2. Both articles were alike in form in the old language, and were only dis
tinguished by their position and accent, as is still the case with >), el, til. The Epic
poets have also J, (incorrectly S,) for St, and all the forms of the art. prcep,, which
begin with r, are likewise used by the Ionians and Dorians for the corresponding
forms of the postpositivus,
re for S, rm fo*r ijv, &c.
The Dorians also have re), rn), for both el, a!, and el,
Obs. 3. The two articles are in fact nothing but the old simple pronoun demon
strative, (this,) and are frequently employed for it in the works of the ancients in
many contexts even in prose, as is shown in the Syntax. See the usual pronouns
demonstrative derived from it in the following Section.
3. The articulus postp., or simple pronoun relative, is strength
ened in several combinations partly by the enclitic particle m\p,
(osntp, J>irep, faep, &c.) partly by being compounded with the pro
noun tis, (ootis, &c.) See 77. 3.
Obs. 4. With regard to the enclitic ri, which in Epic poetry is appended to Si, as
?s ti or trri for Ss, 1W or ritri for S>, see 149. under ri.
104
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
76.
1. The Greek has a double form for the general pronoun de
monstrative, ' this.' One is made by appending the enclitic h,
( 14. Obs. 3.) to the articulus prcep. :
oSs, ^Se, roh, gen. rovfo, rwl's, &C. plur. o'&e, ctiSe, TatSe,
ravage, &C.
2. The other form oSror comes from the same article, and
conforms itself entirely to it in its very anomalous decl. Whereever the article has the spiritus asper or the r, the pronoun has
the same, and where the article has o or u, the pronoun has in the
first syllable ov, but where the article has w or at, the pronoun
has av: for instance, 5ovros, o'iovrot, twvrovrm, itavrn,
rirxvra, &c.
Sing.
Plur.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nom.
ovror, avrn,
tovto,
oiroi,
avrxi,
rxvrx,
rovrcov, rovruv, rovrun,
Gen.
tovtou, rxvrw, rovrov,
rouroit, rxvraif, rovrois,
rourai, rxvm, rovrta,
Dat.
rovrov, rxiirret, Toyro,
rovrovs, rxvrxs, rxvra.
Acc.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Dual, N. A. rovru,
ravrx,
ravru,
G. D. Tot/Toiv,
rzvraiv,
rovroiv.
Obi. I. As the arlinulut prarp. was the only pronoun demonstrative in the oldest
language, ( 126.) but gradually lost this meaning, it is obvious that both these
forms only give to it more intensity, and that ivrts in particular is in some degree
the mperl. of i.See the still greater intensity given to both by annexing , 80.
Obi. 2. The dialects offer no peculiarity, but the Ionic i in ?vr'uv, nvr'ttn, &c.
aud the very anomalous Epic form
of the dat. vUvhari, TwVSirf/ for reirit.
Obi. 3. The nom. tires, aim, is likewise used as a kind of vocative or exclamation
in the sense of the Latin heut! ho! you yonder! hark!
77.
1. The simple Pronoun Interrogative
ris, neut. rl, gen. Ti'vor ; who or ivhich, what ? quis, qua,
quid ?
always has the accent on the i, (river, dat. pi. rim, &c.) and dis
tinguishes itself by that circumstance, and by its nomin. constantly
having the acute accent, from the simple pronoun indefinite,
r\s, neut. ri, gen. -nvbr, any one, some one,
something, aliquis, aliqua, aliquid,
PRONOUNS.
105
106
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
PRONOUNS.
107
79.
1. Independently of these general correlatives, there are also
some definite or particularising ones, referring to the properties
and relative circumstances of the object, (ofwhat nature ? in what
place?) These are formed in Greek after a very distinct ana
logy ; but as they are partly adjectives, and partly adverbs, we
shall treat of the latter separately, 116.
3. Each series of correlatives has a common root and inflec
tion ; but distinguishes itself by the initial letter. The interro
gative begins with a ss, for instance, -novos, quantus? how great?
how much? The same form, but usually with a change in the
accent, serves for the indefinite, aoahs, aliquantus, of a certain
size or number. When there is a r instead of the initial ot, it is
the demonstrative, tocos, tantus, so great, so much; but if the
initial consonant is dropped, and the word begins with the spiritus
asper, it is the relative, '6aos, quantus, as great as, as much as.
There is in common language no negative to answer to these
questions.
4. Beside the simple relative, there is also a compound one,
which in some circumstances is generally preferred. It answers
to the correlative oans, orov, and is formed by prefixing an o to
the interrogative,
vsoaos, relative oaos and hnoaos, (poet, bwxoo-os.)
5. The simple pronoun demonstrative, Qroaos,) is mostly used as
a perfect demonstrative by Poets only ; but in prose sometimes
merely in the restricted instances, when there is no particular
stress on the relations of quantity, (or quality, in row,) ex. gr.
aau fiekrim lar), roaco [aocKKov (pv\&TTZTai, (Xen. Cyrop. 1, 6, 20.)
twos x.a.1 roaos. Hence we generally find a more emphatic form
Used, and just as the article 6, (the old and weaker demonstrative,)
is strengthened either by the enclitic Se, (8Se,) or by being changed
into ouTor, the same is done here ; -or in the second instance is
changed into -ovros, as
roaostojotSe or rovovros.
The former is declined in the middle of the word
nxrofjSe, Too-n&i, TtxrovSe, gen. roaav^s, &c.
(see about the accent, 14. Obs. 3.) The latter conforms en
tirely to ovros respecting the diphthongs ov and au, but has in the
neuter both oy and o, thus
108
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
roaovros, rooavrri, roaovrov and rodouro
gen. roaovrov, rooavrms, &C.
pi. roaovroi, roaavrat, roaavrat, &c.
Indef.
zsoaos,
ZJOIOS,
Demonstr.
roaos,
roaoaHs,
roaovros,
roTor,
Rel.
oaos,
bwbao,
oios,
roiovroi,
zjriklxos, rnXixor,
rn'kixooo's,
rvikixovros,
rfKlxos,
o'nrikiKOs.
See about the Ionic forms xoW, xo!os, hxioos, Sec. 16. Obs. I.e.
Obs. 1. There are also a few incomplete correlative!, which, (like rin^m, <roTi{,
in the preceding Section,) have only the compound relative beside the interrogative ;
of this kind are especially mparts, ircixris, (where born, of what country, of what
place,) the derivatives of Tons, like Torras, srefraics, T#rarXsrftintvrls, &c. and
the demonstrative rims, rwniirts, (tiny, to very small, tanlillus,) is also a correlative.
Obt. 2. This class of words derive their correlative power from the initial letters
t, t, &c. but some of them denote also other relations, when compounded, especially
with the general correlative), "rifts, \kts, *<*t, (} 78-) fc>r instance, the interrogative
crrf is al.so answered by Irtfucs, ix\>7es, of another hind, ofa different nature, reifn'as, of all sorts, of every kind. It is the same with (niaris,) which gives iWila<ris, retmiaxes, ipitaris, (belonging to our country, our countryman,) and the like.
Obs. 3. To consider <rwm<ris, &c. as a compound of aim is improper. The final
syllable turn here, and in the word euros by itself, is nothing but the superl. of is, as
will be clearly shown below, in treating of the particles, (itmu^a, imZStt, 116.)
80.Appendages.
r 1. The compound and strengthened pronouns relative like
tarn, orov, oairsp, hiroaos, &c. annex to all their cases the little
word ouv, which retains the accent, and in this composition exactly
answers to the Latin cunque, denoting the completeness of the
relation ; as tans, who, hariaovv, quicunque, whosoever, rinaovv,
hrtovv, otuovv, acc. bvrivaovv or ovrivoyv, &c.ooT!regot)v, owoaoaovv,
oTrnXiKououv, &c.
Obs. 1. The form SuVjti imparts still greater force to this signification; as irririvrtri trw, whosoever it may be, itctiriTtn, but it is frequently written separate.
?, In the language of familiar intercourse, the Attics, to give
VERBS.
109
110
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
Ill
112
A GREER GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
113
OA*. 1. From this last rule are excepted, and consequently subject to the prin
cipal rule
a.) Two consonants, of which the 6rst is a mute, the other a liquid, (mula cum
liquida,') for instauce, y^xfu yrygaQet, xi-xXtf&at, vt-mmM, t'iSXxkx, &C.
But yi takes merely the i, and yX, fix, are fluctuating; ex.gr. yin^u
\yvu(inrftxtt xstT'SyXajTriffitya;, ii-iyXuXTKi and hx-yiyXvxriu, fiXaxrw /3</->Amflat, fj\xcx\'jj tfiXttfnxtz .
b.) The perfects pipvrificti and xixrvifjuu of fiyew and xriofiui. The Ionians,
however, (and even the Attics sometimes, ex. gr. Plato, Meno. 39.) have
Ixrqwu. All other verbs beginning with py and *r, take simply the i,
ex. gr. ipvnftonvKat, ixTtunr/txt, ixtovx.
c.) The perfects a-tiTrat/**/, TFiTmxx, vi-rrvKa, Tirrrviitt, (see the Anom. yrirnvttifu, r'm/txi, xitrnt, mVw,) all of which rather are syncopated verbs of
the root nETn. Any perfect immediately and regularly derived from
ct, has merely i, as the usual perfect of XTneoai itm%cc, and 'nrrin/uu,
timet***.
OA*. 2. The same kind of augment, peculiar to verbs beginning with {, may
have taken place in the old language with other semivowels ; hence the two per
fects t/t/tisx and Irruftai, see the Anom. /cilfo/tai and a%iti.The Epics double all
liquids for the sake of the metre, but only in the imperf. and aur. ixXafay, ip/taSt.
See the Anom. iiiirai about iiiun.
OA*. 3. A few verbs of the common language beginning with liquids, hare,
instead of the reduplication, the syllable il or tl, ex. gr. tlx*fa. See the Anom.
XoLp.fca.yu, Xay%uyv, Xlyu, fiugtfrtai, and PEft under uVl7t>.
Obt. 4. Homer's figvmpira is the only instance of a reduplication before j.
06*. 5. In the three verbs favXeftaj, (to be willing,') idx/iai, (tobeable,~) and ftixXu,
{to be about to do, intend to dn,~) the Attics commonly strengthen the sijllabic aug
ment by the addition of the temporal one ; ex. gr. ibmi/im instead of iluydfiny, the
same in irtXaiu, see J 86. OA*. 2.See about the syllabic augment before a vowel,
J84.'sOA*. b.elc.
OA*. 6. Non-Attic poets often omit the augment in the historical tenses ; ex. gr.
fcaXi for ifiaXt, /35 for ifcn, yitem for \yimrc, &c. * Compare about the accent,
OA*. 1. 2. to 103.This omission in the plusquamp. is also very common in prose :
rtTufurxy, r'trvTre, for irirv^urar, WiTinrrc, iilitt, (Plato, Phaedr. 251.) for Istliu, and
the like. But the omission of the real reduplication is very rare and doubtful.
See about iSix and the like 110. 8. and about the Epic redv.pl. hi, instead of Si,
the Anom. Siteiti and ittxvvfu.
OA*. 7. The aor.2. (of the active and middle voice,) has also frequently the redupl.
in Epic poets, and this redupl. continues through all the moods, (see 82. 0. with
the Note,) ex. gr. rixXnyov, XtXxBiiv, rtnBtsr, XtXttfUcSxi, &c. In some few verbs
the simple augment is added in the indie.
Wif^aity, (see the Anom. and com.
pare aiXtfuu and *ENn.)The present and the fut. active have this redupl. only in
some mostly poetical forms derived from reduplicated tenses ; see 1 1 1 .
1 Observe that yy, yX, fix, belong to those instances of muta cum liquida, which
are also excepted from the rule of the others in prosody, (see $ 7- 10.) The other
exceptions stated in that Section do not occur in a way, which applies here ; for
litfirifuti is a syncope. See the Anom. %'ipu.
* With Attics for the sake of the metre but seldom ; see Herm. on Eurip. llec.
p. xxxii. In prose, never, not even in Ionic prose. The sole exception is zt"'See the Anom.
x%n.
I
114
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
84. The Temporal Augment.
1. When the verb begins with a vowel, whether it has the sp.
asper or lenis, the augment coalesces with the initial vowel into a
long vowel, and this kind of augment, called the temporal augment,
(see 82. 1.) continues unchanged in all the prceterites. A or s
generally becomes w, and o u, ex. gr.
dvuco, imperf. wuov, perf. rnvxa, plusq. mixw,
Wnity, imperf. %\irtfyv, perf. riKmxa, plusq. nhnlxw,
o^ikiu, imperf. </w.i\sov, perf. ui/j.l'knxtji, plusq. aiy-ik-nxtit.
2. The following verbs sxu> I have, eden, I let, t\xui, / drag,
(see the Anom.) ipwu and ipiru^co, I creep, e&/<y, J accustom,
iXliou, I ivind, fcioLto, I give a feast, siren, (see the Anom.) and
iiroftxi, I follow, epya^oiAoii, I work, do not change the s into r,,
but into ei, for instance, imperf. eixv, perf tlgyoto^m, &c. (See
Obs. 4.)
Obi. 1. See also Cxu, ikt'r, in the Anom, al('ui, tu3* in the Anom. J3v, and the
verbs belonging to the root 'Efl, 108.1
3. The vowels i and v can only be augmented, when they are
short, and they then become long through the augment ; ex. gr.
Ixsreuw, (Eurip. Med. 971.) aor. Ixmuax, (338.) and even when
the syllable is already long by position, the augment must be
rendered sensible in pronunciation, ex. gr. 'ta^vu '{<s%vai, fovea,
V/MVOVV.1
4. Of the vowels long in themselves, a (according to Text 1.)
commonly becomes n, the others <n, a, r, v, are not susceptible of
the augment, ex. gr. w-rraoptai,
imperf. irrri^m, perf. rjTT)/Aai, plusq. vtrrrii^riv,
except by the removal of the accent. See Obs. 4.
5. A diphthong may be augmented, when its first vowel can be
changed in the way mentioned above, and if the second vowel be
an i, it is subscribed, thus :
av\ia v>u\ovv,
euyfi/jiairiiypiJ.m, '
atriarirovv,
riSov,
olxiuuxovv.
But many verbs neglect this augment, (Obs. 2.) and it never
takes place with ov, (oird^uouTa^ov.)
1 The following are improperly considered as belonging hither, viz. ?<r and i{i>.
Sec the Anom. u1. about il,a. See 108. 2.
and .W., ubout wvia,
\,tu-rm, which forms belong, however, to the Ionic tifim, il^ni*.
VERBS.
115
Obs. 2. Those verbs, in which the augment would produce a cacophony or indis
tinctness, remain in general unchanged, especially a few beginning with a, at/, a/,
followed by another vowel, xta, unfit, attSt&fitat, ava'tvu, e'uxxlfy, eliu, and some others ;
only that the short x, for instance in Ha, is lengthened : imperf. aim, (long a,) wiiim,
oi'ax/sv, &c. But itlla makes rfuJov according to the general rule. Neither do
some other verbs beginning with a, take the augment, titlfy, tixtv^ia, elrgia, or
those beginning with u, (as ux, sT*a>,
with the solitary exception of unify,
which, however, is only augmented by the Attics, and that but rarely, t'Sxxea, i'Uae-tixi, Alt. Sxowa, ixxr/ixi.In the verbs beginning with tu the augment nti is Attic,
and the usage is fluctuating, ni^i/mv and ti%Zfim, tifiSm, very seldom tiifiBnt. See
about compound verbs with tl, 86. 3.
Obs. 3. But the Ionians and non-Attic poets frequently neglect this augment as
well as the syllabic one in any verb, ex. gr. iful/im for tuulfim, lm for
(oflaw,)
&c. even in the per/, and plutq. past. ex. gr. ilu/ixi, tlxxftxi, (of tt, tlxli,) Herod.
The Dorians, instead of changing those beginning with a into , merely alter the
quantity, i.
Obs. 4. The temporal augment arose unquestionably from the contraction of the
syllabic augment with the vowel of the verb, ex. gr. xym t-tvyn nyti : the contrac
tion of it into n, and u into u, is, however, a deviation from the general custom,
( 28. 3. b.) but that of ta into , and n into u,
l-t%n, ux"i) agrees exactly with
it.Hence the accent of some compound verbs is accounted for. As the accent,
(according to Obi. 1. 1. to 103.) always rests, as far as possible, on the aritepenultima, itSrrn of itxrru, for instance, has the circumflex on the penultima, because
of the contraction. And thus the augment sometimes is to be known only by the
"accent, ex. gr. -reanxv, (from itxu,) imperf. trftinxm, irtifyi is the imperative of
ItTiUyv, and imTiyt the third person of the imperf.
Obi. 5. But the syllabic augment has actually been retained in some instances
before a vowel. Beside several Epic forms, the following three verbs of the com
mon language, which by the rule are not susceptible of the temporal augment, have
the syllabic one :
0/}iw, uriofiai, ouftv,
imperf. iaf^ouv, ivvsvfttir, iavgouv.
The case is the same with the verb Am, (see Anom. Symfu,) I break, aor. lo&t, &c.
to distinguish it from Hy*, I lead.
Obs. G. The temporal augment arose from the even in the perfect. For as the
usual redupl. ( 82.) consisted in the repetition of the first consonant with an i, this
i alone could be prefixed, when the verb began with a vowel, and it formed
the temporal augment along with this vowel. The is still found unchanged
in the first mentioned verbs, (as iayx, twtrftai, imti/txi, iotlgyxa,) and besides in
tmxac, fflAfra, Xtfiyot,
from t'xti, ti.ni, i(yu. The in these perfects comes from the change of the vowel
in the root, (of which below,) and i is redupl. : i(y X-etyx, like 2<;x iihotut.
Obs. 7- This augment retains the sp. asper of the verbs, which have it, ex. gr.
LCuw, ix^uxa, from 'AAOfl. See Anom. x\trxoftm, also avSawv, tnv/u.
Obs. 8. Just as we have seen above, (83. Obs. 6.) the syllabic augment increased
by the temporal one, the latter is commonly increased in the verb split, (/ see,) by
the syllabic one, and retains the spiritus : imperf. Upn. See about the perfect
iu^xxx, ifaa, and also ciym, xmyu, among the Anomalous Verbs. The Epic poets do
this likewise with other verbs, ex. gr. lan>o%Ui of ihs^olii, WvSavi of av&xvu.
Obs. 9. When a verb begins with u, it is the second vowel, which takes the aug
ment. This occurs in the verb i{T J, {tJv, and the perfects of Obs. 0. iu the
plusq. ufxuv, letkiru*, iweyu*.
11G
A GRIiEK GRAMMAR.
85.Attic Reduplication.
VKRDS.
117
118
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
Principal Tenses,
Active,
Passive,
1 Person, 2 Person, 3 Person,
1 Person, 2 Person, 3 Person,
TM
s
wanting roy
TOV
/xev
VTXl.
(Tiv, ai
/x.$ot
Historical Tenses,
TO
f
M
wanting rnv
TYi'J
vro.
/XEV
T6 v or o-qlv
VERBS.
119
120
A GRKf.K GRAMMAR.
0!>s. fi. The first ptrion is wanting through the whole active in the dual; that
is to say, it does not differ from the pi. That the dual, as an old pi. especially in
verbs, has sometimes the signification of the pi. with Poets, has been remarked
above, $ 33. Obi. 8. See particularly, Od. 9. 49. Hymn. Apoll. 487. 501 .
88.Moods and Participles.
1. The imperfect and plusquamp. exist only in the indie.
Other moods and participles may be formed of the other tenses.
The future, however, has neither conjunctive nor imper., and the
perfect seldom has a conjunctive, optative, and imper. See below,
137. Obs. 11.
2. The opt. derives its name from serving to express a wish,
but is also frequently used in a variety of other connections, as
will be seen in the Syntax. We only observe here that its sig
nification corresponds almost thoroughly to that of the Latin
imperfect of the conjunctive, which is wanting in Greek.
3. This observation is closely connected with the following
principal rule concerning the conjugation of the conj. and opt. :
The conjugation of the conj. of all tenses has constantly for
its basis that of the principal tenses, while that of the
optative is always grounded in the conjugation of the his
torical tenses1.
The table of the preceding Section thus contains in its upper
series the terminations of all conjunctives, and the lower one
those of all optatives. The peculiarity of each mood thus lies in
the modifications of the connecting vowel, or where there is none,
of the radical vowel.
4. The conj. in particular combines throughout the vowels a>
and n with the terminations of the principal teuses instead of the
final vowels of the tenses of the indie. The conj. of the present
(act. and pass.) of the usual conjugation, (see ti/b-tw,) may
therefore be learned from the following rule :
Wherever the indie, has, o, ov, a, the conj. has u :
Where the indie, has s, s, v>, the conj. has n or ip.
Hence Ind. rvitru, o/aev, ovaiv, oia.ch, &c.
Conj. IWTttl, MfMV, WITIV, UfMClf &C
Ind. twtete, erai, &c.
Conj. tvitTrtTi, nroit, &c.
1 Thus, for instance, the opt. even of principal tenses always has *> in the third
f the dual, and in the panive constantly ia the third person ting, and pi.
i
VERBS.
]21
122
A GKEEK GRAMMAR,
| 89. Active, Passive, and Middle Voice.
Active, Passive.
Active,
Passive.
Present,
u,
opai
Imperf. ov,
o/xnv
Perf.
a., xa,
y.ou
Plusq.
eiv, xsiv, ptTjv
Fut
{'
ooij.ai
Aor. f x'
<*W
\ ai,
oD/xcti
I ov,
0//.7)V
3. The four following tenses of this natural passive, viz.
the pres. and the imperf.
the perf. and the plusquamp.
comprise the medial signification in all cases, where that medial
signification occurs, so that through the connection or context
alone we can discover whether they are of the passive or middle
voice. But in the aor. and fut. the above natural passive is
generally only a medium, or middle voice : the passive has a
particular form for both these tenses, which have this peculiarity,
that the aor., notwithstanding its passive signification, assumes the
active form in its conjugation, whilst the future, formed from this
aor., goes again over to the passive form.
Aor. pass. { *m>
Fut. pass. P**"""'
In contradistinction to these forms, the above natural passive of
the fut. and aor. is called in grammarfut. and aor. medii :
1 Compare above the Note to 74. 4.
VERBS.
Fut. tried. {
123
Aor.med.
But the four first tenses, which have only the natural passive form
for both significations, and consequently should be called passivomedia, are simply denominated passiva in the theory of gramma
tical forms, and can only take the name of media, when they
have the medial signification in the context, that is to say in the
Syntax.
Obs. The medial or middle form of the aor. is omitted in all verbs, which have not
such a medial signification ; it is the aor. pass, in
or v, which assumes this
signification in several verbs, ( 13G.) and therefore the medial form occurs only in
a limited, though considerable, number of verbs. We begin, however, by consider
ing every Greek verb as perfect, and shall notice, farther on, which tenses are
actually in use in each verb.
4. The old Greek grammarians have in their grammars a com
plete medium, or middle voice, in which the present and imperf.
of the passive are given at length as tenses of the medium; but
instead of letting them be followed by the perf and plnsq. pass.,
which also have the double signification, they have a separate
Perf. and plusq. medii,
the import of which is the following.
5. The perf. act. has two different forms, each of which ends
in a. in the first person. The common form, as will be seen below,
either aspirates the radical consonant, or introduces a x, (Xe'yw
XeXsj^Zj <PJ Wpfxa,) the uncommon one does neither, ((pivyu
zsityzuya, laiu SeSna.) In most instances the latter form, which
differs so little from the other, really is the true practical perfect
belonging to the regular pres. of the act., from which it is derived ;
and in but few instances the present has a transitive, and this
perfect an intrans. signification. (See 113.) This anomaly of a
small number of verbs ought not to have had any influence on
the theory of the Greek verb in general ; yet because the intrans.
signification is in some instances the same with the reflective sig
nification of the medium, (as for instance, ' J have frightened
myself or ' I am frightened,') and because both forms of the
perf. exist together in a few verbs, the old grammarians placed
this perf. with its dependent plusq. in the conjugation of the
medium, though in every instance, where a verb has a medium, it
is only
the perf and plusq. pass., which have the true medial sig
nification along with the passive one. (See 136.)
124
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Pass.
ojAai
e d/xrjv
-e y.ai
flw
e r,v
-E
U01X.XI
Med.
as in the pass
m
G0/J.SU
e oxnm
oD/xai
o/xriv
wanting.
VERHS.
125
12G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
127
J 28
A GREJJK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
129
130
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
out once for all in one tense what else would require to be re
peated in each tense.
4. The tenses are accordingly classed in the following three
series, in the order in which they are derived from each other in
the generality of verbs, or stated in the grammar :
I. Pres. and imperf. act. andjoae*.
II. Fut. and aor. 1 act. and med.
Per/, and plusq. 1. along with perf. and plusq. pass.
and fut. 3.
Aor. and fut. 1. pass.
III. Fut. and aor. 2. act. and med.
Aor. and fut. 2. pass.
Perf. and plusq. 2.
And though one of these tenses may not be used in a verb, yet
grammar states it to serve as a uniform basis for others actually
in use.
5. Any change, which the verb undergoes in one tense of the
first series, applies also to the following tenses, unless there be
particular rules and exceptions.
Obs. That, in which the tenses of each of the three series agree, chiefly consists
in this :
The tenses of the first series never change the real root of the real preient
tense of the act. voice ; and if, (according to the preceding ,) that present
tense is of a lengthened or full form, that form takes place in the whole
series, whilst the second series in most instances, and the third in all, is
derived from the simple or imaginary form.
The second series comprises nil the terminations, by which the characteristic
of the verb is in most instances changed, especially through the addition
of a consonant in the termination.
But the third series constantly retains the characteristic of the verb unchanged,
and only alters the root at times. This series alone shews the pure cha
racteristic of the verb, if there be a lengthened or full form in the first,
whilst in the second series, when it is, for instance, a palatal letter, we
can only recognise one of the palatals, but cannot know which it is.
94.
1. The formation of the tenses, and their differences among
themselves, are pointed out for each tense in only one of its forms,
which always is the first person of the indie. All the other per
sonal and modal forms are conjugated alike in all verbs, as soon
as that first person is known, as will be seen below in the pa*
radigms, (compared with 87. 88.)
VERBS.
131
Obt. Only the per/, pass, is of such a nature, that its formation must be studied
in its several modal and personal terminations ; see 98.
2. Several tenses are formed in a manner so simple and con
stantly uniform, that they are easily known from the examples
below. We will only previously state those of the usual con
jugation in ai :
1.) The present u gives the imperf. ovrvirrai, ertntrert.
2. ) Every tense in a> is in the pass, o/xai. Thus the pres. a>
gives the pres. of the pass, rvnroi, -ruitroixm : and the fut.
the fut. med. rv^u, rv^oixai. The 95. 7. shews that
the /iff. 2. or circumflexum in Si, med. -oCptai, is comprised
in this rule.
3. ) Every tense in ov is in the pass. o/xw. Thus the imperf.
ov gives the imperf. pass, 'e'-rwroy, hruitrotrnv : and the
aor. 2. the aor. 2. med. trvnov, irwofjum.
4.) The aor. 1. med. annexes merely the syllable
to the
aor. 1. Ty\}/a;, irv^d^rm .
5. ) The per/, always gives the plusquamp. in the act. voice
by changing a into eivrirvtpa, etet^eiv : and in the pass.
by changing ixai into y.vnrrt/ptpiati, etetoju+wv. See about
the other persons of the plusquamp. pass, in particular
98.
6.) Both forms of the aor. pass, give the fut. pass, by
changing w into y)<ropiiirutySm and etwtjvTv^-naaThe rest of the tenses require particular rules.
95.Fulurum Activi.
1. The principal form of the fut. in Greek is the termination
su. It occurs in by far the greatest number of verbs, and is on
that account called fut. 1., ex. gr.
zsolvui, fut. vs&vaw.
2. When the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, it causes
the changes usually connected with a, ex. gr.
Xiyco,
otXe'xo;, Tiuyju,
fut.
zsXi^ai, nv^ai,
SXi/3cu, "Kutcu, ypaiQu,
SXi\}/a;, Xei^O', ypd-^co,
aiiivSui, zsifoa/, zsip^ai,
amvrsu), zsiiaui, Tsipaw.
Ok. 1. When the characteristic of the verb is a lingual letter preceded by t, a
change takes place before the <r of the fut. according to $ 25. 4. But the case is of
rare occurrence ; it is most distinct iu rr'niti,fut. mien. See also the Anom. via*.*,
K 2
132
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. The verbs in nr, aa, or tt, and having the pure character
istic, (according to 92.) change ttt into 4<, aa (tt) into
and
into u, ex. gr.
riitrw, (TTnO,)
5>J*>,
pxltTUl, (PAOfi,)
px-J/OJ,
vxaau, (TATfi,)
Tst<y,
<paco, (OPAAfX)
tppdaco,
and in rarer instances ( 92. with'"the Obs.) is changed into
and <t<j (tt) into a, ex. gr.
Y.piZu, (KPAm,)
x.%x%co,
zskdaaoi, fITAAfl,)
zsXdaw.
4. When the characteristic of the verb is a vowel, (verba pura,
91. 06*.) the syllable, which precedes the termination aw, is
generally long, let its quantity in the present tense be what it
may ex. gr.
oxx.qvw, (Zi,)
(ixxguaw, (u,~)
rial, (i,) !
riaai, (J,)
and consequently e and o become -n and a, ex. gr.
See the exceptions in the Obs. 3. 4.
5. The characteristic a. is changed into -n in the fat. except
when the vowels e, i, or an ^ precede, in which cases the in the
/itf. is long s, ex. gr.
Ti/Azw, dnardw,
rii^haco, dnatrriaw,
fiodw, iyyvdca,
fionam, eyyunaai,
idta, //.eioidui,
extra/, /jt.si%idac<i, (a,)
Spdai, Qcopxoj,
Sqiact)f Qwpdaco, (a,)
See the exceptions in the Obs. 6. 7.
6. But the penultima of futures in daw, law, uaw, is always
short, when they come from verbs in , or aa, tt, ex. gr. in ippdaw,
Sixdacu, toi^iau, nXuaui, coming from tp^xt^w, 5ixz<y, vo/ai'^&i, yXv^oj :
and in zshxaw, zsrlatu, from z:\daau), zsrlaaw
Obs. 2. The Doric dialect has g instead of c, (in the fut. and aor. 1.) not only in
most verbs with ex. gr. Ktfil%tv, iixx^u, from xtpufri,
but also in verbs, which
1 The probable reason of it is stated in the Obs. 15.
* T/r is taken here in its usual quantity, though Homer uses it also as long.
3 Compare the analogous rules of the first decl. S 34. 2. and of the fern, in adjec
tives, 60. 2.
* The vowel in all these verbs is short by itself, and not lengthened in the fut.;
were it long by itself, it would continue so in the fut., as it does in xt*Z"i Xti'"Whether verbs like xvwtrru, vtrroftat or tuW^ua/, actually made xv&irtv, uffofcat, nUoftut,
in the fut., as is generally assumed, is not absolutely decided. See Buttm, Complete
Or. Gr.
VERBS.
133
have a vowel before the in the present tense, but chiefly, only when the vowel in
the usual fut. is short ; ex.gr. \y'\Xu.%i. (See Obs. 3.) The Dorians have, however,
the common form along with this, and use both indifferently in verses according to
the exigency of the metre 5.
Obs. 3. Several verbs, of which the characteristic is a short vowel, keep this
vowel unchanged in the fut. especially,
ytXtito, %aXaa/, SlXaat, xXtt&t, (to break,*) fxtiv, fut. yiX&fv, &C.
etXiar, ecexliv, ifiiw, xciX'.ai, riXiai,
io/, rolei, atatoftat, otxlofteci,
fut. eiXtffe*, ati'iffofjtxt,
a^ou, fut. khvai,
ituu, apv9, iXxvv, filSva/, rr-jai, fut. uvuvu, &C.
and some poetical verbs, (*ari<v, nixiv,
rati*,') as well as a few rare and obso
lete themes, from which the tenses of some anomalous verbs are derived, as x<;ira,
xttftxn>, iXiru, &c. The quantity of the prei. tense of the verbs in i* belonging to
this class, is yet unfixed, though on the whole it may be assumed to be short ; all
the other verbs, which have vrtt in thefut., are partly long, partly undetermined in
the present tense : see 7- Obs. 10.
Obs. 4. Some verbs are fluctuating between the two formations, partly in the fut.
itself, and partly in the tenses derived from it, (according to 93. 4.) which are
the following :
ama>, (to praise,) fut. ttW\au, aor. wifx, perf. pass, rumputi, aor. 1 . p. yt'&**,
(Epic, cttwffoj, nine*.)
*
tMu. (to desire,) fut. Tc'-i'iau and lira, perf. mxfoiixa, pass, nfiui,
aor. I. p. i<r3ir9ti.
iiv, (to lie, bind,) fut. 3>ira, perf. Yihtx, pass, tpai, aor. \.p. iViSmctifiw, (to tahe.) fut. algwiv, perf. pass. feitp.eti, aor. 1. p. fyiSm.
See also the Anom. yxfi'm, rrtaiu, iuj/mik, li/ut, and PEfl under ilmTt. To these must
be added some disyllabic verbs in in, i/ra, which shorten the v again in the perf,
and aor. 1. pass., though with the Attics even the u of the present tense is long:
perf. pass. xiXO/iai, aor. 1. pass, ixiSxr, liuBnt, injUnt, with a short v,
perf. act. xixixx, t'iSHxx, or Viivxa1.
Obs. 5. All verbs, which retain the short vowel in the fut., may in non-Attic
poetry double the a in both the fut. and the aor.: as tu.'iism, ixoftiffti, lixforv, iyU
Xetffffl, xaXtrrecftitaf, ttivvattt 8.
Obs. 6. The verb ix^oio/tm, (to hear,) has ixaiirt/iai contrary to the analogy of
/W, etXouw, fut. lira, and xt*" X^P^'t nas XZ*ru>
contrary to the analogy of
i^aiai, are*.
Obs. 7. That the Ionians have in verbs, which usually make their tenses with a
* The instances are more rare, when this form, 1. takes place also with the long
vowel, as yixa^?:, and, 2. passes over to other tenses, as lXvyi%3m, (for -jVSijv from
Xi/yiZ*,) in Theocr. It is, however, evident that this Dorism was a partial practice,
which gradually went over from the verbs, in which the radical letter is a palatal,
into other verbs by a specious analogy. We have in Obs. 8. a perfectly similar and
unquestionable instance with the Doric a.
The verbs irva, (to accomplish,) and ifiu, (to draw up water,) have in the pres.
tense an Attic collateral form itirn, ituTu.
7 Compare also some verbal nouns of the disyllabic verbs in iu and wv, as tytint,
rint, xrlrci, firiif. See below, 119. Obs. 2. 0.7.
8 That in some of our editions, (especially in the old ones,) verbs, which never
have a short vowel, are written with a double <r, to shew their quantity, offends
against correctness. Yet there are verbs, in which the point has always been dis
puted, and still is partly so ; as in itvofiai, (to preserve,) in finrimtrt, &c.
134
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
long , an instead of this long x, (as Bwcum, titwa,) and the Dorians, on the
contrary, instead of the in verbs in <u always i, ( nuJum, i/isAex,) follows of course
from the general principles stated 27- Obi. 5. 7. Only \uu has in all the dialects
itctrai.
Obi. 8. But the Dorians also frequently introduced i in the conjugation of verbs
in ia/, as iptXctiru, iatra;, iTevdSti, from
3i<v, irffftw. It is particularly frequent in
the later Doric writers.
Obi. 9. The following six verbs,
x\iv, / navigate,
trtiu, I blow,
nai, I swim,
Siv, J run,
piai, IJJow,
^iu, I pour,
have in the fut., or at least in its derivatives iu'9, ex. gr. TXiute/tai, ttrnsra,
&c.
and the two following,
xalv, 1 bum,
nXmm, I weep,
the primitive form of which, peculiarly retained by the Attics, is tiu, xkati, with i,
have itv : xavaw, ixXaueec, &c. See the Anom.
Obs. 10. That several verbs in have mri in the //., is noticed below in 112. 8.
7. The trisyllabic and polysyllabic futures, which have a short
vowel before the final syllable aco, viz., d, e, f, are susceptible of
a collateral form, which, rather peculiar to the Attics, is usually
called
Futurum Atticum.
The instances of this kind are all agreed in this, that the a is
dropped, and that the final syllable becomes a circumflexed or
contracted termination. This is effected in two ways.
8. In the verbs, of which the future ends in dau or taw, the two
vowels xoj or soj, after having dropped the a, are contracted, and
the same contraction takes place in the other persons, according
to the general laws of contraction, so that these futures are con
jugated exactly like the present tense of the contracted verbs in
doj and ia>, as will be seen hereafter. But here, too, the Ionians
leave the form ia>, hit, uncontracted ; ex. gr.
/3i/3a,/ /3i/3at<T, (j3i/3a'<w, /Si/3eir, &c. not in use,) fut. Att.
/3i/3a/, ifs, 5, pi. oi/xev, an, uai, (v,)
tsXeoj, f. rtXlaoi, Ion. again teXe'o/, teXeW, fut. Att.reXZ, us,
si, pi. ov/jlsv, eTrs, ovai, (v,)
with which the fut. med. likewise agrees, a/ptoci, jfc, &c. oS/xai, et,
&c. Compare the present tense of the verba contractu in the
active and passive voice, 105. with the 06s.
9. No contraction of the vowels can take place in the fut. in
7au after the a has been dropped, but the second vowel u alone
* It is remarkable that all the six verbs denote a flowing current-like motion.
See them all in the list of Anom. Verbs, especially on account of the nou-Attic con
jugation, of fut, and the quite unusual one of
with iv.
VERBS.
135
takes the circumflex, and they are then conjugated like the con
tracted verbs in iu, St, ex. gr.
KO/J-O^OJ, f. HOf/.tSW, (-iftli) flit. Att. KOfJUaJ, ltlsy lit,
pi. iov/j-sv, teirs, tovat, (v,) med. kofj.ioviJ.iii, n't, lErrai, &c.
Obi. 11. This fill. Att. thus has its first foundation in the Ionic dialect, to which
the dropping of the r between the two vowels is peculiar. See above, 28. Obi. 4.
and compare Obi. III. 2. to $ 103. The Attic dialect afterwards contracted thetwo
vowels, whenever it could be done, and something analogous was remarked in the
verbs in <>.
Obi. 12. We have instances of afut. in in in this resolved form : rtXiu, II S. 415,
x0fft/r, v. 831, for xa^tvut. See the Anom. xopivw/it. But the form u, us, like the
corresponding prei. tense of the verba contractu, is not resolved by the Ionians,
(Herod, iixat, ixif, !x,) but the Epics have the lengthened form, (Homer, x(tfita,
Ixix, xi;y, like the present tenses of ij 105. Obs. 10. The instances, however, of
both the resolved and contracted form are not frequent. The most uncommon are
those verbs, in which the usual prctent itself ends in in and in : rsXln, tiXiS, fut.
tiXik, (Homer,) tiXi?, (Plato Protag. 331.) xakiu, xxXii, fut. xxXt7r^t, (Demosth.
Lept. 5.) xxkoivrxs, (Xenoph. Hell. 6, 3, 2.) for xxxUeirxs See likewise the Anom.
No change can take place in most instances, that is to say, either when the
fut. ru comes from a prei. in
(ex. gr. %,xxt for iixairut, of iixx^u, />//3, Plato
Phadr. 7. for pifiaru, &c.) or when the simple present tense in iu and <ui is obso
lete, (ex. gr. iufiv, iupuri. for x/if/tiru, &c. of AM*IEn:) see below 'imifii, J 96.,
and xagius above ; ?xs^c for sr.Chaeu, see the Anom. rxi&xnvftt and others. To this
Obi. belongs also the fut. of some verbs in in, which is like the prei. See the Anom.
Igvn, Txyuu.
Obi. 13. The long vowel, especially the u in the futures in atru, is very seldom
shortened so as to admit this contraction ; ex. gr. Ux/hZti for ifiti, lixmhrxs
for tixuinnrxs, Thuc. 3, 58. 6, 23. (See about this and some doubtful similar in
stances, Buttm. Complete Or. Or., 95. Obs. 16. with the Note.)
Obs. 14. In the verbs in / the fut. in In, really is more in use than the regular
form in iru : it also occurs with the Ionians, but never in the resolved form, ex.gr,
uy}.z,u -^ f.t. Si^mi'v, rofitov/ttv, &c. in Herod, and Hippocr.
10. The tense, which is called in grammar
Futurum Secundum,
after having shortened the radical syllable, annexes in the Tonic
dialect the termination iu to the pure characteristic of the verb,
and in the common language contracts it into >, conjugating it in
both the act. and the medial voice according to the rules of con
tracted verbs.
11. This fut. occurs only in verbs, whose characteristic is
X, fj., v, p, and which in general have not the future in o-u. We
shall treat of them in particular in 101. Grammarians for
merly assumed a fut. 2. in all verbs even in those, in which it
never was used, for the bare purpose of deriving from it the aor. 2.,
of which the formation will be shown in the following . The
fut. 2. pass, stands in a very different predicament ; for, as it is
13G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
137
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
138
5. Most verbs have the aor 1., and but few, comparatively
speaking, the aor. 2. In the grammar, however, the latter is set
down in many verbs, which in reality have it not, because many
verbs, though destitute of the aor. 2. act., yet form the aor. 2. pass.
on the same principles ; hence this formation is preferably shown
once for all in the aor. 2. act., and the aor. 2. pass, is derived
from it *.
6. The changes and abbreviations of the characteristic and
radical vowel of the pres. tense into the characteristic and vowel
of the aor. 2., mentioned above 2.) are effected in their several
instances in the following manner :
Characteristic
Pres. \\. Aor. 2. X
tuhtu, *stowov
XgliWTOI, *6X.pV@0V
j>XHTU, *SpflX(pOV
TIT
>>
p
>>
5)
(ppov^a), *e<ppaSov
xpii^co, txgatyov
)'
>
nraipoi, 'iirrapov
a Vowel
I!
1\
a
a
i
e or
rplvca, ET^awov.
06. 2. The form of the aor. 2. bears the same relation to the simple theme as the
imperf. to the pres. tense in use ; but distinguishes itself from the imperf. partly
by its aorii/ic signification, (of which we treat in the Syntax,) and partly by having
its own moods and participles, made after the form of the present. And there is
this constant analogy, that the real imperf. of a verb always conforms itself exactly
to its usual pres. tense, and that consequently a true aor. in the indie, differs from
the usual imperf., and that in the other moods it differs from the usual pres. tense.
Hence, for instance, iy^afn necessarily is the imperf. and y{f*s the conjunctive
present, &c.
8 With regard to the aorists stated Text 6. as examples, the learner must be
informed that the forms irwrav, tzgvfiov, tppecQov, irstyss, never occur at all, or at least
only in a very few passages, which on that account are suspected of being corrupted,
(they should he iru^a, ifroga, &c.) they are stated here merely on account of the
aor. 'I. pass, (as irir>!, i*{!lj3>i>,) which is really in use.
Of the verbs, which in their rr conceal another radical letter than y, ($ 83.)
which must of course re-appear in the aor. 2., there is none but the poetical lirrtfun,
it.4Tcp.nY, (see Anom.) which has an aonst of that kind.
VERBS.
139
Obs. 3. Same imperfects seem to form an exception to this general rule, and to
be aoriiis at the same time ; but on examining them more closely, we find that
they all are, at least in practice, mere aorislt. Such are
(see 109. fti/ti,) and
irsi^i:!, y^',um (from ifo/ixi,) tSiyav, about which see the Anom. Homer has xXuai,
(to hear;) its prei. tense is in use, yet ixXver always has the signification of the nor.
Homer also frequently uses the imperf. of other verbs as aoritlt, particularly for the
sake of the metre ; but it would be very improper to consider as imperf. i3jzd>,
Inr/tit, S^air/tev, and some others, of which the pret. tense occurs nowhere, and
which of course are employed only as aoritlt. That nxctqm, >..x*n, and the like,
are still more improperly considered as imperfect!, appears from 85. O'is. 2. with
the Note5.
Obt. 4. The same analogy respecting the distinction of the aor. 2. from the imperf.
obtains also in those verbs with double themes, which on account of their more
considerable deviations can only be noticed in the list of Anomalous Verbt, as \apr
afixprivu, &c. For in them too the aor. 2. is constantly the imperf. of the
obsolete form,
m^ojtov, from AABO, (AHBl!,) 'AMAPTd.
04s. 5. Hither belongs also the aor. of some verbs in in and aw. These termi
nations are not derivative in some verbs, but mere lengthened forms of the primitive
simple one, (6 92. Obs.T. and below, 6 112.8.) of which the aor. 2. as xrvwUt
Ixrorm, yaia iym, (from KTTnn, ron,)8 has maintained itself as other tenses have
maintained themselves in some verbs. (Compare the perf. 2. $ 97- Obt. 4. and the
aor. 1. in tiie Anom. yx/t'iu.)
Obt. 6. The abbreviation of the peuultima, (Xi&ai ikxStv, fivyu iipuya;) may also
be justly considered as a return to the old form of the verb, which frequently, (as
we have seen above, $ 92.) had been lengthened only in the pres. tense. And even
the change of i into may be considered in that light, since we likewise find this a
in the Ionic dialect in the pres. tense of some of these verbs, as t^tk, rxutu. But
5 The separation of the aor. 2. from the imp'rf. might be historically accounted
for in this way. The Greek language originally made no distinction between the
signification of the aorist, and that of the imperf , and both historical preslerites in
v and a, (Jrvrov or irvrrsv, and irv^x,) were probably formed for that mixed signi
fication without any distinction, just as the German and English languages have
imperf. of one syllable and imperf. in ed, (/find, found; 1 print, printed ) Hence
the import of the aor. and imperf. is not fully distinguished one from the other in
the oldest writers,
137- Obs. 3.) But when the Greek language began to
observe a marked difference between the signification of the aor., and that of the
imperf, the latter gradually assumed the fixed form , but the aor. did not on that
account immediately confine itself to the form n. This form in many verbs was
probably as unusual to the Greeks as / sued, failed, named, is to an Englishman
instead of / saw, fell, ran. When, owing to the great variety of the Greek verbal
forms, the pra?tente in ci also acquired a double form, it may have been derived in
a different manner from the same pres. tense, (iXuxov, iXrrov,) or from an already
existing double theme of the verb, (s'Xav, ikipfiani,) the signification of the aor.
would naturally be gradually attached to one of them ; hut the inclination to attend
to analogy would have the effect of confining the aor. to that form in , which was
farthest removed from the usual pret. tense ; and when later wants required the
separation of the moods and participles, which originally had probably a common
form with the pres. and prateritc, they were made partly for the aor. conformably
to analogy, (from the form in ,) and partly (for the form in ,) recourse was had
to the mods and the participles of the unusual pres. tense, which was likewise the
basis of the indie., yet with some deviations in the accent, which the ear required in
the infin. and participle, (Xinh, Xirr'nixi, \itoi,) because they generally denote the
past, and their terminations, uv, trStxi, uv, remind us too distinctly of the present.
6 See also the anomalous cr/ri, cTvyla, rental, tinxtUpim, poxae/tai, and compare,
XtjKM and
in XecrKV, t^urxv.
uo
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
Ill
142
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
143
Wtjj^oi*. See also xlyai, ratuXtxt, among the Anom., and the change of n Into ti
in }tiiit* of AEIft, see the Anom. iurxi.
Obi. 'I. With this conversion of into a corresponds the change of n into m in the
per/, of the Anom. fnywfii, (PHTO,) iffvyx *, and related to both are the and
intercalated in some per/., which else would be disyllables ; the a according to the
Attic reduplication : for instance, f9, (iTJU.)
See also in
the list of Anomalous Verbi, 'ChrHtxx under %c%m, \mnxa under
im&x and
MieS*, each for itself, and the pan. forms aucm under ;', Imotu, in a Note to
^ 108. i5.
OAi.3. That according to the Attic redupl. the rowel is shortened in iuw ixrxut,
ixiifv iktlkifx, 'EAEren IxUkZHx, has been noticed, 85. Epic poets were allowed
for the sake of the metre to rechange the * of this perf. into a short 4 in the parti
ciples fern, as rtrx^vix, r&aXtrix, a^a^via.
Obi. 4. The case is the same with the few instances of the perf. 2. in verbs in in,
and ecu, like piyit* ipptya, ftvxxof&xt, {aor. \uC*y... u.\-j
as with the aor. 2. in 96.
Obi. 5. They point to simple forms Pirn, MTKfl. See also the Anom. ynHiw, onnr'ui,
Obi. 5. That the number of perf. 2. taking even those into the account,which occur
only in poets, is but very limited, has already been noticed in Text 5. We will just
mention in particular0 among those belonging to transitive verbs, xxnxex, XtXenrxy
rtroxx, Jxrmtf *>i<T03a, oi5, 1jtw, irra^ya, a-rutx, tiisnx?., and among the intransi
tive, xxxfStyx, \l\xxa, rtrfiytt, Tlpoixx, ipptyx, totxx, ttciSx, Xxba, obulx, iXr.XvSx,
e'ur.ox. r'iBxKm, riSnva, fi'iptnra, xi%nra, y'xynx, xs^aSa, vi'rtf&x. fi'tptuxx, ( uyxxvutri.}
along with some, which properly are intransitive, and only become transitive in
particular connections, as klXnStx, x-iQivya, i'slix. To these may be added from
} 113. OA*. 3. 4. those belonging to verbs, which are partly transitive, and partly
intransitive in some of their tenses, and in which the perf. 2. in particular has the
intransitive signification.
Obi. 6. But as the perf. is not so much needed in the copious Greek language at
in other languages, the perf. act. does not occur, or occurs but very rarely, in many
verbs, which have no perf. 2. and of which the perf. 1 . would sound harsh or strange ;
it is supplied by the aor. or by a circumlocution with the perf. pan. (See below,
$ 134. OA*. 1.)
See about the perf. of the con}., opt., and imper., $ 137. Obi. 11.
OA*. 7- Thex of the perf. 1. in xx is sometimes dropped by the Ionians, when it
8 TirfiQx, as coming from rp'iQ*, (when it may also be considered as perf. 2.)
occurs but seldom ; in Od. ^. 237. it is intransitive, in Soph. OSd. C. 1 86. it is transi
tive. Ab perf. of rfiru we find it without any various readings in the old writers,
Soph. Trach. 1009. We meet in later writers, (Matthia's Gr. Gr., Engl, transl.
5 183. 3. p. 228.) with rirgnfa.
* Compare Tivrruxx in the Anom. iri<mt.
' See, in Buttm. Lexihgus I., towards the end, a more detailed explanation of
these forms.
We merely state here the perf. themselves, and observe that, though they all
are formed from their themes according to the above rules, they mostly belong to
Anomalout Verbi stated below in the list, with which the learner must already be
familiarly acquainted to trace every one of the perf. mentioned here (o its right
verb.
7 It was a general rule with the Greeks that, if any form of a verb sounded dis
agreeably or strange, or was attended with obscurity and equivocation, it was dis
used, though it might appear of great grammatical importance ; another turn of
expression was preferably resorted to. Little attention, however, can be paid to
this circumstance in the theory of grammatical forms, which notices what analogy
requires, and leaves practice to individual observation.
144
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
is in verba pure, whereby the ptrf. I. becomes the per/. 2. Hither belong the Homeric participlts,
xtxxipwi, Tirinif, titX>i(, and others, for-i*af.
The same is done in Epic poetry, on making the vowel short, in the 3 pers. piand in the participle of some verbs, as
iSaa, /SiCauw, for /3iSn'w/, /JiSwtif, from BAH, (Anom. Qxlru,) *ifvan, -aiQviit,
for x-ifvKuffi, t'.Quxu;, from Qvu,
and there are some old per/., of which these forms only and none whatever in xa
occur ; as, fUfi&Bu/i, fufictui, it&atari, itixa/s, (see the Anom. MAO, AAtiS) But the
Anom. AEIft, SiiVa;, has both 5i2/*, and SiSm, which are used alike, and conjugated
throughout. Hence the 1 pert, ting, is also assumed for the above forms, though
it occurs nowhere : Kr'npvu, ftiftaa, "M%ttot, fitSxet, and likewise irraa, (for Irrnx* or
tttmt, see below irmpi,) y'.youi, TiSraa, titXo*, (see the Anom. ySyrtftm, dtwuu,
rAffyai,) whence some tt/ncopated forms like (zltstp.iv, r&rdteci, (for /SiCao/tsr, Ti3*aiv/.)
See 110.
98.Perfectum Passim.
1. The perf. pass, annexes the terminations (jw, ami, rai, &c.
and the plusq. /aw, uo, to, &c. not as is done in the other pass.
forms, by means of the connecting vowel, ( 79. Obs. 1. o/axi, etch,
&c.) but immediately to the characteristic of the verb, as it stands
before the termination x or xx of the regular perf. 1. conformably
to which the perf. pass, is generally formed for the sake of uni
formity.
Obs. 1. Hence when there is no per/, in use in any verb, grammar presupposes
one, as in 3uia-, (xixwroc,) the per/. 1. AiXupa is supplied, aud the per/, pan.
(xikii/ificci,) is formed after it.
2. When the perf 1. has <p or %, these letters are changed
before ft, <r, t, according to the general rules, 20. 22. 23. Thus,
for instance, rirvQx and zsissXe'/jx. give
reru-ixfji.au, rirv-^xi, tItv-ictqii, for -Ip/Jixt, tyaxi, (prxi
zsin/Ke-y/jLoci, tsiitXt-Zp.i, otewXe-xtok, -X/*a'>
XTa'j
and to prevent the meeting of three consonants, ( 19. 2.) the a
must in the farther conjugation of this perf. and of the plusq. be
dropped before the terminations a$e, abxi, o$u, &c. for instance,
2 pers. pi. TETf-<p&E, for -q>a$e or -4<&e,
tn/n. ctewXe'x,&<i -x.sS'cei or -$&<gu,
but instead of the 3 pers. pi. vtcsi, vto, there is generally a cir
cumlocution used with the verb etvau, to be, rtrvy.y.iw^, (at,) ei'iiv,
and in the plusq. waxv.
Oil. 2. The Ionians, however, have no occasion for this circumlocution, because
instead of -vrau -t, they may use -arm -st>, which the Attic writers sometimes
imitate in these tenses. See more detailed remarks about this in Obi. IV. 3.
103.
VERBS.
145
14G
A GRF.F.K GRAMMAR.
per/. i\iXiyx*i pass. iknXty/iai, irfiyyu trfiyftxi* : the rest of the terminations
generally remain, iXvXsy^at, yxrai, &.C. it%iy%ai, &.C.
Obs. 0. In the same way, when the per/, pan. requires two /i/t and the root has
a third /i, one of them is dropped of course : xi/nxTaxixxppsu, xixau^xi, Sic.
4. It is partly on account of the difficulty of their formation,
and partly because they are seldom wanted, that the conj. and
opt. generally are not formed at all, but a circumlocution with
Eivai is resorted to, nrvy.iA.iws, (n, ov,) <5 and eirjy.
Obs. 9. These moods can he formed only when there is a vowel before the termi
nation, which easily emerges into the terminations of the eon;', and is readily com
bined with the characteristic < of the opt.; for instance xrdsftm, xixmfteu,
conj. xly-ruuni, it, *jtsu, &.C.
opt. xsKTy-ur,*, xtxrrie, xtxryre, &c.
There are but few isolated forms of trisyllabical per/., which all are anomalous.
Thus Plato has the conj. ixr'trfiwln, (ripou rirfiiificu,) Andocides the conj.liafilSXtitd,
(/accXXiu. fiiGxrifiai.) See also xlxkn/uat B.nd piprtftai under xxxiu and /i^vro-xw. Even
when the radical vowel is i or u, the opt. may be formed by absorbing the additional t,
which renders the vowel long, but Homer's x'iXCts, Oil. 0. 230. (Xv xixu/uu, 95.
Ob). 4.) is probably the only instance, which occurs*.
99.Futurum 3.
The third fut. or paulo-post-fut. pass, derives its signification
( 138.) and its form from the perf. pass., of which it retains the
augment, substituting adfim for the termination of the perf.; hence
we need only compare the 2 pers. of the perf. in aai, (^'j
and change m into opm, for instance,
rervfji.fji.xi, (rsTt/\J/(H,)
rtrv^ofxai
rirpafi.fA.at, (rirpa-^at,)
nrpa-^ofi.ai
WBtplKrifJim, (ws^/Xtjffai,)
<7ii$ikriaof/.m
tjinsHiMti, {ysiiciiam,')
analaaij.mObs. 1. Whenever the vowel of the fut. 1. is shortened in the per/. jrnss., the
/ut. 3. takes again the long vowel : SiSnVqtut/, XiXvftfixi, (see 95. 06*. 4 l.)
Obs. 2. There is no 3/ut. to be met with of the verbs X fi t (, and there are but
few of those, which have the temporal augment.
' There is no doubt that this y by itself is then the nasal sound ngj compare
4.3.
* Others insist on xixnrxi, XtxZrt, &c. but I have adopted the accentuation
of some HISS, as alone conformable to analogy; for x'urw/ixi and
must
stand in the same relation to xixTx/uu, and Xi/.ira to XiXv/iai, as ru<rri/>icci and
TuTm-i to nrtt/uu. SeeButtm. Complete Gr. Gr. and about the opt. forms xixrr,
fti/triyn, see the list of Anomalous t u bs.
1 But it must not be supposed on that account that the 3 /ut. is formed from the
] /t of the middle voice with the redupl. ; for I do not know whether the above
TiT(x^efcxi occurs anywhere, but ^Ur^n, xtxXwiixi, which actually occur, dearly
confine us to the per/. (See the Anom. /SoXX*, xaXiu.)
vnnns.
U7
EWaiSet/Sw,
tribal,
Eore'cpSriv.
It follows of course from SO, that, when the characteristic of the
verb is a tenuis or media, it is changed into an aspirata, for in
stance,
"ktiitu, cciAeifia,
iXeltpSwv, r/lu.i^S,r,v,
rvzsrv, (TTIlfl,)
erii^nv,
riasu, (TAXTi,)
iri-^m.
3. With regard to the other changes of the radical word, which
occur in the jut. 1.
93. 4.) the aor. 1. pass, chiefly follows the
perf. pass., taking a in the same cases, for instance,
xopu'a>, (xExo/x.iff/^.ai,)
ixofjLtaSnv,
Te\ew, (tete'Xec7^(.i,)
ereXiaSriv,
and mostly changing the vowel of the preceding syllable in the
same way as the perf. j>ass., for instance,
aoilaif {zstzsbinfj.ua,,)
Iwoni&rjv,
Ti/Aaw, (rn'/*if*i,)
irifj.-nbtit,
Tiuyju, (TETfy/xoci,)
eti/%&7)v.
Obs. 1. A few verbs, which have a vowel for their characteristic, take the r in
the aor. 1. paw. without having it in the per/, pass. ; for instance, nitt, wlrm/tai,
aor. 1. \ r
and ixxvaSti'/, ftvaefuxi, pluvn/zeci, ifjtvr.fSnv. see also the Alton, trviu,
Xi^"i rtrxnupu. That ImISw, which comes from crai^, has not the t, is owing to
this verb having a double form. See the list of Anomalout Verbs.
Obs. 2. See about the verbs in in, which have in the perf. pats, and i again in
the aor. 1. pass. $ 95. Obs. 4.
06j. 3. Those which, without being verbs in X ft v {, change their i into a in the
per/, paw. 98. Oil. 3.) retain their i here : irrfifa, (i/rrfa/tftai,) IrrfitpSm, r;!n
tr^t^Sqv, Toi^a) 'iS^ifSr,*. But the Jonians and Dorians have WpaQSw, ig^i^^n*.
4. The aor. 2. pass, annexes w to the pure characteristic of the
verb, and follows the rules given for the formation of the aor. 2.
act. Hence we need only form that tense, whether it be in use
or not, and change ov into w, for instance,
tuvtoj, ETt/irovIrvitm,
TgEfl-oi, erpqevov,erqxum.
L2
148
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obt. 4. The aor. 2. past, is after all nothing but a softer form of the aor. 1 .
Hence it commonly exists along with the aor. 1., but chiefly in primitive verbs only ;
and in most verbs, which make their aor. 1. in x$*'
fBm, it is preferred, this
aor. 1. being used only by poets, when they want a long syllable, or by tragic
writers, who prefer full and antiquated forms. Yet even in prose both were used
indifferently, and the choice was probably determined by euphony.
Obs. 5. Though the formation of the aor. 2. pan. agrees so perfectly with that of
the aor. 1. act. that it follows the latter in grammar, it is yet absolutely independent
of it ; for in almost all the verbs, which have the aor. 2. pass., the aor. 2. act. is not
in use, as in U/.^t^. from xXictto/, tx^i/Cqv, itvthv, IfiXuGnv, t^'/fqy, from kouttu,
ti/st, (SXairru, plimi, It{P>s from rfifu. Only the verb t{!t prefers the aor. 2.
as it is stated above, in both the act. and the pais.
Obs. 6. As there is no such interchange in the pan. as in the act. between the
aor. 2. and the imperf, some verbs, which, according to 96. 3. cannot form an
aor. 2. act., form an aor. 2. past. It may in such a case be made after the imperf.
instead of the aor. 2. act. ; only the rule that the long vowel becomes short in the
aor. 2., holds out here also, for instance,
yga$v. {imperf. lyoatyo*,')
iygei$7iv,
t^IZu, (imperf. irjiCay,)
ir^'tZnv, (r.)
Obt. 7. On that account some verbs, of which the radical vowel is , form an
aor. 2. pass, without changing the i into a: for instance, Qk'syvitpxiyw, and fixir*
and Xiyu, (see the Anom.) See also about the unchanged long vowel in iTAiiyny
the Anom. ve\neeu.
Obt. 8. The verb vJ-u'^x commonly takes a y in the aor. 2. pan. i^iynt. See
Buttm. Complete Gr. Or.
Obs. 9. The characteristic 5, 9, r, does not take place in the aor. 2. past., and
instances with a vowel before the termination are hardly to be met with, except
ixar.f from kx'm, and these three i'idr.s, Vffvvit, ifiint. (See the Anom. AA, f'w, puv,)
which have the signification of the act. The rest of the verbs in u puram and
contraclum, and those in iu. 3, and
have only the aor. I. past.
Obt. 10. There is a striking agreement of the two aor. pass., in point of form
and conjugation, with the act. of the verbs in pi. Compare the aor. pass, in the
paradigm of rixrtt with the imperf. and the collateral moods of the pres. tense of
riBn/u.
101. Verbs in X, /x, v, g.
1. The verbs, of which the characteristic is one of the letters
X, fx., v,p, deviate so much in the formation of their tenses, that it
is necessary to bring them under a particular point of view.
2. All these verbs are generally without the fut. 1. orfut. in
oa>, but they always have the fut. 2. ( 95. 7. 8.) Thus
vifAoj,
fut. Ion. ve/xicu, commonly ve^ao;,
l*ho>,
/xeve'w, commonly /xev<Z,
of which the conjugation, vs/xw, z!s, ti, ovuev, sire, ouuiv, med.
oTifAoci, ei, eTrau, &c. may be seen in the paradigm of ayykXKu, and
be compared with the pres. of the verba contractu in ea/, 105.
3. If the syllable, which precedes the termination, be long in
the pres., it is always made short in this fut. without any excep
tion ; for instance,
VERBS.
149
^xWco, arlWa,
F. -^/tfXw, art\u}
xplvoj, ay-vvw,
xpiiw, a/Auvdi.
For this purpose the diphthong i is converted into a, and ei into
e, for instance,
culpa, xretva),
F. aitpSi, xtevsS1.
Obs. 1 . The Ionic forms, xyy'lXXu, fut. iyyiXto/, xt>h'lut XTlw'iw, Q:ln& from fxtvw,
itXm'ui from rXvw, &c. p/. i^i>, and so on, are now easily accounted for, as well as
the Doric verbs, with the contraction uw : for instance, frxUZpit. %%>.<J',uiu, (95.
Obs. 17.) See about the forms in ra, Obs. 3.
4. These verbs also form the aor. 1. without <x, merely in a.
They retain the characteristic as it is in the fut., but make the
syllable before the termination long again ; yet independently of
the pres., for either they barely lengthen the vowel of the future,
ex. (jr.
t'iWu, (rl\u,) etiXcc,
xphu, (xgfvc3,) exqhiz,
dfAuvcv, (a/xt/va/,)-/)ptt/va,
or they commonly change the e of the fut. into ei, and a into w,
for instance,
fAEVOJ, s-eXX&i, TEIVW,
(/AEVcU, TEXiZ, TEVftl,) EpCSIVSt, eVeiXj ETEIVSt,
(\|/aXa!, (pstvc2,) E\]/rAa, Eif^ivas.
Several verbs, however, having a in the pres., take a in the aor. J .
for instance,
Itlfd'wtii, Vepavoj,inipava, inf. Ttepavoti.
Obt. 2 The x is taken by the verbs in -<u and -m'mt, ex. gr. ii<Pfxtxi, fixfxrxi,
irutlw, -riuteti, except rtrfivxi and fiwcti. Most of the others in ol'.im and a\ow are
always found with n in the Attic writers, ex. gr. ffnftxlvai enfiii*xi, %x*.vrr,Yxi, ?.vy.y.-.%ffSxi, &c.i^Sa't^u i^r^xtxxSri^xi, &c. excepting, however, xatkayat, Xivxxtxi,
xvznxau, xifixvxi, ofyZrxi, tr^mm. Later writers, or what are called xm), (see
{ J . 9.) make also many other verbs with , (as rti/ixlm, /umW, \y-itaict,, &c.) and the
Dorians of course do this throughout, whilst the Ionians again have almost every
where their n.Verbs beginning with a,
(to raise,) and &y.\epMi, (to leap,)
have x, which is changed into n in the indie, only, because of the augment : fifx,
aoau, xgxs, &C. nkxfiw, U\xfxi, &C. 1
1 Other verbs requiring the short vowel, as those in (, , u, Xpu, r/tv, or with the
vowels n, , and the like, do not occur at all in common language ; and the old
poetical verbs, of which we have the forms tvirw, 'M^/tire, and the like, arc defec
tive; similar ones in the common language, ixxti, rip.ni, x*v. favXa/txi, arc
anomalous.
8 The learner must here be put on his guard against two errors : 1. nothing is
more common than to find
xpxi, lp.imx, &c. with the iota lubtcriptum, which is
to be condemned for the same reasons, as above with regard to the per/. 2. (see
97. 4. the Note.) ; 2. in editions, which on the whole may be considered as good,
the accentuation often is still Ti-rxtxi, cv/ixmi, and the like ; its incorrectness,
however, is sufficiently obvious from what we have observed here, and in 11.
150
A ORHKK GRAMMAR.
OAs. 3. The oldest language and the Julian dialect also made the ful. and the
aor. 1. of these verbs with r\ Homer, txt^et, Theocr. irurm, from xuw, rilgv, and
this formation alone continued to be used in common language with respect to
some verbs, like xixxai, (/ /and,) txt\ect, $i(tt, (I knead,) Qvgra. See also the Anom.
5. The aor. 2. retains the vowel exactly as it is in the fut. ; for
instance,
fitzWu, (/3aXa!,)e/3aXov,
(paivco, ((pave?,) aor. 2. pass. eQzwv,
xKit/oif (xXfvw,) aor. 2. pass. txXi'vnv, (i,)
except that in disyllabic verbs the e of the fut. is changed into a,
(compare 96.) for instance,
XTEiva;, (xteviS,) EXTavov,
s-e'XXcu, (fEXaJ,) aor. 2. pass. iwtKw :
the polysyllables retain the e, dyyiWaivyyiXov, vr/yiKriv.
Obi. 4. The aor. 2. act. is used iu very few of these verbs, and, where both occur,
rather poetical: thus ixravov occurs more rarely than ixmra". But inthepasj.
the aor. 1. whenever it retains the consonant before the S, is generally peculiar to
the Poets, (compare 100. Obt. 4.) It is the aor. 2., which is most in use, ex. gr.
^otUu ttpdvriv, ffXXu Wa\m, c^aXXw iVpaXtjv, tu^m ita^riv.Yet
and all polysyl
lables have merely the aor. 1. pan. excepting iy^tXAw, which has %yy'o,3r,> and
iyytKnt.
6. The per/. 2. is completely comprised in the rules given
above in 88. a. 2. 3. : hence
(pxtvoj, Tfelpwz.
There is this peculiarity, that the diphthong ei, having arisen in
these verbs not from the radical vowel i, but from e, as appears
from the fuf., is not changed into oi in the perf. 2. but merely
into o, for instance,
XTEiva/, (xrsva!,) sxrovo,
<pElpco, ((p&Eja/,) EpS'oga.
7. The perf. 1., the perf. pass., and the aor. 1. jiass., also
follow the general rules ; they annex the terminations xa, (aou, &c.
*iv to the characteristic, and retain the changes of the fut., for
instance,
afyaWu, (o-QaXw,) ta(pix\xx, EapaX/Aai,
(fa/vw, (<pavi2,) irtyxyxa, i^ithm,
ai'pu, (acS,)
riqxct, vtffxon, pari, -n^ixhof, %pnv, part. a'g&Ei'r.
The perf. pass. ( 98. 2.) also rejects the a of the terminations
<j&ai, o$e, &c. ; for instance,
* The case is the same with xyyixx.*, of which the aor. 2. act. is even questioned,
it is only required an i or x to be omitted by the transcribers to produce it. See in
Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. the list of Verbs.
VERBS.
151
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
152
The two last ways may also be explained as owing to the terminations mm and v>u
having been originally lengthened from >> and Cm.
Obs. 9. About the few verbs in p.u, which, as well as fam, take, for euphony's
sake, 99. 2.) the forms of 1v, (iyifinSw, fiifilwiut,) see the Anom.
102. Verbal Adjectives in riot and ros.
1. After having stated the formation of the tenses, we pass to
the formation of the two kinds of verbal adjectives in te'oj- and tos,
which in their signification and use approximate to the participles.
(See Obs. 2.)
2. Both kinds constantly have the accent on the termination,
annexed immediately to the characteristic of the verb ; this
undergoes the changes prescribed by the general rules, and in
several instances the vowel, which precedes the termination, is
likewise changed. These changes agree in every respect with
those of the aor. 1. pass, only that where the aor. has
the
verbals take mr, xr. They therefore may always be compared
with the 3 pers. sing, of the per/, pass., which also has a t.
But this 3 pers. deviates in several verbs from the aor, 1. and
from these verbals, with regard to the radical syllable.
3. Verbals are formed thus :
Xiyu,
yo&tyta,
?p((pa,
(pwpdaj,
(piXiu,
a'ipita,
HU.UW,
(\i\exrm, eXe'xSw,)
{yiy^a-nrai, iypxtySm,)
(?rpr, Es^Eip&nv,)
(netficup/zTtti, i<pa/pxr>v,)
(nz$t'krir*i> tpiXriSw,)
(yqwrcti, ripiSw,)
(niiravTai, EWauff&nv,)
Xextoj-,
ypaitros,
spiiiTos,
tyoiptzrios,
tyikvirios,
aiperos,
i:av(srios,
VERBS.
153
the difference of the use in some verbs, and lastly the conjugation
of one of the verbs in \ y. v g, (dyyiWa.)
2. A barytone verb is, (according to 10. 2.) a verb in its
natural form, in which the termination of the pres. always is
unaccented ; in contradistinction to those verbs, which contract
the two last syllables, and therefore take the circumflex. The
latter are called verba contracta or perispomena ; they are par
ticularly stated in their proper place.
Prefatory Remarks to the Paradigma Tiirru.
1. The verb rvvru, which we too select for a paradigm, is not
so improper for it, as some suppose. Since it is necessary to shew
first the whole foundation of the Greek conjugation in one verbi
there is scarcely one more convenient than tvistoj to be hit on ;
for it is only in a verb, which has like this a perfect form in its
pres. tense, that the exact nature of the aor. 2., as stated above,
96. 2., can be fully explained.
2. The learner must, however, be reminded that ruitru is here"
a bare paradigm, that is to say, an example, in which a complete
view is given of all the tenses, which may occur in verbs of this
kind, though neither tvhtu, nor any single verb, has all the tenses,
or employs all the tenses, which are set down here. See 104 l.
3. But we have only stated in the paradigm those tenses,
which are warranted by the analogy of similar verbs, as aor. 2.
act. and perf. 2. The old grammars had also
the fat. 2. act. and med. ;
but as this belongs to the verbs in X ft v 5, we omit it here, and
conjugate this future completely in the paradigm of those verbs
4. To give a view of the whole, we annex a Table containing
the first pers. of the flexible moods, the second pers. of the imper.,
the infin., and the masc. of the participle of all the tenses of
the act., pass., and middle voice. And this Table is immediately
followed by the paradigm of rittru conjugated once more at length.
5. Observations on the accentuation of verbs, and peculiarities
of the different dialects, are given after all the paradigms.
1 These tenses of tkVtm are those, which really are in use. See below the list of
Anomalous Ferbs, to which ti/ttiu also belongs on account of the Attic formation of
the fut. rwxTWN.
154
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Verbum
Indie.
rutlru,
Pres.
Imperf.
Perf. L
Plusq. 1.
Perf. 2.
Plusq. 2.
Fut. I.
A or. 1.
Put. 2.
Aor. 2.
Conj.
tvhtu,
TtTi/tpa,
STE-rufpeiy,
ETETl/ffElV,
Pres.
Imperf.
Perf.
Plusq.
Fut. 1.
Aor. 1.
Fut. 2.
Aor. 2.
Fut. 3.
Tt/WTO/AiXI,
IruVTOfj.m,
ruitruy.a.1,
*
ErETI^j^MJV,
ETlJ<f>S'r)V,
ETtiarnv,
TV11W,
MedFor the Pres., Imper/., Per/, and Plusq . see the Pass. Voice,
Fut. 1.
Aor. 1.
Fut. 2.
Aor. 2.
* This con;, and opt, can be formed only in very few verbs. See 98. Obs. 0.
the verb upui nwp/tiw, (,
VERBS.
155
Bauytonon, riitru.
vum.
Opt.
twtoi/xi,
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
TVXTl,
tvhtuv,
rirmre,
rerunas,
TETt!<f>Oi/XI}
TETWroifAl,
TlJ-vJ/ElV,
r p^*-*"
rum,
TUWSIV,
rvnut.
Tuitrov,
TVTirtoboU,
TV7fTOI/.&V0S,
reruipSai,
TSTO/X/KeW,
Tulp&Eiw,
TutpSrivzi,
rvTtslm,
TVBr,vaut
rtriJ^Eff&ai,
Tutp&Eir,
Tvn-naoi/.tvos,
Tunels,
TET(nJ/d/x.svOf.
TUltTOIlAW,
*
ZUOT.
Ty\J/d/xEvor,
TWOI/AW,
rvnov,
In most instances they are supplied by a circumlocution with the conj. and opt. of
,and tJm. See 108. IV.
156
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
A cti-
Pres. Sing.
Conj.
rvuru, (that) I may
strike,
TUlfTYIS,
rvirrri,
TvirmTOV,
rvitmroi,
rvltront.il,
rvisrrin,
Twxruai, (v,)
rvisra, I strike,
Dual,
Plur.
Dual,
eruirrsroy,
irmtrirftt,
Plur. irvirro/ji.iv,
frvirren,
itwrtov,
Dual,
TSTUQOCTOY,
TETutyxrov,
Plur.
nrvtyxre,
Tsrulpam, (y,)
Plusq. Sing, eteti^eiv,
Dual,
Plur. ETETi/tpEiyxEv,
STSTV^ilf,
ETETtJlpEITOV,
ETETt/pEfTf,
ET6Tu!p='>
irsrvptirm,
\rtrufynaxv,
Perf. 2. TfTwri, through all the moods like the per/! 1.
Plusq. 2. Itet^eu, like the plusq. 1.
Fuf. 1. <S'i;i(/.
^4or. 1. <Sin</.
rv-^oj,
like the pres.
Dual,
Plur.
Aor. 2.
iTV^XTOY,
Tt/\J/asT7)V,
6Tt/\J/a/XEV,
ETlnJ/aTE,
ETlnJ/aV,
ETI/WOy,
like the imperf.
rvltoi,
like the
* See below,
157
VERBS.
vum.
Infin.
Part.
Opt
Imper.
ruTTToi/jn, I might strike,
to strike, Tinrrvvax,
were I to strike,
Tvirn, strike,
rvmrat,
TVTTTOIS,
rwrniru, let him, her, it
striking,
TVHTOl,
[strike, gen. runrovros.
rvirrerov, strike rje (both,)
TVITTOirOV,
rvvrirm,they (both) may or must strike,
ruirTolrm,
TVXTOIfJLiV,
TuirriTe, strike ye,
[must strike,
TI/37T9IT6,
TVTTTOliV,
rWTsruaecii or tuwtovtuv, they may or
\l did strike, thou didst strike, &c.
TtTUtpOll/.!,
like the pres.
TETVpuTx,
gell.TiTVtyOTOS,
imperf. is
wanting,
tu^xis or tu^hxs,*
rv^xi or Ti/4-sie, (v,)*
nJvJ/ov, strike,
TU^XTU,
TV^XiTOV,
TU\J/aiT7)V,
rv-^xifx-ev,
Tl/vJ/aTOV,
rv-^xruv,
t<a|/2uev or rv^eixv,
TU^OLTOJtJXV Or
Tildas,
rv^aax,
gen. tu-^xvtos,
rvxsXv,
pres.
Obi. II. 4.
158"
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Passi(To be
Pres. Siny.
Dual,
Plur.
Indie.
Conj.
TUTTTO/Aal,
Tui!TaitJ.a..t
tutitti, or ei, (see below, Ohs. Tv-xrrt,
Tvnmai,
[I II. 3.)
TUWTOfAE&OV,
TVTITCUIA&O-i,
WWTEcSoV,
TVTCTTlaSoi,
jWTEir&ov,
TWTO/XS&a!,
T^TrTEff&E,
u/wrovrai,
rvTiTCiivrat,
TMf)3>)<TO/xai,
TH<f)&)(T7], Or El,
and so on like the pres.
Plur. Etwro/xe&a,
irvTCTi^e,
eti/tttovto,
See the Note to
Plur. ETET^/xe&a,
mrutySs,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. is wanting,
Aor. 1. Sing.
Tufty,
Dual,
STV(priT7)V,
TvtpSrirov,
Plur.
rvtp'bnrs,
TUipSwlt, (v,)
Fut. 2. wT)<ro/xai, through all the moods like the Fur. 1. '
Aor. 2. irvrniv,
through all the moods like the Aor. 1.
Fut. 3. rsTu^ofAcci, through all the moods like the Fut. 1.
* The abbreviated form is most generally employed in
VERBS.
159
turn,
struck.)
Opt.
tvjttoio,
ti/wtoito,
TuirrotaSov,
TVTlTOiaSm,
TI/'TJ'TOIIT&S,
TUWTOIVTO,
Imper.
Infin.
runrw,
Part.
rvvroiMvos,
VI, ov,
rwri'jJuiy,
Tuitrta'be,
rvwriabuaav,
or Tvitriaiani,
:
the Table, p. 146.
,
rerv^att,
.
TETO/X/XEVOf,
), OV,
TETt/(p&0),
tztv$3cov,
or TTti<p&UV,
ruty'&ri'yt&a.t, rutpSrisopiEvof
ov,
Tvtpbeim,
rvfovivxt,
ri/^&Err,
Ti/lp&sJ'o'a,
gen.
TMp&ErWTOV,
TuQlV)Tm,
TUf&ElV./XEV, TW^EI/AEy,
Tl/^S'rjTOV,
Tii<pSr;TE,
(rvtySit-naav,) rutpSeTsv *,
the yf/ s< and second pert., and almost always in the third,
ICO
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Med(To strike
The pres. and imperf., perf. and
Indie.
Fut. 1.
Conj.
wanting,
Plur.
Aor. 2.
like the imperf. pass.
Verbal Adjectives, (
See Herod.
VERBS.
161
turn.
one's self*.)
plusq. are the same as in the pass.
Imper.
wanting,
Opt.
like the pres. pass.
tv-^/ouo,
Infin.
Part.
TtnJ/o/xEvoj,
n, ov,
71, OV,
rv^dahm,
Tt/\J>aiVTO,
ruiroifjLm,
the pres. pass.
Tv^xcfocaaav, or
rv^dahm,
ruirov,
ruwiaSiooav, Or
rvxiaSwv,
102.) rvitrios, rvicros.
2, 40.
71, 0V.
A GREF.K GRAMMAR.
162
Pres. Ind.
vatisvu, &c.
Conj.
Opt.
nai&svru,
woaSiiiri, &C.
in/in.
araiSet/oir,
naaSevot, &C.
Pari.
Imper.
irquituirw, &c.
Imptrf.
enaideuov, er, e, (v,) &C.
Per/. Ind.
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
'nmaiSivxa,
Mircutisuxco,
wearaiJeyxoi/xi, not in use,
. au, s, (v,) &c.
Infin.
Part.
7r7roLi8ev)iivzt,
'TtiTtai&tvKws, v~a, bf,
Plusq.
tirevraiSeuxeiv, ttf, , &C.
Fut.
voul'euou,
Opt.
nxiSevaoifju,
Infin.
Part.
Aor.
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
itotilsvoxis
TraiSEuuiTw,
naibsuoau, &c
&C
7n/in.
Par*.
iCatBsvaau,
vtatSevaxt,
TtaiStvaaoa.,
f?re? form,> "-fJiwiHif, in, urn are understood here of course, as well as
in the following paradigm:
VERBS.
163
Passivum.
Pres. Ind.
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
itai&evoiLXi,
naiStuov,
nocttSturi,
na^Eurt or 81,
nxiSsvoio,
'Tix^Eusrxt,
TraiSei/Tirai,
TTXI^EVOiTO,
&c.
&c.
&c.
&C.
Infin.
Part.
iraidiiisisbai,
itxx Sauo/tAEvor, -n, ov,
Imper/.
EWaiSci/O/ATlV, ETTiZlSElJot/, EWaiSf^ETO, &C.
Per/! Indie.
Dual,
Plur.
HcTtxl^eu/xxi,
itE'jiai&Evfj.E'Sot,
TTE'ffaciSEi/ftES'aj
TtiHoLi^ivtsctt,
HEitxi^Eva^av,
Treirai^Eva^s,
'TitTioti&ivTa.i,
WcTra/SEt/CT&ov,
wswaiSEuvrai,
Conj. and Op<. are wanting,
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
7ts7taiSivao,
BEitai^Eva^xt,
ntTmtitvti.inos,
niirxiStua'^ai, &c.
Plusq.
ETtETrxiOEU/Jt.m,
ETrEICXiatVISO,
E'B'E'ffa/SEtiTO,
Dual,
EWEtfaiSElJ/XESoV,
EWEWai'Sei'ff&OV,
ETTEWaiOEl/JJnv,
Plur.
E'B'E'a'aiSEy/XE&a,
E'ffETrai'^Eyff&E,
EltEHXt^EVtrO,
Fu<. Jnd.
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
7raiSEy9'7)iT0/M,ai, Trxio'euSriOolfJLW, XaiHsvSriOfoSa.i, nxtOEuBnao/JLEVOi.
-<4oj\ Ind.
Conj.
iratfeuSu,
Opt.
hx&ev'Sieiw,
Infin.
Sxi^Eu^rinxi,
Imper.
na.ibtu'St-nri,
Part.
WaiSEiz&Eirj
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
Fut. 3. Ind.
HEituihtvao^xi, "nETtoiibivo-oliMv, neTrxiHevaeaSai, itEiixioEvao^Ews.
Medium.
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
Fut. Ind.
iraioeuaottxriv,
<7lut^evaea^at,
irxihuoofxevoi.
^x^Evaofxxi,
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
A or. Ind.
nxi^Euaai/xxi, nxi^Euaaif^m, vxi'.iivaxi.
EVaiSEtWuAW,
ri, nra-i, &C. aio, aero, &C. wxioeuoxoSco, &C.
au, aa.ro,
&c.
Infin.
Part.
TrxtOEveaoSai,
naio'Euaxn.ivos.
Verbal Adjectives, vaioEvrios, naifovror.
M 2
161
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
165
Passivum.
Pres. Xs/vojuai,
perf. Xe'Xsi^/Aai,
XeXeivJ/osi,
XeXemrxt, &c.
plusq. iktkttwnv, \{/o, wto, &c.
fut. XEKp&i<T(;/Aa<,
fut. 3. XsXeiij/o/Aai,
imperf. eXeitto/ai'iv,
conj. and opt. wanting,
imper. XeXeivJ^o, teXttyScu, &C.
infin. XXE?<p$ai, part. XEXsifA/AiW,
aor. tXEi'ipSw,
Medium.
Fut. XEi^o/xai,
aor. |(2.) eXiwo/xw, conj. XAra/fMu, op<. XictoiVw,
imper. \mov, &c. pZ. X/weu^e, &c.
infin. XiWEo&ai, par<. Xiwom-evos-.
Verbal adjectives, XeittWo*, Xeiwtw.
166
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
a.q%u, (to take the lead, rule over,) Med. (to begin.)
Activum.
Pres. aq%a>, imperf. ypxov,
per/. (npxa>) and plusq. hardly ever occur,
fut. aqifii,
aor. riefcoi, conj. a($fi), opt. ap^ou/At, apifus, ap^at, &c,
Wiper, apiflt, dp^dru, &C.
infin. ap^cci, part. aas.
Passivum.
Pres.a.p%o\t,cn, imperf. wg%cW/v,
perf npyfMu, dual, vtpyn&oii, pi. ypyn&bo:,
np%ai,
%%Xov,
%px$ey
vpxrat,
%px$ov>
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. rtfip, %qx^u> &cinfin. ripx^aci, part. -hpyy.itos,
plusq. ypy/Mov, dual, mpyiA&ov, pi. ripy/AE^a,
wpx.ro,
^x^m>
3 pers. wanting,
fut. dpx^'naoiJLQLi,
aor. %px$m, conj. dpx$&> opt. dpx^m, imper. apx^ri,
infin. dpxww> port, dpx^h
fut. 3. wanting, (see 88. c. Obs. 2.)
Medium.
Fut. a^cpiMu,
aor. mp%dn,7\v, conj. a^u^at, opt. ap%al^m, imper. agjjoti, d&w, &c.
infin. api,aahxi, part, dpifl.ti.iws.
Verbal adjectives, (in the tense of the active and middle
voice3) dpxrioi, dpxros.
VKRBS.
167
plusq. iaxivixetv,
infin. eaxsvxxivai, part, iaxevxxds,
fut. anLiva.au,
aor. iax.sua.aa., conj. axsuaau, opt. axevxaxifxt, an, axevxaga, &C.
imper. ox.eiia.aov,
infin. axtuxaai, part, axtviaxs.
Passivum.
Pres. axtvxCpy.a\,imperf. iaxtvat^o^m,
per/, iaxtva.aii.ai, dual, ioxivxaixeSov, pi. saxfuxoiAsSa,
iaxivxaxi
haxtvxaSov,
iaxevaoSe,
iaxivxaroci,
ioxtvaobov,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. \axevxo~o, iaxtv<itdu,8ic.
infin. iaxeux&xt, part, iaxtvaaixhos,
plusq. iaxiviafxm, aao, ttaro, &c.
fut. axtvaa^vtaoixai,
aor. iaxivxoSwv,
fut. 3. (ioxtvxaon.ai,') does not occur.
Medium.
Fut. axtuzaofj.a.1,
aor. iaxevxaxivnv, conj. axivxauiut\, opt. axevxaxlfiDV,
imper. axevxaxt, axevxoctaSu, &c.
infin. oxevxaaaSai, part. axtvaaiiMms.
Verbal adjectives, axtuxarios, axeuaaros.
168
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Passivum.
Pres. x.o(ji.I%oix.cci,
imperf. exo^i^o/xw,
perf. xtx6fi.iofi.ai, (compare eoxevaofAxi,)
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. xexifuao, lo$u, &c.
infill. xexofA.lo^fai, part. xtxofA.iafA.iws,
plusq. txsxofA.iOfA.riv,
fut. XOfJUO7IOOfA.ai,
aor. ixoy-'iahm,
fut. 3. (xExo/Ai'cro/xai,) does not occur.
Medium.
.FW. xoi/.leo[ji.au,
fut. Att. XOfA.lOVfA.Oll, dual, XOfAAOUfA.t$OY, pi. X0fA.lOVfALt^QC,
xofA.it!
xo/Aietadoy,
xof/utioSt,
xofjuitTou,
xofjutiajov,
xofjuovvrou,
Opt. XOfA.lolfA.ftTI, XOpHOW, &c.
tn/Jn. xoptiErir&ai, pari. xofA.ioifA.tws,
aor. lxofA.iaaiA.iiTi, conj. xofA.iaajfA.ou, opt. xofA.ioaliA.rn, imper. x6fA.iaou,
infin. xofA,iaao~eu, part. xofA.iaafA.itos.
Verbal adjectives, xofA,iorios, xo(A,tor6s.
imperf. ItpvXaaaovA
EtpuXarrov, j
plusq. ii7t<fu\dxttv
aor.
i<p6\a^a.
Pass.
Pres. ipvXxaaofA.ai,\
imperf. ttQvj\xaoLfA,m,\
<fukirrofA.ai,\
l<$u\xTT0fj.i)v,l
perf. 7re$Li\ayfA,ai, dual, lttipvKxyfA,t^ov, pi. nt^vXayfAt^x,
9e<p6\fyu.
iZBlpi/jKayftov,
iriipv'Ka^^s,
nctyvXaxrai,
7re<pv\a^ov,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting; imper. irttpuXx^o, nttyv'Kajfiu, &c.
infin. in($v\aifixi, part. irt<pu\ayfA.iws,
1 Sae below, the Note to Obt. III. 3.
VERBS.
169
li:zQvka.jfim,
3 pers. wanting,
Med.
Fut. $v\%of/.sut
aor. 6(piAai;a/x?)V.
Verbal adjectives, QvXotxrios, <pv\axrbs.
170
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Pres. ind.
iyyiWu,
itnper.
perf. ind.
plusq.
wyyeXxEiv,
fut. (2.) indie
ayythw,
dyytKiis,
ayyEX,
Dual,
dyy&tirov,
dyye\s7rtn,
opt.
sing, dyyikow,
dyy&ois,
dyyiKot,
pi. dyyt\<w^tv,
dyyeXeTrs,
dyyeXovai, (v,)
Dual,
pi. dyyikoitiw,
a-rysXoTrov,
dyyEKotre,
dyyt\oirnv,
dyys\o7ev,
or,
dyytkolw, oivti, ol-n,oi'rjTov, owrnv, oi'ti/xev, oinrs, ot-natzv,
see Obs. II. 3. to rvwrm,
infin. dyys\sitv.
part. &yys\uv, dyyiKovaa., dyytXovv, gen. dyyt\ovvros,
aor. 1. ind.
r,yytiXa,
aor. 2. ind.
rtyytkov
1 See about the use of this tense In this verb the Note to 101. Obi. 4.
VKRBS.
171
Pass,
(to be announced.)
conj. dyyiWaiAizi, opt. ayysXXoi'ptw, imper. ayyiWou,
infin. ayyE'XXeix&ai, part. dyyeXk6ix.evos ,
Pres. ind.
ayyiWofMu,
imperf.
rtyytWo/Am,
per/, ind.
viyyi\y.a.i,
ioyysXsai,
riyyeXrou,
Plusq.
rryytkWi,
7iyye\ao,
KyyeXTO,
Dual, r,yyi\iA.&ov,
pi. iiyys'X/iAE&a,
ijyyfX&ov,
SyysX&E,
vryytK^av,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting,
imper. yiyyiKao, riyyeXSa, &C.
infin. r/yysX&aii, part. wyyEX/AEW,
Dual, oryyE'X/AS&ov,
ijyyEXSov,
nyyixSw,
pi. rnyyiKfJ-i^x,
riyy&Xhe,
3 pers. wanting,
fut. 1.
ayyEXSrjfTO/jicH, &c.
aor. 1. ind.
rr/ysK^m,
fut. 2.
ayyeXwofAai, &c.
aor. 2. ind.
iryys'Xaiv,
fut. 3. wanting,
(see 99. Ois. 2.)
Med.
(to announce one's self.)
Fut. indie.
ayyEXouptai,
Dual, ayysXoi//XE&ov,
ayyeXT), or e7,
ayyEXeiV&ov,
ayyEXErrai,
dfcyyeXeiir&ov,
pi. ayyEXou/XE&a,
ayyEXEiff&E,
ayyfiXouvrai,
172
A. GREEK GRAMMAR.
Opt.
Sing. dyye\olfjt.w,
Dual, ayyeXoiptE&ov,
pi. ayyeXoi'/AS&i,
dyyt\oio,
uyyeXoXobov,
dyytkoToSt,
ayyEXoiro,
dyytXoloSw,
ayyeXoivTo,
infin. ayyeXe~o-&ai, part, dyytkouimias, w, ov,
aor. 1. ind.
wyyEiXa/xw,
aor. ind.
wyyaXdptOT,
VERBS.
173
3.) The temporal augment in trisyllabic compounds, (ex. gr. kiim*, >?,) see
84. Obi. 4.
4. But the following are real exceptions :
1.) The aor. 2. (to distinguish it more clearly from the pres. tense, see 96.
the Note to 04s. 3.) throws the accent in the following instances on the
termination :
a. In the infin. and fart. act. and infin. med. always
ruflrtiv2, tvxu*, TVztfSxt.
b. In the ting, of the imper. aor. 2. med. usually ex. gr.
yitw,
but in the pi. y'mvSt, XuSsrSi.
c. In the ting, of the imper. aor. 2. act. merely in the following verbs :
nVl, ixSi,
and according to the correct Attic pronunciation also
kxSi, tit.
The compound imper. follow again the general rule, \<rtX&$av, &mX&tt ttrih.
2.) The infin. and part, of the per/, past, are distinct from the rest of the
pats, conjugation even by their accent, which they always have on the
penultima,
rtrvftftirtt, 9ttrtittfiittt'
3.) All infin. in mi, (except the dialectic form funu, 04. V. 9. ) have the
accent on the penultima, rtrvQiteit, tvQSmcci, rmrnnu. See also the infin.
of the conjugation in fti.
4.) The infin. aor. 1. act. in at and the 3 pers. of the opt. act. in a and
at always keep the accent on the penultima, even when they are poly
syllables, ex. gr.
infin. QuZ.%cu, xaibtueat,
3 pert. opt. ^tt) fvka^eci, xu.thivca.?.
6.) All participlet in us and us have the acute accent on the last syllable,
Ttrvfilf, TufStit, ro*\tt, and in the conjugation in pi those in us, as, os, ft.
6.) Wherever the mate, of a part, has the accent, the other genders have
it also, without any regard but to the nature of the syllables, ifvXxttuv,
^jmtww, QoXdmt, Ti/Anrwv, npne-ouea, nfinffov, tltvQus, nruQuia, rtrvfos.
7-) In compounds the accent never can go farther back than the augment.
The few instances, in which there is only a short syllable after the aug
ment, keep the accent on the augment, when compounded, a/tr%e*, iv'trav.
But if the augment be dropped, the rule is as stated in Obs. 1. (t{V/3.)
II. Some particular Ionismt and Mticitmi.
1 . The Ionians make of the imper/. and of the two aor.
iterative! in .tun, pan. form -rui/tnt,
* The infin. aor. 2. act. might be classed among the seeming exceptions (2.)
because the Ionians form it like the fid. 2. in iu>, ex. gr. XmtUn for XaCiit, But the
case unquestionably is here the reverse. The accent was thrown on i<V from the
same motive as on > and 'ut&ki, and the Ionians, who were fond of vowels, let this
accentuation dwindle into a lengthened termination.
3 It is by this and the third peri. ( 12. Obi. 3 ) of the opt. never taking the cir
cumflex on the penultima, that the three similar forms of the aor. 1. are distin
guished, ex.gr.
infin. act.
3. opt. act.
imper. med.
tctt&wreu,
trm^tveai,
wsuhvfev.
But as the number of syllables, or the nature of the penultima, seldom allows this
accentuation, we generally can distinguish only two of these forms, and in such
verbs as tiJtto we cannot even distinguish any of the three. See, for instance,
below in rim, xeftiX", yfcifv.
174
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
for the purpose of denoting the repetition of an action. They are used only in the
indie, and commonly do not take the augment. In the verb tuttm they would look
thus,
ruvrifxtt, rvxrifxapm, from 'iruvrtt, <>f*xv,
rv^ttaxot, ru^affxounv, from irv^tt,
ruxtrxtt, ruinvxcur.v. from trvxer, ipw.
See also the Obs. to the contracted verbs, and to those in ui. There are some
remarkable Epic forms of this kind, which combine the vowel of the aor. 1. with
the characteristic of the pres. and imperf., ^iirnnn, xfinmuxi, ftl^asxit, iiamiarxt,
{Hymn. ApollAOZ.) Sea Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. $ 94. 4.
2. The plutq. (1. and 2.) act. in m with the Ionians made the first pert, m and
the third n or at, (iriri/fic, InriQu, or -u.) Hence the Attic contracted form of
thefirst pert, in n (from
ex. gr.4
Wivc&n for ImrevStt),
which form appears to have been the usual one among the old Attics. But the
tecend perton , (from uc,) and the third m, (from n,) before a vowel, for instance
xttrilSut for irtxtiBu, Aristoph. Nub. 1347. ir>f<, //. 691. (compare below the
third p. imperf. nrxtn, 105. Obs. 3.) were perhaps less common with the Attics ;
whatever has been stated about these forms, and about a third person n (for u,)
beside theplusq.nhw, (see below uhtt, t) 109. III.) rests solely on a few isolated passages,
and vague remarks of the ancient grammarians. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr.
$ 17- Obs. 14.
3. There was instead of the opt. act. in /u a collateral form in dm, tin, t'm,
pi. elv/iit, tlnrt, Vm, called the Attic form ; but it chiefly occurs only in contracted
verbs, ( 105.) and consequently also in the fut. circumfl. ex. gr. Iftix for l(u, of
the fut. ie*, Cyrop. 3, 1, 11. fattlxt, Soph. Aj. 313. In barytone verbs it occurs
merely in the per/. ; ex. gr. Tuptuydm, IktikuSu'm *.
4. Instead of the opt. aor. 1. act. in aipi, the Cohans had a form in in, (rityus,
ims, tut, &c.) of which we have given in .the paradigm three terminations,
sing, second pers. rtyua:, third rtyui, (.) for -tut -tu,
pi. third pers. rv^uxv, for -am,
which are far more usual than the regular ones.
6. The form of the third pers. pi. of the imper. in -t, pass. -<ruv, is called the
Attic, because most usual with the Attics, though it occurs in other dialects. In
the act. form it always is like the gen. pi. of the part, of the same tense, excepting
the perf. (xuro&irurxv or xixc&tvraii,part, r: tsjSotwv.)
III.Second Pers. Sing. Pats.
1. The primitive termination of the second pert, of the pass, form rxi and , (see
87. the Table,) has maintained itself in the usual conjugation only in the perf.
and p/usq., and in the verbs in pu, ( 106. Obi. 2.) It is merely in the less polished
dialects that we find the second persons ruxritxi, irvrrtrt, imper. rotmrc, aor. 1 .
vied. Iri^/art,con), rurrnfeu, &CS
' 2. The Ionians rejected the of this old form, and thus made it */, , it, at,
which the common language again contracted into y, to, u, for instance,
* Except these instances, it is only the anomalous aor.
from 1%v, which
always has ffx9'1919 m the opt.
8 The second pers. pres. pass, of the contracted verbs appears to have been of
frequent occurrence in the popular language ; we find, for instance, in the New
Testament, xxvx&tai for xm^itm, commonly xau%x, the contraction of juutgifa, (see
below rifutw.)
VERBS.
175
/on.,
common,
Ion.,
common,
2. Pret. ind. rvirrtai, rirrri,
imper. ri/rrii,
rvrrau,
conj. rv^rrwt, rvvrry,
2. imperf. \tvxt16, Irtrrrtv,
2. aor. 1. med. Ion. irv^eu, common Irvipai.
Thus the opt. utt was made , which continued to be the common form, not being
susceptible of contraction.But the is never dropped in the per/, and plusq,
excepting Inn. See the Anom. tiim.
8. The Attics had also this peculiarity, that they contracted the v, which came
from tai into u. This form, which has on that account been added everywhere in
the paradigm, was unquestionably the usual one in genuine Attic writers, excepting
the tragic poets, as well as in the popular language, and in the verbs (StuXt/tcu, t'ifttu,
and /ut. S\j,epx,, (see the Anom. .) the second per:
thus remained alone in common use, so that /Wx>< and c% can only be conjunc
tive!.
4. The Doric and Ionic dialects have instead of or m>, (ituVtiv, imper. rimu,)
see 28. 04s. 5.and the Epic poets may lengthen the i of the imper., and make
it u, but it occurs seldom, to. gr. t(ui for 1(u, from
(//. X. 611.)
IV,Ionic form of the third pert. pi.
pass, in arott, ttro.
1. In the third pert. pi. of both the indie, and opt. pats., but never in the eon;'.,
the Ionians changed the into *, and consequently had, for instance,
opt. Tovrtlar* for rvirrtitrs,
perf. *rt*enhvarai for Xivra.'ibxmru.i,
MiKklartti for %'ixXtvrett,
which form was sometimes imitated by the Attic poets, for the sake of the metre.
See also below the verbs in 'm and .
2. The Ionians sometimes do the same with the termination , changing the i
into >, ex. gr.
\$m\'w for i/WxT.
But orreu, (rv^mvrai, rv^otreti, &c.) and the termination of the conj. urrui, always
remain unchanged.
3. The third pert. pi. perf. and plutq. past, may by means of this Ionism be thus
formed, (and even Attic prose-writers, as Thuc. and Plato, do it sometimes,) when
the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, (see o 98. 2. with Obi. 2.) for instance,
TlrvQeirai, for r^ra<,
ieriXxTM,
Kurca,
from tmtk. rirru, rrlxXti, and the like.In airixsrw, (Ion. for iflxxrxi, see the
Anom. Ut'uftah) the characteristic of the verb is retained unchanged instead of
4. The lingual letters appear again iu lieu of the e, which is dropped before vreci,
res, for instance of <ru'3, v'ururitm,
3 pert. pi. TitrtiittTcci for xi<r%i*rm,
and of itii. S^iMpc*
lir.'/'.'azrai, (Hom.) for iffffljyr*',
(where the diphthong is made short on account of the Attic redupl. o 85. 2.) and
with the J, which is concealed in the , being restored, ( 92. 8.)
XtMoathtLTtu, xixaiff&arai, from ffxtvetfa,
6. We find in editions of Homer verbs formed in this manner, which have neither
3 nor ? in the pret. 'Effdiarai, (from fxita, if(*r/uii, 101. Obt. 8. b.) may, how
176
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ever, be derived from a collateral form PAZfl, from which firrari occurs in Homer.
The others cannot be safely relied on in grammar*.
V.Miscellaneous Remarks.
1. Some unpolished dialects, and especially the Alexandrian, (1. Obs. 10.) gave
to the third peri, pi., in the historical tenses, and the opt., the termination cat :
hence we frequently meet, particularly in the Greek translation of the Old Testamerit, with forms like ifaltocat, X^vyocat, XuTurat, (for i?o:nw. tpvytt, Ai/owiv,) &c.
2. The Dorians and the Poets, on the contrary, have in some cases a bare >, with
a short vowel instead of cat, the termination of the third pert. pi. This occurs
especially in the aor.
third pen. pi. irvQ (Tiri>, for -war.
(but never r,t, for with respect to Homer's uiatBtit see fua'nu in the list of Attorn.
Verbs.) The other instances belong to the conjugation in ui.
3. The same unpolished dialects (1) by a still stronger anomaly gave to the third
pers.pl. of the per/, act the (historical) termination at: hence in the New Testament
tytuxav and
in the Batrachom. 178. Usyat. See about the interchange with
the third peri, of the dual in a narrative, ex. gr. II. a. 364. imiumt, instead of -nr,
87. Obi. 5.
4. The third pi. of the principal tenses has commonly iti instead of at or in
the Doric dialect, as we remarked 87- Obi. 3. explaining by it the long vowel before
the c in the usual form : thus,
rvxritrt, Tiriipatn, for rvirrtva, rirvfacit,
conj. vvTTvtm, for rvtrmcit,
fut. 2. ftitUtTty /imvtri, for (uitUvci,) fiitwcn.
<
This form does not take the XftX%vrT*{t~Another Dorism is rvtrnui for tuttiwi.
5. Even in the terminations euca and as, Ara, of the participle, the long vowel
comes from the omission of t or , which appears from the gen. mate. The Dorians
always have and ai in its stead :
rvTreica, for Tvrrowa,
aor, 2. ijtZoita 7, for XaZoZca,
Tu^/ai; rv^aica, for rvipaf, ara.
C. The Epic poets allow themselves to make the accented long in the oblique
cases of the part. per/. ; for instance, riTfiyiraf for -crat. See about the Doric
part. per/, in m, coca, } 111.
7- The Dorians also introduced their A into the terminations Xrurrlfiat, Xrirv/ifiat
rum'ifiat, &c. for -fi.r,t, and, (though less frequently, and only in the later Dorisms,)
into the termination of the aor. pass., ex. gr. Xrotrat, (Theocr. 4, 53.)
8. Thefirst pert. pi. act. in pttt is in the Doric dialect fin, (<ri*rtftii, \riyfm/uii)
and thefirst pers. dual and pi. pass./uSa, piSit, is with the Dorians and Poets
(ttrHit, with an c inserted :
TV*T0/&tc3x, TVTTOUtcSot.
9. The infin. in in and tat had, in the old language and the dialects, the form of
fatai and uit, thus,
Tvirriuitat, rvxrifist, for vutfvur,
riTvipifjiitai, TimQifitt, for nrupXtat,
vvxriuttaiy rti^rr,fitt, for rwnftat,
' II. f.637- axtixiiarai from ax^^i/iai, (see Anom. anax'tp,) and Od. n. 86. IXtiXaixri from \\au, \y.rXapMi, both with doubtful various readings. See Buttm. Complete
Gr.Gr. $ 98. Obt. 18.
' Not teMca, because there is here no contraction. See J 13. Obt, 13. Not*.
VERBS.
177
and sometimes they were syncopated, tipim.(See also below the Contracted Verbs
and the Verbs in pi.)
10. But the Dorians in particular make the infin., instead of in1 or , without
either removing the acute accent backwards, or changing it ; Tor instance, /ntisiu,
tvitt, kiThit, for pigj^in, tuSm, Atliuv, aor. 2. ayxyit for etyetyiTvXa*irlv ^or X^'V*
(not x*J(m.)
11. We also sometimes find in Doric writers the second pers. pres. act. if instead
of us, likewise without any change in the accent ; ex. gr. ipixyts for ipikyut,
Theocr.
12. The old language had in the second pers. act. instead of s,
the final syllable r9,
which in Homer and other Poets is frequently annexed to the conjunctive, and less
frequently to the opt. ; er.gr. iSixwSx for iSiXitt, nXmlurU* for kXm'uh, but which
has maintained itself in the common language only in a few anomalous verbs, (see
below, 108. 109. tip), dpi, <ptip), and 73.)
13. The three terminations, which are considered as peculiarities of the conjuga
tion in fu : 1 sing, pi, 3 sing, si, imper. Si, probably belonged to the verb itself in
the most ancient language. Hence the imper. 9/ not only in the aor. pais., but
also in the syncopated per/. (C) 1 10.) The first pers. pi has maintained itself in the
usual conjugation only in the opt., but the oldest Epic poets had it also in the con
junctive, ex. gr.
IMSffU, kyiympt, for Vasai, ttyayu.
Lastly, the third pers. sing, ci or is also very usual in Epic poetry in the conj., ex. gr.
ri/XTyrn, i%*fft, for tihttii, IxV'
(See about the indie, mi instead of the usual form, J 106. Obi. 10.)
14. The circumnexed forms are either resolved or lengthened by the Ionians, viz.
the infin. aor. 2. act. in is im, as Quyitir for Quyuv from i$uym, (see the Note to Obs.
1. 4.) and the conj. of the two aor. pass. is iu, Epic tin, (see the Note to Ols.
I. 3.) thus:
conj. aor. 1. pass. ilftS'i*, for littSZ, (from iJ!9>;,)
Conj. aor. 2. pass. Twi*i, Kpic vwri'm, for rwr*.
In the persons of this conj., which end in , the Epics sometimes lengthen the
preceding i in this manner, and sometimes double it,(,) for instance, (liiprs, iupu,
iaptm,") ietpt'tr,;, $etpur., Ii. y. 436. %. 246. (Irao'igv, ffwru, ffuTlla,) f&Tnri, t. 27>
Compare below, the dialect forms of the verbs in pi, which must be here considered
as a basis
15. The conj. in Epic poetry sometimes loses its long vowel, and takes s and ! for
i and ii, ex. gr. Upt>, let us go, (see below dpi, conj. ?,) iyilftpit, for -*pn, {II. (3. 440.)
Xfuvrtpu for conj. aor. 1. Ifitetpii, (a. 141.) ipupirai for fir&t, (Qd. n. 41.) jwr/XAir*/,
(3. 6/2.) See also tiUpn under oTia, ( 109. III. 6.) It occurs most frequently in
the conj. aor. pass., for instance ietptltpir, iapu'm'.
" There is a third reading in the quoted passages, (//. y. 436. x- 246.) and others,
where it clearly is the conj., viz. iapiim, iapiin, without the iota subscriptum. See
about it, the Note to J 107. Olis. IV. 9.
* This has been attempted to be considered a mere deviation from syntax, as if
it were the indie, instead of the conj. But as this interchange occurs only where
the metre does not allow the conj., it is obvious that, whilst the language was not
settled, pronunciation came to the assistance of the metre. And this view of the
matter is placed beyond all contradiction by instances, where there is no indie.
similar to the abbreviated conj. This is the case with tlt+pn, Sue/ft, (for Suyur,)
jV<>, and all conjunctives of the aor. pass. We cannot presuppose in Homer an
indie, ilia, J know, Sslu, I put, Ii, I go, for else these forms would as readily occur
as real indie, and be met with also in the other persons, (iiJ, itiwri, &c. with the
signification to know,) which, however, is not the fact.
178
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
1. The rules, which we have just given, shew merely the man
ner, in which the different tenses are formed. But no language
affords fixed rules to know which formation each particular verb
follows, when there is a diversity of formations possible. A great
part of this is matter of memory, and just as we are obliged in
Latin to remember the per/, and supinum of every verb, especially
of the third conjugation, we must in Greek remember in each
verb every one of the tenses, of which we have been hitherto
treating in particular Sections.
2. It is of the most material importance to know whether the
aor. 2. act., the perf. 2., and the aor. 2. jwss. of a given verb are in
use. These tenses are certainly related to each other in form ;
but it does not follow, (as has frequently been observed,) that a
verb, which has one of these tenses, has also the others. On the
contrary we have seen that the aor. 2. act. and pass, seldom
occur together in one verb. The lexicon, or the lists in the
Appendix, must be diligently consulted. Actual instances must
have been met with of each of these tenses, which is a very un
common occurrence, or it may safely be assumed that the verb
barely has the other tenses, viz. the aor. I. act., perf. 1., and aor.
1, pass1.
3. It may be considered as an invariable rule that all trisyllabic
and polysyllabic derivative verbs, which end in
at2,a>,
echaif vvu, evu, 6u, dui, iu,
from
from
from
from
OKiVD,
from
from
from
from
VO(JLOS,
TtaTs,
Tl/AMJ
have only
the aor. 1. act., perf. 1. (in xa,) and aor. 1. pass.
Obs.\. Some of these terminations, however, are not derivative in some verbs,
that is to say, not derived from a nounmbtt., or adj., but mere lengthened forms of a
1 Exactly as in English the greatest number of verbs by far have ed, in the impetf. and part, pail, (/ love, loved, have loved,) and the smallest number have the
monosyllabic imperf. and a pari, past differing from it, (Isee, taw, have seen.) And
in German most verbs have the imperf. te, and the part, past t, (' ich sage, ich tagte,
ich habe gesagt,') and comparatively few a monosyllabic imperf. and thepor/.n, ('i'eA
trage, ich trug, ich habe getragen' ;) the first form alone is used in German for deri
vative verbs, which in Greek have also merely the aor. 1. &c.
VERBS.
simple radical pret. tense, and thereby rendered anomalous. (See 92.) These
verbs may make a second aor. from this simple form, ex. gr. iXiraim from AAIT1J
HXim, Ictfiiu from AEM'l iHpm : they are all stated in the list of Anomalous f-'erbsOb$. 2. Hither belong also those derivative verbs, which, according to 119. 4.
end in rru, rru, XX, &c. and are derived from nominatives. The verb ikXatrm is
the only one of these verbs, which has an aor. 2. past. (fiXkiyw.)
105.Conjugation of Verbs contracted.
1. The Greek verbs in koi, da, and bu, conform in the main to
the rules stated and examples given, and in the Section on the
formation of the tenses we have attended to their peculiarities.
But in the pres. tense and imperf., act., and pass., when the
vowels at, , and o happen to stand immediately before the vowels
of the termination, (and partly remain unchanged iu the Ionic
dialect, see below, Obs. 1.) they undergo in both the Attic and
the common language a contraction.
2. This contraction follows the general rules of 28. excepting
some terminations in the verbs in bu. Instead of contracting oei
into ou, and ori into a, according to the general rule, the i of the
second and third person predominates, and the final syllables oeis
and oris are contracted into on, and osi and oy into o:. Thus
Second pers. indie, act. iMoSben, }
-
a,
conj.
^iffSorir,
J> contr. /xiuJoir,
Third pers. indie, act. /xkj&oei, )
. _
conj.
HiO-Sori,
a..
J> contr. untjoi,
^ '
and in the same way
Second pers. indie, and
conj. pass. nio-Sbr,, contr. fMoSoT,
and as ooi is likewise contracted into o, three moods, viz. the
indie, conj., and opt. of the act. voice become perfectly like
in these two persons. The infin. bw is correctly contracted :
fAKT&osiy, contr. (Aiajovv.
3. The whole indie, and cory. ac<. and pass, of the verbs in dai,
are also perfectly similar, being contracted according to the gene
ral rule, viz. ae and an into at, ati and yi into jt, and ao as well
as aou and aw into w.
N 2
as o
o w M PI H n
/Xitf&oy ,
/e
hire,)
(/o
for
ow<
(*ioyen.
,&o yTOj',
jxifyen.
&ouyror.
yen.
ri xaovrot,
T\y.uvros,
yen.
puu^ooiy,
&oov,
Sooveay
(y,)
/^if &o yf i,
(XKxSoETDy, JAKT&OETOy, (/UtSo /xev, jL*l<7&OETE,
fx-iaiJoeis,
Ti/!Aa TiptSroy,
rov,
fX4<T&0Ely,
Tifjuars,
Ti/Ajiy,
honor,)
(to
ocoy,
ano/xvauway,
rusee,
wy,
ifZ-uv,
Activum.
Prisons.
(v,)
Ti/xaot/ir ,
1S173.eep.
Tt/JLsLsti, TlfJ-OLtl,
aroiEiroy,
TtfAaEiy,
woiov/aev,
woieite,
yen.
iroieovTor,
9TOIEIV,
jfe/l.
woioy ror,
do,
(to
make,)
uttov,
moivaia,
(v,)
iroieavai,
TlOlisTOV, woie'erov,
woiitre,
itoikis,
noitu,
Sing.
Indie.
Dual,
Plur.
contr.
In
fin.
Part,
< n ta csCD
fj,taSuai,
(y.)
fj.taSa>,
fj-taho,ti* fxtaSoT,
fMaSoifl ,
fuaSoTs, tuaSoT,
fMaSoTev,
"'
(oiWay.)
-own,
oitijacV,
otriTWV,
Attic,
or
o'm,,
foins
j,taSolv)v, -OITJTOy,
2
"Seep.
179.
S179.3.p.
ee,
(v,)
fuaSiuat,
pU(T&OT]T0y, /Ajf &onToy, fi.tcsSoaiJ.zv, fMoSonrt,
/ANX&OYir,
fj,taSo tfj.t,
fj,taS6ais, puaSoot,
(y,)
nixwot,
rtyJirov, Tipiaroy, rtfj.S>fJAv, Ttft,xre,
TlfJ.?S,
Ttflu",
TltujifU, rtfj.as,
Ttfif-,
((jr^av.)
-amn,
amfi.it, See
Ob*.
below,
this
form.
about
Attic
4.
rtfj-aiv ,
cyfl,
j4fitc,
or awir,
-at rov,
(y,)
rtfiiwat,
Ti/xawirov, TI/XalTOV, rtfA.iwfjt.ev, rtfiAmt,
Tl/XaOI/lAI,
rtfji ots, TtfLOLOl,
(v,)
nsotwat,
T 0l)TOV,
W01OIT0V, WO(0THV,
notufJAV,
sroiijte,
woioir, vcuot,
9roi<5,
owi7f)JT.e,v,
-oio'inTiomyv, (oinuav.)
oWis,
ntotolm,
am,
or
(v,)
noteaiat,
notimrov, itotinrov, notiufi&v,
-xoteai, noieys,
itoieotfi.
noti-n ,
notion,
TTOIeV),
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
Sing.
Opt.
Dual,
Plur.
pnu&Or
o Tft/i av,
p.Infin.
/tx(Ej/.xina&farxmEWai, Pari.
&c.
iteif,
(U.ia&o2TOV, E/AKX&OI/T IV, /xi(;&o5piEv,
pmr&ouraiv,
ftNT&OyTE,
/xi'irS'oy,
/xifOr&OEro/iTav,
/XKT&odvTO/Vj
jIAKT&OETOV, j(il(T&OE'T<UV,
jIAi(T&OEr,
(lua&i a i,
in
following
The
four
the
like
conjugated
tensessame
aretunru.
>(<r&o ,
orriy-aruitrm,
&c
Part.
xus,
TEInfin.
Tl/*7)KE'vai,
Tl/CAfUVTO/V,
ETiptarov, ETI/XOSTW, ETi/AlZ/LtEVj Iny-art, ETl'/X.t (Vj
OrTif as-raieav,
TI/HOS VTt l',
ETETIJIAWEIV,
TETIptWaj
Tl/Jirta ), iTt/Mria ,
Part.
&c.xus,
naiOrslrua t,
Infin.
it itwrpilvou,
fl-OIEITiUV,
woiEi'ra;, flTOISlTOV,
sroi'si,
itooritirca av,
WoiEovnwy,
EftWOI^XEIV,
aroiEe'ify, jrotisirov, 5J-0IE TOIV, T OiE TE,
T OIE ,
Sing.
Imper.
Dual,
Plur.
Sing.
vperf.
Dual,
Plur.
Plusq.FutA.
1.
\Aot:
tJ.ioSavLi.ai,
fJ.lAovAe,
ixiAovt.oi,
puAwfj.Aci,
puAuAs, /JuAuvrai,
jjuAoi*,
fj.iAo7*,
fj.iaboifj.Aov
fJuA&OLCXt,
IXiAuTai, /xiaS'ci/xaS'o*,
fj.fAwfj.ai,
fJuAisAlV,
(AlAilTXl,
/Al T&06(T&E,
fJ.lAiufJ I.i,
(juoAiri,
(JuAou(AEOV,
TifJ.UfJ.AoV,
TlfJ.XULI.AoV,
vrotufj-Aov,
(JLlAoTiTXi,
fuAorrt,
179.
3.
Sp.
ee
TlfJ.UfJjAoV,
T\fj.ufi.ai,
Tifj.ara.1,
TtfixoAxi, rifj.difJt.evof,
Tifj.,ufj.ai
Tifjjjt,
Ttfjuarxi,
Tt/j.p,
TtfJ.XSTXi,
TlfJLasAxi, Tifj.a6fj.svos,
rifjL3.afj.ai,
TlfJ,X7ITai,
hoiul xl,
JtoiriTxi,
Tifj,xrt,
sT,
orroT),
TlOi VLJ.Xi,
3FOI01/ XE&OV,
xoieitxi,
Koirt,
in,
oraroiEip,
noi oy.aL,
ironi/jiAov,
VOl iTal,
ItoiesAxt, irotiofj.evos,
S179.
eep.
7COlid>fJ.AoV,
noi viAov, noi nAov, kolzui jlAx, noi -nAe, HOi lUVTXi,
Dual,
Plur.
ZOlSMfJLat,
iroi rt,
Sing.
Indie.
Dual,
Part.
Plur.
Infin.
Sing.
Cory.
lx.iabolfj.Yiv,
|jr
o fAiobMouabu,
> fjutabov,
vabua v,
fx.Otabovabuv, fx.ig
abovabsf fjnabog
fj5
.iabovabuv,
fX.tabolfj.ibov,
fjuabolo, /XIJ&oItO,1
fX.iabouabov,
Efx.taboufj.ebov,
EfX.taboVfX.YIV,
Efj.iabovTO,
fj-iaboivTO,
E/JLtaboilVTO.
Efx.tabov,
fx,taorboeabua v,
fj.tabo tfx.ibov,
fx.iabo lfj.Yiv,
fitabo to, fjnabo iTo,
fx.iaboeabu, fx.iab6iabov,
fxiaboeabuv,
fx.taboiabuv, fx.taboeabe,
ifX-iaboETO,
TI/JLCOfAEboV,
Tt/JLUTO,
Tifj,dabu,a v Ttfx,iabuv,
TlfX-uaboV, Tt/jLcoabviv, Tifj.cofj.eba, TtfjMabe,
TifMatbuv,
Ttfx.dabu, Tiftavbov, Tifx.dabe,
TlfJ.S>VTO,
ETlfJ.ufJ.ib0V,
ETtjJ.a6jJ.EboV,
EltOtOVfJ.ebov,
ETlfJ.UfJ.fiV,
ETIfJLXTO,
ETlfX.U,
TlfX.U,
TlfJ.010,
Efx,tab6ov,
fx.tab6ou,
Tl X.UfJ.Vi ,
EfJ.lO-boOfJ.YiV,
Tt/xOraiabua v,
Tifx.aolfx.ebov,
Tifx.aoifj,Yiv,
TlfxioiTO,
Ti/x iabuv,
nfxaoivro,
ETIlJ.aOtJ.YiV,
ETifX.%OV, ETlfX.aETO,
TI/ AOt /,
T!otolfx.Ebov,
iroioio, ZOIoTtO,
WOlEIT&OKTfltV,
notoTabov, irotolabYtv, vototfAiba, uoto'iabe,
noio'tvTo,
eicot vfx.Yiv,
inotitTo,
E1S01 V T0.
inotov,
WOI6EOr'<T&iU<TaV,
noieoifxebov,
1tOliOlfX.YiV,
asoteoio, 9roOITO,
note abuv,
W>ie'e<t&e,
Esroi0/u,nv,
EBWoZ/, et oie'eto,
VERBS.
185
Dual,
Plur.
<neitoii\fj.ai,
ntnolvKJai,
neTfowTM,
6woiM/x,E&oy,
TtwoirttiSov,
weiroiwSov,
nenm-nij.t^ci,
nrtitoi-n&e,
wewoiwrati,
Perf.
teti/miaczij
rtr'nj.i\<sa\,
nrlfj.r\rat,
TiTifA-niAeSov,
tetiVmct&ov,
teti'/xjkt&ov,
TtTifj.v\fj.&a,
rtTifAwSi,
rtrlfj.riyrai,
TSTl(J.riaSat,
Infin.
nsiroirioSdi,
TETIjtMl/XE'yOfj
Part.
itsitoii\y.iios,
Conj. and opt. wanting, See the few verbs,
them, 88. 6. Obs. 9.
TSTifjmao,
Imper. sing.
TtTifj.i\aSu, &c.
nsnowaSai, &c.
Plusq.
sTSTtfj.r]fJ.rl\i,
smuoi-nfrnv,
Sing.
iTSTifJ-WO,
snsnol-nao,
IrtrliJ-nro,
STiTifJ.7lfJ.sSoy,
sirsilovriiJ.sSov,
Dual,
STSTIfJ/TiaSoU,
eVcWOI'WIT&OV,
ETETlpf)<X$T)V,
sirsirotrioSnv,
E'TSTI/lX7)/XE&a,
sTrs?roiy}fj.sSa,
Plur.
ETcT/A7)5&E,
litsiloiriaSs,
etet//xt)vto,
invnoiriiTO,
Fh<. 1.
,4 or. 1. EVoiri&i'iv,
fW. 3. WEW0i7)(T0/[X.a;i,
JW. 1.
Aor. 1.
OTOinaofj.ai,
inoinaafJ-W,
TifJ.riSr\aofJ.ai,
e'ti/atiSw,
Ttrnj.rii3oiJ.oii,
Medium*,
nix.TtaoiJ.ai,
sTifj.Daxfj.m,
Verbal Adjectives.
TtfJ.miO!}
notnrsos,
rtfrnros,
<ttWt\TQS,
fj.sfj.laSaiiJ.ai,
fj.z/j.to$uaat,
fj,sfj,laa>TXi,
fJ.SfJ.iaSufJ.tSoi,
fj.sfj.iaSuaSov,
fJ-SfXiaSuaSoV,
fj.synaStifj.sSa,
fj.Sfj.laSa>aSs,
fj.sfj.iaSa/vTat,
fj.sfj,iaSwoSai,
fj.sfj.iaSa>fj,hos.
which can form
fj.sfj.taSaiao,
fj.SfJ.iaSaiaSu, &C.
sfJ.ifJ.iaSufJ.riv,
sfj.sfj,'toSuao,
sfJ-sfJ-loSuTO,
sfJ.siJ.iaSufj.sSov,
sfj.sfj.!aSuoSov,
sfJ.s/j.iaSuaSr)v,
sfJ.sfj.taSufj.sSa,
S/J.S/J.taSuaSs,
sfj.sfj.iaSuvTo,
sfj.taSuSnv,
fj.sfj.taSuaofj.at,
fj.iaScuoofj.ai,
efj.taSuadjj.nv.
fMoSuTSOf,
(J.taSuTOS.
9iuttu, to make for one's telf; n/uirfxi, to honor, (like the ac/.) (iirhi<r6xi, to
hire, take to hire.
186
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 1. It was laid down in ancient Grammars without any limitation, that the
resolved form of contracted verbs was Ionic. This conjugation may more correctly
he styled the old or fundamental form, hut can only with respect to the verb3 in m
be strictly called Ionic, that is to say, that form of conjugation, which was emploved
by all Ionic writers, and by the later Ionic prose-writers exclusively. Epic poets, on
the contrary, often made use of the contracted form, and sometimes only preferred
the lengthened im to in, ex. gr. ixniv, v\uur, vuxuitrKt, &c.The resolved form of
the verbs in j can only so far be called Ionic, as Epic poets made use of it on but
few occasions, ex. gr. io^tiu, rrtivxavra, i/xuriaviriv, &c. The verbs in tin are found
resolved only in theJtrsl person ; they else generally occur contracted or lengthened
in a way peculiar to the Epic poets, (see below.) The verbs in in and in never are
used in Ionic prose, but either contracted, as in Herod.
Itixm,
luwra,
/3iJ for fiiim, i*Xu, i^^SsJyrs, 1tiwti, &c. or with the peculiar deviations in point
of formation and contraction, stated below, Obs. 7. etc.
Obs. 2. In the Attic and common language none of the contractions of this con
jugation were ever neglected, not even in Attic poetry, (that is to say, in the
dramatic senary.) Little words in s, of which the pres. act. is disyllabic in the
resolved form like
are alone excepted. They only admit the contraction ,
ex. gr. tju, ?t;s;, mT> : they are resolved in all their other forms, ex. gr. fin, x'upxi,
H'lt/tit, s>iv<, <r>iy, &c. excepting however, ,", (to tie,) ex. gr. ri JE, tu tsSin,
Plato Crat. () imlnr, Aristoph. Plut. 589, iaiiuifuu, See. But hit, (to lack,) makes
TO YlOV, "hitfiOLt, &C
Obs. 3. The third pen. sing, impcrf. takes the moveable in the reBolved form,
(Homer, i'^ut, Unit.) but not in the contracted one. Yet Homer once has wxm of
irxin. (Compare the plusq. Obs. II. 2. to 103.)
Oil. 4. The form known by the name of the dttic opt., peculiar to contracted
verbs,(see Obs. II. 3. to 103.) has been given atlength in the paradigm, p. 181. that
its analogy may be thoroughly understood. It must, however, not be forgotten that
the Attic language, guided merely by euphony and clearness, employed parts of
both forms ; especially
1.) the pi. of the Att. opt. was little used, (particularly of the verbs in u> and
in.) because of its length. The third pert. pi. in tiinu, farm, was much
less used. The Attics always said truent, rt/tmv, /urUutv.
2.) but the opt. in aim of the verbs in in and in was much more in use in the
sing, than the other.
3.) In the verbs in in the Attic opt. (n/xnni, &c.) is used in the sing, almost
exclusively, and also much more employed in the pi. (the third pert.
excepted,) than the other two.
Obs. 5. Some verbs in in take after their contraction ' for a, as in the Doric
dialect, (see below Obs. 15.) This is particularly known of the following four
verbs,
(to live,) xfwSai, (Jo use,)
<riyt, (to be hungry,) ii^h, (to be thirsty,)
from
%(i, (gee both among the Anom.) rutin, i,$it>, ($, JS, iZ<i, XV*'"U> &*0
But the following three verbs, which approximate much in their signification,
xtin, (to rub,) r/iin, (to wipe,) -i-i*>, (to cleanse,)
were contracted in the same way, at least by correct Attic writers.
1 See, however, the Anom. tin.The third pers. sing. aor. 1. f^ta of the verb x'tn,
(see the Anom.) must not be confonnded with the third pers. sing, imperf. : the latter
is contracted, (iXn, ixu,) the former not, ex.gr. Aristoph. Nub. 75, KriXm.
VERBS.
187
Obs. 8. The verb fiyiu, (to be cold,) deviates in its contraction ; it has u and y
instead of tu and , ex. gr. vijht, fiyit, opt. fiy^ti; but it is not constancy observed,
at least not in our editions. The lonians have the same deviation in a verb of tha
opposite meaning, lifiu, (to perspire,) gives <5{<mr, U. i. 27. <3{i>i, Hippocr. tie Aer.
Aq. IjOC. 17.
...
Dialects.
Obs. 7. As the lonians form the second pers. pass, in their usual conjugation in
si and i, they have in the verb3 in ( an accumulation of vowels, which the Ionic
prose-writers retain in the pres. (roiiixi, Uranism, &c.) The Epio poets sometimes
contract the two first vowels, ex. gr. u>',tu*>, (just as mJHtrsu, uv'.h'ho,. > Sometimes
one 1 is elided, that of ill always is ; ex. gr. pv^'tai, (puSiapai,) Od. fi. 202. tpt&ic,
(fa/i'upai,) Herod. 9, 120. aWu, Vc,iyi, &c. The forms of this second pers. in i*, iy,
in, Uu. aw. iw, which we inserted in the paradigms for the sake of uniformity in
the analogy, do not occur anywhere.
Obs. 8. The lonians, as we have seen, do not commonly resolve the verbs in am
into their proper vowels, yet frequently chauge the into 1, ex. gr.
egtw, loUfiil, for egav, i^dofilv,
Qiirinrtf, for fttrinrlt,
XfllTeii, finx*nwSoii, for arou, arSot,
and the like. Sometimes they change > into i, ( 27. Obs. 1. 10.) ex. gr.'/mx*VtUMTOtl, Vi'- >,'//. &C.
Obs. 9. In the third pers. pi., where the lonians, (according to Obs. 4. to 103.)
change the into a,
for jt,) they sometimes use this termination for ir#,
(eliding one 1,) but probably only of verbs in in, as i,^>tTO for -aim, intra
usually iftyixamtTB.In the per/, and plusq. they not only change wrxi and mrxt
into narat, ma-rat, (ex.gr. rirrtrnxrai, Ki^oXvart, Horn.) but commonly use 1 instead
of , ex. gr.
tlxtarat, irirtuiaro, for mxyvrat, iriri/lrjvra.
Obs. 10. The old Ionian Kpic poets employ the contraction at times, and at others
not. The verbs in au, however, were seldom resolved, (Obs. I.) but the Poets were
at liberty to lengthen again the contracted vowels by placing a similar short or long
vowel before ; thus they made of a in
(i^dtn,) oaav,
{av8,
(ifX**-*"') MX"*-?'
atrxaXaa,
2 pers. pass, (/unif,) ftti,
/tia,
ayaoaffSi, i:cj.'}ii,
AyofdarSij ptutaeScct,
and of 6 or u in
(efOAf,) fym,
ifem,
imper. pass. (aXeuv.) aXm, aXem,
(faaoufft,') fiamri,
faaun,
opt. (aineioira,) ainiira,
atnamra,
(iadavrt,) daunt,
^mufft,
part. fern. (xWa,) rSvJieu, i&mftu
Such lengthened syllables seldom occur in Ion. prose, Herod. 6, 11. riytfium,
4, 191, Mpivti.Sometimes the is put last, ex. gr.
iifiuorrtf, rif&matftt, for nf&vrtt, nfimpi, (from amis, ecai/it9.')
8 See about the iota subscriptum the Note to Obs. 15.
This lengthening bymeans of the m produced in some verbs a peculiar formation
mis, tin. See the Anom, %dm,
and piim (in pi/twrxu.)
188
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Thus Poets could use instead of yixOtru either ytximtru or yiXtmru according to
the exigency of the metre.Homer's part, fern, ituvriuira. for aeura, or iotea is a
peculiar anomaly.
Obt. 11. AU the forms lengthened with eu are also common to the verbs in in,
though they cannot originate in them either by resolution or lengthening; for
instance,
(a^asvc.,) aewci, Epic attain,
(iniMtr*, intomv,) "hnwuvra, or.toUv, Kpic ^n'lomrcy Sij'omcv.)
Obt. 12. The Ionians make a less frequent use in these verbs of the imperf.
iterative in *, {Obt. II. l.to 103.) ex.gr. Qik'nrxn in Herod. /3w*Xiincif in
Homer. This form is never contracted, but sometimes syncopated by the old Poets,
(by dropping the ,) ex. gr. i^ifxi, (for n^iia-xi,) from fix'">
from tiu, and
lengthened wirwnif from raurau.
Obi. 13. That the Dorians instead of contracting u into cv, commonly make it iv,
and that this contraction is also used by the Ionians, has already been noticed
above, J 28. Obt. 5. Thus they make of m>
ruivpLtty rrttuifitti, mtvurtf, itd'hm.
But also of the verbs in we frequently find in Herod, and others, instead of m
contracted into tv, the contraction iv, which is contrary to analogy, for instance,
liixatiuv, iiixaiiv, T/.s.ciCvn:. from S/xaw0A>,
and by the interchange of and i, (06s. 8.) the same contraction occurs also in the
verbs in <u>,
uouTlviy iyanurrif, from ueuram, ayttTuu,
Lastly m is not only used for uu, and consequently for am, but also for ttv, ex. gr,
irnv9tt Qikivf* 10, for vmouff^ tvrij QiXiouret) tvrtt,
ytXturx, for yiXaivcet, Zffa,
ilKMUffly for ilKUIMVffl, BVtt.
Attentive reading will shew which of these different forms occurs most frequently
in either of these two dialects. But it follows of course that the third pert. pi. xtnuri,
ytxiin, can only be Ionic, since the Dorians have TouutTi, yikiSm, (compare Obt. V. 4.
to & 103.)
Obt. 14. There is another more j93olic than Doric contraction, which causes the <
to be absorbed by a preceding a, which thus becomes long, ex.gr. Queatrts for fori'
vrif, third pert. pi. TurZm or rlMW.
Obt. 15. If the Ionians change the contracted a or a into n and >i, ex. gr.
Qtnm, IwSxi, and the like, it agrees with the nature of their dialect, but it is done
only by some of their writers, for instance, Hippocr. : Herod, has ojf>, >, and even
X(Zr&cu, xt*} &c. The Dorians, on the contrary, who generally use 2 instead of *,
prefer the in these contractions, omitting, however, the iota subscriptum in the
contraction of an", (compare Obt. V. 10. to 103.) for instance,
lyi for i;S,
rtXpUTi for TcXuin, and the like, whilst in conjugating they yet say riX/tSm, and
so on. They have the same contraction in the infin. of the verbs in in, ex. gr. w
r/t*v for Kigftuv.
Obt. 16. The Epic Poets have likewise the * as a contraction, but only in some
10 The Doric iurx becomes through contraction s7, not -, which occurs only
in the part. aor. 2. (x/3*r,) where there is no contraction ; see Obt. V. 6. to 103.
11 The omission of the iota tubtcriptum was formerly general in the in/in. of verbs
in u, ex. gr. n/tit, 0Sr, 5. It is but lately that the correct orthography has
again been generally adopted. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. J 105. Oil. 17.
Some grammarians always omitted this iota tubtcriptum in lengthened syllables ;
VERBS.
189
forms of both in and t, and chiefly in the dual t, ex. gr. rprmiinm, l/utgrnrw,
(from mihiu, i/ucfTim,') and in the lengthened in/in. in
/iimi, instead of ut and
St, ex. gr. ipcpitxi, (from Qefiv,) f&AfUtm, yaii/iKai (for
OJ. 17. The Epic iflp/uuu for Ajeuv is the only instance of this in verbs in 1*.
See a list of Contracted Verbs in the Appendix.
IRREGULAR CONJUGATION.
106. Verbs in (u.
1. We begin the anomaly of the Greek verbs with what, from
the termination of the first pers. pres. indie., is called the con
jugation in /At. This does not include a great many verbs, like
the two preceding conjugations, but only a small number of verbs,
and parts of verbs, which in some essential points deviate from
the numerous other verbs, though connected by a common ana
logy.
Ob. 1 . The verbs, which are conjugated in Grammars as examples of this con
jugation, are pretty nearly the only ones, which adopt this formation in all the parts,
where it is applicable ; whatever else belongs hither, consists merely in isolated
parts of some anomalous or defective verbs, or of Epic forms. But even the verbs
in fu, which are in use, do not all agree among themselves in all their parts ; each
verb must, on account of its peculiarities, be stated completely as an anomalous
verb.
2. All verbs in /. have a root, which according to the usual
formation, would end in u purum,
28. 1.) and chiefly in iu,
aw, 001, via. Hence it is usual in grammar to refer that more
uncommon formation to this more usual one, and to say, for
instance, that the verb n'&ai/xi comes from a simpler form Efl.
3. The peculiarity of the conjugation in
is confined to these
three tenses,
the pres., imperf., and aor. 2.
and consists chiefly in this, that the terminations of the inflection,
ex. gr. /aev, re, v, y.a.1, are not appended by means of the connect
ing vowel, (optEv, te, ov, optai,) but immediately to the radical
vowel of the verb itself, for instance,
1! Consequently o'fjja; mentioned in a Note to the last Ob. in j 106. and BwBai,
(see the Anom. Sax,) belongs hither. Compare also 13>iJt in the Anom. Sicfiui.
Both kinds of contraction, (that into , and that into 11 and i,) which became pecu
liar to some dialects, when the language was polished, were unquestionably, like
many other peculiarities, in general, but fluctuating use in the oldest language. The
form even continued in common use in some instances, (as
&c.) Need we
then wonder at meeting in Epic poetry with many other forms, which were retained
for the sake of euphony ?
190
A GREER GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
the three tenses; a and s always become n, {indie, pres.
o becomes u, (indie, pres. u/m,) and v becomes 7>, (indie, pr. vpi.)
In the rest of the terminations it most usually occurs in its ori
ginal short form, e, a, o, v, ex. gr. rlSy/xi,rfoepsv, E&Effav, ti&e'vzi,
n'&STi, Ti&Eputi, &c. with some exceptions, which are best learned
in every verb separately, from the paradigms, or from the list of
Anom. (as wjpjvai, St^n/uu.)
OJi. 2. The termination of the second pers. past, in the common conjugation,
(j, ,) being derived from im, i, (see Obs. III. 1. 2. to 103.) and the connecting
vowel being omitted in the conjugation in fti, it is simply sm, co, in the verbs in pi,
(exactly like the per/, and plusq. pass, of the common con jugation,) n'9i-nu, ir/Si-,
"nz-exi, &c. But here, too, the contraction with the radical vowel is more or less
used in some verbs,
riBis, WiSov, (irf,) '/fa* for "meat, "iiu.sa. See the AWe to p.
and as the Ionians, after rejectingthe a, change the radical vowel a into i,(see below,
6 107- OAs. 4.) they make of It-arxi, (7ruu,) "m. The contracted form (i9ou, XSav, Sc.)
is probably the only one in use in the aor. 2.
8. All the other tenses are formed according to the common
conjugation from the radical verb without any redapl. ; ex. gr.
ti'S)/aj, (EH,) fut. Srivcu. Some anomalous verbs of this kind
have, however, peculiarities in these tenses, which must be kept
distinct from the conjugation in pu. We shall first review the
peculiarities common to several verbs.
9. The two verbs V*m*( and StSu/M shorten the vowel also in
those tenses of the pass, voice, which belong to the common con
jugation :
Act. swu, per/, est)**, pass. perf. fcaepuu, aor. EVa&nv,
Both ri$niM and tntut ( 108. I.) do the same merely in the aor,
pass, and in the fut, which is dependent on it :
ete&hv, (for e&e'&^Vj from Efi,)
e^eis-, part. aor. 1 pass, (from 'Efi.)
They both change the radical vowel into 11 in the perf. act. and
pass.
vibcixa, ribiiy.au, eTxai, eT/ash.
10. The three verbs T(&*)/*t, Tti/ai, liluyn, have a peculiar form
for the aor. 1. in xcc,
iSrixa, r,x.x, sowxa,
which must be carefully distinguished from the perf.
Obs. 3. There are no verbs in tt/u and u/ti of three or more syllables without the
redupl. in any of the principal dialects, excepting perhaps
and some deponents
in npuu, (for i/tai,) ufim, and s/uti, (from *,) which must be looked for among the
Anomalous Verbs, ex. gr. 'ii'0/.u.ca, iitt/ixi, mfuu.
192
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 4. The verbs In upi are also anomalous as far as they belong to a class of
verbs derived from different themes. The termination upi or
&c. is only a
strengthening syllable of the pret. and imperf. The other tenses are formed of the
simpler radical verb, in which this v or ,v is also wanting, ex. gr. 'huxmpt of AEIKH,
r(\nvpi of ZBE11, and are therefore stated here as defective verbs. See $ 112.14.
There are but a few parts of a few anomalous verbs, which conform, beside these,
to the conjugation in upi. To know instantly when the u is long or short, we
need only to compare 'Irrnpi : hlxwpi is long like "errtpt, iuxvupir short like 'Irrxptv,
aor. 2. (see the Amm. Ji!*,) isi is long like !rn;>, &c.
Obs. 5. All verbs in pi increase their anomaly by having in the pra. and imperf.
persons and moods, which desert the conjugation in pi, and follow, as contracted,
the conjugation of in, au, iu, retaining, however, the redupl. (as if the verb, for
instance, were TieEn,) and those in upi, as if of its. In the meantime they must
be conjugated entirely in pi to have a distinct idea of their analogy, and the Notes
will point out where the simple form predominates in the common language.
Wherever this is not done, it may be assumed that the formation from TI8EQ
occurs little or not at all, as is the case with the first peri. sing. pres. . The con
jugation in pi belongs, on the whole, to the strictest Atticism.
Obs. C. We subjoin a few general remarks. There are in many languages two
terminations in the conjugation of verbs, one with a connecting vowel, the other
without it ; for instance, in German da lebest, du lebst, in English thou drinkest,
drinkst. There is no absolutely general principle, by which it can be ascertained
which of the two ways is the oldest ; but it is more natural, if there be no prepon
derating analogy for the contrary, to consider the longer form grammatically as the
basis, and the short one as a syncopated form of the long one. In this sense the
conjugation in pi by virtue of the peculiarity stated above (3.) is unquestionably a
syncope of the common conjugation, and wc have no right to assume that the fuller
form had anciently prevailed and been abbreviated.
Obs.T. The syncopated form is the most natural when else two vowels would meet
in pronunciation. Whilst the fuller form was preferred in Greek in the most con
siderable number of verbs, and became gradually contracted, (fikii-pit, piXtvpit.)
the syncopated form maintained itself in some others, (3i-/ti.) This syncope, how
ever, could not have taken place in those terminations of the common conjugation,
which consist of only one vowel, (Si'-a, Si-n, 9i-t,) and it is exactly in these instances
that another form of terminations pi, a, Si, maintained itself, by which a conso
nant was now immediately appended to the radical vowel. To this was added the
lengthening of this vowel, and thus arose, for instance, out of the root 3 the
forms Sfi-pi, i9-r, St-pit,
&c. The redupl. probably served only to strengthen
such short verbs in the pres. ; and thus originated, (according to 96. Obt. 2. and 4.)
a simpler form, (f3r,) for the aor., and a longer one for the pres. and imperf. (rltnpi,
in'Snn.) See an anomalous redupl. in the Anom. ivlttipi.
Obs. 8. Heme it appears that the formation of the essential particulars of the
verbs in pi might just as well have taken place in parts of any other verb, and it is
therefore quite superfluous to assume a peculiar first pert. pres. in pi for every
tense or form, in which that kind of inflection is found. We shall see below,
110. 10. perfects, of which the plural is formed in that manner, and (ibid. G.) aor. 2.
of this kind in verbs, which have either the usual form in the pra. (fciiv, Ji/,
aor. 2. 10/wf, iiin,) or a very deviating one, (tWw, yiyiexu, aor. 2. ('>!, tyyvt )
The following paradigms of the few complete verbs in pi serve at the same time for
most of the anomalous forms of this kind, to which we shall occasionally refer.
Obt. 9. The deviating moods and participles of this conjugation will yet be found
VERBS.
193
to place1,
(of 2TAX2,)
to give,
(of AOil.)
to shew,
(of 5tixvu<y,)
Irnai, (v,)
SiSwai, (v3)
XEixvur,
oWxvuffi, (v,)
i'suTOv,
S/Sotov,
S/Sorov,
S/So/XEV}
Sl'SoTE,
SiXaatfi, (v,)
or SiSoDji,
Stlxvurov,
SclXVUTOV,
Se/xviz/aev,
Seixvi/te,
Stixn/an, (v,)
or SeixvSti.
Indie
Sing.
Ti'&yjr,
rlhnat, (v,)
Dual,
Plur.
Tl'&fcTOV,
rlBsrov,
TI$S/X.EV,
Tl'&ETE,
TI&eWi, (v,)
Of TI^EIffl,
"ya/AEv,
"ffltTE,
<ya<ri, (v,)
Obtervation I.
1. The /Airrf per*, p/. in -wv, (,) is the only one employed by the best Attic
writers ; in old Grammars it is called Ionic, merely because it was erroneously
considered as a resolved form ; far from being Ionic, we find the circumflexed form
alone in Herod. nSiiro liSew, hixtiri, and this creeped into the common language,
but in later times.
2. The contracted form riBut, Stripe, See. ( 106. Obs. 5.) is the least used in the
pres. by the Attics. Herod, has the third pert. iihT, from tiiu/u.
1 But this form occurs in Homer only after a pronoun relative, (Sm, it, &c. :)
hence we ought to write >in, (as is now done in most of the passages.) and consider
it as a free use of the conjunctive.
1 Some only of the old grammarians accent the word in this way,
: others
write ifr.ai, and then it is nothing hut ifdtai contracted according to 105. Obi. 15.
into n for k, which is preferred here for the sake of euphony, Homer having every
where else the regular ifirai, Sfirs, &c.
1 See about the anomalous signification of this verb the Obi. II.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
194
Jnfin.
isavott,
| rAi
Part. '
Ti&elr, (e'vw,) Uis, (xvtos,)
Seixvuvosi,
fflffOVdW,
SiSour, (ovror,)
SEixyuoa,
Seikvuv,
SiSov,
TI&EV,
Conj.
Sing.
of Seixvi/a;.
Dual, 7)T0v, rtroi, r)TOV, 7)T0V, utov, wtov,
Plur. a/fj-et, tits, aoi, uifj.iv, ijre, Sitsi, ufj.ii, Sin, cuai,
See below, 06s. III. about these conj.
Opt.
Sing.
TI&EI7)r,
Tl&EIT),
<S"at*l,
Dual,
Tl&ElWov,
Ti&Eirinov,
Ti&Ein/xEy,
TI&El'yiTS,
(ti&e/)(Tv,)
Plur.
SiSoi'mroy,
lyati'ri/AEV,
of OEIXVWU.
SlXoiTi/AEV,
SlSoiVjTE,
(SiSoi'no-atv,)
3. We also meet with liiJnt. but this is an incorrect spelling of the later writers
as well as in the aor. 2. iftn.
4. This is the peculiar opt. of the verbs in fu, to which the aor. pais, of the com
mon conjugation corresponds, and this, too, has a very usual abbreviated form for
the dual andja/., which is used almost exclusively for the third pert. only.
Dual,
Ti&ElTOV,
Plur.
Tl&EI/AEV,
TI&EITE,
jraiTov,
IfaiTW,
fcatfj.zv,
OliOlTOVj
SiSotTr/v,
Sidoi/tiEV,
trouev,
Jmper.
3 pi.
rihert,
ircu, 8cc.
T&i-rwaatv, or
iVa^i, comm
Sei'xvC&j, comm.
7fT*), aru, &C.
ora, &C. Seixvu, uto, &C.
lyarwffav, or SiSoToitrav, or Sfiixvi/Tojffav, or
iVavnyy,
SeIXVI/VTWV.
5. See about r!Bm instead of -9(j 17. 6. 4. The tecond pen. sing, in S/is not
much used ; the abbreviated form with lengthened vowel is preferred,
t/S"
I
Urn
I
ilhu
I
itSmi.
VEBBS.
195
Imperf.
ETl'Sw,
Sing.
ET7&7),
'fir,
r/
ET('&TO)|,
ETI&ET7JV,
IfiXTDV,
E&MV,
like the
imperf.
>MV,
eW,
EST),
iSi'dW,
ESEixvUr,
ini'xvv,
Dual,
eSeiXWTOV,
eSeixvi/t)Vj
Plur.
EoWxvt/^tEv,
ETl&ETE,
eSi'SoTE,
E06IXVKTE,
Eo"ixvt/<jav.
6. Excepting "rrti/u, the sinj. of this tense is most usually after the contracted con
jugation and the form -vu :
ir/Savy, ;<>-, [l, Ui'3i/y, flvf, 0P, Di/xvimv, tf, f, (y.)
Perf. te'Sei;
EtJT7)Xa,
EfTTTflXEIV, Or
Plusq. ETE&E.
eo'eSuxeiv,
of AEIKft.
l(7T7)XEIVj
With respect to Tmyu we must notice in this per/", and pfauj'.
1.) The augment, contrary to the other verbs, (see 7"- 6.) the i, which is
here instead of the redupl., has the ipiritui asper, and the pluiq. frequently
has its augment increased by the temporal augment u.
2.) The more usual abbreviated forms 'itTa/tti, &c. instead of the regular
conjugation, (see below, Obi. II.) ,
3.) The deviating signification, {ibid.)
Fut.
of AEIKO.
Aok. 1
ttanut,
8. This irregular aor. in ku is chiefly used by good writers in the sing. : the Attics
generally preferred the aor. 2. for thefirit and second pert. pi. There are neither
moodt nor participle! made of the form in mm, except the part, of the middle voice,
which with its indie, is, however, confined to the dialects. See below the Medium.
Indie.
Sing.
Aor. 2.
e'S&iv,
like the
imperf.
wanting.
Dual,
Plur.
EfTlTOV,
ST)T7}V,
ESTIJXEV,
SHT,
9. The aor. 2. Itmt deviates from the analogy of the imperf. and of the verbs in
w in general, ( 106. 70 by its long vowel in the dualani pi. The 3 pers.pl.
is exactly like in sound with the 3 pers. pi. aor. 1. so that the sense must be deter
mined from the context. (See below, Obi. II.)
10. The sing, indie, act. aor. 2. ISm and Utn has not continued in use. But in
the other parts of the verb it is used either exclusively or preferably. {Obi. 1. 8.)
11. Compare the aor. 2. of some anomalous verbs below 110. 6.
O 2
196
A GREER GRAMMAR.
S&tvxi,
rovai,
Souvai,
Sets, bsTaa, &ev,
%is, sxvx, yav,
Sotr, iovsx, $ov,
&ipr, &C.
yaJ, ripr, &c.
S&/, Sur, Sw, &C.
&i'nv,
sxlm,
Soi'tiv.
The co/i/. and o/><. tire conjugated like the pres
(&',) &r,
(SoS1/,) Sor,
Imper.
Soto/,
S>5tov, ra/y,
Je'tov, &>v,
Sotov, TO>V,
stjte, Tftidav, or
&e'te, To/tray, or
Sore, Taiirav, Or
&e'vtv,
Sxurcuv,
Sovtwv.
12. The case is the same with the conj. and opt. as what we remarked of these
moods in the pres.
13. The monosyllabic imper. Bit, tit, (100. 4.) does not throw the accent farther
back in composition than on the penultima; ex.gr. rifidn, ix'iitt.
14. The imper. erUBi is sometimes abbreviated in compounds in this manner :
rmfirri. The same is done with /3ii9i. (See the Arum. fWw.)
Inf.
Part.
Conj.
Opt.
Indie.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
r&saeu, poet.
Pass.Pres.
oiooftou,
Isxaxt, or
SiSoaxi,
T&STXI,
ti^e'/xe^ov,
'Itxtxi,
IS*flt/XE&OV,
Ti&E'/x.sS'aj
TI^EffS'E,
Ira/^tE&o!,
Ti'&EffSaij
Infin.
Partic. TI^E'/tAEVOf,
Conj.
r&a/juxi,
Sing.
Dual, I Ti&a/ptE&ov,
Plllr. I TI&dJ/AE&a,
Si'Sorai,
JiJo/xE&oy,
Sl'Soff&OV,
S'So<t3'ov,
ieiKwoai,
SEixvurai,
Seixv^/ae&ov,
"sxvtxi,
oYSou&E,
Sj'Sovtck,
Seixvi/it&ov,
Seixviz/ae^iz,
SEIXVt/<X&E,
SEIXVt/VTai,
lyat/AEvor,
Si'Soir&ai,
SlSo/AEVOf,
5Ei'xvt/o-&ai,
SEJXV1//XEV0S-,
of
ieixvvoj
hr,rxi,
lyaJ/xE&ov,
Jyiiff&oy,
ifr)<r&oy,
ISU/fJL&X,
SlJoi/XE&OV,
SlX(2<T&0y,
SiSoI/aeSo:,
SiScSu&e,
SiSoivrsi,
ISWVTXI,
See below the 06s. III. about the deviating accentuation of
this conj.
* The abbreviations of the forms in -trai, -arm, into -, are partly questionable,
partly poetical. See Buttm, Complete Gr. Gr. $ 107. 8'.
VERBS.
Opt.
Sing, j n^Ei'/xtiv,
| Wal/jtm,
Jyaio,
I Irarro,
lya/pte&ov,
I ti&eito,
TI&EIJAE&OV,
TI&sr<7&OV,
ri&EiirSnv,
Dual,
197
| SiSoipiiv,
I SiSo7to,
SlSoi'/LtE&OVj
SiSorir&ov,
SlSo/ff&TJV,
of
Seixvi/o).
I
Plur.
S"sho-.7e,
IfflElVTO,
n&EivTo,
See below 0>s. III. about the Attic opt. t&oito, 7ya<ro, SioWo, &c.
/mper.
n'&ea-o, or
rfoov,
T&oU, &C.
lyaffo, Or
Si'SWo, or
v
&c, 5"iSoo-Sto, &c.
Imperf.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
irfoeaOf or
.ETI&OK,
ETl'&ETO,
ET|5e'/XE&0V,
etj&eit&ov,
etiSeVSw,
ET&E'/AE&a,
ETl'&Eff&Sj
ETI&EVTO,
TEJEI/Xai,
T&El(Tai, &C.
Plusq. TE&Etptr)V,
t1?xao, or "sw,
iVaro,
fraptE&ov,
(fEIXVftTO,
Seixvi/a&Wj &c.
EOIOO/M1V,
eSi'oWo, or
eS/Sok,
sSi'Soro,
eSjSo/ae^ov,
ESiSoV&rjy,
Ira/xE&a,
"yaff&E,
<V*vto,
Perf.
KaaeUf &C.
eSi'Soj&e,
EOl'5ovTO,
iSsixviVtw,
eSe i'xVW(TO,
E$EIXVl/TO,
eSeixviz/ae&ov,
eJeixvi/o^ov,
e$eixhJo"&,v,
E$EIXVI//Ae3'2,
eSeIXVI/(T^E,
eSeixvkvto,
Se'So/aou,
Se'Soovxi, &c, of AEIKH.
eSeoo/x*iv,
15. The following tnooih of the per/, are easily formed, viz. in/J. ndiiirdau, ii}rSi,
part. rtSutt'trts, imper. 'iftut, &c. but the con/, and op/, are never met with.
Fut. 1 TE^TJCTO/Xal,
Aor. 1 ETE&rlV,
So&7)iro/xai,
EYa&niv,
of AEIKft.
198
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Medium,
Fut. 1. h-naoiMU,
I s^oo/xau,
I Jolio/xai,
of AEIKft.
Aor. 1. eSwa/Anv,
| efrisifji-nv,
| iSaixium,
17- The aor. iSr.zium, li**i/tm, and their part. are known only to the tonic and
Doric dialects ; the other moods do not occur. Attic prose employs merely the
aor. 2. of the middle voice of these verbs. Compare the Obi. to the aor. act. But
the aor. 1. irrnrxftrt is much in use. See below Obi. II.
Indie.
Aor. 2.
EdO//.)V,
(eSeao,) e&oi/,
(eSouo,) eSoy,
wanting,
and so on,
and so on,
is conjugated after the imperf. pass.
Inf.
*ritAEVOS')
Part.
5d/xEVoy,
Conj.
oa/fMCl,
Opt.
(&e'<to,) &oy.
Imperf.
18. All these are conjugated after the pm. pass. See below, Obi. III. about the
Attic forms of the opt. and conj. (v^offSoiro, ?rfoVSA^*/, &c.)
19. The infin. keeps the accent even in composition, intirtxi, iniir/iu. The
tmper. retains the accent in thei^. only when the prtpoiilion is but of one syllable ;
ex.gr. Tfirdu, Tfmriisi, ifsv, (ot'lv/u :) when the prep, has two syllables, the accent
is removed on it, ex. gr. Tiplhv, air&ov. In the pi. the accent always is on the prep.
20. The aor. 2. med. of lirtqti does not occur : it is stated here for the' sake of
analogy for other verbs, ex. gr. irri/itn of "rrxfuii, (Anom. ritipxi.)
Verbal Adjectives,
rTE'9r, I Wo,,
ofAElK:fli
farof, J boTos,
II.Observatiom to imifu.
1. The verb Irtayu is divided between the transitive signif. to place, and the intrans. toitand, ( 113. 2.) In the act. voice, the tenses, which denote lb place, are,
the pro. and imperf. iVnyu, 'Irrm.fut. crriri,
aor. Xffrvteot :
those, which denote to iland, are,
the per/, and pli/stj. Xffrvxa, \arn*ui, aor. ffrif*.
The pass, throughout means to be placed ; but the pres. aniimperf. "rri/ixi, -ftn, as
middle voice along with the fut. med. erriim/itii, signify sometimes to place VMft ielf,
and sometimes to put up, (to erect, for instance, a monument.) The aor. 1. med.
always has the latter signif.
2. The per/, act. from its signif. is here not a per/., but a pres. tense, and the
plusq. of course an imperf. (j 113. Obs. 11.)
Xtrnxx, Island,
lrti*w, I stood ; irrnxar, standing, Slc*
* But in some compounds, of which the middle voice has the iutrans. signif., the
VERBS.
199
3. In the dual and pi. and in the collateral moods, there is generally an abbrevi
ated form df the per/., and plusq., which becomes the pres. tense in pi : this form
being also peculiar to other verbs, is explained 110., and is stated here merely to
complete the verb 'Urnfti.
Perf.plur.irrafi.ti, igrltri, Ifran, (*,)
dual, Xrr&rfFj
pltttq. plur. irrxpiv, trrurt, Xftotaai,
dual, iffrxrev, \ffrxrrti,
conj. iffru, ns, n, &C. opt, irrxinv,
imper. 'isrxii, iffrxru, &c.
in/in. isrxixi,
part, (irrxus,') \ctus, iffrurx, \crus fl, gen.
Ion. Xirrins, tiros,
so that this per/, and plusq. have assumed in most of their forms the formation and
signif. of both the pres. and the imper/.
4. It is on account of this signif. of the pret. (and because the /ut. rnrv means
/ shall place, rrirtfuu, shall place myself,) that Xtrnxx, I stand, has produced a
peculiar anomalous
/ut. \irr 'iv or itrrrfafixt, I shall stand,
with which you may compare a similar /ut. in the Anom. Svnrxw.
5. But there is also for the transitive signif. a
per/. 'Urxttx, I have placed,
which belongs, however, to a later period. The old Attics use, in both significa
tions, instead of the per/, the two aor. or a circumlocution. (See 97- Obs. 6.)
6. There is in some editions of Homer the syncopated form of the plusq. 3 per*,
pi. Xarxtxi in both the transitive and the intrans. signif. ; but the correct reading
seems to be 'Urxrxt as usual in the sense of the imper/. they were standing, and
irrxexi abbreviated for trrtirxt, (of the aor. 1. irrtirx,') as aor. they placed, (Orf. <r.
307.) which, like other aor., might be used in the sense of the plusq. they hadplaced,
(//. ft. 56.) Compare a similar abbreviation >v;tri in the Anom. xiftx-fnfti.
7. There is also a Homeric abbreviation Xrmrt, you stand, (/<. 3. 243. 246.) for
iffryiKttTl or XrTKTt.
III.Obs. on the Conj. and Opt.
1. The conj. and opt. of the verbs in fu have always in their regular formation
the accent on the termination, whilst these moorfj in the common conjugation con
stantly throw the accent, whenever the termination allows it, on the preceding
syllable, (rCvryt, rvxrvftu, rvtrrti/ti, rvxruvrxi, &c.) Thus rtfu, ii^vftiv, ruUa:.
nhtvro, &c.
2. This accent arises from the circumstance that the syncope, which is essential
in the verbs in fu, cannot well take place in these moods ; for their characteristic is
not in the terminations ftiv, n, /ttu, &c which they have in common with the indie,
but precisely in the vowel, which precedes these terminations. This they cannot
reject, but combine it with the vowel of the radical verb, and thus make it a long
vowel, which, in conformity to the rule, takes the accentuation of the contraction.
($ 28. Obs. 9.)
per/, act. may be conceived as a real per/, in English, ex. gr. ivlirrnfti, I raise up,
i/irraftxi, Irise, stand up, i/itrnxx, I have risen, stand. The corrupt Greek formed
from this per/, denoting the pres. time a peculiar pres. tense ; hence 1 Corinth. 16.
13. vrrixiTt, stand.
s See about the irregular contraction of the neuter Urit, in Buttm. Complete Gr.
Gr. the verb 'limp, in the list 0/ Verbs.
200
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. This combination differs, however, from the usual contraction of the same
moods in the verbs in
in, vat. The difference of the opt. in the two conjugations
is obvious. In the conjunctive of contracted verbs the vowels
m, <,n, Un, coalesce
in various ways ; the conjunctive of the conjugation in fu is more simple. Verbs
having n in the indie, (rth/ii, iVriyu,) retain also throughout this >i and the > of the
common conjunctive ; but those in upi have * and instead of and <i, (see the
paradigms.) The conjunctive itTZs, Ivrx, which is also stated, belongs to the form
iVrav, and is not so good, and less frequent, 106. Obs. 5. See Obs. IV. about the
Ionic resolution or lengthening of these forms.
4. The accentuation of the conjugation in /*i does not differ from that of the
usual barytone verbs, but the wish to make these moods conformable to analogy with
regard to the accent, occasioned deviations in the pass, voice, which were more or
less used in some verbs, and this induced us to state the regular form for unifor
mity's sake, and to render the deviations more sensible. In the two verbs Ttlr,^
and tnpu, ($ 108.) the Attics drop the radical vowel, and take the terminations of
these two moods from the common conjugation, throwing the accent back, wherever
it can be done, so that these forms look exactly as if they were made of the indie, in
0/uu. The difference in the conjunctive is simply in the accent :
Tt^stfuu for TiSrSfuu,
aor. 2. med. trpoo-Strai, rgotiTai, &c.
but the opt. has the additional diphthong u, ex. gr.
(Compare below xaivtuai in
and p\p.vniMti in /up.wica/.')
5. It is only the opt. of "erxfiai, which, preserving the regular diphthongs, takes
this accentuation in all Greek writers,
(Vt*, 'UretiTfij 'itrxiffa, Ifrauvre,
but the conj. always is SrrS/uu, etnirT^Txi, &c. These two moods in iiie/tai are, how
ever, sometimes met with accented in the following way, which passes for an Atti
cism,
COnj. itlatrai, opt. enro&oivro*.
In all the other verbs, which are conjugated like Irrxfuti and ilta/uu, these two
moods always are proparoxytona, ex. gr. Hit/txi, tSrmirs, mum, Itritrnrtu, from
Ivvafiai, evlvocftxij Wlaritftat, (see the Anom.) Svetra, from the anomalous oco^a/, (with
the radical c.) We also find in the verbs in xftai, as in rUt/uu, instances of their
going over to the form e/jUfiv, see the Anom.
and xoiftetft&i.
6. The verbs in vfii usually form these two moods from i*, Qux,*ir,s, tuxtuci/ii:)
yet there are instances, shewing that they also followed the analogy of the others by
taking merely i instead of the double vowel : opt. txitora, II. . C65. rvyyira, Plato
P/iad. extc, conj. 3 pers. sing, nuitanri, (according to the oid form rvsrrjin, rtSrin,
ibid, p.n.d.1)
IV.Dialects.
I. Much of what has been stated respecting the different dialects in the common
conjugation, is also applicable here ; ex. gr. the iteratives in rxn, which always have
the radical vowel short before this termination, ex. gr.
' Fischer on Wetter, 2, 409. 470. 472. 484. 485. has collected instances even of
Ionic writers, but they are far from being sufficient, and this Atticism is in general
so fluctuating, that there is yet much room for farther inquiries.
7 See below 110. 6. (piiit,) and compare ibid. 7. ffifmt. The accentuation, which
we have adopted above for the pass, form Ja<W, xiytira, is grounded on the analogy
of the instances stated in the preceding Obs. Compare above hiy-i, 08. Obs. 9,
VERBS.
201
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
b.) They shorten the characteristic vowel of the conjunctive (according to
103. Obi. V. 15.) but in general only when they lengthen the radical
vowel | thus,
tuoftMt, ffrua/ilv, for fftai/Aai, ffr'iv[/.tv,
o-tiiitm, for (ittStoit,) Tlf>lTr,
aiwi, for
10. As the Epic Poets make the 3 pert. sing, of all conjunctiva in n, (see above,
103. Obs. V. 13.) there arise here forms, which must carefully be distinguished
partly from the indie, and partly from the 3 peri, pi., ex. gr. Irriri for Irry, Jain for
if.
11. The opt. is not resolved, except that the Ionians say tul/un for til/im, as if of
6EO.
108. Verbs in m< from 'Eft, 'Eft, 'Ift.
There are among the rest of the Anomalous Verbs in (u some
little verbs, of which the root is partly 'Eft, partly 'Eft, and 'Ift,
and which consequently may easily be mistaken one for the other,
especially in compounds, when the spiritus is lost in part; ex. gr.
OTgojEivcH may come from eWi and itvxi, whilst in ocifeTyai and
airtiwi the spiritus may be recognised, but not in Ionic writers,
who do not aspirate the consonant in these cases. The radical
form 'Eft has three principal significations : 1.) to send, 2.) place,
and 3.) clothe, put on; 'Eft signifies to be; and 'Ift to go.
I. sI*)jxi, ' to send, throw,' from 'Eft.
1. This verb may throughout be compared with tIShixi, from
which it differs but little. The i (according td ^ 106. 6.) sup
plies the redupl. ; in the Attic language it is long. Whenever
the short radical vowel s is the initial, it may take the augment,
being changed into ei, ( 84. 2.)
Remark.The comparison with rlfa/u being presupposed, we barely state what
tenses occur of this verb; it is rather uncommon as a simple primitive, and most of
the forms mentioned here appear only iu its compounds.
Act. Pres. "hijm, ms, &c. 3 pers. pi. last, (v,) or UXai, (v,) the
former a contr. of leccat, comp. r.&sWt.
Inf. lhai, part, lets, eonj, lw, opt. Uim, imper. (ieS<() com
monly Ui of'IEft,as rfl of TI0Eft.
the opt. But this reading does not appear well founded, and seems to rest only on
the opinion that the / had passed over to the preceding vowel, (rip, Mr.) See Obi.
V. 14. to 103. and connect with the contents of the Obi. 8. 9. what has been there
stated respecting the eonj. aor. pcut.
VERBS.
203
Tmperf. Trjv, and (oF 'I Erf,) "owv, Compound iQlwv or fykuv,
(see 86. Obs. 2.) 3 pers. pi. vQhaxv.
Per/. eTjcz1, plusq. elxetv.
Fut. %7o>, aor. I. fob, ( 106. 10.) Ion. Mxx.
Aor. 2. m, &c. (not used in the sing., it is supplied by the
aor. 1.) pi. tfAsv, ire, hxt, commonly with the augment :
slfjjsv, eTte, tiffsev, (xaflEijAEV, dveTre, <iipEi<rav.)
Jn/". thai, part, eh, conj. Si.
Opt. elm, pi. eT/xev, eTte, eTev, for eiti/xev, &c.
Ifnper. sr.
Conjugate in the same way particularly the compounds ;
ex. gr. xtyeTvxi, dtpui &<Qts, &c. opt. pi. inTpev for
&c.
PAss. and Medium, compare tWhim, for instance,
Pres. "le/iai, perf. el[izi, (MGeT/j^u, (neQeXaQxi, iJ,eSela6a>, &c.
Aor. 1. pass. e9w, commonly with the augment ei9iv,
ex. gr. d<pei9nv, part. dQeQels, &c.
Aor. 1. Med. rini^m, (more in use than the same aor. of
ti'97)(U,i, yet only in the indie.')
Aor. 2. Med. tpm, commonly with the augment e"f/.m,
ex. gr. iipeiro, etpeivro*,
fTorn which e'aflai, ei^evos, (wpoeaQxi, aft/Mews,) conj.
Imper. oS, (a<pov, n^oov, irpoebQe, &c.) See p. 186.
Verbal Adjectives, er'eos, eros, {atyeros, &c.)
2. Compare the Obs. III. and IV. to the preceding about
the Attic conj. and opt. ex. gr. itpoui^xi, gpimra.i, 'loiro, dtptomro,
ifpooia&e, and about the dialects ex. gr. dtpew, d<petv, for the conj.
difw, %at for the 3 pers. sing. conj. y.
3. There is, however, a peculiar Ionic-Attic form of the imperf.
in -fiv instead of -*iv in the compounds : mpaien, Od. x. 1 00. rxpleiv,
Plato Euthyd. 51. See Buttm. Complete Greek Grammar.
4. We must also notice the Homeric fut. and adr. dveaet,
dveaoutJ.i, &c. according to another more regular formation, but
which occur only in the compound with dvx, and, as it appears,
merely when this prep, signifies back, again.
1 Like riiuxx. There is a more uncommon form, fuxi, with the intercalated u,
according to 97- Obt. 2. of which the patt. ifiurrai occurs in the New Testament.
See Buttm. Lexitogtu, I. p. 296:
* The accent is not drawn back, because of the mtgnt'enl ; see 84. Obs, 4.
204
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
205
Later writers employ also for the 2 pers. the form xdQri, and in
the imper. x*8ou for Kctt-naati, xdBnao. The Ionians have in their
usual way a rnirn^oti, 3 pers. pi. xariotrai, &c.
4. Whatever is wanting, is supplied by s^saQat or IfyaQai, and
its compound with xxrd.
III. "EwwfAi, (Ion. slvvfu,) Iclothe, put on, follows the conjugation
of folxw/M, and has its deficiencies supplied by the theme 'ED,.
See 112. 14.
When not compounded, this verb is merely poetical, and we
find the
Put. saw, saaai, aor. saam, infin. saai, saaat, tned. \aaiy.m,
per/, pass, sli^ai, slum, street, &c. whence the 3 pers. pi.
Plusq. s'letro, (II. a. 596.)and of the form ?<rpwu, plusq.
2 pers. saao, 3 pers. saro,
and with the syllabic augment aor. ssaaa.ro, plusq. ssaro.
The compound /A^eW/xi is used in prose :
Fut. d/Mpisaco, Attic tifjUpiu, aor. 1. rifji^tsaa, kfjuQiioou,
Per/, pass. v>iA$lsaix.ai,ri(A(pieaai, ni/.Qieorai, &c. infin. hy.iQiiaQat.
The compound with sari, commonly without eliding the i, is like
wise used ; ex. gr. aor. 1. med. sirisaaadai.
IV. si/ii, I am, of'Efi.
1. The usual conjugation of this verb is the following :
Pkes. Sing. sI/ai,
sis, commonly s7,
sarin, sari,
Dual,
sarbv,
sarov,
PL
io/Asy,
sars,
tialv, s'tai,
Infin. s*vxi, part. <>v, (gen. ovros,) ovaa, ov,
Conj. a, ys, y, yrov, of/xev, wrs, Zai, (v,)
Opt. ei't)Vj sms, s'lvi, eiVitov, s\virviv, sm/asv, seldom sfasv, smre,
seldom e?te, emaav, commonly e^v5.
Imper. 'tadi6, saraP, Dual, sarov, earuv, pi. sars, saruaav, or saruv,
Imper/. sing, w,
is, commonly riado?, vv,
Dual,
wmv, or yi<ttov,
rimv, or "harm,
PI. wfAsv,
virs, or wars,
vtaetv.
' The particle
well ! be it >o .' appears to have arisen from the 3 peri. ting, it*,
for it requires the ting, whether you supply touts or txutx.
* This must not be confounded with Mi, know! See in the following tTSa.
' Plato, Hep. 2. p. 3G1. has a singular form %tu.
8 With later writers Is. Compare 103. Obs.V. 12.
206
A GREEK. GRAMMAR.
VEBBS.
207
208
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Verbs.
209
210
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
211
109.
The following verbs must likewise be stated here :
I. $7)fAi, / say, of <S>Afl.
Pres. sing. (pn/Ai,
Qrif,
tynot, (v,)
Dual,
(parov,
Qxtov,
PL <pxfi.it,
pare,
<pam, (y,)
Infin. tyavxt, Part, (pas,
Conj.
Opt. <p*/w, Imper. <p&i,
Imperf. sing, 'iipnv, 'iqms, commonly e$7>o$a, etpy,
Dual, sipxrov,
iQxrw,
PI. Epa/XEV, ?(paT,
etpxaxv, (poetically etpav,)
Fut. <pri<Ta>,
aor. l.*<pnaa.
The med. QzaSat, ttpan-nv, (imper. <pxo for <pxuo in Homer,) is
used as well as a few perfects of the pass, voice, like
THtyxabw, (be it said,) Ttetyxottivos .
Verbal adjectives, (fxreos, (pxros.
1. The pres. indie, with the exception of <pr,s, is enclitic accord
ing to 14. The compounds are accented aCfj.ipniMi, av^r,s,
diTltpn/j.!, dvTKpris.
2. With respect to the signif. of this verb, we must distin
guish 1.) the general one to say, 2.) the more particular ones to
affirm, assert, pretend, concede, and the like. The pres. (pnpcl
includes both ; but in the first signification it is chiefly the pres.
and imperf. act. with all their moods, which are in common use,
the rest is supplied by the Anom. tliruv, &c. which see. The fut.
and aor. ip-nnu, tpnnx, have preferably the more particular signi
fications, which in the imperf, infin., and part. pres. to avoid
ambiguity, are more usually expressed either by (piaxeiv, which
else is not used in prose, or by the middle voice *.
3. We have arranged and denominated the forms of this verb,
as their formation requires; but with respect to its use, we notice
further that the imperf. i<pr,v commonly is likewise aor., and may
be interchanged with eIWov as perfectly synonymous. To this
t(pnv must be joined the infin. (pxvxi, which in a narrative is always
used in the sense of the preterite. If in the affirmative we say,
for instance, Eifn 6 TIs^ix'Kyis, Pericles said, we say in sermone
1 For instance, t$n rxev^ccZuv, he said that he was in haste, ifecrxi r<TevhetZ,tti, he preitnded to be in haste, finun, pretending, asserting ; ci fxftiw, denying, (for iS Qn/ti it
exactly the contrary of <fn/ii, I affirm, assert, see 148. Obs. 2.)
P 2
212
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
213
214
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
and Herod. (1, 45.) has with a shortened termination 7)EiSe, see
the Note to page 201.'Homer has instead of ^<xaviWv with the
first syllable shortened, (Od. I. 772.)
4. Formerly grammarians used to mention here a particular
verb,
to which they gave all the above forms beginning with i, and these
were considered as syncopated ; the forms oTSx, tliivM, were
merely stated in the list of Anomalous Verbs under eI'So/. The
Doric dialect has indeed a verb taapu, "a-ns, taari, but supposing
even that all those forms are derived from it, usage has most
certainly intermixed them, and the popular language of both old
and later times has constantly employed in the sing. oTSa, and
in the pi. IVpiEv. The above mixed conjugation is, therefore,
best calculated for a Grammar, which is to teach the practice of
the language.
5. But on looking a little more narrowly into the anomalies of
the Greek language, we soon perceive that those forms actually
belong to <n$z or si'So/. It is obvious that the Ionic i'Vsv did not
come from IV/aev : the latter, conformably to general analogy,
(see 23.) rather came from the former, and I'S/aev as'well as the
infin. 1'5/AEvai evidently belong to siou, and not to Tod/m. Add to
this the striking analogy, not only of the language in general,
which so readily transfers the forms of the per/, by means of a
syncope to the conjugation in (u, (see 110. 9.) but also the
analogy of this verb itself, as no one can deny that the forms of
the plusq. riv/Aiv, yvre, differ from rt^aixiv, t!Seite, barely by this
syncope. Now "o-piEv, "are, stand exactly in the same relation to
oiSa/AGv, ol'SaTE, for the difference of the very changeable vowel in
this and similar verbs is of no weight whatever. The imper. !trSi
was submitted, exactly like xUpax^i, aM%$t, to similar abbre
viations, ( 110. 9.) as well as the 3 pers. pi. \'axaib, from which
the collateral form 't'on/M appears to be derived.
6. The syllable u instead of oi in the other moods of oi$a has in
'The point is completely decided by some striking analogies, especially irtmSfti*
and iixrnr, which are compared below, 1 10. 9. But it will not he amiss to review
here the analogy of all the forms proceeding from ',,* and Jim. Just as wt'.Sm
makes
so do ", and
make
and properlv also ink, the i supply
ing the place of the redupl. ($ 84. Ob>. 6 ) A shortened form
passed Irom the first verb into the Iouic dialect, and the second into the common
VERBS.
215
its favor the analogy of mix*, (Ion. oTxa,) emus, (Anom. e'txw.) See
the Note below.Here too we plainly see the transition to the
conjugation in tti : for, whilst the part. fiSir continues in the
usual analogy, the conj. and opt. take the terminations of that
conjugation, sldu, (circurnflexed,) eiSsinv. But the Epic Poets
may shorten the long vowel of this conjunctive, and neglect its
accent as readily as in other conjunctives : "va ti'Sopisv for s!Sa//xev.
The radical vowel i was also shortened, conj. iS<='o;, part, i&i/ise,
(Homer6.)
A GENERAL VIEW OF THE ANOMALY OF VERBS.
110.Syncope and Metathesis.
I. It is true that, whatever deviates in language from the larger
mass of what is regular, still follows some analogy even in this
deviation ; but this, especially in a dead language, is not always
apparent, a variety of instances of the usage in common life, and
of the different dialects not having gone over to the language of
language. But the complete form mm, Uiia, by changing ti into /, and by contrac
tion (as it were of una, iTJ,) produced
the part. (<*if, tlaas, and
the moodt
iStlti, stated above, 6. Tlie written language itself furnishes the
proof, that practice retains sometimes several forms at once, and sometimes a single
one ; the pari, of imxa occurs in the three forms, itixiis, lixii;,
but that of tiix
occurs only in one, ithis The plutq. required a new augment: Uixu commonly took
it according to the analogy of lo^ra^u ieZfrafyv, Itfuut: but there was likewise a
regular plutq. with the syllable m shortened. This appears from the putt, form (of
the per/, iiy/iui, plutq. mypw,)
'i pert, plutq. ifiurt, without the augment ukt:
In the same way arose from Uiia,
plutq. (nf3ii,) jSSi/v.
To this was added the syncope, which, as we shall see below, produced out of imxa,
(altering the vowel,)
the 1 pert. pi. of the per/. Uiyfui, 3 dual of the plutq.
and out of i!ia, (with the same alteration,) the forms
(T3-ff$Tt, ) ir$a,
T&piy and irptv, lmt
but in the plutq. out of SJn
yrftu, jrrri, vira*.
Homer's "rat, (instead of It-rat,) differs from this
(instead of fii-rat,) merely in
the omission of the augment The accent, moreover, shews thut Iran did not come
from Utifu, since the 'A pert. pi. of impi must necessarily be Iran, (see Iti/u,) aud this
is continued by the additional analogy of the verb w,
feixa, (oi into i, ux-rant,) u\arit,
eiia, (oi into i, la-rant,) tram.
Both are Attic forms instead of the regular isUan, tliari, which establishes the commini anomaly of the termination ran, instead of the generally prevailing final
Byllalile an of the per/.
6 To facilitate the use of most Dictionaries and Indexes, we observe that all the
above statements must be looked for in the pret. tenses of iUu, i/JU>, and "rn/xi, and
in their compounds.
216
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
217
218
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
04i. 2. As we have seen above, j 106. 107. that the termination 3/ of the imper.
belongs likewise to the syncopated formation, since it has an immediate con
nection with the root, the imper. of the above forms, as far as it occurs, is formed
in the same way ; ex. gr. /39/, JjSS/, <ym3i, HB,, (pi. (3Sti, SSti, &c.) Thus the fol.
lowing four imper. in 3j and its abbreviation <, ( 106. 4.) must be ranked among
the aor. mentioned here, viz.
See in the Liit, <r/w,
^x"< ft'"-
VERBS.
219
220
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 5. When through this syncope the consonant of the radical form comes
before a r in the termination, this t, liecause of the similarity of sound with the ter
minations of the pan. (rirvpSi,
and the like,) sometimes becomes a 3. Thus
the rest of the ptrsont of the imper. a*a>%$i become instead of
r .-. - in. itt/ytrttjava-r 5;, aviiv^w, and of the per/,
tyfnytga, iyer.y'o^an, ly{nyt(3i,
(see iyt!(i,) and this accounts most naturally for the Epic a-tr<3f, (see below,
that is to say, as soon as the 3 came before the r, it was changed into r, (as it/at,
1m,) and the > was dropped, (twti,) which was erroneously made a past. rinrBi.
10. This syncope is more natural, whenever the characteristic of
the verb is a vowel. But, as we have seen in 97. 7. it is but in
a very few verbs, that this vowel is pure before the termination a
of the perf, ex. gr. in
StSia, (see SfiVai in the List,) whence perf. pi. ScSi/aex,
SeSite, for StSl'a/AEV, TE,
Plusq. eSe'Si/ixev, eSe'S'ite, eii^mav, for eSeSi'ei/iaev, te, ilstit'saxv,
Imper. SeSi&i,
and as some of the perf. in rm.%, when shortened by the Epic Poets,
have their radical vowel (a) before the termination, fiifiwxx,
(ftifix*,) Qifixavt, f&e$(t.us, this ancient form, and this syncope
jointly serve to account for such perf. in the Attic and common
language in the dual and pi. of the indie, and in the infin., ex. gr.
of TETXuxa, (see the Anom. rXrvai,) TETAAAte'tXci/aev, &c.
infin. TET^avai, (for tetX-eW) This agrees perfectly with the
pres. of the conjugation in /xi, lura/xEv, lardvoti : hence most of the
other parts of the conjugation in pti adopt this form of the perf.
thus,
Perf. Te'tX5|U.EV, TETXitTE, TETXa<7l, (v,)
Dual, te'tXiztov,
Plusq.pl. ETETXa/xEv, ete'tXte, ETETXauaV,
Dual, ETETXarov, etetXostw,
Infin. TETXavai, (short a,)
Imper. TErXa&i, nrXiru, &c.
Opt. TETXai'nv.
The conjunctive of this verb is not used in this form ; we give
that of $i$rf*.a., /3E/3apiEv, &c.
Conj. /3f/3, rir, ri, &C
The part, alone does not follow the conjugation in pti> but is con
tracted of ausus, so that the tnasc. and neut. become homony
mous, (aus and aos, gen. kotos, contracted us, uros,) and this con-
VERBS.
221
traded form has a peculiar fern, in una., ex. gr. of fiifinxic, part,
gen. @e(3wTos.
Of these perf. there is none in common use, but the sing, indie.
of the perf. and plusq. (rir\r,xx, as, s,sTSTXr/xeiv, sir, si :) all the
other parts have the above collateral forms, which mostly are
more in use than the regular ones. See in the List, besides
rXijvaj and fialw, vh<jxcn, rsbvnxa, and above in lar-ny-i,
107.
Obs. II. 2. 3.) the perf. h-rnxx.
Obs. C. We observe farther,
a. that except the 3 peri. pi. of the per/. (rirXan, nBtxtiy, ieratit, &c.) the a. is
short in all the other forms, the short vowel of the termination having
been removed by syncope, not contracted with the radical vowel ; and that
consequently we ought not to write TirAawu, nMreu, lermxi*.
b. that it is only the contracted part., which has the fern, tm : the Epics em
ployed it regularly in via in the resolved form, ex. gr. jSi/ucu,-, (3i/3Diai,
c. that the termination xui, neuter ait, of the part, (j 27. 10.) becomes tit in
the Ionic dialect, (see "mutt, \ 107. Obs. II. 3.) which is the usual Attic
form in nlnis, of hntxu, (see the list, and compare farther irtrriis,
irriif, in the Anom. rjVr.)
11. Sometimes a metathesis of the vowel with a liquid, ( 19.
Ohs. 2.) changes the radical verb, chiefly, in two cases :
1.) In the aor. 2. see 96. Obs. 7. and compare also the
Anom. apuigTavw and ripnu.
2. ) In several verbs, of which the simple theme has a liquid
for its characteristic, ex. gr. in the root AN, aor. E&avov,
fat. xwvt*ai, a transposition of the vowel NA takes
place to facilitate the conjugation ; hence r&vmx, t&vxptev, &c. and this transposition in some verbs produces the
new usual pres., in this instance Swaxa. The same is
done with the root MOA. But owing to the difficult
pronunciation of /jX, a /3 is inserted between these letters
in the middle of the word, according to 19. Obs. 1.
fj.iiA$\wxoi for iiittXuxx, and the /x itself is changed in the
beginning of the word into a /3, $\u<sxw 7. Thu supposi' The quantity in comedy, ex. gr. tsMhu, Aristoph. Ran. 1012. shews that the
short a was in common use. But this did not prevent Poets, particularly an old
ona like jEschylus, from employing in the infin. for the sake of the metre, the con.
tracted form nitimi, (Again. 550.) The Epic infin. nimpirM, rifodfiu, are ex
plained on comparing them with 107. 06s. IV. 1.
7 Exactly in the same relation are /Uij to pz\<txi;, ^t.Wru, (/ squeeze out,) to
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tion renders the analogy of the three following verbs evi
dent and complete,
Svriaxw, &stvou/xa, E&avov, Ts'&vyjxar,
(AN, NA,)
Spdiaxai, SogoD/xai, e'So^ov,
(OP, PO,)
$\<Laxa>, yi.oKovix.ai, e/aoXov, fj.ifj.fi'Kaixx, (MOA, MAO,)
which see in the List ; and the defective forms 'iiropov, miwptuTxi, (see below wo^eiv,) belong together in the same
way8.
Under this metathesis can be ranked with perfect certainty
only those verbs, in which the transposed vowel is recognised in
some forms, as the a. in TE^vctva*, teSWhv, and the o in /ae'/x/3Xo/>cc.
But where there is merely an n, it may appear doubtful whether
we are to call it a metathesis, or simply a syncope ; ex. gr. whe
ther it be Sf'/xaj, (AEM, AME,) ^il^nxa, or (like niyuu, vEVE/xnxa,)
leixw, (SeSeVwoc,) Se'S/ATixa. Hither belong with a differently
formed pres.
riy.vu),fut. repu, aor. ete/xov, perf. riry.r,xix,
v.a.iMoi,fut. xxfjiovfAai, aor. txaptov, perf. xixy.i\x%.
Yet a more distinct analogy appears to class tbese verbs in the
category of a metathesis, (TEM, TME, KAM, KMA.) and this
is still more certain with respect to the verb xaKiai, though the
succession xaihiu, xxXiau, xixX-nxa, seems to point to a bare syn
cope. The fut. xxXiau, or with the best Attic writers, xaXu, is
unquestionably the fut. of the primitive KAAfl, (compare 95.
Ols. 12.) but the usual pres. xxhiw comes only from the fut. as
the Ionic pres. ju.a%E0pi.ai does from the fut. ix.xyinofj.xi,ou/xxi,
(see 95. the second Note to Obs. 16.) The radical form KAAfl
gave xixXnxa by the same transposition, (KAA, KAA,) as the
above perf. : hence the poets have also, corresponding to the
form Sv-naxai from ANX1, a pres. xix\y\sxw. Thus
xx\iu, xix\ri<sxti>, fut. xaku, perf. xix\wxf (KAA, KAA.)
See in the List fiaXku fiifiXnxx, o-xiWu 'iaxXmxx, and also ttiXxcu,
ffTogEvvy/xi, n-Egacw, and the Note to xiqdvwfAi.
fiiXt : see Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 108. And a still stronger analogy for ftixCt. ftif*
/3a.wxa. QxcZexu, is afforded by the following two instances, /*%><, (death,) fSiri/tfiftris, ifiafTU*, ififynTM, iPfirifrn.
' The corresponding radical form of /Ji/3jrx hat been preserved only In the
verba/ tubil. fiefA,
VERBS.
111.New Themes derived from the Tenses.
1. There is another, but not very common species of anomaly,
when any other than the pres. becomes a new theme, partly
because it could be taken in the sense of the pres., and partly
because it was more familiar to the ear than the pres. This
occurs only with the perf. and the aor. 2. act. and pass. ; for we
have assigned their proper place in 96. Obs. 9. to those forms,
which by an irregular assumption of the characteristic s, used to
be derived from the fat.
2. A. The perf. ha\ing frequently the signif. of the pres., (a9
we shall see in ^ 113.) it sometimes actually forms a new pres.,
but chiefly only in the Doric dialect, or with Epic Poets.
Thus we read in Theocr. (15, 58.) XeSo/xw for Xe'Soixa, 1 fear,
{Anom. Sfiffai,) and in Homer xsxXTiyovTEr, (yinom. xXa'^oi.) Hence
the imperf. in ov derived from perf. ; ex. gr. Hesiod, eititpuxov, (as
if from IlE^TKfi,) from nitpuxtx, to which also belong the 3pers.
like yiycove, ohwofe, aicuye, which in Homer are not only perf.
(that is to say pres. tenses,) but frequently also imperf (or aor.)
Hither belong likewise the fut. kcn/ifa, (see 107. Obs. II. 4.)
and T&vhiw, {Anom. Stwxco.)
Obs. 1. The statement of this anomaly is rendered rather difficult by the circum
stance, that we have unquestionable vestiges of part of the Dorians having given to
several persons of the actual perf. in general, terminations similar to those of the
pres.: as the in/in. ytyiittti, Pind. {Anom. yiytstuu,') "iiivxni, (for -uf.) Theocr. instead
of litvx'v.xt, mirlttns, mQvx*, (for -ui, n,) instead of as, i, Theocr. ; and the part, in
v, eutra. instead of if, v7et, ex. gr. irtp^ixevrscs, Pind. /jtifttvaxeoerec, (from u^u'urxa.}
Archimed. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. Ij 88. Obs. 11. and 14. 111. Obs 2.
Reduplicated aor. like trixiit*, a^agsv, &c, ( 83. Obs. 7* J 85. Obs. 2.) are erroneously
considered as belonging hither.
Obs. 2. The accent of some Epic part, and in/in. points likewise to a prrf. pass.
having assumed the form of a pres. ; ex. gr. inrrAuiio; and in'.am;. axaxwtai,
under
\\r,\afi%vot under
3. B. The aor. 2. produces in some verbs a new formation as
if from <u, and the aor. 2. act. in particular, because of the infin.
in tit.
It cannot be presupposed that there have been verbs supev,
rvyiio, &c. but the aor. tlpov ivpiTi, trvyjiv Tvyttv, gave birth to
the formation itqwa;, tvpwxa, reTvxnxa, &c. which produced, but
later, a pres., see cuplaxv, ruy/jiiiu, and similar forms in /xav&ava;,
fiXaardnu, yi'ywixat, &C.
In some other verbs, of which the aor. 2. pass., as deponens, has
224
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
VERBS.
225
beyond the pres. and imperf., so that this alone already renders
such a verb anomalous, when the whole is considered as conform
able to method ; ex. gr. Xx^xtta, iXxiifixvov,Xt)>J/o{a*i, s'Xa/3ov,
&c.
4. The circumstance that there is a double form of a pres. in
actual use, occurs even in common prose ; and many double forms,
like Xeiwai and Xi/xTravw, xniw and xv'mviu, are found in the best
prose-writers. But one of the forms frequently belongs to a cer
tain dialect, as, for instance, xyitico for iyu, (puyyxvcu for (ptuyu,
were more familiar to the Ionians. Poets of all times were par
ticularly fond of such collateral forms, as were handed down to
them from days of yore. Frequently also such a fuller collateral
form became most current in popular language, and was com
pletely conjugated with aor. &c, whilst the equally complete
radical form receded from the language of daily intercourse, as
TriqQu eTteqax, gave way to iropQieo iiro^naa.
Obt. 1. Such modifications of the radical form were frequently attended with dif
ferences in the signif. Instances of this kind belong to Dictionaries, or to the
Section on the Formation of Words. But here, too, it is impossible to draw a strict
line of demarcation. The idea of duration, which in those fuller forms was to be
rendered more sensible as a stronger contrast to the idea of the aor., gave rise to the
modifications of repetition, {iterative,) of frequency, (frequentative,) and of habit,
(habitual, usual.) Thus it was very natural that of two co-existing forms of the
pres. one adopted such a modification preferably to the other. For instance, the
verb figia made of <fi(u, which is formed perfectly analogous to the above-mentioned
rt^lin, and to several other correct collateral forms, lias, however, generally some
more restricted peculiar meanings, as 1 to wear a coat,1 *put it onusuaUy? But there
is no fixed rule to be established on that head, and no Writer, no Poet in particular,
considered himself bound by it. Without attending to any particular shade of
meaning, the fuller form was frequently preferred, whenever euphony, the conve
nience of the metre, or stress to be laid on the thought, required it ; and fi'ui, for
instance, was often employed for <pUa. But all this can only be hinted at here.
Obs. 2. Whenever there was, along with the usual regular form of the verb,
another rather deviating one in the pres., this also produced, it is true, an anomaly
in the language ; for the same writer being obliged to render the thought, for
which he used, for instance, kifvrtiru in the pres., by Xuif>u in the fut., it may be
said that the fut. of Xjprxiv. M Xitya/. Yet as in this case it is not two defective
verbs, which constitute an anomalous whole as in the former, but there merely is
along with a regular perfect verb, (Xutx, kttyx, &c.) a defective one, (Xipram,)
which Poets and Orators use for their own purposes, all such defective collateral
forms must be left to Dictionaries. The grammarian can only direct the attention
of the learner to the analogy, according to which the lengthened forms resemble
each other in many instances, as will be seen in the following .
5. But it does not follow that all the themes, which are or
appear to be the basis, on which some tenses were formed, have
Q
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
therefore existed. It is, indeed, possible that the simple radical
form, which is in the other tenses, may have existed formerly
in a pres. (compare 83. Obs. 6.) but on the whole it is not
probable ; and it often would happen that the habit of seeing
various formations combined in one verb, led tothe preference of
an easier conjugation, or introduction of some change, neither of
which circumstances necessitates the supposition of a correspond
ing pres. of a similar theme. Of this nature is, beside the in
stances mentioned in the two preceding . the transition of the
verbs in a> to the formation (iw,) huu, &c. (see 8.)
6. There are frequently several of these circumstances con
curring, so that the conjugation of a verb is mixed up with that
of three or more forms. Thus we have of the primitive form
FIHQfZ orFIAQfl, barely the aor. ivz8<n : another form, strength
ened with v by position ITENQH, maintained itself in the perf.
iciirovQx, &c. but both were forced to give way in the pres. and
imperf. to the form irxayjii, which now gives its name to the
whole verb. From IlETAfi comes issraau, &c. in the perf. pass.
through the syncope we'wTa/xsu, whilst the lengthened form thtxvis alone in use in the pres. and imperf., &c.
7. Some of the derivative forms of verbs are of such a nature,
that there are scarcely any instances remaining in the language
of a similar change of the radical verb ; ex. gr. in uyiviw from
aycu, Baayju from riAQfi, cs9iu from e'Sw, iXdutca from Ixiu, &c.
Most of them, however, conform with others to the same obvious
analogy, which must be comprised under one point of view, the
better to commit to memory the anomalies of their conjugation,
and the numerous collateral forms of the whole verb, or its
pres. tense, which occur especially in the Greek Poets.
Remember that, when in the following examples two forms are
combined by and, they are both in use ;where from is men
tioned, the latter verb either is quite obsolete, and to be recog
nised only in the tenses derived from it, or is found merely in
the old Poets ; and when for is mentioned, the first form is
peculiar to the Poets. Verbs belonging to the first and third
category are not stated again in the list of Anomalous Verbs, unless
there be some particular reason for it.
8. One of the readiest changes was
uinto ecu, more rarely da>, contr. a :
piitru and jmniu, nrvniu from KTTIlfi, (whence enTUTrov,) yay-iw
VERBS.
227
223
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
sioned a new formation in iu, (see 111. 3.) out of it, and a
pres. tense in laxw,
from ETPX2 aor. tvpov, Bvpgtn,ivpluKU,-flit, gupwoai :
see also d/j.itXxx.laxoj, itatyimtu, inxupioxo/Axi.
Obs. 0. This form may be compared with the Latin verbs inchoative, since several
of these verbs denote a beginning, increase, growing ; but they seldom distinguish
themselves by this signification from the simple form, as the Latin rubeicere, for in
stance, does from rubere. We have, however, an instance of this kind in ti&if, lam
arrived at puberty, 'nfc&vxu, I am growing up to puberty. Commonly the simple form
had the same signif., or was quite obsolete. But verbs in rxu sometimes have a
causative or transitive sense, (see 113. 2. to cause or get another to be in the
state, or to perform the action, of the simple verb,) ex. gr. piti*, I am drunk, ptilvrxv, I intoxicate, (see the List ;) rlnrmv, I give to drink, from /, inn. See below
<'*i about fc^rxifuti. The learner has been cautioned already, (in the Obi. to J 103.
II. I. Note,) carefully to distinguish the Ionic imperf. and aor. in i> from these
verbs.
Obs. 7. The x in the termination tx is, however, sometimes radical, and the <r a
mere strengthening addition ; ex. gr. Xjittm from AAKf!, itrxa, {to lUen, compare,)
from iizv, (to be Hie, resemble,") Tirirxn for riu%*i. The case is different with
akuexw, 6'iiiexv.
11. Some verbs have Attic and Poetical collateral forms in &a>,
with different vowels preceding,
Q\yt8oj for (pXiyu, veixiQoj for vs'/xw, q>Qtvv8u> for (pSiviu.
Hither belongs also the lengthening by means of the letters a&
before the termination, which occurs even in Attic prose, but is
found only as a prceterite, imperf., or aor. in -aflov,and in the
dependent moods. Those, which occur of this kind, are,
SiwxatSeiv, iiiuxxBov, from Sia/xw, sixafleiv, e!xz9oim.i, from eI'xoi,
a/xuvstfleiv, d/ju/vx8o!ixviv, from dixvva, e'tpyxStiv from ei'y<u,
and the Epic uLercxlxQov from nits.
Compare with them the forms introduced at a later period instead
of via), (I spin,) d\ea>, xvda), vriQw, dXri^u, xvnQat : see also ir\ri9a>
and itpMoj, in win&Kvifu and niixTrpvuM.
12. Sometimes a v is inserted before the termination,
5a'xv<y from AAKH, (whence t'Jaxov,) see also below, renvoi,
XX/J.VOJ.
Hence iu and vai becometvcu and vvoj,
trhu from II I ft, rut and rivtu, Si/a/ and Suvw, hruu and
EVTt/vw, see also (pSiw, ivw, lip voj,
and aw becomes -xUu, seldom ata,
/3/v<u from BAD,, <p$dw from OQAfL
13. The trisyllabic and polysyllabic verbs in dw, and some in
ahu, have, however, a theme in u for their radical form, which,
VERBS.
229
(coming from the aor. 2., see 111. 3.) produces some tenses,
as if of ioi :
av%co and av^dvai, fiXaardvai from BAA2TX2, aor. 2. efiXxarov,
jut. fiXaorrifjcv, aniyboixai and dutyfidvotxau, see also below
(j.a%Txvu, ouoQdwixm, &c.b\ioQdvta and oXioQalva, aor. 2.
ai\ioQov, jut. okia^rtau.
The verbs in va> usually insert a nasal sound in the radical syl
lable of the verb, and shorten the radical vowel, when it is long,
in this manner,
XsiVo* and "kifVltdvu, (psvyco and (puyydvu, epivyai and l^vyydvu,
XriQco and Xorthdvaj. See also below, avfldvio, biyydvu, X.*/x/3ayft>, "Kay/jxvu, [/.onddvco, nvvbdvoiAaiy rvy^dtai.
Obi. 8. With respect to the quantity of the doubtful vowels before the final syl
lable m, it may be remarked in general that i'w and mi are long, ex. gr. i(m, tym,
fyaivm, but am short. However, if we follow the Epics,
QSdm, /MM*, xi%umf
are long: but the Attics are so far deviating, that they not only make
rim, Qi/m, short, but also include again
Qldru, ^w', in the analogy of the other verbs in dm, and make them
also short.
14. A very frequent change is that of
u into wixi, (see 106. Obs. 4.)
olyu and oYyvv/jn, Se/xvc/uu from AEIK.fi, (whence Se/^w, &c.)
see below, ayvv/xi, opvufxi, o/xopyvvixi, fyvywixi, &C. and also
nralpu and 9rTvuM.i, (primitive form IlTAPfi, compare
above 92.9.)
When a vowel precedes the termination, the v is commonly
doubled, and o becomes a,
xge/xcw and xpe/xdyyvixi, see below, Kepdwum, <ntrdvwn.i, <jxeSavvypii, tycu and ^ivwfM, see below, Kopevvv^.1, afiimvixi, aroptwvtxi, rlu and rmvtxt, yjiai and yyuvvvy.i. See below
<wvvi/|U.i, pamvixi, arpdmvixi, y^pamvti.1.
15. A change, which is rather confined to Poets, is the insertion
of a v before the termination aw, thus,
dta into votw, vr//.i,
$otfiM and Sa/xvaw, $d//.vv)fj.i, migydui, mipvAixi, from sregow,
and changing e into >, xigvaw, nipvntu, from xspau, (xepdvvuu,) and also ffi'Xvn/uu, w/tw/uu, ax.iSmiJ.1, from 7reXa!<v,
IlETAft, 2KEAAX1 ,
. 1 In this word the Attics made the syllable *< long, which else as a redupl. is
short, and actually is so in- xi^tai, &c. See in the Lit the quantity of the other
forms belonging to film and <pdm.
230
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
16. Several verbs, not only those in iu, but many others, take
the redupl. in the pres.
yiyvuaxcn from TNOfl, whence yvaiao^ai, tMixvhax-co, wiwgatfxar,
&c. and tx.iio} and n,iy.\ai, it'iyuiircii* from IlETfi, ylyvofx.ai
from FENX1
17. Lastly, some verbs form single tenses from very different
radical verbs, exactly as in Latin/ero, tuli, latum. And the very
same verb is an instance of it in Greek,
Qipu, flit, olaa, aor. rjveyxov.
The other most decisive examples may be seen in the List, under
at^eco, Eiffelv, g%oy,ai, iaSlcu, bqxu, rpiyju. Compare also the ad
ditional remarks to aklaxofxat, ioiaQai, %dai, $iu, itXriaaw, rXrimi,
113.Anomaly of Signification.
1. Whatever relates to the signif. of verbal forms, is properly
the province of Syntax, since it cannot be separated from the
theory of the construction of the language. The most general
points, without which the subject of conjugation could not have
been understood, have already been stated ; and the deviations
of meaning, as far as they are more or less firmly established
in some verbs, cannot be kept distinct from the anomaly of the
formation of verbs, exactly as in Latin, ex. gr. odi, hortor, audeo,
ausus sum; but the instances in Greek are at once more various
and frequent.
2. We must, however, previously elucidate a subject, (which,
on the whole, concerns only the Dictionary,) because it enters
in various ways into the anomaly of the Greek verb, viz. the immediative and causative signif. of verbs. The former denotes
the action or situation as belonging directly or immediately to
the subject ; the latter denotes the action or situation as being
caused or effected in another. There is in the regular way a
particular verb for each of these signif., though the causative
verb may be derived from the immediative. Thus in English
fall, lie, awake, are immediative, and from them are derived the
causatives to fell, lay, awaken, which cause the falling,'[lying,
awaking of another object. But it is an anomaly, when, as is the
E The i in r/srrv is long according to the Eltjm. 31., and the first syllable of
Ki%ivu, "yi/hi, is acknowledged to be long. The inferences to be drawn from this with
regard to redupl. in generalj are stated in Buttm. Cumpl. Gr. Or.
VERBS.
231
case in all languages, one and the same verb combines both signif.1
in Greek, for instance, k\avveiv, immed. to Tide in a coach, move
hastily towards a place; caus. to drioe, x6isiv, to sit and to set.
This appears to have been the case with many more verbs in the
old language, and this accounts for the circumstance, that in
several verbs, which for that very reason belong to the anomalous
verbs, the immediative signif. has been retained in some tenses,
and the causative in others, as we have seen above in the verb
Obs. 1. The causatives are by their nature transitivet, and as the immedialives aro
also intransitive* in most eases, it has given rise to the very general, but incorrect and
misleading practice of treating this subject as an intermixture of a tram, and intrant.
signif. But independently of this denomination being much too broad, (since verbs
may be trans, and intrans. without changing their meaning, ex. gr. the transitive to
see, may also serve to denote the situation of one, who has his eyesight ; the intrans.
fiiytn, to flee, is likewise transitive, tfiiytn nrx, to avoid one, which cases very fre
quently approximate without being identical, ex. gr. when mihiv, to hasten, be
comes transitive, rtrtSUn rt, to hasten something, but never tnSiin risk, to cause one to
hasten;however, in all cases where causativum and immediativttm actually bear the
same distinction as transitivum and intransitivum, we may employ the latter deno
minations equally well, when the causative relation has been previously fixed, or may
be supposed to be well known.
Obs. 2. The pass, or med. form is also employed in several verbs to express what
is here called the immediative signif., because any immediative idea, whenever the
mind supplies a causativum, may be considered as the pass, or med. of this causativum,
ex. gr. to He, as to b laid or to lag one's self. Hence of xxiil^tn, to set, the signif. to
tit, or more accurately, to set one's self down, belongs properly to the medium xxli^y
tint, yet the act. nmilfyn was as readily employed in the same sense. And many of
these verbs of double meaning have undoubtedly creeped into most languages by the
pronoun se in Latin, or the Greek iavrh, having been added, omitted, or understood;
of this kind are almost all the Latin verbs of this class, ex. gr. abttinere, (scilicet,) se,
to abstain from. See also 130. Obs. 2. The particular cases, where a verb com
bines both signif., are stated in Dictionaries ; Grammar, besides stating the gene
ral view of the matter, attends only to those instances, where assigning the two
signif. to different forms of the same verb renders that verb anomalous. Thus the
aor. 2. and perf. of some primitive verbs are the tenses, which particularly assume
the immediative signif. j see beside, Irrn/u, irttflrxv, fixitu, 5k', iet'ixa, l^u'ru, Ifvfu,
tr&mvpi, rxixxa, fim, in the List, and the following Obs.
Obs. 8. That the perf. 2., as we remarked, } 97. 6. Obs. 5., especially belongs to
the intrans. signii'., id seen in particular in verbs, in which the two signif. are inter
mixed. HfxTni is one of those, where the pres. act. has the two meanings, and its
two perf. at least in the most current prose *, actually have the two different signif. :
x^xttu, I do, make, perf. tritrji^n, v^xrru, Ifind myself, (ex. gr. xxXii.) perf. irt1 Ex. gr. in English to burn, immed. to be on fire, cacs. to setfire to, the Latin
snppedilare, immed. to be at hand, caus. to cause something to be at hand, to supply;
the French sortir, I si med. to go out, caus. totaheout, drop; immed. tofait, caus.
to let fall.
8 See in Buttm. Compl. Gr. Or. the List'of Verbs.
232
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
vrciya. This appears to have been originally the case with all such verbs as OAn,
nurn, V*, <rixu, &c. : they all had both meanings, and that of the per/. 2. was the
intrant, one. But the pass, or med. of most of those verbs had the, intrant, signif.
(compare 135. 4.) and as the per/. 2. has the same, the per/. 2. of the following
verbs, (which also ought to be seen in the list of Anom.,) appears to belong to the
med. or pass, voice, to which, however, it belongs as little as the per/. 1. Tifw,
IVtjixh, which is exactly in the same predicament :
aytv/u,iyto/im, I break, intrant.; per/, 'ixyx, lam broken:
itum,iaU/iai and i'iitm, 1 burn, intrans. :
lysu$/t\yi\^6fmu, I awake, iygnyoga, I watch :
iAfr, (/ cause to hope,) tXvropxi and ioXta, I hope:
xHia, (I afflict,) xnbtptLi and xixnlx, I am anxious about any thing :
fitzivbi, )xv :,.-, ,>, I drive mad,) pxlvopeu and u-.uiwi.. I am mad :
eiyw, otvofyv, attu%ec,airotyofiai, I yet open, xi'iuya, I stand open :
o\\vfj.i, c\u\ixx,oXXvfiett, Jgo to ruin, oXaiXx, I am undone :
vWuxx,xuSeftxi, / believe, <x'vrofcx, I trust :
xriyfufii, vrtyivfAai, I become fixed, vixnyx, I am fixed :
pfiyvupi, pYiytvpat, I rend, intrans., tppwyx, I am rent :
cnTu, (/ make putrid,) eriro/txi, 1 become putrid, ainntx, I am putrid:
trtxtu, (/ melt, trans.) rrixo/txi, I melt, intrans., per/, rirvxa :
tpx'nu, (I shew,)<pul>6[teti, I shine, per/, vi^wx.
See about (Silt* the following Obs. The per/, of some deponents, like ylyti/txi,
y'tynx, are explained in the same way.
Obs. 4. Every transitive may be considered as the causative of its pass., and this,
of course, may be looked on as an immcdiative. Sometimes the language really gives
the act. form to a pass, idea, as in Latin vapulo, which thus becomes au intrans. im
mcdiative, ofwhich /erio is the causative. It is thus that the few instances in Greek,
where particular tenses of a verb, though of act. form, have yt a pass, signif., are
accounted for ; especially some per/. 2. like iffuyx, ixyx, lam broken, /orced asunder.
The Homeric rtriv^ats, (see the Anom. Ttv%a>,) and the pei/. 1. ixXeaxx, (see iXiVxa^ai,)
are still more exact instances. Fluctuating ones, between the trans, and this neutropass, signif. are, of tphi^a, I spoil, (trans.) l/iipicfx, I have spoiled, and am spoiled;
rivlnyx, I have struck, with some Writers / have been struck, and rirfmpx, see the
Anom. T^ot.
3. It is likewise an anomaly of signif., when the act. med. or
pass, meaning of the verb does not correspond to it in all its
forms. That the act. voice should have a pass, signif., is of most
uncommon occurrence : see the preceding Obs. But it is fre
quently the case with the deponens, a verb which combines an
act. signif. with a pass, or med. form. This anomaly is uncom
monly frequent in the Greek language. Whenever the act. form
is quite wanting in a pass, verb, which has an act. signif., it con
stitutes a real or defective deponens, which, according as the aor.
is taken from the pass, or med., is ( 89. 3.) a deponens pass, or
deponens medium : ex. gr. Ivtot^ai, tSwnbw, to be able, dnio^ai,
r>*.co-dfA.nv, to heal, nv^iwi^m, invSiimv, to learn, hear.
VERBS.
233
Obt. 5. The frequency and variety of verba deponentia in Greek comes from the
intermixture of the med. voice, which partly partakes so much of the past, both in
signif. and form, and partly implies so often the complete, or almost complete mean
ing of the act. Any principles bearing on this point in general belong to Syntax,
(see 135. Obt. 4. and 8.) and their application to particular verbs is the province
of Dictionaries, which must l>e consulted about the very numerous defective verba
deponentia.
Obt. 6. But the Greeks often allow themselves to form tenses with a past, signif.
from a deponent. This is done 1.) in the per/., where the construction imme
diately shews whether it is to be understood in the pats, sense ; ex. gr. Plato de
LL. 710. Tlavret eMrit{yBLfctt
(from a.Tioyii^o^ai, I make, perform,) where the
dot. must be rendered by the English by, All hat been made, completed by the Divinity.
2.) In the aor. patt., when the deponent as such has an aor. med., ex. gr. faiXenau, I
force, Ifimfiftm, 1 forced, i/3m-3iv, / wat forced; hl-aftmi, who hat taken, Ji^Si/j,
accepted. Compare 13G. Obt. 2.
4. It frequently happens that the fut. act. of act. verbs is little
or not at all used, and the
Fut. Medii
has the trans, or intrans, signif. connected with the act., when
the rest of the med, with its peculiar meaning does not occur of
such a verb. This is the case with a number of the most familiar
verbs, ex. gr. daovoj, I hear, axouaoixai, (never axouaw,) I shall or
. will hear.
Obt. 7. We subjoin some fut. of this kind : iyvmnpiti, Sn/ix:, (from t2,)
ktwrf^ffifiat, avtXttvrcftcu, fiaSiovfutt, ^arifftfiai, yiXetirapiett, yrigeirafieu, iyxufitaffo/Ltai,
txeunrafuti, ifie^xriffofACLi, Beeu/jturtfien, Sri^affofiai, and SrigtCnpat, xX'npo/ieti, xoXttirepat,
oiUM%opeti, -rrMtfafiau, wi^ofjLat, fftyrifofLoti, and nwnco/Acti, ffxu^rOfjMi, f<xovba.90fjLat, tfv^i\f
(jtai, -ro&arftjUai, {*;rtytj : to which must be added the verbs Uf*k and a73*. See
also in the list of Anom. Verbt especially upxeruvu, /3a/v,
$\<*vxw, yiyjurxm,
Sccxyof, iafSecva, ittffeu, iifyatrxat, S'tai, Siyyavot, 9yflV*, S^ugxu, xotfiw, xXuiu, Xayy^ivK,
\ap.{ia*M, fiavSavv, vim, (vturtyta;,) o/ti/pt, i^elai, vat'tCp, Tei<r%u, fttVrw, T\iu, srtitt, piv,
rlxTti, r(ix, Tfiiyti, Qiiyv, x'i&must, however, be observed that practice was
as little fixed and constant in this respect as in others : many fut. of the act. may
be met with, where other writers used the fut. med.3 ; but we must carefully exa
mine 1.) whether such passages may not be corrupted, and 2.) whether the Writer
does not belong to the later Writers, or what are called *), who often forsook again
the Attic usage in this respect *.
5. But the fut. med. was also employed as pass. : yet this
usage was not so steady in particular verbs as the preceding ; it
depended chiefly on the exigencies of euphony, and consequently,
with Poets, of the metre. In polysyllabic verbs the still longer
3 Nothing, for instance, is more easy or common than to mistake the Attic form
of the 2 pert. med. in u, (for ,) for that of the act. in tit. Hence in several pas
sages, where we have f
, for instance, we ought to read fti^u, which form of
the 2 pert, was not so familiar to transcribers.
* The learner must be careful not to mistake the conj. aor. 1. for the fut.; ex. gr.
in Hit axoutu
139. 06*. 7.
234
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fid. pass, was thus avoided ; ex. gr. a^sX-n^roii for iqsk'n'b-hawrai,
vrepiQeoSai, (Herod. 7, 149.) for ireptetySrueirSai, and the same in
a,u.ipT/3)r6rv, o/xoXoyEiv, dnxWirrsiv, (puXxrmv, yvfMxCw, aoixsly,
^/aiovv. There are, however, instances also of shorter verbs as
Obs. 0. It may easily be supposed that this was rather uncommon in verbs, of
which the med. voice had a signif., which corresponded too closely to the transitive
act. one ; but it occurred still less, and perhaps not at all in those verbs, of which
the fut. med., According to Text 4., steadily had the signif. of the act.
Obs. 9. There are very few instances, and these few chiefly in Epic poetry, where
the aor. med. too occurs as pass. Yet some compounds of rx'irSeit are also used
passively by the Attics, as KttriwxitSui, opins, liurip. Hipp. 27. Plato Pluedr. 49.
ffvf%lofii'to;1 Thetfft. 58.
6. We rank among the instances of an anomalous signif. of
the tenses, those in which the per/, has the signif. of the pres.
tense. We shall easily conceive this transition from the former
tense to the latter, when we consider that in using the perf. we
generally think less of the action, which is past, than of the state,
which resulted from it. Thus ribmKa properly signifies / have
died, but on thinking of the state, which resulted from it, as still
continuing, it means / am dead; and in this sense it is a pres.
tense. In other yerbs the original perf. was still more lost sight
of, ex. gr. x-rao/xai, / acquire, consequently xix-m/x.xt, I have ac
quired. But the consequence of acquisition is possession ; hence
xsx-rrvAsii was taken to denote / possess, without thinking any
looger of any previous acquisition. In all these cases it follows
of course that the plusq. becomes the impcrf.
Obi. 10. Thus it is not exact to assign to the verb /3 in the pres. tense both
significations I see and knout; ti2 meant / see, perceive, and the per/. ui, I have
perceived, and consequently know.
Obs. 11. But when ideas were nearly related, the pres. tenso itself might easily
take the meaning of the new derivative pres. expressed by the perf., or versa vice.
Thus it happened, especially in poetry, that the pres. and per/, frequently had the
same signif.; ex. gr. p-'iXn, properly it goes to the heart, it concerns, fciftnXi, it went
to the heart, hence both signify it grieves ; Hp**, I perceive, iiJ, / have perceived,
hence both mean / see.
Obs. 12. The application of these principles to occurring instances, of which the
most familiar are noticed in the list of Anomalous Ferbs, must be left to individual
notice, as the same case may often be viewed in different lights. But we must
particularly notice some instances, where in Epic poetry the plusq. supplies the place
of the aor., or of the imper/., though the per/, of that verb does not occur as a
pres. tense.
Obs. 13. The case of the prrf. becoming the pres. tense, ii^articularly frequent in
verbs denoting a sounding and raising 0/ the voice: xixfxyu, I cry out j and farther,
'/,i?.HKa! ytymx, amya, fiifyvxu, /tiftuxet, fj.'iu,r,Kx, xik\ayyx, r(f(iy.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
235
2,3(3
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
237
them from Homer and other ancient Poets. Nothing but what
is found in Homer and Hesiod, and in some fragments of those
old times, can safely be looked on as belonging to the general
analogy of the language. The peculiarities of later Writers may
also belong to it, since they had older Authors, lost to us, before
their eyes, but historical certainty is wanting. Whenever we have
been able fully to trace the formation and use of a verb in the
. old Writers, we have had no regard to the peculiarities of the later
ones, or it is only in very important instances that we have
referred to them by name.It also follows from 1. 11. that
whatever is noted as Homeric, (especially with the mention of
Homer,) does not exactly occur exclusively in Homer's Poems,
but is likewise to be met with in the subsequent Epic Poets, to
whom Homer served as a model.
10. And lastly we observe that we have generally omitted those
collateral forms, which, though perfectly synonymous with a form
more in use, do not create any difficulty, being either a pres.
tense, or easily reducible to a pres. tense, and consequently
readily found in the Dictionary. All which Grammar can do
with respect to the formation of such collateral forms, is to direct
the attention of the learner to some general analogies ; and this
has been done in the preceding Sections.
A.
' Kico, {I hurt,) Homer has of this theme, the 3 pres. pass. aSrai,
aor. 1. act. acta*, contr. aaa, (Od. X. 61.) pass, and med.
aai&w, daad^m l. Both are sometimes long, sometimes
short ; the case is the same with the verbal adj. daros, whence
with the a priv. ddaros, (w Z " ) invincible, which cannot be
hurt, inviolable, Horn. It is from this old form that came
the subst. am, (a,) and thence shortening the a. the new
verbal form draco used by the Attic Poets.
Compare also &*, I satiate.
aydfjjxi, (I admire,) pres. and imperf. like ij-apiai, fat. dydao/j-ai,
aor. rryda^m.
The Epic pres. tenses iydtuai, iyxUfcxi, occur with the collateral meanings
of to envy, to be angry.
' 1 An might also be assumed as the radical theme, from which the other forms
were derived by lengthening. But the lengthening of a long vowel, which did not
originate in contraction, (, &<m, >,) would be contrary to analogy :
on the
contrary, really belongs to in, I satiate. The Homeric verbal adjectives iiam and
irn are, moreover, best explained in this way. See Buttm. texilogus, I. 50.
238
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
iyt!(ti, (/ assemlile,') per/. pas. iynyif/uu, aor. 2. med. injtn. Epic ctyifirSm, part,
iyfiptiw See J 110.4.
aywy-i, (I break,) fut. a$,u, ( 112. 14.) The prceterites have the
syllabic augment, ( 84. 06s. 5.) aor.
(Horn. r,%a,)
aor. pass. Hym, (a.) The perf. 2. soya, (/on. en-yce,) has
the pass, signif. / am broken, forced asunder, ( 113. Obs. 4.)
The aor. 2. pau.' \dym was also shortened in the Epic metre. Compare
ijrAijyn* and xartTkttyw.
This augment is found even in forms, which from their nature ought not
to have any; tx.gr. particip. compos. x<momf, Lysias p. 158. Heiske'.
The xuvuZm! of Hesiod stands for xxrx^iui, (opt. nor.')
ayvntvh), See UTlTv.
|
ay^ifjLUtt 860 kyu^u.
ayu, (I lead, bring,) has in aor. 2. a redupl., riyxyw, dyacyetv, &c.
85. 06s. 2. perf.
and aywx*, ( 97. 06s. 2.) perf.
pass. r,yy.m.MED.
The aor. I.
</, a'aeStu, occurs also, but seldom in the Attics'. See
9G. OA.,, g. about the Homeric imper. <t|i.
'AAThe forms ueui, aaact, (to satiate,) which are classed under
this root, may be seen below in aco, but the following belong
hither, viz. atiwai, Hnxhau, (to be satiated, weary of a thing,)
as if from AAEfi, which in Homer are commonly written
aSSjjuai, &CS.
aSeiv, &C. see avSavtt.
Ai/{, see n\m.
|
'AEfl, see itifu andj.
imfu, {I blow, breathe, see &,) keeps its everywhere, infin. &wtu,pass. ar/iai, com
monly with the act. signif., but also to be blown, Od. . 131.
am'*, see } 95. Obi. 4.
See Heind. ad Plat. Gor^. 50. and PArf. 79. The endeavour to distinguish
this verb from xttrxyv has probably produced this striking anomaly, which was
favored by the circumstance, that this augment is irregular even in its proper place.
'Thissingularformissatisfactorilyexplained by ihedigamma. The verb iy*, ttyn/ti,
is one of the words, in which we trace in Homer the vestiges of the digamrna men
tioned in C. Obt. 3. This verb was originally FArn, and this F was a consonant
(V.) On being compounded with cans, it became of course KAFFArn, just asBaXX.iv
became xaftSaAXa, &c. (117- Obi. 2.) No wonder that' this double spiritus, chained
as it were by the metre, was retained here, whilst the digamrna vanished every
where else. Considering the intimate relation, or rather what may be termed in
some respects the identity of the sounds T and F, U and V, (see the Note to p. 8.)
it was very natural that it became a u. Compare below iZu&n in iJav*.
4 We must guard against mistaking for this aor. that of the Attic verb &ttk for
itcru, which sometimes approximates to it in signification*.
5 This spelling has been introduced by grammarians, because some kindred
words, (as aim, satiety,) are short, and yet Homer employs the first syllable of the
verb always as long.See Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 1C.
[* "Att or aerv as a contraction for iirru or itrrti, should have the iota sub
scriptum, &ttw or atrrv.E. H. B.]
ANOMALOUS VEEbS.
239
240
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
241
242
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the aor.
though less frequent, is likewise inlrans. Theperf.pass.ifi(tfuui0,
formed after the analogy of the fut.
agrees in meaning with
This
fut. itself, with other forms derived from it, (see *{/,) has obtained the par
ticular signif. to adapt one's self to, conciliate, which some of the above forms
also have sometimes, (//. a. 136. Soph. El. 147.)"Ayam, (fitting,) is the
tyncopaled aor. ($ 1 10. 8.)
agiaxaj, (I satisfy, please, conciliate,) fut. apiou, perf. pass. jjgEo>tai.
MED.
It is derived from APfl, of which if'tr*, (according to 95. Obt. 15.) is
the old fut., which exclusively assumed this particular siguif., and produced
the rest of the tenses along with the new pres. tense.
igvu/j-ai, (belonging to ouqaj, as nrxpvvixxi does to irratqw,) is used
instead of oupoiMu in a particular sense, (to get, obtain, as
the reward of exertion, or as booty.) The rest of the tenses,
except the pres. and imperf. are derived from the radical
form".
jtJ^: (/ plunder,) has with the Attics kfitiru, (i^xirs/ixi,) ijf<rs*a, tifrirSm, Slo.
with the later writers, (;,) k^ri\u, i^xiyni, See. Homer has both formations, (see 92. Obt. 1.)"
APO, See a^agiffxa*.
allu and
(J increase,) fut. al\mv, ( 112. 13.)The past, with the fut. of
,
the middle voice, / grow.
ATP, to this root with its principal meaning to take, belong the following two com
pounds" :
1 .)
(/ take away,) of this verb we find in Poets only the imperf. (in
the sense of the nor.) irxifvt, and aor. 1. med. iTnu^iftm, (from ATPn.)
To these tenses must be added the part. aor. I. act.
and med.,
(with pass, signif.) imv(tt/ttvts with a particular change of vowel. These
forms are strictly related to the former in point of meaning.
2.) i!r.TO,r<t,, (J reap the fruits of, enjoy,) fut. Wmftrtfiw, aor. Irntigiftxt,
iiraufirSai, and in un-Attic writers, IrxvfxrSai.(See 90. 8.)
The old Poets have also the act., and chiefly the aor. IrxS^n, Pind. Pyth. 3,
65. conj. ithO^u, infin. itxu^ui or imti^i/uy. The pres. WavAu, which is made
from it, is iu Hesiod.
ityvoav, (I draw from, as water from a river,) fut. d$u%u, aor.
fyua*, 92. Obs. 2.
A$see \a$S*, and ottaQitrxu.
xVb (I am angry,) iy^isoixai, ri-/^iabnv, ( 112. 3.)
AXn, see iu^,
10 In Jpollonius,vrhere the reading ip^ifiim is incorrect. Compare ix^x'r1" and
Compare //. . 446. with 121. and x. 160. with i. 124.
t'Aj*"^ na ifiri in the /<., but the /W.
cornea from ipritrtt or
i^TxrTa, which is a Doric and dialectic form. , H, B.J
" See about both, Buttm. Lexilogus, I, 22.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
243
244
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fi'u/uti or i.'M, a Homeric fut. I shall live, which may be considered either as a
real irregular fut. (like n'tfuu, or like xiw, *i<*,) or as a conj. used like a fut.
instead of li'tu/iui, (see 139. Obi. 8.) Neither do we attempt to decide whe
ther it belongs to an old verb BEIfi, (whence, perhaps, /3<', />'>,) or whether
the pan. form of the verb/3*/ took the collateral meaning of wandering through
lift, that is to say, living, in which case Siuc/uu would correspond to the act.
form jiila, conj. for p*.
gippclexu, (J eat,) from BPOfl.
The part. perf. fit/Sfwun sometimes undergoes a contraction like that of
110. 10. whence Soph. Antig. 1010. fii/jjirif. See about the Epic aor. f/5f",
1 10. 0. The Homeric /i/3a;3( belongs to a particular verb, the intensive
/3i/3f9i, / devour.
fSi&eif (I live,) fut. fiioiooiMu, aor. Iplcoaa, and (aor. 2.) s/3uuv, /SicJvai,
part, finis, conj. fiiu, air, &c. opt. fiiymi, ( 110. 6.)
\ The forms fiiujKapai, and avafiiuricepeLi, have both the intrant, signif. Qo start
into life, revive, Plato Phad. 72.) and the transitive one, (to restore to life,
Crit.9.) It is merely in the latter sense that it has the aor. 1. ifiivra/mr,
(Od. 9. 4C8. Plato Pitted. 89.) in the former the act. ita^mmu is used.
BA, see fiiXXm.
fiXxarxvu, (7 sprout out, bud,) pKxtsrviaai, sfiXxirov, ( 112. 13.)
fiXciixoj, {I go,) has, as if from MOAft, aor. e/lmXov, mXuv, /j.o\o)v,
fut. tKokvvfxoLi, perf. u.ii.fi\coxx, (according to 19. Obs. 1.
for nAitXanta,) as if it were MAOfl, whence came the pres.
tense fiXtiuKu. See 110. 11. The pres. /xoXsu is sus
picious.
fitxu, (/cry, or callout,) always contracts i into a>16 in the Ionic dialect, fut. fiarefiui,
it then draws the accent back; aor. ?/W, and takes c in the aor. pass.
BOA, see
and fiiv*.ipeti.
/3d<rxfc', (Head to pasture,) fut. /So-rxtiew, &c. ( 112. 8.) MED.
fiov\oixxt, (7 )tZ/,) yu<. fiouXvioixxi, perf. fitfiouXvu-xi, aor. Ifiouvifiovk-J&w. (See about the augment, 83. 06s. 5.)
Homer lias also a per/". 2. /ii/Ssi/Jut, (v^fcfavXu, / prefer.) The first syllable
was likewise short in Homer, and the old language in general, in which case
it is written with an e, 0>Xir9i, ( 5. Obs. 3 )
BO, see buiit.
| BPO, see /S</3!.
fifX*"i 'fyu/C", an Epic aor. to wake a noise; different from fy't^ir, to wet, ^i^u-Sai,
&t'X&*'*'t and ^o^Swr;, to be wet.
I roar, bellow, dep. pass. The perf. act. has with Poets the signif. of the
pres. Compare unxatuai and /muufuu.See about the perf. fiifyix*, Buttm.
Lexi/ogui, II. 85.
15 This becomes evident on. comparing the verb /33u" for /3i3i", to aid. Com
pare below iiiu.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
245
r.
yxixtu, (J marry,) from TAMfi, fut. again yaixia, yaixu, aor.
eynux, yriixxi, 8cc.perf.ysyziji.mx, &c.MED. I marry, take
a husband. The form eyx/A-ndm, (whence Theocr. has yxu-tSeTax,) is a pure pass.
TA, see TENfi.
y'tyuva, a per/, with the signif. of the pres., I call aloud, proclaim. But most of the
other forms are made as of a pres. in m or derived from this per/. ; infin.
ytytnui, imper/. \yiyt,%vi, (for -tar,) 3 pert, iytyuiu, but also (lytywt,) yiymt,
which form consequently occurs as pres., imperf^ and aor. See 111.2.
TEN. This root, which corresponds to the Latin verb gigno, genui, has two prin
cipal signif. ; the causative, to beget, and the immediative or inlrans. to be born,
The forms are anomalously intermixed. Of the act. one there is none in use
but the per/, (yiyna :) all the rest in both signif. belongs to the medio-passive
form. The whole may, according to custom, be assigned to two different pres.
tenses :
1.) yim/iai has merely the meaning of bring born ; in the pres. it is Poetical,
to be begotten, and to beget ; in the aor. lyutm/wt merely transitive, to
beget, in both prose and poetry. Else the regular verb ymau is used in
this last signif.
2.) ytyve/ieu, (old and Attic, later yiufssu,) /ut. ytvfooftai, aor. iytveftrir, per/.
yiyifnfieu, or (in act. form) yiyna : un-Attic forms lytvnSni, ytynSwftxi.
All these forms are absolutely intransitive not only in the proper signif.
of being born, but also and even more frequently in the mere sense of
becoming, growing, the Lat. fieri. To this must be added the signif. to
be, since iyiiipm and yiyna serve at the same time as prtelerites of the
verb i!tcu. But whenever yiyna can be translated by the pres. tense /
am, it always conveys this particular meaning, / am by birth, or have
become.
There is for yiyna a Poetical form, (yiy&a,) pi. yiya/ztv, yvyittrn, infin.
yiyiifiit, (for -urai,) part, ytyaiis, Attic yiy*s, (see 1 10. 10.) It appears to
come from TAD, from which is also derived the older form ytyixtn, (for
ytynxuxi, see 111. 2.) in Pind.17lyitre, y'tm, (Hesiod, Pind.) is the synco
pated aor. for lyinro: see also the following article.
ylrrs, {he took, seized,) an old verb in Homer, of which no other tense occurs. In
other Poets it also stands for iy'mrt, Syim, from the preceding verb.
ynSico, (I am glad,) yv&ww, &c. ; per/, yiyrfta, is the same with
the pres. and more used.
yn%att or yntitxv, {I grow old,) /ut. yn(aee/ii, is regular after the first form, yet the
Attics prefer the form yneaiai to the infin. aor. yn(atai.
This ynfavai is the infin. of the more ancient aor. lyrirar, (see Buttm.
Compl. Or. Gr.) to which belongs also the Poetical part, ynfat, (It. j. 197.
yntaTtrn>, Hesiod, E. 188.) to which the aor. J2jv, from iilfdrxu, exactly
corresponds. See 1 10. 6.
" The anomalous form ytydart, (Batraeh. 143. Horn. Epigr. till.) may be
explained from the per/, yiyaa, (-dart for art,) having become the pres. tense, (see,
however, Buttm. Lexitogus, I. Note to Art. 2, I .) whence also txyiyitrrai, Hymn,
Ven. 198. ; the latter through a new anomaly as a jut.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
yiyttfjuu, ylvofixi, see TEN.
ytyvcioxv, (old and Attic, commonly ymtiaxv, I know, Lat. nosco,)
from rNOQ,fuf. yvdao/xai, aor. eyva/v, pi. eyvwy-ev, &c. infin.
yvutoti, imper. yvaiSi, yiurai, &c. opt, yvoi'nv, part, ymis,
( 110. 6.) per/, 'iyvaixa, pass. eyva/oiJ.au.
In the carnalive signif. ( 113.2.) to pertuurle, which the compound imyiyyurxa has, particularly with the lonians, it forms the aor. 1. xAyvuirx.
yiau, (I bewail,) aor. 2. lysn, II. ?. 500. ( 96. Obs. 5.)
y^nyt^lu, see tyiiooj.
TUN, see yiy&nx.
A.
AA,lulu. The forms belonging to these themes have four
principal signif. : to divide, give to eat, burn, teach.
1. ixiu, (I divide, particularly with a sharp instrument, / diitributt,) in this
form and signif. has merely the pres. and imper/. and is only Poetical ;
but the/ut. tare/tai, aor. tixtrdpw, as depon. med. have the same meaning,
and arc also employed in prose ; the per/, 13xr/txi has the pass, sense,
(lam divided, distributed,) and its third pers. pi. hixixrxi adheres again
to the root Son's/ for the sake of euphony. Compare (ix/s/txi i/ix/rdftxr,
>a!u \ixna.fi.r\i. The pres. txr'nftxi, (which see below,) bears the same
relation to these forms as rxr'ufixi to trxrxrSxi.
2. tietlvjfti, (I give to eat, treat, /east,) med. Ixlw/ixi, (I consume, revel,) 2 pers.
ieutvt, (see 107. Obs. 4. 4.) according to the analogy of verbs in nyu
makes its tenses from 2/<v, which, however, never has this signif. in the
pres. tense, Ixlra, ixiro/ixi, &c.
3. itt'm in the pres. tense signifies also to burn, kindle'6. In the per/, iilnm,
( 97- 4.) it has the intrant, sense of the med. ix'm/txi, (I burn, am on
fire,) aor. 2. (ihxtifiw,) 3 conj. oxtirxi.
4. AAf! combines the causative sense to teach, with the immediaiive one to
learn. In the first we have only the aor. 2. iSxst or ciixet, ($ 83. Obs. J.)
to which belongs also the Homeric SiSai, but in the sense of /earning, per/.
( -!5*at.) hixxiri, 3iSa;, aor. pass. iSo!>i, (properly was taught, i. e.learned,)
whence the new per/, hixnxx. (Jill- 3.) or iiixti/ixi, /ut. ixirtfuu: iiixx
as a pres. tense, gives (StSSo-Sau,) iiixxrSxi, to get to know, to investigate,
experience, Homer. This verb is merely Poetical, and has no pres. tense
in either sense, but the usual iilxtxu (below) comes from it.
The Epic Swu, onus, &c. an anomalous/ut. with the steady meaning 1 shall
Jind, also belongs to this root10.
Sotxva), (I bite,) from AHKfi, fut. Si^o/xai, perf. SeXuxa, aor. Eoaxov,
112. 12.
"ixfixu, see VifAw.
18 It is from misunderstanding the passage //. i. 4. 7. that the intrans. signif. is
given to this form. Compare II. r. 206. 227.
" Compare xtiu in xupxt. Both are old /ut. from AAfl, KEfl, in the form of the
/ut. 2. instead of ia'ut, mm, with the contr. of the two first vowels, as in the gen.
xXuas, (from x\Um,) for xk'mvs. See 53. Obs. 5.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
247
248
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3i;x<< or 3iS*, (/ see, behold,) aor. ih;*m, (see 96. 04#. 70 also lifixm and
13!{^3>ii', all act.
Se'xoAtai, (/ take,) is in Ionic ^Iko/axi, and hither belongs also,
according to 112. 9. the Epic $eloxr,ix,ivos, (waiting, being
on the watch, II. o. 730. :) SeSsy/u-Evor is used in the same
sense, (77. S. 107. &c.) also 3 pi. Ss^aTai and plusq. as imperf.
eSeVwiv. Yet likewise e'Sexto,
as syncopated aor. in
the sense of taking.See SEiSsy/xai in mmw/m.
Siu, (I tie, bind,) see 105. 06s. 2. and 95. Obs. 4 the /ttf. 3.
fotir><7ou.zi, ( 99. 06s. 1.) supplies the un-Attic fut. 1. Ss&riMED.
liu, (I want, lack,) fut. li-nau, &c. is commonly impersonal : Se",
(it behoves, is necessary, French il faut,) conj. Se'ti, opt. Se'oi,
infin. SeVv, part. Xtov, fut. Strio-si, &c. The pass. Sbo/axi, Set),
or Se'ei, oe"rxi, &c. is always personal, (I want, need,) Serluofj.xi, ISEri&rjv.
The contr. u was sometimes resolved in this vert, even by the Attics, to
distinguish it from the preceding verb; as Isocr. Butir. 2. nniirw Jii/f, and in
Xenopho frequently 3iir/, 3ii9. But Homer has the aor. ??,(//. .100.)
and a peculiar form livipx,, hvnrtpxi.
il*, see Harm.
I
AHK, see <>.
[
}>!/, see AA.
Sioztrxa/, (/ teach,) loses the o- in the formation : Joa2[<u, Se$i'o*x'
&c. ; with Poets also SioWrWMED.
Comes from AAH. Compare the Aofe to a\u<mu.
Siopxaxa, ([ run away,) occurs only in compounds, (awoSiSgoio-xa;,
Sixotopxexu,) from APAfl,/itt. Ipxaoixxi, perf. o&paxxaor.
eS5v, 5f, a, ajtXEV, eSgars, 3 pi. E'S(35?Tav and eopav, ( 107.
06s. IV. 6.) conj. S, jtr,
&c. opt. opxiw, imper. opx$i,
infin. opxmi, part. opxs. See 110. 6. with the Note.
The Ionians have everywhere <i, lii^irxi, 'igneeptu, iifrf, &c. This verb
must not be confounded with the regular
(/ o.) which has /Irf. art.
aivr-.:, and nor. 1 .
: Si^dixec is common to both.
Zltyiixxi, (I seek, inquire,) is a form of fu, which retains the n in
the pass., 106. Obs. 3.
SixeIV, (to throw,) eSixov, is a defective aor.
3,^i!, see p. 177.
I
see Jiru.
|
AME, see Hut,,
ioxrxi or Seztsu, (it appears,) aor. Soxo-axro, conj. Soxaatrxi, (-nttti,)
Homer.
Zoxiu, (I seem, think,) from AOKQ,,fut. 5o$ev, &c. The per/,
from the pass. SE'Soy/xai, (/ have seemed.) The regular for
mation ^wnioj, &c. is Poetical.
See the Kpic Vinn^tim in ii^efuu.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
249
Stm'iti, (to give a hollow sound, make a noise in falling,) per/. Hhu**, ($ 97. Obs. 4.)
aor. XhevrntK and tyinvrwx from a form raorn, which bears the same relation
to Sew'tai, as xrvxlu to ri-rru.
AO, see liiv/ti, $ 107>
ifxfiui, SiS^o/ta, see TfiX"I
APA, see S'dsafKU.
St/va/Acu, (I can, am able, have power,) pres. and imperf. like
"<jr*IMu, 2 pers. pres. i&vxoon, Poetically Si/vri. See about the
conj. and opt. 107. 06s. III. 5, and 83. Obs. 5. about the
augment. Fut. St/v7)<70tan, aor . rfivvriSm, (also EXt/vato-S^v,)
perf. SeStjvnixat.
Verbal adjective, oVvaror, possible.
In Homer this rsro is a dejion. med. Imlrwi for OvntS*.
SiJiwj this ueri originally combined the immediative sign if. fo
in,
enfer, with the causative one, to wrap up in, inclose, ( 113.
2.) '
The pres. act. tin has only the latter, (lo wrap in, tint,) and retains it in
the fut. and aor. 1. act. Situ, tSutx, pan. iSc9i, ( 95. Obs. 4.) The MED.
Si^tta/, (I wrap myself up in,) Siaopat, Hhmrifust, took the intrans. {immediative)
signif. (to go in, dive, Sec) which again assumes a transitive signif., to enter
(a garment,) put on (a coat, i. e. to dress.) These signif. of the immediative
sense are retained in the act., in the perf. Siiixa, and the aor. 2. (see 110]
6.) tSit, 5?vj, 2if, imper. iZSi, iSn, con;'. 3m, (//. (. 180. Plato Crat. 413.)
opt. Sim". To this must be added a new act. form in the pres. tense Ji!,
which along with the aor. tint is preferred in certain connections and in the
compounds, to the form Sioftai, \Svfup.tit.
This is the basis of the general practice ; the modifications arising from
the different shades of meaning, especially in the compounds, must be left to
dictionaries and individual study. The aor. med. livtipm has with Epics a
collateral form, Oinn, Qiru, imper. Situ, see 9b'. Obs. 9. Hither belongs
also the part, Svrittmt with the signif. of the pres. in Od. *. 24. Hesiod, E.
382. Herod, makes of Situ Sutiivn, ( 1 12. Obs. 5.)
E.
iifSti, a Homeric form, either from rmt, (to bind,) compare \iynt, iaXm, or from
'{rtfuti, (see below,) for
commonly imre. See Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 87.
syelpoj, (I awaken, or rouse from sleep,) is regular in the act. perf.
synyeqxx, eyhysqix.au.
The med. has the signif. of awaking from sleep, being wakeful, watching,
and its aor. is iyfi/un, ( 110. 4s3.) The perf. 2. lypiytfx, (of which the
anomalous redupl. was probably caused by ny^i/tnt,) has also the immediate
signif. like other perf. 2. (see 1 13. Obs. 3.) but acquires a new pres. signif.,
i. e. becomes a new pres. tense ; properly, I have been awakened, i. e. am
awaie, watch; the plusq. with the force of an imperf, iy^nyiftn. Pres. tenses
** Compare 107- Obs. III. 6. Hence UJJ/m for ixiiv/at, (like Su/ttt for Sun/tu.)
See Buttm. Uxi/ogus, I. 17. 10.
** See about the in/in. iyairSxi, (instead of typeUm,) Buttm. Complete Or. Gr.
250
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
derived from lytiyt^x in the same tense are, iytnytfii in Homer ; iyttiystiu
in the later prose ; and yer.yaiiu in the New Testament. From iyttyi^xrt
arises the Homeric form iytfyifii, (6 1 10. Obt. 5.) and from this again with
new anomalies the 3 pers. pi. lyfnyifSrxri.
liaij see irSi*.
|
ibovfj.xL, see V^^uu.
ItyiMu, xa&6^o/w.a!i, (/ sit down,) fut. xa^eSowiai, ( 95. Obs. 16.)
imperf., tKx^s^iixmv, used as aor.
See, for instance, Plato Meno. 26. p. 89. Xen. Anab. 5, 8, 14. This ren
ders the pre: xaBifrfuxi suspicious even in later writers. Compare below,
"Jp, and above, 108. II. t7r* and f.uxi, which forms properly all belong to
one root. See in Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr., in the List of Verbs,
Later
writers also used the pan. form
instead of IxaSiZopw.
e&e'Xw and &e'X<u, (I will, wish,) fut. e$i\7i<joj, t\-no~cn, &c. ( 1128.) perf. -hSeX-nxx.
(J am wont,) per/, fi'w&a, ( 97. Obs. 2.) Ion. HwScc, is alone
used instead of this pres. tense.
There is nothing left of the pres. but the Homeric part. 7S>, accustomed,
tfiv, (I tee,) an old verb, of which there remains nothing in this tense but uin,
Hut, 'iiitSxi, &c. as aor. of the verb
(which see.) But in the Epics there
is also iiJ in the same sense, (which as pres. of the indie, occurs only in later
Poets,) the pass, form ulofttu, lUctptriY, (iuirsifim, tuexftnes,') for to be seen, and to
seem, Lat. videri. See about the signif. of this verb, g 113. Obs. 10. and about
the special forms used in the sense of knowing, UTix, p2<i, uniuu, &c.) 109. III.
elxo/j perf. Eoma, (/ resemble, appear,) used as a pres. part, ioixws,
Attic slxois-, especially in the neuter eixos-, see the last Note
to 108. (Ion. oIkx, oIkuis, oixor,) plusq. soJxeiv. (Sj 84. Obs. 9.)
fut. ei'&y. (The verb J give way, is altogether regular.) Like
tWais, etna, and sixEvcti occur now and then in Attic Poets for
the sake of the metre.
The pres. uxa occurs nowhere, and the imperf. C!ki, (for U'*u,) merely II. t.
620. The Epic forms i'ixm, itxrnt, and mxrt, XixTt, have been more properly
ranked (in the Note just mentioned, and 110.9.) along with the Attic
U(y/ut, (Soph. Eurip.) among the syncopated forms of the perf. and plusq.
See the same Note about the remarkable form ifgan instead of Ulxmn, which
occurs in the Attic prose-writers.
ii\u, (I crowd, press together,) more commonly t'i\iw or etkiat,
fut. rieoj, &c. aor. 1. infin. ektou, tiXaxi, part. t\aa.s, perf.
pass. EsX/xai, aor. pass. iaXm, infin. aXfivat or d'krinsvxt, part.
dXels, (which forms are also fluctuating in our editions be
tween the spiritus asper, and the spirilus lenis.)
Compare irraXnr, rrxXmxi, from irrikXti : from the same root EAAft, in the
sense of pushing, pressing, comes also iXjtum, (see below,) in the particular
signif. of which to beat, strike, the aor. i).rai, (ex.gr. Od. i. 132.) occurs in
Homer. Hither belongs also, according to $ 112. 9. the plusq. ioXnru, was
crowded, pressed, Apoll. 3, 471. See Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 88. and 76. 7-
ANOMAIOUS VERBS.
t'lpucartti, see MEIPOMAI.
|
tlpi and u/ti, see 108. IV. 5.
eiweIV, (to say,) an aor. 2. indie, ifaov, (Epic eeiwov,) imper. eiwe,
(comp. w/xSeiwe, see 06s. I. 4. 1. to 103.) more usual than
the rather Ionic aor. 1. Eiirce, ( 96. 06s. 1.) imper. Twov,
(erroneously eittov, see J?A'c. /. ad Plat. Menon.) The Attics,
however, use e?War as well as elms, and preferably eIWte,
8ccs*.
With this aor. are intimately connected the fut.
(Ion. ifim,) from
which Poets use as the pres. tenseand of PEfl the per/, i&nus, ( 83. Obs. 3.)
paM. uftiitm, aor. pass. ip'pnSm and ippiSm, (un-Attic tl(i!h, fi;t9ni,)
pt&wa.$,fui. 3. as usual, /u/.
utfitrafim w. Verbal adjective, pnriot, pnrag.
*npu is used as the pre*, tense of this verb, (as we remarked above, 108.
I. 2.) on some occasions ay^tvtn, which properly signifies /o speak in public*
for instance, xaitut ayogtuav mb, tuutSf wrn :otye^idn is alwavs used in
most of the compounds, ex. gr. i<rxyi(tiiv, I forbid, &*um, I forbade ; in
some Xiyu, for instance, ivnktyv, etvTUTov.
The Poetical imper. ia<rin comes from a collateral form with an inter
calated a. Compare Xwsn, uvxu, putyu.
The Poetical liwar or im'm is also very anomalous ; it is identical with.
ijvsjV, of which (wWitm) ivw-frM is to be considered as the aor., since we meet
with no pres. indie. iwV<r<u!', and the in/In. is circumflexed, (inrtruV, Od. y.
93.) //. iwtfsnja-Ai or Xtit^m 87.
efyyai, (/ exclude, shut out,) fut. s'tp%oj, &c.
elpywixi, with the spiritus asper, I confine, shut up, fut. t"p^a>, &c.
The ancient and Epic language has for both signif. l^yu, whence 3 pl.perf.
i!jvTO, and without the augment, tf^xrtu, they are shut up.
eijjWj see eiitsiv and e/jeo-&<jh. But in the sense of connecting in
order it is a particular verb aor. 1. elpx, (Herod. 3, 87. e%ipas,
exserens,) perf. 'ieppj-ai, part. EsgfisW, (Horn.) ipixhos, (Herod.
4, 190.)
u To assume the theme Erin, as is usually done, is needlessly adopting the ano
maly, which the augment u continues through all themooo*. A theme Einft agrees
perfectly well with a radical form En(whence i!r.)
a Grammarians increase the number of the themes of this verb, without any rea
son, by admitting i('m, which absolutely is either the regular fat. of
or the
pres. tense in the sense of asking, (see below.) It is assumed as a theme here on
account of i"gnx, and merely for this
is ranked among the verbs, which take
the temporat augment u. But as PEfl unquestionably is one of the themes of this
verb on account of ippr,r,v, pnpta., the analogy of tlkttQa, uua^reti, ( 83. Obs. 3.) is a
most natural inducement to connect wgqxac with the same theme.
m II. \. 839. and elsewhere Snrrw is conj. aor.
** Just as iiidrxu and iXvexv omit the t in the fut., so does Wicxu. This fut. is,
therefore, no argument to class iwVr here, (though from its form it certainly
might belong hither.) and as the pres. himn, and its kindred forms nVatri and
Itirtt, when they stand alone in Homer, never signify to sny, but to told, they
must be removed from the radical form u'sruV, and be stated separately below, (see
msTTw,) though there is also a pres. Ivtcrrai from fviVrw used at least in Pind. Pyth. 4,
358. where we have iv<VT for itiruy. See a more detailed account of both verbs
in Buttm. Lexihgui, I. 63. p. 27'J.
252
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tlu^tt, see
skai/va, (I drive,) fut. l\aau, (a,) &c. perf. i\v>\ay.a, pass. perf.
iXrikaixqu, aor. rik&nv. Verbal adjective tXaTor, (with later
writers e^Xot/mu, rikx&m, ekaaroi.)
The theme bJm seldom occurs in the pres. tense, but ix, IXpf, ixS, &c.
injln. ix, is in prose the Attic fut. ( 95. Obi. 12.) See also w/Ui, iXrxi, and
about ix>iXJTo. see p. 17C. the Note, and about ixnxdfwo;, (proparox. ex. gr.
Arat.l7C) HI. Oil. 2.
EAET6, EAe, see "nx't"*1(Xxu, I drag, augment ei, 84. 2. fut. \>$fii and iXuvau, aor. ti\%a
and t'lXxvaa, pass, merely etkxuaiucu, elkxiioSriv, fromEAKT^L
MED.
ikxco, (I give hopes, I cause to hope,) eXvojuuci, {I expect, I hope,)
perf. tohita the same with Xsro/*ai, plusq. as. imperf. suWeiv,
(% 84. Ois. 6. and 9.)
EA, see
'ea, see tJfut.
ENErK, eneik, &c. see fifu.
I
itirv, see uVur.
i>r,v&K, an old per/, which presupposes a theme ENEen, ENS12 : mmnOi, Kxrutr
mS-i, (it, tilt, liet on tomeihing,) Horn. See 97. Obt. 2. and compare above
l&sit, hSer, see XfXfuu.
Wittk, (I teo/d",) has two forms for the aor. in Homer, either Xtinrra, more cor
rectly Miiirw, (see Buttm. Lexilogut, I. f>3. p. 282. and compare above J 85.
O&t. 2.) or according to 85. 06. 3. with the redupl. at the end (3 pert.)
iiiV-rw, \Wvxu, see uViiV.
|
trw/it, see 108. 3.
liXwra, see i7x#.
|
i*rvf;r, iiruvgirKa/utt, &c. see ATP.
'En, see uWr.
iisiaraixxi, (/ know, understand,) 2 pers. sirlaraaat, Poetically
(see the A'ofe to Soph. Philoct. 798.)
imperf. vrtturriivm, (so far it goes after "ara.fj.ai, conj. and
o^j<. see 107. Obs. Ill 5.) _/u<. Imo-rTiffo/xai, aor. hniarr&rit.
Verbal adj. litiarfiros.
'izsw, (I am busy, or occupied, about something, see Schneider's
Gr. Diet.)
This old verb, of which some compounds, (especially S/is-ai,) have been re
tained in prose, has the augment u, (Jii7a-,) and an aor. JWtfv, nrtZv, mil,
(Itrimro, Wirruy, furarrin, but all this rather Poetical.) To avoid mistakes,
compare Imn and ivitrw in i#truV.
i'npj, (Ifollow, attend,') tMfiny,'^'/""! tuls tmdMe voice, which is much
used, has an aor. corresponding to that of the act.
excepting that it has
the spiritut asper in the indie. : inrt/tni, exteSai, evrev, (fxio, e*ito, Horn.)
which latter forms occur chiefly in the compounds, inVw, fee.
a See, about the difference of the forms ivtru and the fut.
Note.
the preceding
ANOMALOUS VERBS,
253
The old Poets have the i also in the other moods of the aor. 'Utuuxi. 'htt'itSxi, lr*{x!! *. But the pres. imrm, Od. i. 820. is a false reading for
l(XtTtti : see especially lafTn above.
ipxai, (I love,) Poetically sqaiMti, (after larafxat,) takes its tenses
only from the pass, form, aor. wqxvSw, (Poetically r,pa.<jxix-nv.)
The pres. tense ipZixoa, epiaSxt, ipwixEvos, is a real pass.
Another regular ifiu is used merely in compounds, igi;5ra/, to pour out,
Ketrifiotffai, &C.
EPm and ij3, see jltyt :i;y>, see also in t;>- v.
Epnxoj, to tear to pieces in the transitive sense, but in the aor. 2.
vqixov it is intrans. ( 113. 2.)
Ipeiitu, (I throw down, overthrow,) has this causative ( 113. 2.)
signif. in the fut. aor. 1. &c. ; i^i^ro, plusq. pass. Epic,
instead of ip-hputro, 85. Obs. 1. but the aor. 2. and per/. 2.
ripmov, tp-nqnrct, have the immediative signif. to fall down
Epic med. d.yrtp^iij.m,he carried off on high, carried away.
i;f, see uitut and \>W.)m.
h'Ku> (J s^r^ve> contend,) is regular, perf. pass, hp-hpiaixoti with a
strengthened signif. of the pres.
There is another form ifiScutu, and (according to 6 112. 13.) Xfiiitur^mt,
II. v 102. where the i is long for the sake of the metre.
eqeaScu, (to ask,) ^oixm, tpwi^xi, imper. l%ov, an aor. fut. ipriaoixon.
The Ionians in their prose have also a pres. tense, ilfnuxi, but use the
imperf. ufofiw, with itftffSeu, thus accented, and this is likewise aor. in the
other moods, fut. ufrivepMi. The Epics have also igifda/ as pres. tense with
the signif. of tUwm. and farther the form ;; in both the net. and med.,
which must carefully be distinguished from the fut. \fu>, (see uVur:) conj.
XftUfUt, Epic for ifiifut. Whatever is wanting, is supplied in prose by
IfMTOil.
if'fu, (I go away,} ippwu, Upp'wx, 112. 2.
The Homeric ireipn is derived from this verb in its causative sense, to
sweep away. See Buttm.
I(u9ttiiv, {I redden, make red,) fut. ifvStwu, &c. ( 112. 13) Homer has also the
radical form
\fivf&, &c.
ifOxu, (I restrain, keep off.) aor. ^u'xa, infin. tft/xaxiijv, see 85. Obs. 3.
or tlfvi, 5, (/ draw, drag, put/,) is regular through the whole conjugation, fut.
again
med. \piep,xi, II. X- 454. See ,\ 05. 06. 17. Hesiod, (E, 81C.) has
also the in/in. uaiu%m of a form in p., (short.) The MED. "ni-.u-t, takes in
*9 On comparing the forms SWav, ffv'wSat, and iexo*, r^i??, (from **,) with firAf,
J*-\it, iTripvv, rrMns, &c.,(see 5, 110. 4.) it becomes obvious that the former have
been produced by the same syncope. The spiritus asper in kV< and EXil, (I?*,)
was changed into an r, which immediately took its station before the following
consonant, thusi-'x"i l-r. The aspirated > in itTsfun is an anomaly.
254
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Epics the signif. to save, preserve ; in this sense some editors write the v with
one r, (lifiram,) when the syllable ought to be long, just as if the v had been
originally long ; and in the sense to draw, they spell it with a double r, (ifurraro,)
as if the u had been originally short. But as the is also found short in the first
sense, (ex. gr. II. I. 186. x- 351.) and as the signif. frequently run one into the
other, it is more correct to denote the lengthening of the v by two ff,withoutany
distinction. The collateral form fvtiUm, which simply means to save, liberate, has,
on the contrary, a long u in the Attics, lprirxrt, but with the Epics this, too, is
short, firi/tnv, II. . 29. and should therefore also be lengthened ippiriun,
iverxm, which, however, is generally neglected. Lastly, there is a syncopated
collateral form, ( 110. 5.) Iftir^ai, tlpvirSxi, and purSau, commonly with long
IfvTo, (yet once t^uro in Hesiod, 0. 304.) ttgOrt, ti^varxt, $v*ro} &c. alraoBt exclu
sively in the sense of saving, watching over, (except Od. x- 90. '"p"*', dragged,
putted,) which must not be mistaken for the per/, and plusq. of the radical
form i"fi/ictt, I have been dragged.See Buttin. Lexilogus, I. 18. with the Addi
tions in vol. il.
epyrp^M, (I go,) from EAEYfl, fut. eKivooiaxi, aor. rikuSov,
commonly ^X&ov, ( 110. 4.) kxhtlv, imper. IX&e, (see Obs. I.
4. 1. to 103.) &c. perf. tXwXvSa. Verbal adj. iXeuareov.
The per/, with the Epics is
1 per: pi. with the syncope
tly.jkou3ftir.
The Doric is nvS, lJW, see 5 16. Obs. 1.
. It has already been stated above, $ 108. V. that instead of the other moods
of the pres. from Ifx'/f', which more seldom occur, especially in compounds,
we meet much more frequently with those of upu, and that instead of ifx'r1"'
we more generally find the imper/. tut or f,x, and the pres. i!fu instead of
the /ut. \Xivrtpuu.
l<sb-ntJ.ivos, {clothed.) Ion. w&^svor, A tt. a defective part. perf.
U&lv, (I eat,) from JS, (Hom.)/f. <3,um, ( 95. OAs. 18.) per/. Whuxx, per/, pass.
Unhf/Aeu, aor. pass. flSte-Si* aor. act. tQayov, (from *Arfl.) J'crbal adj. I&ifrat.
Part of the forms of fia come from the old formation, fut. iliru, &c. ( 112.
Obs. 3.) where the i in the per/, act. was changed into o, (compare 97Obs. 1. 2.) which in Homer remains also in the paw. ihrHtfixi, iiriherai. Homer
has also the per/. JSuSa, and the infin. pres. tifutxi, ( 1 10. 5.) for
Wipusu.
isvrn, Xairtv, iffTo/inv, see hVmv and 2V.
ifi&&i, see uv-oavM.
tvlv, xaSivlu, (/ steep,)/ut. iv%nffu, xaSivlrifv, augm. zetSnvhv, xaStv^at, and Ixs&tuitt.
tiflexu, (Ifind,) from 'ETPJ1, aor.
imper/. iiiet,/ut. ii(vrtt, &c. ( 112. 10.) nor.
pass. ifyStit, ( 95. Obs. 4.) Verbal adj. sipirii .Augm. $ 84. 04s. 2.MED.
Un-Attic writers form the aor. med. like the aor. 1.
instead of
tisi/tm, ( 96. Note to Obs. 1.)
(/ hate,) only in the pres. tense, and Poetical, whence a
MED. (cyj)ccwfj.zt,) aitiy$wy.tx\, (1 incur hatred,) fut: ineyslr\atnj.au, &c. aor. r,y^6ij.m, a.tZYiyjioiJ.r>)iao, perf. airriypriij.a.i,
I am hated. See 112. 13.
80 The infin., notwithstanding its aorislical signif., is always found accented,
artxSHrScu, but there is Ho pres. tense i'x&yuu in the ancient writers. See Buttm.
Complete Gr. Gr.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
255
eyju, (I have,) imperf. s^ov, fut. H,ai, (with the spiritus asper,
see 18. Obs. 4.)aor. (as if it were from 2Xfl,) ta%ov,
ff5CE~v> conjff3C7>f> &c- (compounds noLpiayjo, irqtpdayris,)
opt. axotriv, (see the Note to Obs. II. 3. to 103.) imper.
X*S' (110. 6.) but in the compounds also wataa-%E, med.
<tx,om-)v, imper. ayrpv, (icxpdu,/f>v>)whence a new fut. ay/naca,
per/, \<symx, &c.aor. pass. ioxjtSriv. Verbal adj. Ixtojand ayeros.
The aor. *xl" has produced a collateral form of the pres. "fx"i which is
preferred in some particular signif. (to hold, occupy, &c.) to which of course
thefut. ex*'" raore properly belongs31. There is an old per/, of ix">
(U. /5. 218. msXKuU/*.)
We must also notice the following anomalous compounds of ix"
irix*. This verb, when it merely signifies to endure, bear, in the middle
voice ii',^i<r3< has the double augm. in the imperf. and aor. nmxlfun, rinrx'pi'l
( 86. Obs. 6.)
i/trix", (/ wrap round, environ,) imperf. itmTxi't fut. ipfll", aor. Upr
!Tirx"i ifi'x1'' > MED. i/trix'f" or i/ttrirx'tu/tai, (I c/othe myself in,
wear,) u-pi%o/stt, aor. tipvirxopttiv.
itrirxnofiMi, (/ promise,) Ion. iricx'/""' (Horn. Herod.) fut. iirwx'"VM'<
aor. v*iffxop.m< imper. ua-orxov, perf. far'irxtuuu.
( / boil, cook,) fut. l^wu, &c. (Herod. 1, 48. has the imperf. tyii.) Verbal adj
i^nrus, ii^oTOf, or ifStt.
'En and 'En, see 90.
z.
<aw, (/ live,) has (according to 105. Obs. 5.) <2, Ztfs, Zr>, &c.
imperf. e<uv, itynt, &c. infin. jv.imper.
We also meet, (as if from a form in pi,) the 1 pen. imperf.
and imper.
to which, however, the preceding forms were preferred. Thiser6 is
used by the classic Attic Writers as a defective verb along with the more
perfect tier* /Jim/. The tenses fwx or Zrrs/Mu, iZwx, Vjixa, occur but little or
not at all in the old Writers. The Ionians lengthened ru into
: this
produced with them a new formation, ruu, rmis,
( 105. 04*.
10.,/Vofe.)
*l See about the origin of iV^jn, e^i"', from
the Note to Iirw. The ; in the
pres. tense "ex* supplies the place of a redupl. as that in /*>ftf, a-i'sr, exactly like
the i in 'trrtifii, only that in 1'X" 'he spiritus aper was converted into a lenis on
account of the (which was done much more frequently in the old language.)
M This is erroneously derived from OXOfi, and so is i"x***, (see ci'x'/""i) from
OlXOn. Its true derivation becomes obvious from the comparison with the subil.
inm%*i. The simplest perf. of %x* w
and with the augm.Zx*; thus that of
Oixn is ix*- Both were in the usual way with the Attic redupl. Sxt>x", tlxwx*,
(for the i of elxV' naturally occurs but once, as in iuhxn,) yet as of two aspirata
the second also maybe changed, ( 18. Obs. 1.)
t"x"x&, were both used, and
this form was retained for the sake of distinctness.
83 This form is not ^wr-w^a*, ipx-iex1"*, hut fyri-ffx", apri-fx"9, ^' should
properly be iftr-irx" ('ike iftir-iixni) hut 'n tue a"r- 'he ttugm. went over from the
verb to the prep, iprrexn.
256
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fyvrnuv-h {Ijoin,) fut. ZpVtfii, &c ( 112. 14.) aor. 2. pass. Ityynv.
tyrtvtu, (/ gird,) fat. Zohsoj, &c. per/. pass.e^aja/juii, (112. 14.)
MED.
H.
see 108. II.
I
*>), see fn/u, 109. I.
iipim, (I sink.) The Homeric irtfssn/ums, (II.
491.) is most correctly derived
from this verb. It may be assumed that, whenever a verb began with a long
vowel, this vowel was shortened by the redupl. : thus i/ti/uiiui. The metre
required a doubling of the 6rst instead of which the Poets used
as is
done in other words ; ex. gr. uxixapyit from raXi/ttt,
for vin/ncs.
.
6AN, see Snirx*.
Hao/ixi, (I admire, behold,) this is the oldest principal theme, of which isolated forms
have maintained themselves in Homer and the Doric writers, (9<t>9<, 5MwS<u,
Dor. 3*w9u,) which have given rise to a double change: 1.) Sx'tifuu, Dor.
Sn'uuxi, Ion. 2.) the usual dicufuu, (fut. Sxitopeu, Ion. 3iri/uu,) Herod,
has the form iSmrt, (see 105. Note to Obs. 16.) though commonly with the
various reading i9uu"f. With respect to the signif. of this verb, Homer uses
it only in the sense of admiring, and never has dixrdz/: later writers use all
its forms in the sense of beholding, contemplating. This verb must not be con
founded with 9An, (to nw te, suck,) which see below.
Sxitrai, (I bury,) aor. 2. pass. Iritytw, ( 17. 6.) perf.pass. te'S/x6A*per/, as pres. rihi**, (I am astonished,) where the second aspirata is changed,
whilst in the aor. trctfn the first is changed, (see 18. 1. and 4.)
eAtl, an Epic defective verb, of which there occurs the aor. 1. act. 3>ii, (to nurse,
suck,) and the med. Siifa/, (see 105. Otis. 5. and 16.) SnVw9n, to suck, milk.
See Secouai.
Biitefiiti, see Saufzxi.
|
SHxm, see IS'o.v.
Sipo/xai, (I warm myself,) is a defective verb, of which nothing
occurs in prose but the pres. and imper. ; but Homer has
also the fut. bepo-ntxai, and the conj. aor. pass. (eSe^jiv,) Se^eo/.
St'o-ffaffSai, (to obtain by prayers,) hiaaavro, &c. a defective aor.
Verbal adj. hinroi, (woXi&eo-tos-, &c.)
diu, (/ run,) fut. beuaoixai or Siuaovixxi,
95. Obs. 17.)no
other tense occurs ; see -reiyjti.
Sxicftai, see SAtpui : SwSai, see 8An.
|
eHn, see 6A*.
btyyiica, (I touch,) formed of &i'y H, fut. 3-<^o/xai, aor. t&iyov.
Svrio-Kto, (I die,) from ANft, aor. E^avov, &vi$xwv, fut. Savovixxi,
:t The forms Siym, Siym, which occur, ought probably to be accented like the
aor.
ANOMALOUS VF.RBS.
257
258
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
K.
Kaa, 1.) xUur/uu, xUaifuci, see xxlwpxi, 2.) xixaXut, fut. inn, Ike. see
and
ANOMALOUS VEKUS.
259
2G0
A GREKK GRAMMAR.
(/ hear,} a Poetic verb, whose imper/. ixXvn has the signif. of the aor. ($ 9G.
Obs. 3.) imper. x.i!i, xXu'iti, and xxS3/, *X?ti, ( 1 10. C.) or with the redupt.
( 83. Obi. 7.) xixXi/Bi, xixXin, part. pats. xXifiHui, (renowned,) 110. 0.
KMA, see >ip.
|
xtiu, see 105. 06. 5.
xopivwixi, (I satiate,) fut. xoqiuoj, &c. ( 112. 14.) perf. pass.
xix6qso~u.ni, Ion. xsx6pnu.xi, Epic par/, xsxop-nais, ( 97. 06s. 7.)
with the signif. of the pass.-xogiu, his, is the Ion. fut.
This verb must not he confounded with infut, int, I sweep.
xpiXoi, commonly xixqxyx, (I bawl out,) see 113. Obs. 14.
xixqxyu.sv, xixpayfti, &C. ( 110. 9.) fut. xexpxouMi, aor.
sxqxyov.
xpa.Uu, (Jfulfil, accomplish,) admits in the Epics a lengthening
in all its parts, ex. gr. sxpalxivsv, xqrmvxi, {aor. 1.) xsxpxxnTxi.
KFA, see xifetvvvfii.
xpsu.xmvu.i, (I hang up, suspend,) pass, xpsu.xnvu.xi, (I am sus
pended, hung from,) and as med. (7 hang myself;) xqiu.xu.xi,
(after larxu-xi,) I hang, intrans. and its conj. xpiu.uu.xi, opt.
xQiujx'iu.'m, and also xqiu.olu.riv ", fut. act. xqeu.xcrai, (a,) Alt.
xqu.v, f> > &c. The aor. pass. ixpBu.xa$wi is common to
the pass, and middle voice, and intrans., but the fut. pass.
xQtu.xo$rio-ou.xi belongs merely to xqtu.xiwu.xi : there is a
particular fut. intrans. xgg^a-oputi, (/ shall hang loose, wave
to and fro.)
This repartition of forms and significations is, on the whole, confirmed liy
the Attic writers ; but it must not be expected that authors never deviated
from this analogy40. Kft/ixa as a pres. tense occurs only in later writers.
Kfi/mi/u is an Attic collateral form in the pres. and imper/.
xpuTru, x^vtxd-ko, see Obs. II. 1. to 103.
xrxou-xi, (I acquire,) perf. as pres. xixrnu.xi, (I possess,) and
'ixTwu-xi, ( 83. Obs. I.) conj. and opt. see 98. Obs. 9. ; and
about the opt. xsxra>u.m, see Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 98.
Obs. 17.
xrsivu, (I kill, slay,) fut. xtevcD, see 101. Good writers use
merely Exrova as perf. Homer has a fut. xrxvico, (see Buttm.
Complete Gr. Gr.) and its medium as pass. //. %. 481. xxrxxrxvisa'bs.
There is also a Poetical aor. turns, , a, 3 pers. pi. ixrxy, (for -,) conj.
xt'iu, (for xtZ, see 107. Obs. IV. 8.) infin. xrifut, ira/u>, (for *tiJ
* Aristoph. Vesp. 298. wf/w^S,, see $ 107. Obs. III. 5. and compare pafw/pnt.
In German the same happens with hangen and Artn^en, erhiinate and erAt'jw ;
and in English with hung and hanged.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
261
part, xras, pats, txrx/ttn, xrxfiirti, xtxiSxi. See about all these forms, 110.
C. 7. Homer has also the aor. pass. 41 IxrxSny, and ixrxrBnt, ( 101. Obs. C.)
Independently of the very un-Attic per/, ixrxxx, there is another form
Ixrettixx, (5 1 12. 9.) of which the Atticism is doubtful.
url/ttiH, see $ 110.7.
I
xrimix, 96. Obs. 5.
xutiai, (I kiss, from KTf2,) xt/<r&(, ext/ffa, (v.)
The compound Tfmrxmix, (/ prostrate myself, worship,) is commonly regu
lar ; but in the Poets we also meet with -{ri!<r*i, &c. See particularly ano
ther .
xf/>e&>, (/ light on, meet with,) is regular, but has a collateral form
xupa. Deponens, xvqo/xxt, imperf. exugov, fut. xvpau, aor.
'ixvfioa.
xvco or xvioj, (/o be pregnant, to conceive.) TLvtsxai or -o/xxi, I im
pregnate, is regular in the second form xuitu, but the Poets
have also an aor. 1. med. exvadumv**. Compare xuviw.
A.
\<zy%a.M, {I obtain by lot or fate,) from AHXfi, ( 112. 13.)
fut. Xti^o/jloci, aor. Jxajjov, perf. eYxin^a, ( 83. Obs. 3.) or
\t\oyyjx, (as if from AErXft.)
The Ionians said in the fut. xx&pzi, (see J 27- Obs. C.) The Homeric aor.
XtXa%ui has the causative signif. to impart.
AAK, see xicxiu.
Xa/LA/3avw, (/ take,) from AHBfl, ( 112. 13.) fut. X^vJ/ow^i, aor.
Xa/3ov, imper. Xa/Se and Xos/3e, (06s. I. 4. to 103.) per/.
e.X<{>, ( 83. 06.5. 3.)MED.
The Ionians have XsXu'finxx, ( 111. 3.) and (from AAMBfi,) kx'p^tftxi,
Xav5av<v, more rarely X^Syu, (/ flm hidden,) Xyitoj, e'XaSsv, Xt'Xn&a:.
A/ed. Xav&avopuei, more rarely Xri&o/^ai, (/forget,) Xrjffo/xai,
eXaSd/ar/v, XeXokj/u-cei.
Homer has in the aor. XiX9ir, XiXxSir^xi, but the former merely as a
causative of the middle voice, to cause to forget, make one forget, in which
sense he use3 the pres. XriSxvw. The Ionic dialect has in the perf. pass, x,
XsXxr/txi, ( 27. Obs. 6.)
Xoloxoj, {I emit a sound, speak, Ion. X-nxiat, Dor. Xaxlu,) from
AAKfi; aor. 2. s'Xaxov, and as med. XsXaxo/u.w, (Hymn.
Merc. 145.) whence, (according to 111. 3.) fut. Xaxyntxat,
41 This tense in common language was not used from this verb; they had, instead
of it, Wxw, i
in a pass, sense, (iriSxm It' xireu.)
" The usual reading xvmxjiXn rests barely on the seeming relation to Ixitx from
XVIXU.
2G2
A CRKF.K GRAMMAR.
aor. 1. s\acxwxa,perf. (as pres., see 113. Obs. 14.) >J\a*a,
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
263
\vca, see 95. Obs. 4. and about \vro 110. 7. opt. per/, \s\vro
98. Obs. 9.
\>, (I wish, long for,) \tk, \y, 3pers. pi. \avn, a Doric defective
verb.
M.
txxlwfjLoci, (I am mad,) fat. fjtamviMU, aor. e/xzvw, perf. (with the
same signif. as the pres. tense,) fj.afj.mx. But the aor. act.
tu.mx, (Aristoph. Thesm. 561.) has the causative meaning, to
make mad, in which sense the compound sxixxivai is, however,
more usual, ( 135. Obs. 2.)
Theocr. (10, 31.) hu /u/tsirti/uu, ( III. 3.) with the signif. of the prei.
tense like /la'i.o/tai.
fixUftxi, see MAO.
|
MAK, see pnxiofixi.
U.xtQxvco, (I learn,) from MH0.fi, aor. %)j.zQiv, fut. fj.xHioij.xi,
perf. uuuuidwui, ( 112. 13. and 111. 3.)
The fut. paStZfix,, see J 95. Obs. 16.
ftaTlin, See fti^Tru.
p.xpv3n.xi, (Ifight, combat,) after "arxu-xi, has merely a pres. and
imperf., imper. ixxqiao, ( 107. Obs. IV. 4.) opt. napvol/xvv,
( 107. Obs. III. 5.)
Hx^irru, (Y catch, seize,) ixxp-^ai, &c. part. perf. ixtixxpttuis, aor. 2.
(jfj.xp7rov,) u.e/j.x^'Jioy, and abbreviated Eptawov, //.zws'eiv, 3 pers.
pi. opt. ixsixxtiom, (for m-scwoiev.)
na.-xpij.xi, [[fight,) fut. fj.xyjfjotJ.xi, commonly fj^tyjovfj.xi, ( 95.
Obs. 15. 16.) aor. lfj.a-xnxfj.m, per/. M,Ep^.2XT"^a' Verbal adj.
ixxyjcrkos and /xaj^ajTsor.
The //. produced the Ion. pres. tense fcx%laficti, and Homer has not only
fcx^inu'.vc;. but even fteL^uvptyas, both as pres. tenses.
Epic Poets use, for the sake of the metre, the fut. fia^r.tcfun, but the aor.
MAO, an old verb, which occurs chiefly in three signif. and forms :
1.) Perf. as pres. (^um,) fttptelaffi, pctfiasot, (jjen. ftipavras,} and with the
syncope fcifcxfitr, fiXftari, 3 pert, pl.p/usq. fiifuctxi, ( 110. 10.) to strivet
desire ardently.
2.) Pres. med. u^y-u {I long for, seek or search for,) /uZj&iygf, contr. of ftuop.au,
but the prevailed : hence, for instance, infin. ur;<'-)n, and imper. fuiu,
(like /muh from pi *>,*., (uSttsu,) see 105. Obs. 10. Note.
3.) F(//. and aor. mer/. pae-eptai, tpxtrapw, belong to /&ai9peu,(Istir myself, seek,)
especially in compounds : thus in Homer the imperf. Wtuxlm, Od. i.
441. corresponds exactly to the nor. Wipna-eifimt, ibid. 440. Compare
dxiw UfaiffSttt, mlu vtiffourSoti.
a Some critics write also Ifix^ntxn, &c. for the sake of uniformity, contrary to
the text, which has been handed down to us.
264
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
fj.tfj.vuifj.Yiv, fj.efj.vuro, a contr. of the Ionic fjt.iij.vsafjt.yv, fj.efj.vecoro,
(II. 4-. 361^*8.) To this perf. belongs the fut. 3. fj.efivmofj.ai,
(/ shall remember.)
Abbreviations occur in Homer's flip**, (jtiptuu,) for /tl/tmrai, and in He
rod.'s imper. piftnt for ftifmm. Compare above /siftfUartu.
The simple form, (fuJuputt,) fuHftmi, is barely Ionic in the above sense, and
uvuiutvaf, ftreletn, ftyiiie, &c. (see 105. Obs. 10. Note,) are Ionic lengthenings.
But in the sense of to sue for in marriage, to woo, we also meet with ftyitrttu
in the common language.
f&eXuv, see (&\aiffx6).
fjutx'iofjMt, (7 roar, bellow,) from MTKO, must be noticed on
account of its Epic forms epuJxov, fj.ifj.ux.de. Compare fj.maofj.xt.
N.
valu, (I dwell,) takes its tenses from the pass, and med. from
NAfl, with short a, fut. vdaofj-ai, aor. evxoSnv or evxadfj-riv,
perf. (with later Writers,) vivaafj.ii. The act. evaaa, (evao-aa,)
has the causative signif. to cause to inhabit, to settle.
' vxao-ai, (I stuff,) va&p>, &Cvtvxafjuxt, vxctros, ( 92. Obs. 2.)
vifjM, (I distribute, apportion,) fut. veixu and ve/j.r]o-u, aor. eveifj.x,
perf. vBvifj.vixx, &c. aor. pass. evefj,r)$yv and tvefj.i$r,v.MED.
ntt, 1 .) / heap up, occurs chiefly in the pre: and imper/. only with the Ionic and Epic
lengthenings mm,
int'u>,fut. w, aor. itwa, Ion. Itmtx, &c.
2.) J ipin, is regular, men, &c. The contractions c, m in the prei. tense
are not in m, but, contrary to analogy, in * : tin, vuvths, &c. The new
prei. is ir.tu.
3.) I twim, Jut. nvfefieu and nvtovpat, ( 95. 06. 17.)i*if^ &c.
4.) The Poet, verb liitln, (to go away, return,) has commonly the signif.
of the fut. in the indie, pret. tio/txi, or nS/uu, 2 peri. lileu, (5 105. Obs. J.)
vlty, (I wash,) takes its tenses from the verb vi-nru, which is less
used in the pres. vi^/u, &c.MED.
vos'w in the Ionic dialect contracts the on as in fSoxco, ex. gr. vdio-oj,
evaiax, evivuro.
vvo-tx^oj, (/ nod the head with drowsiness, I sleej),) vuarduoj and
wo-ni^oj, &c. ( 92. Obs. 1.)
O.
oa>, (7 smell, viz. emit a smell,) fut. otyov, (Ion. 6e'<w,) &c. : the
perf. oSwJa has the power of the pres. tense,
oiyw or o"yvvfj.i, (I open.)
18 See about all these forms, Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 98. Obs. 1517.
266
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
ovo/uuti, (7 insult,) radical form ONOfi, whence the pres. and
imperf. after S/So^ai, the 2 pers. sing, otaaai, imper. ovooo,
fut. ovouofjion, aor. moa^m and Snoiiywi.
Homer has from the still simpler form ONfl the 2 peri. pi. pres. oSnrh, aor.
V
On, See ifioi.
osw, (/ see,) imperf. Ion. upun, commonly sd^uv, ( 84. Obs. 8.)
per/. Iw^axa51, aor. eTXov, ISeTv, ISwv,
iJe, &c. Med.
EiSVnv, iSsa&ai, iSoy, (and as an interjection ISou, lo .'), see
above e"Su,fut. o^o/aou, (I shall see,) from OnTft. Pass.
perf. idipij/.%i, or Zij.ij.xi, u-^xi, Znrai, &c. ZipSai, aor. u/p^m,
oip&wai, (in later Writers also opaSwai.) Verbal adj. hpareoi,
apacros, offTtir.
Tlie per/. 2. Srwrx, (/ Aoi'f teen,) belongs to the dialects, and the Poets.
See about Homer's burnt, 105. Obs. 1C. with the Note.
The antiquated iru-^cfuti, aor. Wiu^xpny, selected, must be carefully dis
tinguished from ixi^s/txi.
ofwiM, (I rouse, excite,) from OPX2, fut. op<j*>, aor. 1. uqvoc,
( 101. Obs. 3.) Med. oqwumi, (I rise,) aor. txipi/j.m, 3 pers.
sing, uqzto and Zpro, (see 110. 8.) infin. oftctt, part. og/xevos-,
(for bqiabcu, 6pifj.iws,) imper. oqao, and according to 96.
Obs. 9. opaso.
The perf. 2.
belongs to this intrant, or immcdiative signif. ( 113. 2.)
I am risen ; but <?uj(, (see 85. Obs. 2.) is aor. (w. gr. Od. r. 201.) like
i'jKjnv, and most generally has, like it, the tramitive or causative signif.
(As excited.) The poji'e-like form !t; agrees in sense with the
Compare above iftu>m, i^ifuti. Lastly, Homer has likewise the pres.
and imperf. of Use/tici and iru/tmi, I hasten, move about, (Od. J. 104. //. />. 398.)
but they are attended with some difficulty : see Buttni. Complete Gr. Gr.
oa<pqal)iofj.xi, (I smell, trans.) oo-Qp-no-ofizi, aor. wo-tppoij.m, 112. 13.
Ion. o <j<p$xfj.w, (Herod. 1. 80. 26.) according to 96. Obs. 1.
with the Note.
sv>.i/t!ias, see S>.Xuui.
I
eSttfti, see oveptti.
ovpico, (I make water, stale,) has the syllabic augm. ioi/pvv, &c.
84. Obs. 5.
ovtqloj, (I wound,) oiirrtiai, &c. aor. syncope, (ovrav, 110.6. 7.)
3 sing, ovra, infin. ovrifj.sv, (for ovrdvati,) part. pass. ourdfj.svos :
ovrxae, ovraaiAhos , belong to ovrd^oj, a collateral form.
IfiiXii, 1.(1 owe, ex. gr. money,') 2. (Iought, am to,) fut. l^uxfi'", &c
The form Hfi^ty, n, i, (commonly Sfi\n,) occurs merely as a wish.See
81 In Attic poetry it was either pronounced as a synizesis in the Ionic way
Sixkh, or written aud pronounced iieaxa.See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 84.
Obs. 11.
5
263
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the Syntax, 150. Homer has also opiXXw, (It. <r. 200.) for afuXo, and for
<SpiX for the sake of the metre fiXXv, (7/. ?. 350.) which forms must not
be mistaken for tyixxtiv, to increate, magnify. Homer also uses this verb in
an anomalous way in the opt. opr. 1. ifiXXtm, 3 pert. ting. (11. <r. 651. Oil.
0. 334.)
'ipXrxavo>, (I am guilty, condemned,) fut. otyX-haw, perf. (p\r>xa,
aor. uiphov,
n.
itai^u, [I sport, joke,) fut. na.iifly.ai, itai%ov(Azt.
In later Writers we also find after this formation %r<Li%tt, ^riTmy/uu, &c.
but the correct Attics always have irate*, trimr/uu, notwithstanding the
similarity of the tenses of the following verb :
mlu, (J strike, beat,) fut. iralacu and nouwoj, but the rest of the
tenses are 'iitaiax, itittama., eitnlaSyv.MED.
IlAP,<r;uV, see in TnjiiV.
itdaaaSxi, (to acquire,) iitaaaixw, perf. itiit%f3.cn, I possess, dif
ferent from lita.aiix.rn, itina.aij.xi, see ifririoixxt.(I suffer,) from nH0fl, aor. s itaSov, from nEN0fl, perf.
niitovSa, fut. ntlaoixai, (according to the rule, 25. 4.) Ver
bal adj. ita^-rtros.
From mien are also derived the less frequent forms rveefim,
and
the perf. (s-irnfe,) whence the Homeric nrahix.See about tiirmh for
mrittmn, $ 110. Obt. 9.
Tartztrffu, see xknfffv.
itaTioixxi, (I taste, eat,) iitaaxfAm, itiitaa[t.a\, compare ^areo/j-ai,
SxazaSai in iaiu.
ittlbu, I prevail on, pass. I believe, obey, to which belong itslaofjuii,
itiitiiaixa.1, but the perf. 2. iteito&a, I confide.
The Poetical forms are, Wmt/tn, plutq. belonging to vixeifa., aor. 2. "sriht,
irlduir, -r'fxiln, &c. There is a new form tlr,*u, iriemra, in the sense of
obeying, following, confiding.
ittUu, I shear, comb, fut. iti%o>, Sec.MED.
trtnmi, see $ 105. Ob*. 5.
[
xuvouat, see xi*%at and qrti'fo.
ittXz^oj, anciently its\du, (i" approach, and in the old language
cause to approach,) has with Poets the aor. litXaS-nv, (long a,
incorrectly iitXiahm,) and iitXrifj-nv, both in the sense of
approaching, formed by the metathesis of 110. 11. 2. {itiKa,
ItXiOL.)
xikti or -TiXi/im, (I am.) This Doric and Poetical verb suffers a syncope, when it
takes the augment : 3 peri, imperf. fa-Xi or strXm, 2d. ftrXu, iirXiu. There is
no other tense occurring. This verb has also this peculiarity, that the imperf.
of the middle voice very commonly has the signif. of the pret. (irXiu, thou
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
269
or/, &c.) To the same verb in its more ancient meaning of I turn, drive,
move about, (the Latin versor,) belong with the same syncope the compound
Epic part. iriT>.9/*i!ni, ri^vXtyiiw.
nENe, see
xl-rao>, TiToaiiv, rio'gvraj, See *4{tiy.
tri-TTu, see vciffu.
ngA*, (/ go over,) regular, xuit* with i, (Ion. riftr*,) but the Epic xititsi with
i, belongs to nrfifsm, (/
which see below.
vsp^M, commonly Tieploi^ai, aor. eWgSov, fut. notifi-h'soiAa.t, perf.
irsftu, (I lay waste, ravage,) aor. swpo&oi, ( 96. Obs. 7.)
Homer has also a syncopated passive-Yike aor. in the in/in. ri(txi of \tieifim,
properly rt(t-tmi, (or wipim,') like
5 110. 8.
nri^lIV, see tr'ucru.
iriaou, irirrco, {I cook,) fut. ire^u, &c. from iskitrai, which occurs
only in later Writers in the pres. tense.
weTstvvu/Ai, (/ spread out,) fut. istriiu, (Att. Tteru,) &c. ( 112.
14.) perf. pass, neirra^ai, ( 110. 4.) but the aor. pass, is
again iirErda^m.
nkroy.'i\, {I fly with wings:) from this radical form arises by a
syncope an aor. sitro^m, ursa^tn, &c. ( 110. 4.) fut.
ntTfiaoixm, commonly nr-naoixnu. There is a collateral form
in fu, IvrxiMU, aor. iitrai^nn, irrdaSai, &c.
To this must be added from the act. form, which is never used in the fret.
tense, a synonymous third aor. i*rnt, rr^MU, Trii, &c.
The pres. trin/uu and mritfuu with the aor. I<rtru<r3r,t, (ex. gr. Anacr. 40.
6.) belong to the Poets and the later prose ; mxirn/uu alone appears to have
, been used as perf. Poets employed also the pres. rinu/tai, truritfieu. (See
112.9.)
nET, see mV-nw.
\ xifoo/tett, see xvvSaioptLi.
vriipvov, eiretpvov, (killed,) is the reduplicated, and at the same time
syncopated aor. ( 110. 4.) of^ENfl, (whence (pivos.)
The part, of this aor. has the accent, contrary to analogy, on the first
syllable, x-'tQvuv^. Pass. perf. vrtQupxi, fat. n^sVv/uu : compare rutu, rirecfim,
101. 9. and about iripnV/t<t<, $ 99. Obs. I. See also below 4>A.
n-hywiM, (Ifasten,) with later Writers also m-hatsu, mrru,fut. it-nipi,
&c. ( 112. 14.) aor. pass, litiynv, perf. 2. irivnya, intrans. /
am fixed, fast, (113. Obs. 3.)MED.
irlfA.v\v>ixi, (I fill,) wi/xwXavai goes in the pres. and imperf. after
"rw/At,
icXwoj, 8k. perf. jjass. niis'Knint.sa, aor. pass.
a That !, is a real aor., is obviously evident from the context in the two
passages, //. <r. 827- ( S39.
270
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
inX-na^m, from ITAAfl or vXi&cv, of which the latter, how
ever, has only the intrans, signif. to be full, in the pres. tense.
If in compounds p. immediately precedes the first <r, it is omitted in the
reduplication, iprlrXapxi, but replaced again, whenever the augment comes
between, ivixtfttrXx^xv.
Poets for the sake of the metre employ both forms with or without the p,
contrary to this rule.The form in , ((ri^rXiv, yimrAan,) is UD-Attic,
except in the same instances as in "fn/u.
With respect to thepaie-like aor. IrXn/uif, opt. srXt/,iij] M, imper. rXr.r; &c.
see 1 10. 7., it was not unknown to the Attics. (Aristoph. ipx-Xt/iuis,
The intrant. <r\nu has a.so a Poetical per/. a-i'trXxSn in the same sense,
(lam full.)
mifjt.'tc^Dixi, {I burn, trans.) iti^Ttpivxi, follows 7y7);uu in the pres. and
impcrf. ; the rest comes from nPAfl, or w%v&w, (Horn.)
ex. gr. inpri&m.
With respect to i/ixlrr^n/u, irir!/t*(xfuy, it is the same as with rifirXx/u,
and also with regard to the form in iu.
Ilesiod (e. 856.) has a remarkable abbreviation r;m for iwfim : the
analogy of ixl/trfx/itt would lead us to expect an a.
nlyu, {I drink,) from FIIO, fut. -nioixai,
95. Obs. 18.) aor.
ewiov, <ni{\v, &c. imper. commonly
( 110. 6.) The rest
comes from ITOfi, perf. isimoin-a., perf. pass, icinati.au, aor.
pass. IwoSnv. Verbal adj. Korios, kotos.
The 1 in rltpuu is usually long, (Athen. 10. p. 446.) but in inn, &c. short.
The fut. viovftect belongs to the later Writers, ( 95. OAs. 1G.)
The forms Titru, imtx, have the causative signif. to give drink, came to
drink. Their pret. tense is Tur'irtu.
nmgiax-oj, Ion. wnrpwxu, (I sell,) fut. and aor. are wanting.
The forms in use are, ri^iu, rirfiftai, ix^iS, nx(an/uti, which fut. 3.
is used instead of the un-Attic fut. 1. x^xStrcftxi, and even the perf. xtxgir$xi is frequently used in lieu of the aor. reaSitai. The Ionians have all
these tenses with .
The common language supplied the tenses, which are wanting, by artiircfuti, ixihiprii: the old and Epic language had the fut. viykeu, i, whence
the contractions xifu, m^v, aor. ixififx from rtfxu, which we have seen
above in a cognate signif., and with A in its conjugation. This n(xrxi after
wards gave the remaining forms through the metathesit, which has been
stated above in 110. 11. 2. and in the Note to xtgimipu.
wi'tttw, (/ fall, f, whence the imper. hmts,) made from IlETfi,
(see 112. 16.) fut. (in the Doric way,) WiaoviMu, (Ion )
neaioiJLzi, aor. 'iireaov,
96. 9.) perf. niitvuxtz.
s The reading a-x^i* appears to rest on a false analogy. But even in lieu of 1/
the diphthong i might have been expected, since the form xi/txXxtxi presupposes a
radical verb n.\A(J. Yet x("> which comes from xiut (5ee I"110"')) llas likewise
fifiln in the opt.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
271
Poetical abbreviations of the pari. per/, are Attic xiirtiis, (compare litfyarts
from /3t0;xa, and itittkui.) The latter points to the original form trimsm,
(from nETfJ, like JiS^x** from Sip*,) whence came rixraxit by changing the
vowel. See Buttm. Lexiiogut, I. 63. p. 295.
We also meet with the regular aor. of IlETn, aor. 1. inm, Eurip. Troad.
291. yi/c. 465. aor. 2. fTov in the Doric dialect, (Pind.)
mryiai, (I /a#,) aor. 'eVitvov, ( 96. 06s. 5.) But iti-nxco, mirvTi/xi, is the same with vsrayvvpu.
wXa^a;, (J c/iase about, pass. / roue, wander,) fut. v\xy%a, &c.
( 93. 06s. 1.)
tTA, see tri\n.
| IIAA, iXriHa, see iriXitJur and a-i^rXn/u.
irXew, (I navigate,") fut. trXsvaofxai, irXtuaov^.xt,EVX-st/ff*, &c. pass,
flreTrXEfTptai, iwXet/J&riv. Verbal adj. nXiusios.
The Ionic dialect has tXmh, r'trXuxit, &c. ; whence the verbal adj. rXurii,
and the Epic syncopated aor. i<r\*r, us, a, ufity, &c. far/.
see 110. 6.
with Ob$. 1.
nXr^tsoi, ttXyitto), (/ strike, wXiiyvy/xi is a more uncommon form,)
in the aor. 2. pass, it retains the w, luXriynv, except in those
compounds, which denote a striking with dismay, e^sirXdym,
nanv'KiLym.
The Attics do not use the act. of this verb, in the sense of striking, but
rurarea, which thej' never employ in the past. The per/. 2. trirkxy* has
with later Writers a pass, signif. ( 113. Obs. 4.)
Homer has also the aor. 2. act. and tned., but with the redupl. r'urknyw,
miu, (I blow,) /ut, vrnvfeptai, vrvturov/teti, iTHvffet, &c. aor. pass. IrnvrSttv.
The per/, pass. rimS/uu, 98. Oos. 4.) is merely Poetical in a particular
sense, (to be spirited, wise ;) and according to the same analogy, the syncopated
aor. Stfi.irtv'rt, (Homer, for avivyvrt, 110. 70 and a/*irrvv$ri, (for KviTyuSv,
compare ti^iu, ii(iiSm,) and the imper. ufixm.
vrtSiu, see 95. Obs. 4.
voptTv, (Hesych.) tiropov, (gave, supplied,) part, woqav, a defective
aor. with Poets.
The same theme in the sense of supplying has produced, according to the
principles of metathesis, ( 110. 11.) the per/, pass, mtr^urai, (it is decreed by
/ate,) part. xit^ufiXiot.
Pind. Pyth, 2, 105. has an infin. tnira^iTt or <rr{fiV in the sense of shew,
ing, exhibiting, which ought rather to be derived from a different radical
form, and written n*a(ut. See Boeckh.
rJO, see w'nm :irnrwSi, see irar%ai.
nPA, sr^tjSw, see xiv^urxu and trlpirgnfti.
itpiaa'boti, (to buy,) a defective wr6, of which the forms are used
only as aor. of aitticfocti, viz. Efl-^iayxw, conj. n^loiixai, opt.
7i%ialixv)v, imper. wpiaoo, irpi'a/, infin. npiotoSau, part, mpix^ms.
The pres. ind. -x^up&i, stated in Dictionaries, is not met with anywhere i
272
A GRI5EK GRAMMAR.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
273
axat, an old form for o-rdu, (I sift,) whence we find (in Herod. 1,
200.)
al3hvv/ja, (I extinguish,) a$iau, &c. ZafSsaixeu, e<t/3e'<t3w.The perf.
sff/3w3c, (with the n,) and the aor. 2. eafinv, pi. e'ct/3i/^ev, infin.
ofirivai, have the intrans. signif. to be extinguished, which else
is expressed by the pass. ofiiiwiMu.
n'm, iium'iatxi, see Obi. II. 1. to 103.
otuaj, (I push on,) has most commonly the augment in the same
way as the verbs beginning with g, ( 83. Obs. 2.) and takes
no a in the aor. 1. "iaaiva, lamvaqi/m, perf. pass, ioov^ai, (I rush
forth, I strive, I require,) part. iaouittws, (proparox., see
111. Obs. 2.) plusq. evav/awv, which form is at the same
time a syncopated aor. ( 110. 7. with Obs. 4.) whence ovto,
avfj.evos,2pers. pi. effavo, (for taovao, see Obs. III. 2. to 103.)
aor. pass, (of the same signif.) eaouSw, (Sophocles.)The
forms with a single a, (ex. gr. huS-nv, eH-sauSv),) are less fre
quent, and those without any augment, (aeva, euro,) belong to
the Ionic Epic dialect.We also meet with a syncopated
pres. pass. ( 110. 5.) ex. gr. oivrau, (Soph. Trach. 645.)
but more commonly with the change of the vowel into ov,
aoviAat, (I hasten, run,) imper. aovao, aovabai, aovaSre, (calls or
exhortations, used in common life.)Hither belongs lastly,
that Laconic imianovx, (he is gone,) known from Xenoph.
Hell. 1, 1, 23. which is explained as aor. 2. pass, (for iaavn.)
GKtS&wviM, (I scatter,) fut. <jxild.au, axttiu, &c. perf. pass. eaxeStto-pux., ( 112. 14.)
axiXku or axs\sa>, (I dry, desiccate,) pass. (I am dried up.) To
this immediative sense of the pass, belong the act. forms
aor. ssxKw, axXwat, axXxim, ( 110. 6.) perf. erjxXnxac, I
have been dried up, and the fut. oxKriaoixat.
The Homeric rxnXfii, (aor. 1. in-xuXu,) points to rxuXXn, (which has the
widely different signif. to dig, scrutch,) whence come, through the mctathetis
2KAA, stated 110. 11. the forms nkjw, axXa'm, &c.
07x30*, (J wipe,) aixris, &c. see 105. Obs. 5. fut. owvu, &c. ;
but the aor. pass, always is eoixvixSm from the non-Attic
pres. aix-nyju. Verbal adj. ai^mros.
ctvfiat, &c. see ffiuu.
| s9rCv, ffTitrSxi, see V.
oitivlw, (I pour out,) o-wsiW, saveienai, ( 25. 4.) MED.
2TA, see iVx,<.
| rniasm, see p. 199. Note.
creqiu, and anpiaxu, (I deprive of,) the first is regular, fut. areT
274
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ANOMALOUS VERBS,
275
the sense of seizing, taking, belongs the imper. t5, (lahe,) to which is related
(from TArn,) the Epic part. aor. 2. rtdupl. rirxym, (seizing.) See Buttm.
Lexilogus, I. 41. p. 162.
TEK, see Ti'xri.
T[Ava>, (/ cut,) fut. re(i.w, aor. ete/xov, ( 112. 6.) per/. rkryvntut,
pass. ririJ.-nfj.ai, aor. 1. It/ajiSw, ( 110. 11.) See about
the conj. perf. pass. ' 98. Obs. 9.
The aor. Irmpm is more uncommon. . The Ionians say also rtZ/ivu in the
prts. ; and Homer has the radical form rip*!, (11. . 707. -rt/ui, Buttm. Compl.
Gr. Or. 92. Obs. 13.)There is an Epic form r/iny*, aor. irprfa, and
trfuzyav, pass. STfidynv.
Tifs, 1 delight, has in its pass, form viprs/tsu, {lam delighted,") three different aor.
in the Epic language, irlfpim or 1t^3jj,iripcw, whence with a trans
position ( 96. Obs. 7-) the conj. rguriiu for tx^tu,and aor. med. (\rx^rfi.nt,)
tiraprofinv, conj. rapirwfitSic.
riffi/tm, (I get dry, dry up, intrans.) infin. aor. 2. pass, rtfrivai and rtptfUMuj
TioauUu, Idry, trans. Wigirmct, &c. is regular.
riTftn, JriTjwy, (I met by chance,) a defective aor.
virttfifv, see rsgiw.
\ rirftuw, see nv^du.
nix. Two kindred verbs must carefully be distinguished, viz. :
1.) nig*, (I make, fabricate,') a Poetical regular verb, rtu^u, Itiu^x, rlri/y/txi,
ITlJ^SlJV, TUXTOf Or riVKTOS'
2.) ruyxxtu, (I happen to, hit the mart,) fut. Ttfyfixi, aor. Srux", (Epic,
WiiXnrx,) perf. nrixnzx, (112. 13. and 111. 3.) The signif. of my
X*'" arose from that of the pass, of nix*, whence the Epics have the
pass, forms rirvy/tui, iri/^Siiy, which nearly agree with rvyxaw, trux",
and the perf. rirwxx, of which the part, has in Homer the pass, signif.
of Twxut, (Od. p.. 423. see 113. Obs. 4.) takes altogether the signif. of
the pres. Tuy%atu\n Herod. (3, 14.) and in the xsml.
The perf. Tirvyfu/i has also the diphthong m, whence in Homer 3 pi.
nnvxetTut, and the fut. 3. merely rirU\ofixi.
To nix" belongs, with the Ionic change of the aspirata, ( 16. Obs. I. e.)
the aor. 2. nrvzut, tituxUSu, (to get ready, prepare.)See especially rirrai
for rvxttv.
TIE, nriiftxi, (I am sad.) Tho part, is nrn/Umt and in the act. form nrm*!,
(j 97. Obs. 7.)
rtxru, (J bring forth,) from TEKfi, fut. ri^a, commonly ri$piMu}
aor. etexovj (Poetically steko/xw,) perf. rlroxa.
We also meet with rlnyfuu and ItIx$m in the later Writers. See about
the fut. nsurSw, f 95. 04*. 16.
ir/iw, see t/.
rtrpoM, (I perforate, bore,) from TPAH, rpwu, &c.
The Attics, however, make more use of the collateral form rtr^xnu, WT(nt. The perf. always is, from the radical form, rirftxa, t/t^x/mei.
rirpcoaxoj, (I wound,) rqdaoj, &c. ( 112. 10. 16.)
The simple T^mu in the more general sense of hurting, damaging, is iu
Homer. Both are connected with rtfur through the metathesis TOP, TPO,
see J 110. 11.
T2
276
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
rlu, (I honor,) is in this sense merely Poet, and regular, pari. per/, past. t<t,uUi;.
In the sense of expiating, it is merely Epic in the pres. and imperf., but
lends in prose the rest of its tenses to the following form :
,
rim, (I expiate,) ful. rim, per/, rivixu, per/, pass. r//m, aor. 1. pass,
irlrlhi*. The Med. rUafjMt, (rletfieu, iTiTaur.f, annretfitt*,) has the signif.
to punish, avenge. The Ionic pre*, is vlnupu, v'mv/ttu, ( 112. 14.)
The i in rim is with the Epics long, with the Attics short, 1 12. 06*. 8. M
Attic Poets also shorten the first syllable otr'mpi. See Buttm.Gmip/. Or. Gr.
112. 04*. 19.
TXijvai, (to endure, bear,) etXtiv, rXrivxi, t\xiw, t\5?&i, ( 110. 6.)
fut. rXriToiMxt, perf. rirXriKX.
From this per/, are again made, according to 1 10. 10. the forms vlvXxftn,
&c. nrXxtcu, opt. rirKxlm, imper. virXaSi, and the Ionic part. nrXnv:, but all
of them only in Poets and in the pres. tense.There is an Epic collateral
form aor. 1. irdyara : the pres. tense was supplied by ivi^aum, or hrtfUm.
TM, see Ttfjttu aud rtvps*.
\ vftf,yu, see rl^m.
rifui, (I pierce,) ire^n, ($ 90. Obs. 5.) a defective aor., compare virfurxu.In the
kindred sense of penetrating, having a clear loud sound, we meet with the Jut.
ritsff.su, and the pres. veplun in Aristoph.
rittm, an aor. the same with vv%t~t, ofwhich Pind. Pyth. 3, 48. 4, 43. 10, 52. has the
part, rivffa.%, and the compounds Xvlvuti, ttirwn;,
TfflTKw, See rlorru.
r(iru, (I turn,) see, about rirgafx and rlr^aifn, 97. p. 161.
rpifyoj, (I nourish,) fut. bpi^ai, ( 18. 2.) perf. tetqoQx, perf.
pass, ri^pafA/xai, Tspa(pxi, [rtTpoiipSou is incorrect,) aor.
pass, irpattpny, more rarely Ibpiqfow. Verbal adj. SpewTOf.
MED.
In the old language rpf* had also the immedialive ( 113. 2.) signif. to
grow thick, strong, tall, and the pats, has the same meaning ; hence the aor. 2.
act. and the aor. 2. pass, are used in Homer indifferently one for the other,
ex.gr. irfxQt the same with ir(a'pu, and rftupifut, (vfaftit,) the same with
the usual r^xQwaj, see Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr. : rirfafu has both signif., (see
the Note to $ 97. p. 161.)
f^X">U r""d less commonly takes its tenses from itself: fyl&futi, iSfifo ($ 18. 2.)
more generally from APEMfl, aor. Xi^xfun, /ut. $(*/iu/fitu, per/. iil(ifmita, (see
$111.3.) Epic iOttftx.
TPT*, see 9{i/V.
t/iiIx", (I 'rub to pieces, consume,) forms its tenses from the less
common rpw/jxa, Irpvyjaax, Tsrpvxt>j(j.ews, &c.
rpdyai, (I eat,) fut. t^o/xxi, aor. erpxyw, (from TPHrO.)
rvyxaia, rtrvxuv, see riv%v.
runroj, (I strike,) has with the Attics commonly ruitrwu, mvicr^xi, ru'BTvirioi, aor. pass, hrvvw MED.
55 The statement that the / in the conjugation of vim, is short in irma from rim,
proceeds from ignorance of the Comic metre in Aristoph. Eccl. 45. f'esp. 1424. where
the i makes an anap.xst.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
277
tuQw, (I raise a smoke, set on fire,) Jut. Sii^co, &c. ( 18. 2.) aor.
pass. ETWpw.
T.
jrifXtifwi, see ix*.
PAr, see ii-Mv.
falm, intrans. / thine, trans. / shew, aor. ifmm, per/. 1. *ifuyxu, jxiss. fxinftai with
aor. 1. ifdr9m, lam shown.MED. The putt, faln/iai also signifies / thine,
appear, aor. 2. Ifdint, fut. farov/txi, and with per/. 2. rifma, (see 1 13. 0i. 3.)
The Homeric iterative fintxt, {shone, appeared,') is rather anomalously formed
from the pott, ifxtm. Homer has also faatSn for it"9wotv, in the sense of
thining : compare x^a/tu.
*A, fitxu, see pn^i, ( 109. 1.) faint and i-ENtl. Homer's nffot/iai beloDgs some
times to fan*, and sometimes to *EN1J, I thai/ shine or be killed.
*ENfi, see vifnr.
<pipu, (I carry, bear,) has its tenses from quite different roots,
Jut. ol'acu, and an aoristic imper. dive, about which see 96. 9.
farther aor. 1. weyxa, aor. 2. we-yxov : from the former are
used especially the indie., and those terminations of the
imper., which have the a, and from the latter chiefly the
infin. and part. perf. h4)ioyjx., (compare 97. Obs. 1. 2.)
perf. pass, hriveyixxi, aor. pass. ,hiiypr,t, fut. pass. Ivzyp-hvol^ai or 'nn^-ncoiJ.xi. Verbal adj. oisios, olaror, (Poetically $epT.)MED.
Thelonians have aor. Unix*, buion, pats.imixQ**- The theme inixx occurs
as a pres. in Hesiod, A. 440. (Vvmh/xm-u.) 'EnyxiTt is erroneously considered
as a compound with i> : it is like iyevyn, iXaXxut, &c. ( 85. Oif, 2.) a
redupl. of ErKO, of which again ENEKfi, ENEIKn, are lengthenings, (like
AAKfi, AAEKO.)See Buttm. I^exilogut, I. 63. 23. Homer has in the imper.
pi. fi{ti.See about fe(tTt, 1 12. 9., and about ftfhai, $ 105. Obt. l(i. There
are a few other rare forms derived from e'm, viz. in/in. aor. 1. itifrtu and
the verbal adj. aidims in Herod. (I, 157. Cj G6.) where the a is not gram
matically correct ; and the perf. r^tiiarai in Lucian Parat. 2. of which the
diphthong m, unchanged by the augment, rests on 84. Obt. 2. f(i, see par.
ticularly below.
tytuyai, {I flee, escape,) fut. <pev^of/.ai and (pev^ov/jLai, aor. cipuyov,
perf. nityivya. Verbal adj. Qsuktsos, (peuxrof, (jQvx.tos, Horn.)
Homer has also the part. perf. past, rifvy/i'ms in an act. sense, escaped;
and a part.perf. fxfuTjim, (compare fu 2>, flight,) fugitives.
qfozw, (J do, previously to another, anticipate,) see about the
quantity of the , 112. Obs. 8. aor. 1. tipbaax and aor. 2.
etp&yiv, tp&oj, (f&iivai, (p$af, 110. 6. fut. <p^ri^o/j.ai, perf.
Elp&ajta.
278
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
There is //. . 346. wm^xfUlmi, an uncommon form of the opt. for -tun,
Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. I. 537. Ao/e.
qbeipui, I spoil, trans, is regular ; but the per/. 2. tySopcc, htySopx,
has, with the Ionians and the later Writers, the signif. / am
spoiled, Attic have spoiled, the same with tySapxa.
Homer has the Jut. tpi'ipi : fat. 2. med. XtLfUfUfuu, intrans. with the
Ionians.
fill, in tliis form is merely a Homeric verb with transitive and intrans. signif. to
waste, destroy, (It. r. 466.) perish, (Od. /3. 368.) The other forms are more
in use, vet, on the whole, more Poetical. Qilvu and ifsm are merely
transitive. But the derivative
Pres. tense <p</
is commonly intrans., and takes its tenses from the middle voice of ftm, viz.
fut. filrtfuu, per/. Ifti/uu, plusq. iffl/art, which latter form is at the same
time a syncopated aor. 1 10. 7-) and has therefore its own moods : opt.
pfifun, 7s, It; (Od. x. 51. \. 330. See the Note to 107. Obs. III. 6.) in/in.
yi'taiiti, part. QfiifAuos, conj. ^Ciwu-'.,. shortened ft'io/tai, y6'nreu.
The i in both pAVv, &c. and the pres. film, ( 112. Obs. 8.) is always long
with the Ionians, and short with the Attics : ifli/juti, &c. is constantly short.
QiXiw, (Hove,) instead of the regular aor. of this verb Homer has
also, with a long t, the medial forms eQiXaro, imper. ipIXai,
(deponens of the simple form <J>1 Afi,) in which the i is long,
in consequence of the nature of the aor. See 101. 4.
Qpd^oj, (J say , point out,) has in the old Poets an aor. vifypa&ov,
iititypoi&w, infin. ntf^aSistv, and a per/, pass. srt'pgaopiai.
Qppioi, used only in compounds, ex.<ppz7v, ela<ppt7y, hatyotiv, (to let in,
out, through,) (pp^au, &c. imper. tiaippis, ( 110. 6.)MED.
(pi'<TTa>, peirru, (/ shudder,) fut. <p%i%u, &c. pcrf. nitpplxoc, from
$PIKfl, (whence also the subst. Qfxii, Sec.) see 92. 8. 2.
*TZ, see fliyu.
(pupco, (Imix, knead,) fut. old tpv^aar, efvpax, commonly <pv%eu,
&c. Ion. Quqwu, perf. pass. Tti$vpy.zi aud W<pi/p//.ai.
$va, (I produce,) <pu<rw, eipvaa. But the perf. iriipuxac, and the
aor. 2. <pyv, (pyvai, conf. tpvw, part.
( 1 10. 6.) have a
pass, or intrans. signif. to be produced, to arise, for which
there is in the pres. and fut. (fyuvyjii, <pvaofx.ai.
Un-Attic Writers use instead of fvtui, tp'us, &c. an aor. pass. Qinitai, fuiis,
&c.See about the Homeric forms rtfiun, -rifaii, 97. Obs. 1. and about
the opt. <pin,, l io. p. 242.
X.
commonly x*lt**', (I give way,) is regular, but has in
Homer an aor. 2. with the redupl. and the change of % into
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
279
280
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
See J 105. Obs. 8. and 15. about the Ionic forms of the pres. and imperf.
being sometimes with a, and sometimes with i.
4.) ^jii, (it is necessary, Lat. oportei,) is impersonal, and conforms partly
to the verbi in pi, infin. xt*""> opt. xt''*>
X.(V' Parl- () W*' *)
imperf. ix(H>M, or
(never ix(v,)fut. xp"u5.) x^;>i. (it is sufficient,) un-Attic ircx(x, pi. ixtx(*rn, in/in. i-nxg.>,
part. ixiX(it, Zrx, , imperf. iriX(n,fut. imX(vm, &c.
Xfclvvvni, (I dye, color,) fut. xp*aut &c- ( H2. 14.) perf. pass.
X<wvvf/Ai, (I heap up earth, make a bank or mole, 112. 14.) is
regular in the old Writers : yj>u, infin. xvv> Y/iaai, &c. perf.
pass. xexuafAai.
This verb must not be mistaken for the Epic x^'f^h (J am an9r9i)
XxutifLw.
PARTICLES.
281
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the place of particles, and when such a form occurs rather fre
quently, it passes altogether for an adv. ; ex. gr. the dat.
xo/aiSti, properly icith care, hence very much ;
onovbri,
with diligence, difficulty, hence
hardly, scarcely,
beside a number of adj. feminine, where originally the dat. 6So;
from h oSor, the way or manner, was understood ; ex. gr.
tte^t), on foot, xoivij), jointly, il'lp, privatim, privately,
$mj.gcitp, publice, publicly ; and the like. Compare
in the following , Obs. 7. aXXri, and the like.
the Accus.
dpXjW ana" *"wv *PX> properly, in the beginning, outset,
hence wholly,
voo1x.it, gratis, without compensation, (from voaii,, a gift,)
paxgay, (oSov,) far, far off.
See also Obs. 3.Theneirter of an adj. is also an adverbial accus.,
when in the sing. pi. it supplies the place of an adverb. But
excepting the compar. and superl., of which we shall treat pre
sently, this is chiefly peculiar to Poets, (see 128. Obs. 4.) and
there are also a few adj., which are used adverbially in the neut.
gender in prose ; such are, for instance, rxx", quickly, ixtxphv or
fj.tx.pa., little.
Obs. 3. There are many particles, which originated in this manner, whose radical
noun is not in use, or used only by Poets. Datives of this kind are written without
the / subscript ; ex.gr. ilxn, in vain, 3i^5, doubly, compare the following . Of this
kind are also the gen. Ijjij, in order, iyx'o, near, hp.w, together, (adj. iftei with the
Epics ;) the neuters trXwiev, near, (adj. xXneUt with Poets,) grtfti^n, to-day, aveis* /omorrow; and especially several in , like^Xa, xiifrx, greatly, i<xx, separately, rdx*,
quickly, perhaps ; and many more.
Obs. 4. If beside the neuters ti$i and l&u, we also meet with iv3vt and l%s as
adverbs, (see 117- 2.) it is only accidentally that the latter form is identical with
the nomin. masc. of the adj., and in these words as well as in \yyvs, the s is as much
a part of the adverbial form, as it is in ap.fi; from iftfi, f"x;'f ^or f^Xt'i "T{'/"a[5 for
Obs. 5. Some are cases of nouns preceded by a prtp. ; ex. gr.
**i*Xt*tMt immediately, on the spot, (properly at the thing itself,")
xxBx and xxSxrtf, (for xxf H, xxf Vsj,) as,
iii, (V S,) where/ore ; but iiin, (S/ , t<,) because, comes from iia rmrt, en
rftugytu, (for
i(yv,) literally for the benefit of the thing, (see J 147- *{,)
that is, for the purpose.
and among these too there are some, of which the noun is not in use by itself,
ex. gr. V^xipm, suddenly. Slight differences are to l>e observed in the spelling and
accentuation of some compound expressions of this kind ; ex. gr. ixmlin, out of the
teay, aside, (for Ix riSSt,) tftvsUn, in the way, a hindrance, (this is at the same time
PARTICLES.
283
284
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
orifa, ( 117* xi^ttir'ipu or n^ctWi^ay,
vcktifftav, TXvtfiatTi^v, and -/riMr,
rUKTVfy tuxrixtrleoy,
and from l&h, (straight-forward,) comes the Homeric i9i!ranc (instead of l&urxrx,
see 114. p. 280. Note.)That some of these adverbs, on taking the degrees of com
parison, become real adj., has already been noticed above, 69. 2. and the Note.
Obs. 7. Some verbal forms, by being in constant use in the popular language,
were also converted into particles, and chiefly became interjections. We have already
mentioned m> p. 205. Note : <5piAi>, see the Anomalous ifilk*, (and below J 150,
among the particular locutions:) rri, see the Anomalous TA:j'Jou, lo .' seethe
Anomalous Mm :there is an old imper. of similar signif. Mil, abbreviated is and
m :S.yi, f'tfi, "S>i, >y(u, signify all four, come on, well.'See also i/tikti, 150. All
these imper. generally retain the sing, form, even when addressed to many indi
viduals, except "n and iy^.iri.
Obs. 8. The adv. Jsujo, hither, is also employed as an imper. for come hither, in
which case it has a pi., when addressed to many : hart, which is explained as an
abbreviation of JtSj' in, which occurs in full, ex. gr. in Aristoph. cc/. 882.
116.Particular Correlative?.
(Compare 79. the Adjectives.)
1. Some localities are expressed by means of annexed syl
lables : on the question
whence? by &ev, ex. gr. aXhobsv, from another place,
whither ?
cte,
aXXoai, to another place,
where ?
Si,
SuA, in another place.
There are some differences in the vowel, which precedes these
terminations ; they are best learned by practical observation ; ex.
gr. 'ASwwpev, ougavo&ev, ocypobi, in the fields, country ; morkpoJbi,
on which of the two sides ? Tnriqojae, to which of the two sides ?
kriquSri, on the other side. Most of them keep the accent,
where the radical word has it, or as near as possible. Only those
in o&ev are generally paroxytona ; ex. gr. irivros wovtoSev.
Obs. 1. But these derivatives of oTxos, -ras, &X\os, XtSoi, Iktis, as "*.'><, xitrm,
aX>.c9i, UnSty, follow the general rule.
2. The question whither ? also admits the
enclitic Se
to be annexed to the word, and always close 'to the unaltered
accus., ex. gr. ouphvovfe, into heaven ; aKxls, (from a\s,) into the
sea; e^e/SotSe, from to e^e/Sos-, &c.
Obs. 2. In ix5, homeward, lo the house, and piyatt, to flight, (ifvyr),) the a comes
from accus. of metaplastic forms of the 3 decl., as those in 50, Ois. 8., and in
'A9>Si, en'/iaji,
PAHTICLKS.
285
the 3 along with the r of the accus. pi. is become a , (according to h 22. Obs. 2.)
There are, however, a few words, which take the without being in the pi., as
Obs. 3. Homer sometimes subjoins an adj. to the acciis. in this form, ex. gr. KiutV
ilmiifiUr,!!, (II. g. 255.) and even repeats this local termination, as if it were the
termination of a case in o5i ii/urh, (to his house,) from St Huts.But when the same
Poet appends this is to the gen. in aiiiirh, it is because this gun. generally is ellip
tical : lit S7it, viz. iiutt, ( 112. Obs. 9.)
3. On (he question where? the termination o-iv or at is annexed
to several names of cities, viz. r,<si when there is a consonant
preceding, and Sat in case of a vowel, and retaining the accent
of the radical word, ex. gr.
'ASwrxri, ITXarstiaffiv, 'OXy/xTTiaffi,
(from 'A5i)vs!i, ITXseTaia!, 'Ols.vtx.7tix '.) A few other words take
the termination 01,
eyotqot,
from 'laSixos, TluSw, ra. Miyxpa, This termination always has
the circumflex, except in oi'xoi, at home ".
4. The following three interrogatives refer to the three localities
stated above, viz. :
wo&ev ; whence? itol; whither? nov ; where?
of which the first only agrees in form with the terminations stated
at 1, (with Poets also woSj and nons, see Obs. 4.) But these and
some other interrogatives, of which the most usual are
97-oTE and timixx. ; when ?
itus ; how ?
itri ; in what direction, in what manner ?
stand with their immediate correlatives, (indefinitum, demonstraiivum, relutivum,) again in the same analogy, which we observed
above 79. with regard to the correlative adj.
1 The termination tin is very generally spelled with the / subscript, and 'Amr,n is
considered as the Ionic dat. ; but the termination an shews that this way of spelling
is incorrect. Yet these terminations certainly come originally from datives pi., only
that the form was altered for this special purpose in pronunciation, and applied
also, (like the termination ?,) to nouns in the sing. See the reverse of this in the
following Note.'OXvpxtiet with a short belongs to it 'Okufi-rmt.
- This termination is in Hu!H the real dat. ; in the other words it is the some
what altered dat. of the 2 decl., which was also applied to names in the pi. (Miyxfx,)
and even to other words, as i\tti/3ar from UthvHx, (see Text 6.) These forms must,
however, not be mistaken for correlatives of the following m?, whither, though this
very iTai& sometimes actually answers the question whither; ex.gr. in Aristoph.
Lys. 508. Plat. 608. ; and we must recollect that in the common language the
correlatives of the different questions in general are easily confounded one with the
other. See the Note to Soph, Philoct. 481. and about hra.u3s7, Buttm. Cumpl. Gr,
Gr. $ 116. 06.28.
28G
Interrog.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Jndef.
all enclitics
1T0TE,
irou,
TtOl,
Demonstr.
Relat.
simpl. compos.
rare,
OTE,
OWOTf,
iron ;
Of,
07T0U,
nov ;
oi,
onoi,
not;
o&ev, oaro^tv,
TO&EV,
wo&ev ;
irus,
ru s,
irus ;
US,
OVUS,
t
<* s,
vri,
t),
(Mm
t[7\ ;
minx, hnmU*.
Their signif. are supplied by the analogy of 79. ; for instance,
aroTe, once, nobh, from any place whatever, &c.And in the
same way as the artic. posfpos. or, independently of o<mr, is also
strengthened by inp, (oanip, &c.) Several relatives of this kind
add irep for the like purpose: &Weg, tfireq, ovmp.
Obs. 4. Of the Poetical forms we will only just mention (for trail, &c.)
vfoi, WflSJ,
c&j,
J'Si, and eired*,
and (for <* and ?iri/,) xin, irirt, which forms are analogous to their particular
correlative; (Text 1.)
5. The demonstratives in this table are the primitive simple
ones, like 6, ri, to, among the adjectives ; but tote, then, at that
time, is the only one in common use ; the others occur merely in
some particular locutions, or in poetry. Sometimes we also meet
with us as a more uncommon demonstrative instead of rut : it
then takes the acute accent to distinguish it from the relative us.
('). But there are some other demonstratives, which, instead of
t, have a very different root, and particular meaning :
exeT, (Poetically fxeiSi,) there, eV-eI^ev, thence, e'xeIVe, thither,
answering the interrogalives nov, ico^tv, and no~,
(Ion. and Poetical; also xeiS, xe~&ev, xeTje:)
Se5o, hither, answering the interr. itoX;
vDv, now, answering the interr. irire ;
To which must be added the following two,
Ev&st, here, there, ev&ev, thence,
which are at the same time relatives synonymous with o5 and
oSev, and commonly used in prose.
7. Of the demonstrative adverbial forms, which we have men
tioned, there are five susceptible of being strengthened in the way
stated above in 79. 5. whence are derived the demonstratives
generally used in prose, in the following manner, (compare 14.
Obs. 3. with regard to their accentuation,)
See about the , lubtcripl in these instances, 06s. 8.
PARTtCLES.
287
rmlna,
-rnvixxis,
rmtKawrx,
e'v&a,
'vhx&z*,
ivSavra, Jon. svrau&a, All.
Ev&ev,
e'v&e'vSb,
ev&eutev, Ion. ivrevSev, All.
rri,
t^Xe,
rnvrn,
us,
5Se,
ovtms, or ovru.
See about the two last series Obs. 7.
8. Part of these demonstrative adverbial forms take moreover
the i demonstrativum, ( 80. Obs. 3.)
for instance,
ovruai, (from oi5r<uij!v, see 80. Obs. 3.)
EVTEU&EVI, EV&stSl, OlSJ,
Seff1 from Se5^o, vt/v! from vuv.
However E'vrau&a, in this respect, forms, besides EYTa^!, more
commonly ewauSoT, see the Note to 116. p. 315.
8. The relative adverbial forms, (like the adj., 80.) to gene
ralise their signif. more intensely, annex
ovv and IriHart,
for instance, bnovodv, wheresoever, wherever, hituaovn, (and with
the insertion of ti, Sswutiouv,) oTroySri^oTE, &c.
OA*. 5. In the same way as the corresponding adj. !> 79. form other oorre/atives
by adding their characteristic terminations to other general expressions, (a &X\olot,
wrrmt, &c. J 79. Obs. 2.) so do the adverbs ; ex. gr. aXXtrt, at another time, aXAj,
(on the question xn,) in another way or manner, &c. tuitus, tiirn, (as responsive to
<rSi, <rn,) in every way, entirely, &c. abrtu, ccbrMi, (answering to rev, ireJ>/,) in that
place, there, &c. But the adverbt derived from
rtXvi, trxt, and
are
commonly strengthened by the insertion of the letters a#, for instance,
etWtt^ov, elsewhere, vmirtt^tv, irtkXa^gv, in all, in many placet,
'ixaraxfoii, from every side, ixXa^-J, &c.
Obs. 6. There are likewise negatives made of most of these forms : from iron, r>i,
and r/f, by a mere juxtaposition,
at/iron, fti-rm, never, tSvut, fti*vs, in no way, by no means.
These last forms in Homer throw the r off before a consonant, (t, /inV*>, 11. y. 306.
{.422.) and must, in that case, not be confounded with the particle of time
{mxu, finru, not yet.) But the negatives are more generally derived from the old
adj. ol^tz/xti, ftxlxpof, none,
tvh*pi, by no means, not at all, s'lihmpjf, abitsfiiv, ivlaftftw, &c
Obs. 7- The simple demonstrative and relative forms are obviously derived from the
artic. prapos. and postpos., of which they partly are real cases, rji, S, v, and for Z,
(compare the 2d Note to 1 16. p. 315.) but the others are adverbial derivations from
them for just as ui, it, and rui, are adverbs of quality derived from ', ti, so are
4 This demonstrative it must not be confounded with the it, which answers the
question whither, (see above 2.) though the ancient Authors themselves have some
times been guilty of this confusion even in the very word ttSah. See the Note to
Soph. Philoct. 481.
283
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
9i, in, formed from them with other terminations5. The forms rairr,, rrSt, turns,
//.- . i ;.>.-. :, derived directly from other pronouns, and cvtcj, JSi, (from 3t,) have
the adverbial form for us. To answer the interrogative* rrr, and
ixtivd? gives
Uii'i and Uuj'vwf. The forms t.-S. rw,
&c. and others, of which there is no
nomin. occurring, as Tuvrn, <ra>ra%av, Sac. follow the analogy of the others.
Obi. 8. The iota subscript should properly not be placed under r,, according to
J 1 15. Obs. 3. in those forms, of which there is no real nomin. as the radical word ;
therefore it should be vn, tin, vetim, ikXa^n, but , rn, raurri, aXXtj. The former,
however, are frequently written like the latter for the sake of uniformity.
Obs. 9. Whenever the forms rin and in occur twice, (and sometimes even only
once,) for tr*rl
tm-isometimes
sometimes( 149.) they are accented nri,
in
Obs. 10. Dialects, a.) The Epics double the r for the sake of the metre in i***s,
ovrin, &C.
b.) the Ionians substitute a * in all the above forms for the r, for instance,
KUS, K9V, *XVS, OXoSl*, 0VX*l, SCf 6 16. Obs. 1. C.
c.) the Dorian9 have for **n, in, &c.to, fas, &c.ibid.
d.) the Poets have the shortened form Si, ex. gr. uXXiSt, ixrtrSt.
e.) instead of * there is an Epic form J%i or Jjgi.
117.Mutability of some other Particles.
A. In the Letters.
1. There are some steady rules for varying ou, ovx, ov% and e,
'x, according to 26. for euphony's sake ; and some particles end
for the same reason in a moveable v or s. This is sometimes
attended with a difference in the signif. Of this kind are
icipav, {trans.) beyond, chiefly of rivers and waters ;but
TTEga, (ultra,) over, across, farther, where the object is
considered as a limit or boundary. Both are preposition
and adverb: see Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 69.
ivrixgy and avnxpus, (with a different accent.) Homer uses
the first form in all signif. indiscriminately ; but with
respect to the Attics the grammarians state it as a rule
that avTixgi is employed only in the physical sense overagainst, straight-forward, but Zvtixqvs in the figurative
sense, straight-forward, without any ceremony, &c. But
there are numbers of contrary examples each way. See
Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr.
euSbs and tuhv, (see 115. Obs. 5.) as adverb of time, (im
mediately,) sv$us alone is used ; but as adverb of place,
(straight-forward, directly to,) it is commonly ei&, (e;r. gr.
8 Compare the gen. of the same terminations in some pronouns with the termina
tion S : see $ 72. Obs. 6. 5.
PARTICLES.
289
200
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
The Doric w!, (for irjof,) does the same, but merely before another r, ex. gr. rerrit for ) *. All these changes also take place in the compounds, as :
avfavrif, avn/r, aAXidU, u.y\rtstt[*u,
MTTetfiifai, xar^av'Tv, jta/3/aaf, xaxxtto>rt;, xcXX/T0y,
xa.fifiv*, xanivfat, xarfriffi, xappt^v. xxit/aj, and on account of the meet*
ing of three consonants xaxran, xae%t$i, for xaxxrun, xder%tSt,
and the prty. i and n are abbreviated in the same manner in compounds, but
only rarely and merely before kindred consonants, iwri/irur, u/30xxu.
B.Mutability of the Accent.
4. Several disyllabic prep., which have the accent on the final
syllable, as na^a, into, arcgl, &c. draw the accent back in the
following two instances :
1.) When in the
Anastrophe *,
they stand behind the noun, which they govern, ex. gr.
rovrov wt'gi, for eje! tovtqv,
&c3 ov/co, for aTCO &<3y,
the prep, septal, avrl, Sici, and did are, however, excepted ;
2. ) When they are employed instead of compounds with the
verb elvai, or rather, when this verb being omitted, they stand
alone as adverbs, in which case the common language also has
the Ionic e>1 instead of lv, ex. gr.
Eyci ndpa for zsdpeif/u,
E7TI, EV, V<B0, for EWSO-flV, &c.
to which belongs also va for dvdar-nhi, up ! up !
Obs. 3. Strict critics accent the prep, in the same way, even when they come in
poetry after the verb ; ex. gr. Xjwji n for inkairr, and when they attend the
verb as an adverb, ex. gr. rlfi, very, pre-eminently. We likewise write in, when
this prep, does not merely signify from, but severed from, at a distancefrom, (com
pare 115. 6.) There is, however, as yet no uniformity in our editions in this
respect, or with regard to the exceptions stated above. Another rule is that, when
in the anastrophe the prep, is elided, it is not to have any accent whatever ;
ifr"not
ii'but not in the second instance, ex. gr. d yif ?' i>{, (for "<rt.) See the mutability of the accent in monosyllabic prep. 147. Obi. 14. and
about i| and !, it and if, and the like, 13. 4.
* Many modern Editors write separately aft <riXay, xii ii, xka- fii, xmy yitu,
rtr v, and so on ; whereby writing separates what pronunciation combines. If
we wish for consistency, we must, since we part the EMIITPI of the ancients into
! ari/fi, write also it mXaya. But then xir 11 follows of course, and this is objec
tionable. It is therefore better to write xxiii, narttt, and the like, as we write
SaluctTio*, ouri. Xy'i'ou., and the like.
This denomination was already equivocal among the ancients, since it was used
for the withdrawing of the accent in both the instances stated. See Buttm. CompU
Gr. Gr.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
291
Ob: 4. The interjection Si has likewise a double accent, the circumflex only in
the sense of a call or exhortation, consequently before the vocative, but in the sense
of an ejaculation, that is to say before any other case, the acute or grave accent ;
ex, gr. Soph. Aj. 372. u ^W^;. S; ^f3*sx, (oh, how unhappy I am /) riif etvxiisix;,
(oh, what impudence .') A pui, (woe it me .') and the same in the Epic exclamation
& w'mt. But it is with this rule as with the preceding ones : see Buttm. Compl,
Gr. Gr.
118.Of the Formation of Words.
1. The formation of words, in the full sense of the expression,
is not within the compass of grammar. The analogies of the
primitive stock of any language are generally so obscured and
disjointed by time, and the intermixture of tribes,they are
combated by such a variety of contradictory opinions, and so
difficult to be cleared up with any reasonable degree of certainty,
that they require extensive and deep philological researches,
which are necessarily kept distinct from the theory of gramma
tical forms. Grammar presupposes the existence of a number of
words to be found in dictionaries, and leaves the investigation of
their relative bearings and analogy to individual observation.
2. There is, however, a kind of derivations, (which on that
account may be considered as more recent,) so complete and
steady, that they may be brought under one point of view ; this
facilitates and accelerates so much the knowledge of the language,
that grammar cannot refuse to them a place, especially as the
analogies of this kind of formation of words are mostly grounded
in the analogy of inflections, and may even be regarded as a con
tinuation of the inflections 1.
3. This Section, however, is necessarily confined to verbs, sub
stantives, adjectives, and adverbs; the other parts of speech
belong to the primitive stock of the language, and have already
been partly investigated in other Sections. Derivation itself re
gards either, 1.) the terminations of words ; or 2.) their compo
sition.
119.Derivation by Terminations.
1. The annection of terminations was regulated in Greek by
two principles ; the endeavour to give similar terminations to
similar signif, and the wish to adapt that termination to the
1 We only give a general outline ; the filling up is left to individual study and
observation. Several distinct, but less extensive analogies have purposely been
omitted, that the review of the main points might not be too much encumbered.
202
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATIONS.
293
294
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATIONS.
295
296
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATIONS.
297
most to the neut. part. perf. pass., ex. gr. upay^x, what
has been done, deed, business; /xl/x-niLx, imitation, that is
resemblance ; airelpu, arnkf^x, what has been sown, seed,
&c. The termination y.fi fluctuates between both ; ex. gr.
IM-hfx,a, memory, eiti<srriy.-n, knowledge, rif^ri, honorartyix.ri,
a point, yga/u/x.'H, a line, which differ only in collateral
meanings from ariy(Ax, mark, y^dixixa, a written character,
a writing.
Obs. 3. Some words in pis of the primitive language have merely the vowel before
the /t without the t, ex. gr. hi/tis,fear, x^vui;,frost, cold ;or they have a 3 instead
of the ff, ex. gr. ifxtSptos, dancing, from lf%U/icu, pvxviSpos, xXetuSftof, ftrivfifios, &c.
/35,it, (properly, stepping, from /Ww,) hence itep ; even after the p, as rxa^/ii;,
from rxu'itaj3.
Oil. 4. The above differences in point of signif. must be noticed as a basis ; but
always remembering, that not only in Poetry, but also in popular language, the
meanings of words in the abstract and concrete frequently run one into the other.
Thus for instance, Xx^f's, (compare 23. Obi.') xt*'f*'f, do not signify casting lots,
delivering oracles, but lot, oracle, whilst f^ivi/ta signifies mind, intelligence, inclina
tion.
b.ais ma. denote the real absfractum of the verb with very
little deviation ; ex. gr. pi/Xmii, act of imitating ; wpafys,
acting, action ; o-x^n, &c; Soxi/xWa, trial, examination;
bva'ta, sacrifice; s^onXiala, &c. In some compositions
ma. denotes the action rather as a permanent property ;
ex. gr. o'|y/3Xe\J/ia:, vLayjfya, which forms imperceptibly
pass into similar ones derived from nouns, which see below
at 10. 4.
OA*. 5. Some forms, which belong hither, deviate from the analogy of the/ut. in
point of quantity, as a'iprif, yittcts, Siffi;, tivis, Xvats, Qvvis, %utts, Svriec. See 06s. 2.
Compare the verbs in the list of Anomalous Verbs, respecting the short syllable in
Tt'tris and tpStns.
The following have not such a distinctly marked signif, but the
idea of an abstract generally predominates in them :
c.n and a, mostly oxytona, ex. gr. sv%-h, prayer or peti
tion, from
eQayri, slaying, slaughtering, from
otpdrTu,SiSa^j teaching, doctrine, from hSiaxu
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
constantly having an u in the second syllable, ex. gr.
aycoyh from aya>, eXoiS?) from eSu, (soViSa,) oxw%) from t%oi,
compare the Note to p. 242.
Some are paroxytona, as fiXifin, damage, from fik&vrco,
fSKifiu,
battle, from fiix^fii vixn, victory, from
vixw. To this class belong also the words in -', which
are formed only from verbs in cuto by changing eu into ei,
ex. gr. -rcailtix from irxtlSeuco. They always have a, and
consequently the acute accent on ei.
Obs. 6. With respect to the accentuation of all nouns in w, compare first 3-1.
06*. II. 3. and keep to the following rule :
The fern, of oxytone adj. in is, ex. gr. His, tiSux, are properispomena.
].) The abstracta of arf/. in ns, ex.gr. i?.i>nz, (see 10. a.) jSaiiStut from /3>g3J;,
and 2.) The /em. of noum mmc. in tut, fx. ^r. I'tstm, priestess, (see 12. 3. d.) are
proparoxytona ; and the just-mentioned abstracta of uerii in are paroxytona.
d.or masc. By far the greatest number of these words
have in the principal syllable an a, either naturally or
changed from an s, ex. gr. xporos, clapping of the hands,
from xporia ; (photos, envy, from tpSroviw, \6yos, speech, from
Xeyai, poos, (povs,) from pso*,yet also 'i\eyyj>s, refutation,
from tKiyy^ai, tvhos from ruitru, itikos from itaKXco, &c.
To these may be added the subst. in ros, which com
monly are oxytona, ex. gr. a/xmros, harvest-time, xojkvtos,
wailing, partly with some little alteration as vtros, rain,
from voi, wotyETor, ice, from wftyvuiu. The accent is drawn
back;, for instance, in filoros, life; kotos, drink, (from
irtvw, irino/xxi .)
e.os, neut. ex. gr. to xSjSor, care, from x7)o&;, \i%os, lot, from
\atyyjivoj, zsgayos the same as wpayi^a, &c. These verbal
nouns never have an o in the principal syllable ; hence
to ysvor, offspring, but h yovos, generation.
8. The subject of the verb, as man, is denoted by the termina
tions
a.r*ir, (gen. ov.) Tng, rap. The termination rns after the first
decl. is the most common, and the words are in part oxytona,
and in part paroxytona, ex. gr. dSXviTws, athlete, wrestler,
from a&X.Ea) : ^iz^nrris, disciple, scholar, from /ao&eiv, Starris,
spectator, from bedo/tai, Xixsto-Trir from 5W<y, x/>irr from
xiv(u, &c. but xi/#Egv7)TW, pilot, from xvfiBpvdai, irXdo-TTts
(from IthtXTTU, WwXaiT/ASEi,) \vid<STi\s, ^d\Trns, &c.
rr/g and Tug are more uncommon forms, which frequently
DERIVATIONS.
299
occur in the dialects and in poetry along with rris, but are
also in use in several words of the popular language, ex. gr.
auriip, deliverer, p-hrup, orator, (from eaciw and 'PEft,)
iaTijtTwp, &C.
Obs. 7- Some shorten the vowel before the termination, (Obs. 2. b.) er. gr. WuJStiis, Siirrif, Sim, aSfim, particularly derivatives compounded with tubst. and
hy'iopou, as oirtyirnsj "titUuffnytrM or Mowratytrris.
b.eus, ex, (jr. ypatpeus, writer, (pSoptus, destroyer, seducer.
Obn. 8. The terminations under a and b have also been partly given to things,
which may be considered as agents or subjects of an action ; ex. gr. &r,rm, a gale of
wind, WtMrni, upper tunic, r^wrri^, alorm, %uarrYt, girdle, \;j.',-> dibhic, bolt, piston.
The use of masc. forms in connection with fern, ones, is a syntactic licence, see
123. Note.
c.or, mostly in compounds only, ex. (jr. %uy%q>or, painter,
sraTgoxTovor, parricide, &c. ; but rpatyos, (b, r],') one who
educates, aoiSbr, singer, and some old words like ag%ar,
leader, (Horn.)
d.ns and as, gen. ov, only in a few compounds, as /xygoTtw'kris, TQiriqdgxps, (and -or,) ogvi&o&r/gas'.
9. The names of tools and other implements, necessary to the
performance of an action or operation, are derived from the pre
ceding denominations of subjects or agents, or at least presuppose
them in point of form ; especially
rripiav, rpov, and rpx, from the termination rwg, ex. gr.
Xovrwqtov, bathing-tub, Kovrpov, water for bathing, a bath,
axgoarrigiov, hall ofaudience, lecturer's room, i,uarqx,cumjcomb, hpyjharpct, place for dancing.
jibv, from the termination sus, ex. gr. xot/gslbv, barber's shop,
from xotigsir, barber, and this from Kilpeiv, to shear, shave,
rpo<pe7ov, recompense for educating, from rpo$sus.
10. Another principal species of subst. are
B. Those derived from ad,}, and attributes, and chiefly for
the mere purpose of expressing the abstractum of the
adj. Of this kind are the terminations
a.ia, constantly with 5, (Ion. n,) ex. gr. aofyos, wise, oofyloc,
wisdom, and xaxi'g, SsiXi'*, &c. Also ^Xctx/a from @k%%, euSaiptovia: from sv^xiixuv, ovos, ayog/24, from it-hp, avSgor, WEvi'a
from Trims, oiror, a/xaS/a from a/xa&flr, lis. The adj. in vis
4 The reading itlptlx, though frequently occurring in our editions, is incorrect, as
appears from the above analogy.
300
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
commonly make their subst. in six, as will be seen pre
sently.
Compound adj. in ros very generally change the t into
a in the subst. ex. gr. dSavxTos dStzvaoltz, SiWewror Suo-
DERIVATIONS.
301
302
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
4.) Gentilia, denominations derived from one's native coun
try. These are A. masc. H.fem. and C. possessive {adj.')
DERIVATIONS.
303
301
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATION.
.305
3(16
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
of meaning as avbguireios. As oxytonon, it gives adj. of
time, ex. gr. ^/XEgivbr, yfieanos, (of yesterday, from
arsSrvoy and the words in eivhs denote abundance, complete
ness, OTsSivor, (viz. all a plain evenfield,) quite level, bpuws,
mountainous, Et/Sieivor, quite serene, &c.
Ivor, anoi,mos, are only gentilia, see above 12. 4. A.
e.Xor, an old act. termination, whence ohXoj-, afraid, who
fears, (timid,) enirayKos, (see . 114. Note on XeXw/uuzi,) who
frightens others, (formidable.) But the lengthened ter
minations n\bs and uXos are the most usual ; they denote
habit and custom, diracTn'Kbs, deceitful, aiAaproiX'os, one
addicted to evil, &c.
f. iptor. Adj. of this termination are almost all verbal
ones denoting act. and pass, properties, qualities, orfitness ;
the termination is annexed according to different analogies,
ex. gr. ygnoifMs from j^gaopcai, useful, Tpo$ii*.os, nutritious,
nourishing, bxnalai/xor, deadly, "botihos, potable. This ter
mination is also sometimes lengthened : aTos, ex. gr. virog. gor, spIs, npos, denote mostly, filled with, ex. gr. olxrpbs,
mournful, <p&ovEgbr, envious, voawpbs and voo-Egw, sickly.
h. aXios has pretty nearly the same signif., ex. gr. Sotppaikios
(from Suppos,) pcoiMtXlos, Seii/,aXeos, ^cv(>x\ios, &C.
i. te'oj and rls, see 102.
DERIVATIONADVERBS.
307
303
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATION BY COMPOSITION.
309
310
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
prep, by elision ; ex. gr. d.y%la\os, (from ay%i and b\\s,) ira\atyevris from itcthai, ivx^xhu, avs'g%o/xai, from dux, e^e'fj^optaii, xj3ai'vft/,
from e, itpoiyu, nefixyu. ( 30. 2.)With respect to the v in
compounds with h, avv, ni\iv, and ayav, see 25. ; and about
5i- and Sis--, ti- and t^usee 70. Obs. 2. with the Note.
Obs. 7. The prep. r(i sometimes makes a crasis ; ex. gr. trjai/^M, ^ausrraf, for
nrja
TossTra,-, particularly with the augment, see J 86. OAs. 1 . See about fjaJSee
and the like J 17.and about the abbreviated forms irjSi/tiyf, iifimt, nat^aXuf,
and the like, $ 119. Oii. 2.
Oi*. 8. That <ri;i does not lose the i in composition, follows of course from 30. 2.
But a^pi too, frequently retains it, cx.gr. in i/ufiaXas, i/tQlint, from <SAf, frat. The
rest of the prep, particularly in Ionic Epic poetry, retain the vowel in some com
pounds, which originally had the digamma before the second word ; but with the
Attics only iu i&iifftttrSeu, isnafxuy, ( 108. 3.) and Wmxns.
Obs. 9. With respect to the separation of syllables, the rule is that, when the prep.
ends in a consonant, the latter always continues with the first syllable, as hVifXofuti, ntHn-iyu, U-oi(si, it-if%efitu. But when the consonant in the prep, begins
the second syllable, it begins this syllable even when the vowel is elided in the
compound ; ex.gr. <x-uayv, a.-xeurui.
5. The principal inseparable particles are
which denotes
difficulty, contrariety, and the like, (ex. gr. tiuo-fixros, of difficult
approach, inaccessible, Iva^xt^ouia, a contrary fate, misfortune,)
and what is called the
privative,
which has the power of a direct negation like the Latin in and
the English un, in, and less, ex. gr. qtfixros, impassable, a-irxir,
childless. This a generally takes a v before a vowel, ex. gr. ami
nos, (innocent, guiltless,) from air/a.
Obs. 10. Several words beginning with a vowel, especially those mentioned in
C. Obs. 3. as having originally begun with the digamma, take, however, merely
the i, ex. gr. anVrnTaf, ecxuv. amies, &c. : hence it is liable to contraction, as in ixtn,
{unwilling,) for iixm, ijyif, (idle,) with altered accent, ( 121. Obs. 6.) from S.i^yos.
But the remains before a consonant in irv'iQiXet, ifUfanU, (from a and Qnp'i.)
Obs. 11. When we find it stated that this at has also other meanings, and even a
magnifying power, this most not be understood as if we were in all instances at
liberty to explain it as such. It has these signif. barely in some old compounds,
which must be remembered singly ; we will therefore notice the most important,
and leave the rest to Dictionaries. The a has the magnifying power in inns, (intensely fixed, speaking of the eyes,) from ti'hoi, to stretch, distend; /i(t/Uf, icxtXtis,
(very dry, hardened,)
currtyts, *\<iX's, (thick-wooded.)* It expresses a com[* " In p. 10. of the Thesaurus they detail nearly the whole of that long Digressio
a Theochteis on the intensive power of a, whereas all that was necessary, was to
give a simple list of the words, in which a. seems to exert this power, with a refe
rence to Valckenaer's Dissertation ; more particularly since it is after all very doubt
ful whether the vis intensive raD a be not a fiction of the Grammarians:that it is
so, seems to be the opinion of the acute and learned Porphyry, in his Quastionet
Homerica, and Mr. Kidd has, in our opinion, successfully explained away the in
DERIVATION BY COMPOSITION.
311
bination orjoining into one in iyiXxxrts, (foster-brothers and titters,) iyiareee, AJiXfit, ixemt, irxXxtres, literally of the same weight, viz. equal ; ixe^es, (from xi^of,)
stances, which Valck. has adduced." The Quarterly Review, No, 44. p. 340. See
Wassenbergh's Selecta e Schol. Valck. in N. T. 1, 141. 31 1. Schafer, ad Dionyt. H.
de C. VV. 203. New Greek The: 8393. d. 8401. c.
" The Editors have not at present access to Porphyry's Homeric Questions, which
are to be found in the Preface to Barnes's Homer. Mr. Kidd's opinion would cer
tainly have been noticed by them, had they been acquainted with it at the time,
when the article in the Thesaurus was written. They suppose the Reviewer to
allude to this passage in Mr. Kidd's Review of the Grenville- Homer
' Much as we revere the erudition of Valck., we cannot assent to the result of his
investigation of what is denominated the intensive power of x. Xttpx iSXnx(r)
denotes a hand not formed to sustain the assaults of war ; ru%ta Hxvxffi, //. 6. 178.
walls unfit to withstand the impetuosity of Hector, and Ixtxret HXnx'es,
1^4the dissolution of a person not experiencing the agonising pains of premature departure,
but ripe in years and virtue, dropping into the grave like a shock of corn in hit teuton,
' animam senitem mollit extolvent sopor:'' see particularly Cic de Sen. 19. Schol. A. ad
it. e. 178.
So would I live such gradual death tofind,
Like timely fruit, not shaken by the wind,
But ripely dropping from the taplett bough,
And dying, nothing to myself would owe.Dryden.
In Soph. Tr. 106. iixxavrajf denotes incessantly streaming with tears, and Antig. 88.
rer/iet xixxflvref, a fate exciting tears never to be exhausted ; //. X. 155. *A$yXy i/Xji,
if' rts tikis t\uXtteira, Schol. A. ; Callim. H. in Cer. 26.
Ti S' aura xxXef xXtfas lireirirxfre TltXotffye'i
AivSouTH ififtXxfis' itx xtt fteXts Xfiat eiffret,
Ovid. Met, 8, 418. ' quod nulla ceciderat alas,' Eurip. Hipp. 75.
" E*** aSrs Got/Am i\tat f'iv&itv Caret,
Ovi' rtXft era* ffj3fiff.'
The Critical Review for June, 1803. p. 128.
This opinion deserves attention, but the Editors are not at present prepared to
assent to it."
Barker's Arislarchus Anti-Blomfteldianus, Lond. 1820. p. 43.
The opinion of Porphyry, referred to above, is given in Villoison's Scholia Feneta
ad It. A. 155.: 'H aWXij, vpes rrtf u\uXer, art ereXXot; ixie%xs trxrixtr' at f&tf yet? rrtf
tpuuin ifoitiuxetffif' ol it, rrtf ereXu%vXar' CtXrtof it if' fit a'uius V^uXtfxra, us 'He'teies,
TtiXi yeut i%vXtn xxrtervhra xrtXtx trta/f.
'A^i/Xy TaXu^uXat, if' its ovhtis V^uXte-xre, ivx irXrtSes t%et %vX*ar, xcu ix eruXxtau rftrthiffx,
\rtearxrrt xett eraas xxufftf trtrnittx. 'AXXaes, Xlaafuotaw i\uXer itXtir, ai (tlr rrtf rraXv^uXar
ifeitiaexxa'tf, [at b\ |i/X*v,] ai it rut cll^vXo*' inXet yeu*, fxn, ra ot xett ra a/Lao, is tart
reu otKaXevias, iffrt yxp afjtaxtXtules' xett iCpa/tei ifxx Gaefiej, xeu iixxoi xfjtx ixxv. a'JTUs xat
iXa%es xett ixatrif r) efteXt%es xett efiexatrts' xett i%uXes auf, it ofia\uXas itot ra Tvxrar \u.et it
iaxtt i%vXe Xtyttt, alt xetret manartf reu ZoXett, (tarxyit yet*, ai it rt ixftret Tooget^at erf
arreua-tr,) iXXx xetret a-rtartfftf reu \uXi8X9ixt, net y i\uXas iiXr,, t\ its alius ** i^uXtujxra,
raurtsrtf if' its %uXer oiiiits txeTpt* xett it ixetnt it xat r) iXo^es, at; ifjtet ioxit, xvtiats ft
Txohftxn Xtytretl, rapot re Xi%evs trteeu fieri u.iretf%ltf u.tjit xeirn;, Toioe xett Xtytt, Keuotitrts
etXo%ev, rtit ix eretpfavtets, iXX' ov Xt%aus Xrteav ptrettrxoue-ns' Xaerof i' ft xxrotxanfts xett tart
revs etXXavs fitrnyetyiv. ua^rta xv^taes ra iXtyiffatt ra vertff reef iXo%atf Ganfatf, Xtytt yeut 'Ejtreef,
AXX' irx fiat T^uatf iXe%ovs xxt fnertx rlxfx
n^af^attees avatgit,
XetTof it If xxrx%griffit ytyofif tart reu exufavf ffufjt/jtxxtre. xxt re itonXet is erua, aux iffrt
ra fttyxXainXaf, iXXx re iivXaeratef, i| ay o-ftftxnu re ifxftertxaf' eurais yeut ifn, vu it
xrttfttf it itiXees, ifctfiuf xxt iinXeut iroiejf' ait xxxats it xxt 1t\rat it inXef iroitiotxtf, ra
t\ xirtXau IptTtaaf. 'H erxoxZeXn euf eeoos rrtf ffUfi%ttxf ruf ertvrafruf' rt i' o^urtaer ft tuxtfnrartfaf rueas ; B. The Homeric Questions are appended to 'Oftftaau'E^nynriis, Humeri
Interprcs, Argentorati 1539. 12mo. and in p. 49, 1 find the article in question with
certain corruptions and variations: xxt eutxuet x/ix tuxnifteXtxreesitx ra ertxeev
rrtf a-rtttttrtrXii if' },sxxi xxetns ii xx) fiXfl^fl! Iftet iexti xuatait it xxphftxri Xiyutxi
rit xXXxtUrifrtfXi. E. H. B.]
v
312
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATION BY COMPOSITION.
313
314
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
DERIVATION BY COMPOSITION.
a, or with 6 and o, commonly take an n or u, but this never is the
case with verbs compounded in the manner described, sub 2.
with prep., though it is done with attributive nouns derived from
them, and with the compound verbs of the second kind, (see
above, 3.) ex. gr.
vTrnxoor, obedient, from vitaKovu, arpccr-nybs , military com
mander, from OTQaros and ayca1, xarviyopos, xctrnyopiu, (from
xard and dyopd, dyopevu,) an accuser, to accuse; evrmftos
from ave/Aor, ^vartKarot from l\a.vvv, dvu/jLoros from optvi/pu,
&c.
and the compounds of ovo/xa change moreover the second o into
v, dvaw^os, iuuivv/aos, &C
9. With respect to the accent, the general rule is, that the
accent of the simple word is, (according to the analogy stated
above, 12. 2. a.) in composition, drawn as far back as the nature
of the accent will allow. Thus, for instance, (piXoTExvor, q>i\6$sot,
come from texvov, bear, ovvodos from oSor, anais ocTtoii&os, from vsaTf
sjaiSbr, ArifAos from riptio, (piXiTaigor, tvlfdpbtvos, from iTscigor,
wagSivor, zsavxioXos, (extremely various, changeable,) from a.\oKos,
(various,) ina.l'Swros, duairaiSevr'os, from aaiStvrhs, &c. We must,
however, remember that
1.) The termination of ad;', in -ns, ej-, has also commonly the
accent in compounds on the final syllable ; ex. gr. (piXoptEiSflr, zypoafyi'kws, dno&vis. But several of them, and espe
cially the compounds with rihos, ij.rix.os, Ts~iyj>s, dgxiw, draw
the accent back : tvr&ms, ewnSes, auragnnr , &c. Those in
-ulw do the same. 119. 14. See Buttm. Complete Gr.
Gr.
2.) Verbal nouns in rt, d, w, t\p, ei/s, and sir, which, as simple
words, have the accent on the final syllable, keep it there,
when compounds ; ex. gr. InivoiJ.-h, ovfjLtpoqd, oixooo/n.^, avv,^Maarris, avyypsttyivs, iinrt^-nrios. Subst. in ptor, as Siaavp(a.'os, napoZvaitbs, &c. with the exception of the compounds
of Ses/aos-, as Gvvlzay.os, &c. do the same. Compound adj.,
in Tor, (compare 60.) most generally have ros, tov, with
the accent drawn back, rarely rbs, rri, tov : no rule can
be relied on in this respect, ex. gr. dvofik-mos, s%al%eroi,
&C. but XfZ&cXTOf, T"h, tov, &c.
1 The words derived in this manner from uyx and aytu/ii, have also in the common language, partly an , ex. gr. \>x,iyit> wK*y-
310
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
317
SYNTAX.
122.
1. Syntax teaches the use of the forms, whose formation has
been treated of in the first part of the Grammar. It follows for
that purpose the grand division of the parts of speech, as stated
above, 31.
2. We therefore shall treat: 1.) of the noun in itself and other
nominal forms ; 2.) of the noun in combination ; 3.) of the
verb; 4.) of the particles ; 5.) of several particular constructions
and phrases.
123. Of the Noun.
1. Whatever is joined to a noun, subst. adjectively, (adjective,
participle, pronoun, article,) must agree with it in gender, number,
and case.
2. There is a seeming deviation from this rule in Greek by the
Attic writers : adj. &c. with a masc. termination are joined to a
subst. fern, in the dual, ex. gr. Xen. Cyrop. 1,2, 11. Kai jxi'av
Plato Phadr. 237. 'H/*<2v h
txccGTa Suo tive savoy Y&ia. ttpypirz xai ayovTE, oiv EWop(.E&a. Thus
frequently rai &e and roIv $eoTv, (Demeter and Persephone,) from
7)
But since we have seen above, ( GO. 3. 4.) that the adj.
in os often are communis generis, especially with the Attics, we
need only take for granted that this is usually the case with all
adj. in the dual.
Obs. 1. Poets sometimes allow themselves to construe attributive auist., which
are kmc. barely in form, ( 119. 8.) with nountfem.; ex. gr.bUvirxt 'Unfit 'SSf,
'Efuvl; \vfiyirnftt, vraftfiatnfx yetix,, ftXuv %iu$$6biu to a female, liurip. Hipp. 602.
(see Valck.)
The intermixture of forms in the dual and pi., chiefly takes
place only on connecting the subject and the predicate. See
129. 5.
3. But the adj. may also stand without a subst. not only in
reference to a subst. in the same context, but very frequently also
without any subst. whatever : the sid)st. then either is actually
omitted, or the idea of a subst. (as a man, woman, thing,) is kept
318
A GREER GRAMMAR.
in the mind. Such an adj. acquires in that case all the properties
of a subst., ex. gr. b oofy'as, loise (man,) vi awHpos, viz. yy, desert,
(earth destitute of water,) n ofiw, viz. bios, straight, (road,) ol
otoXXoi, the many, multitude, people, ra. e/*a, my things ; and also
the pronouns ovros, Ixsivor, rir, &c.
Obs. 2. In this last way most subst. have originated in all languages ; hence in
Greek many personal denominations denoting trade, conditio*, office, (as a shepherd,
judge,) are still used, as it were, as adj., with the addition of the word ittif, when
they apply to one individual only. Thus, for instance, trtifiii; (shepherd,') stands
alone only in reference to his flock; but
m/ttit, where we commonly say merely
a shepherd, when the strict sense is, a man who is a shepherd; and again, Awi{ ri^atttt, a man who belongs to the family of a ruler, of a sovereign, (as Hipparchus, brother
to Hippias, the actual ruler, tyrant, of Athens.) See also &rti(
132. 4. 2. a.
When directed to several individuals, it is a respectful address, ex. gr. Sjis imxrrai,
j/e judges!
Obs. 3. The adj. may sometimes supply the place of the adv., and some adj. in
Greek are almost always employed only in that way. Of this kind are, IBtKctTtis,
voluntary, (l3iXcr<r)ii arnti, he went away voluntarily,) Ht/uns, willing, (cur/tit* tii^art,
she accepted it very willingly; and several adj. denoting time, as t{it7 iflxctTe, they
arrived at the end of three days ; rxortun S
he came in the dart.
4. Whenever a compar. refers to another quality, the latter, as
in Latin, is not in the positive, but likewise in the compar., ex. gr.
Eurip. Med. 490. sspoSu/j.os (x,a\\ov $ Bo(pairiqx.
124.Of the Articulus Prapositivus.
1. Whenever a noun subst, is to denote a definite object, it
generally is construed with the art. b, ri, to, which corresponds
exactly to the German der, die, das, and with the English the,
for the three genders.
2. The indefinite art. of modern languages is never expressed
in Greek, but when an indefinite object is distinctly to be denoted
as an individual object, in which case the pronoun rls, ri, supplies
our article indefinite, ex. gr. iWor erexs \ayo)v, a mare brought
forth a hare ; yuvh ns opviv bTj^ev, a woman had a hen ; ti xogn eylveto daxos, the girl became a leather-bottle.
3. Even proper names commonly have the art. ex. gr. b Swxgottw, at "A&yivai. But it is frequently omitted, and never used,
when there is a qualification following with the art. ex. gr. 2,a>xgaTTir b <ptK6ao<foi.
Obs. 1. Languages differ in the use of the article definite. The Greek in parti
cular has it before several pronouns, where the English and German languages omit
It, or even use the article indefinite. For instance, after a general description, the
Greek says, i rewrit
si* v frn fyUxat : this expression then includes all such,
SYNTAX.
319
whilst we should say, such t. man cannot please me. When prefixed to an inter
rogative, the article denotes that the answer is expected to be a definite object, ex.
gr. to Tr ; but which f ra xt7x rxvrx ; which do you mean ? In confidential con
versation we even meet with, aw^u Si Bav/iurit' to t/ ; something wonderful hap
pens to him. And that itwhat f The art. is essential in Greek with the pronouns
possessive, for ex.gr. ris SouXf, (as well as icvXistsu,) can signify only, a slave of thee;
but o tit
(as well as i hikis tto,) means thy slave.
Obs. 2. The remaining instances, where the Greek has the art. prapos. instead of
our article indefinite1, may be reduced to the following two principal cases: 1.) When
an object, which in particular instances is or may be an indefinite one, is considered
in the abstract or in general, and consequently appears as definite. We do the
same, for instance, in comparisons ; we may say, " He is like the physician, who
should visit the sick without knowing any thing of physic," (Xen. (Ec. 15, 7-)
Again, when an indefinite object becomes a definite one in a particular relation, or
occupies a definite place, we say, " The matter between you and me is still so doubt
ful, that we want a man to decide it," but the Greek has, n to? tuutf$nStrn trt Su,
we want the man who will decide it, viz. the third man in thiiparticular relation, who,
ficc." 2.) On relating a current story, which is repeated as being well-known, and
having been frequently told, ex. gr. Plato Charm. 7- ^tfarxris I K(*t!xs, Si Crtr,
M rtu xxXeC k'tyur uttiiis, Critiasis very wise, who (according to Ike well-known story)
said in reference to a beautiful boy."
Obs. 3. The Greek prose-writers frequently omit the article, where we should use
it, especially in expressing general ideas, ex. gr. Plato de LL. 5. Bt7n yif &yx3r rcu
n/ih, Honor however is a divine good, Ckarmid. 18. 0* Sfx tuftumi xv i"v alias ;
Theart. 23. AltSwis fit inrifiv. See also Schsef. Melel. p. 4. And the art. was
very often omitted in the common language before the words Slot, dig), fitteikm or
(t'tytts /W/Xiuc, (both denoting the king of Persia.) See Heind. ad Plat. Eutkyd. 8.
Phaed. 17. 108.
Obs. 4. Attic poetry has a greater freedom respecting the omission of the art. than
the Attic prose, but not so much by far as the other species of poetry, which gene
rally may use or omit the art. as they like ; and there is not even an art. properly
speaking In Homer, as we shall see below 5 1 27. Obs. J.
125.
1. The art. is frequently separated from its subst., not only
through the adj. (5 xaXor itxis,ol vvzi>xovr* vo/xoi, the existing
laws,) but also through other more particular modifications of the
subst., ex. gr. inAixmro rris h iawI? liar^rts, he remembered the '
time spent in madness, in which case a participle as ytvoixivn and
the like may often be mentally supplied ; ex. gr. t> vphs Ta\a.rtt.s
ixix*, the battle against the Gauls ; v) itply acgtu qcvtov d^rr,, the
virtue which he shewed be/ore he reigned, (Xen. Ages. 1, 5.)
Obs. 1. The Ionians even insert the pronoun ris between the gen. dependent on
it and its art., ex.gr. rut tit liftm instead of rut luisn vis.
1 See Wolf, ad Reix. de Accent. 70. Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 1.
s In the passage, which is quoted, Plato Phadr. 4. ru tcscZtn ought, I think, to
be actually taken iu a definite sense, as Socrates is clearly meaning himself.
320
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX^
321
eopol avo^Ef, r) avco itoXis, the upper town, sir tov uvuitxtuj ronov,
(see 115. G.) v) l%sziq>vv)s ixtTzsoLvts, the sudden removal, &c. 1
Under this head comes also od liiKuais, and the like, see below
148. Obs. 3. Or the adverb comes after, and the art. is re
peated : "Orsev syeiprta^s ex tSs- u^Xuxs raums rr,s ayav, when you
awake from this excessive remissness.
7. If the subst. being sufficiently known from the context or
idea itself, be altogether omitted, the adv. assumes the appearance
of a subst., ex.gr. aupiov, to-morrow, omitting the word r^j-ipx, day,
gives vi avpiov the morrow ; r, At/Sis-!, the Lydian music, {xpixotioc
being understood,) ol tote, the men of that time; is rovnitsw, (for
to Wiaot, with the probable omission of n-ipos,) backwards, towards
the hind part; Anacreo has, To oTj/xEgov /ae'\ei /u.oi, I care only for
to-day, i. e. for what is to-day, what, occurs to-day ; for it is not
always possible to supply a definite subst., when the art. is neut.,
nor is there any occasion to supply a subst.
8. The instances, in which different forms, and whole sentences
have the appearance of a noun subst. merely through the remain
ing article of a subst., which is omitted, are perfectly distinct from
the following two instances, in which such words and sentences
become actual subst. by means of an article belonging to them :
1.) Infinitives, ex. (jr. to v^xttsiv, the acting, being engaged
in business, to xaxwr Xiyeiv, the evil-speaking, back-biting,
r!SoM.ai rep vepiirotrsiv, I find pleasure in ivalking. The
use of the inftn. as a subst. is very extensive in Greek, as
will be seen 140.
2.) Any word or phrase, considered in itself as an object,
ex. gr. to Xiyu, i. e. the word Xiyu.Plato Protag. 345.
Tlept imuTou \iyn touto to Ikuv, Phtedr. 129. K-xTa^qriax<T&ai SeT ayTov to, Il<3r S1 av tyui toioo-Se roiai^s iiay^sipnax, lis
must make use of this speech, how could I have attacked
such a one !
Obi. 4. Any word denoting an object, is generally considered as of the neut. gen
tler ; bnt in grammar it is customary to give to every word the gentler belonging to
the denomination of that part of speech, ex. gr. as we say h irrmofun, (the pronoun,*)
we also say lyu, (the pronoun iyu,) and i \-rti, because of o evrhef**;, (conjunction.')
Obt. 5. There is, however, another peculiarity to be attended to. The article r
with its accompaniment, omitting any connection, becomes adverbial, ex. gr. to tiXttn-xtitfJtnaUy, rasZv, (properly tic ?,) now, ri axi rauh, henceforth, (compare beloiy
1 The Latin lansjunge not having any nrt., mrst resort lo a kind of juxtaposition
to usq such expressions, and that onlv in Comedy, fieri semper leiiiias, Terentius.
Y
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the accus. 131. 8.See about nuu tcu T^ta, the Note to J 132. 4. 2. c, and about
some other expressions with the art. tc or t, below the adj. neul. 128. and the
accus. 131.
Oil. 6. In an elliptical sentence the article sometimes stands even before a pro
noun relative, ex. gr. To i/uu/BU T(it tc f ifttu&ri, (Plato lie]). 510.) the thing compared
controlled with that, to which it it compared, where i*u"o might have been used
instead of ro : Ou3t -rov, era, alc^uvn, iri Qi^cvra, (Herod. 3, 134. :) Tats tiott nfui %u\iTn
h itifuK^arlx, to men like us, (compare below \ 143. 6.) a democracy it prejudicial,
(Xen. Hist. Gr. 2, 3, 17-:) T (ruvcvrimi) SSn it ffni/uirciTti t"n, (Plato Phadr. 34.)
to vrxif Kifvt, the wailnul-like thing, (Pollux 7, 75.;) and the same before other
words connected with a subsequent proposition, ex.gr. To tots iu Tdyu, ItSatxi /a,
literally, the when one ought to speak teach me, i. e. teach me when it it proper to speak ;
"En in XttTirat, tc r,v vrtlo-u/tt, tVa;, i. e. a case still remains, this, namely, if we could
persuade you, (Plato Rep. 1. p. 327.)
126.5, ii, to, as Pronoun Demonstr. and os, i), 8.
1. Both the artic. prcepos. 5, v, to, and the artic. postpos. Sr, o,
were demonstrative pronouns in the primitive language instead of
oZtos or exeiW. When the language was polished, and became
more copious, their use was more confined, but even in common
prose both retained in several definite instances the power of a
real demonstrative pronoun.
2. They were most frequently used in this sense on making a
division and distinction ; in that case 5 /aIv comes first, and then
6 Se follows once or several times, properly only in speaking of
definite objects, thisthat ; but also of indefinite onesthe
onethe otherone more, and so through all genders and num
bers ; ex. gr. Toy i*.ev eti'juux, tov Se oi, this (man) he esteemed, that
'not ; To ju.ev yap avoajTov, to Se /ntjcvixov, one is a silly trick, the other
a mad one ; Ttvv TroXe/xiuv, (or oi vokiixioi,) oi /xev E&atvjuui^ov to.
yiyvd/AEva, ol S' Ifiowii, oi Se avvEaxtuxfyvTo, some of the enemies were
astonished at what happened, others screamed, others prepared
for their retreat ; Ta/v tvtvv to. ij.Iv exei ^ro&as, T* ^' e'tJv anoSa :
KijEio-croy xakus xe'vEH&ai $i xaxus nXovreTv to /xev yap eXeov, to 5' Itcir'lfjLntm <ps'gsi : Isocrales says of the Athenians, who had sent out
colonies, because their country was over-peopled, that in this way
they,vE<Ttvo"ctv d/j.!poTipouf, xa\ tous a.xo\ov$r\aavTa.s xa\ tovs imoy.dvaiiTxs' to'iV /xev yap Ixavrtv rm oi'xoi %iipav xars'^iTTov, toiV 5e nXtiu
tra vita^yovoms knopioav.We find in the same manner, o /xev
avTavoi Se, some of themothers. See about 5 ptsv, 5 S' o5,
149. in (xev.
3. The genuine Attics seldom use the artic. postpos. in this
way, (os /xev, or Se, &c.a. u.h, a Se, &c.) but later Writers, like
Plutarch, very frequently.
SYNTAX.
323
Oh. I. There is an instance in Demosth. pro Cor. 248. Reiske, UoXtn 'EWrMas,
if pi* ivtufvvj us &f Si tous Q}vyaChxs xxroiym, destroying tome Greek cities, bringing the
exiles back to othert.
4. In a narrative 5, fi, to, frequently stands but once with Se in
reference to an object already named, ex. gr. h 11 eiWe, but this one
said ; tw
d.<zoj(fiipn<J<ii, (the accus. with the infin.) that this
(female) then ivent away.
5. When the question is of persons as subjects or agents, such
a proposition may also be connected with xat, in which case the
nomin. always has the form of the artic. postpos. or, o?, a":
but the accus. (with the infin.) takes the form of the artic. prcepos.
rov, &c. ex. gr. Kai or, oatouaas ravrx, eWev avrov ex rris rx^eats,
the other, having heard this, pushed him out of the rank, Kai o?
ita\vbhres, iaifiauvov Is ra\s mas, Herod. Kai tov vttkHiaai Souvai,
and the other ordered it to be given to him.
Obi. 2. Hither belong also the expressions used in relating a conversation : S tit,
Maid he, (see 109. p. 231.) and the elliptic xatl It (viz.
on which the other laid.
Obt. 3. When there is a prep, in the sentence, fin and Si frequently come imme
diately after it, ex. gr. 'Et /th rsTs ffvuQuvovpw, h Si voTs ov, on some points we agree, on
others not; lsocr.Paneg.il. E/'j ph reus ifyi&rrti, rat l\ iouXsintrts. See Reiz. de
Accent. 13. 69.
Obt. 4. The distinctions, however, are not always so marked and so corresponding
as in the preceding examples; ex. gr. u uir is frequently followed in the next pro
position by Tivis Si, Um Si, or by a name or any other designation, as the learner will
observe in his readings; and sometimes el n'ti is not expressed, but mentally sup
plied and presupposed on account of ' Si, and the like, following.
Obs. 5. From the ancient signif. of the art. the expressions rov xtu toy, ro\ xatl rk,
and the like, are derived ; they correspond with the English this and that, and are
particularly frequent in Demosth.
Obs. 6. The ancient signif. of the art. accounts likewise for the Poetical dat. ru
adverbially used, therefore, on that account, II. . 815. Tiywo-xv tl, Sii,Ty toi xtpfan'ms lei* tTes, therefore I will candidly tell you, which may also he expressed by the
accus. (compare below 131. 7) y< 176. *AXX roiy oitx lytvovro, to xai xXalovga
titjij!*, therefore am J melting in tears.
Obs. 7. But the use of both articles as demonstrative pronouns is far more general
in poetry, especially in Epic poetry, and o, h, to, in Homer, (excepting the instances,
in which to, rot, &c. stand for S, h, &c. according to 75. Obs. 2.) are almost every
where to be taken in this sense. To be convinced of this, we need only to look at
the following passages, II. a. 340. 1.399. i-715. .407. Od. i. 106., which read super
ficially appear to have the usual prosaic art.; but the attentive reader, who does
not know of any such art. in Homer, very soon perceives from the context that in
all these passages, and many similar, it is the demonstrative pronoun; the demonstra
tive power of which, however, may be dispensed with here, and is therefore weak
ened. In but few passages this little word denotes an object merely as well known
and distinguished, or as very much present to the mind of the Poet, or where the
demonstrative power really is so weakened, that its dwindling into the true Attic
art. becomes obvious, (11. . 167. 412. p. 289.)But we must be particularly on
y 2
324
A GUF.EK GRAMMAR.
our piinrd against taking tliis form for the art., when it U separated from the subst.
by the verb and the whole proposition, as, 'H ftiv a*' ut uvavr uri&vi tralxs MUt'lgi* 1
for here n as a demonstrative pronoun is to be rendered by she, whose name is men
tioned after in the Poetical way, thus she spoke, and departed, the swift-footed Iris.
This is proved by those passages, in which the real pronoun J, (Jo him,) is followed
in the same way by the subst., ex. gr. Od. . 108.Thus even in Homer this sulst.
nature of i, i, to, apparently raises an adj. to a noun subst., ex. gr. 11. f. 80. ri
the bravest, u. 33. S y\^ui,theold (man,) and frequently ci IXXu, tccXXk. In all these
instances 1, fi, to, as subst. has its adj. along with it, and the sense properly is, him
the bravest, he the old (man,) those, the others, that, the other. But here too the pro
noun demonstrative, as it may be dispensed with, is often weakened, and its dwindling
into the usual article very evident.
127.PronounsAdj. was.
1. The pronouns demonstrative olros and oSe are sometimes em
ployed instead of adverbs of place ; ex. gr. Plato Rep. 1. (in the
beginning,) 'Hgoptrjv onou sir), outossQw, ovfy^tv vqoaeqxsra'> I asked
where he was ; there he comes, said the other, behind you. The
demonstrative oSt is chiefly used in this manner by Poets, (Od. a..
185.
367.) and in particular very frequently by Tragic Poets,
(Schaef. Meletem. 77.)
2. The three principal signif. of the pronoun airos, ( 75. 2.)
must be carefully discriminated.
I. It signifies self,
a. when it belongs to another noun, so as to be in apposition
with it, that is to say either behind it, or even before the
article, ex. gr. MaXXov touto ^>o/3ou/Aai r> fbv Gavarov avrov,
I fear this more than death itself; Kvron tov /SauiXsa ditoxT6~vai efioukm, he wanted to put to death the king himself.
b. when, the pronoun personal being omitted as sufficiently
known from the context, it stands for I myself, he himself.
In that case it is chiefly in the nomin., ex. gr. euros cipr),
he himself said it ; Tcx^yivoix-nv uinos, I myself got there ;
it is used in the oblique cases only, when the sentence
begins with them, ex. gr. ccutov yxp eISov, for I saw him
myself.
II. It is employed instead of the pronoun personal of the
3 pers., but merely in the oblique cases, as in English him, her,
it, to him, &c. (in Latin eum, &c.) In this sense it can come
only after other words of the sentence or proposition, ex. gr.
E'Saixsv auroTs to Ttvq, he gave fire to them ; ou% iupaxxs avrov ;
have you not seen him ? To $ioxs Aivir*) eSxsv, ZxiTvos $<= vt<i
SYNTAX.
325
xaS-nXaaev, he gave the skin to JEeles, but the latter vailed it up.
See also 7.
III. It means the same, when it is immediately preceded by
the article ; ex. gr. 6 airos avr/g, the same man ; exiXsvtn to avro
(or recvri) woieTv, he ordered him to do the same. (See its con
struction with the dat. below 133. 2.)
! Obs. 1. Hence il follows that the nomin. aires, &c. never signifies he alone, &c. But
under the second head must also be ranked those instances, in which the subject,
according to the Greek construction, is stated in an oblique case, especially in the
gen. absolute, and with an infin. in the accut. ; the oblique cases of aires must then
be rendered by he, she, it, ex. gr. ltrj*u/tfwf Havre**, hut as they rushed in ; ptm\
raura aX9s~> aire*, that after this HE departed; Soph. Philoct. 777- (pray) ftrj roi
yiv'iffSoti srsXvernet aira, (viz. ret r'e\a, the bow,) that IT be not troublesome to you.
Obs. 2. The Kpic Poets also employ aires without the article, for i aires and
sometimes it is used even in prose for fuives, alone, ex. gr. aire) yi^ \e-fin, for we are
alone; the English we are by ourselves, abra ravol rm ve^me^at, to observe only what
is before your feet, Xenoph. Laeed. 3, 5.
3. The pronoun auras loses its emphasis in the reflective pro
nouns iixauTov, asavrov, &c. ( 75. 3. :) i5tov al meaus thyself,
but aeavr\ simply thee as a reflective pronoun, (which, however,
in English is expressed with self,) ex. gr. e&i^e axvrh, (in French
barely accoulume-toi, but in English accustom thyself.) Thus
the pronoun reflective of the 3 pers. answers to the Latin se, and
like this, it is also used when it refers to the first subject of two
connected propositions, where we still say him in English ; ex. gr.
No/xi'ei rous noXtras unr^srsiv exvrai, he thinks his fellow citizens
are subject to him. But in this last case it may also be simply
air\ or , (o5, &c. aifsis, aipHs, &c.) In the good Attic prose the
latter pronoun used in this way is altogether confined to the reflec
tive signif. (see 72. Obs. 1.) The choice between the three,
(ixvrov, abrhv, %,) was regulated, as iu many other instances, by
distinctness, emphasis, and euphony.
Obs. 3. The Attics use !, &c, in this combination chiefly 1.) when there is no em
phasis, and when it would be the enclitic /a in the 1 pers., Plato Iiep. 1. (i'hiV.)
Kartlay nftas HeX'ifAap%es Ix'o.ivn i^a/ievra roi -ratia viftftuiai t xtMorai, he bid the
slave tell us to wait for him ; in the same way we have , Xen. Anab. 3, 1, 5. Plato
l'hcedo. p. 117. Prolog. 310. rtfe,*, Xenoph. Hell. 5, 4, 11. &c. But 2.) when, in
a speech alluded to in sermone oblijuo, the speaker himself is mentioned, this pro
noun is frequently used in opposite propositions and the like, entirely as i/ii. See,
for instance, Plato Iiep. 10. p. G17- where e-fas, eS, !, occur in this way.The sing.
of this form is altogether very rare with the Attic Writers, but the pi. was familiar
to them both ways ; they have even the nomin. e-ftTs, when in a quoted speech or
opinion, the speakers, or those who give their opinion, are themselves the subject,
ex.gr. Xen. Anab. 7, 5, 5. Aiyuv ix'iXlvev, on oio*iy ay tjrTov fftyits ayayonv rny rtevrmf,
they bid them say that they would lead the army on equally well. Iu this case aire)
326
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
might be used, but it would rather signify they themselves : in the ting., howevert
nothing but xirii can be used in this case both for he and he himself. See about the
nomin. 1 the Note to 72. 3.
Obs. 4. Examples of 1ut or alrsv thus employed are found in Isocr. Paneg. 12.
Oi y.'i (/ Sfarai) 3rr Tiatn raus iBXnreig ixvrZv (rixa wanevwrecs, where ietvrut refers
to the spectators, to which corresponds exactly in the next following sentence, Oi it
( aSAqrau) orxv iiSvpr'Jixffi*. on Tmrif iwi tw f^iri^etf Stuelav rinovfivtf^lTig**,
(formed of the simple !, irft^.) which refers to the combatants : again in Eurip. Hipp.
977- Xenoph. Mem. 1, 2, 52. Plato Phadr. 259. But in many instances of this
kind avrn may also be used, in which case the proposition is stated by the writer as
his own view of the subject. See Exc. X. ad Demosth. Mid.
Obs. 5. The reflective pronouns of the 3 pert, have sometimes the power of a gene
ral reflective pronoun, which stands also for the 1 and 2 pert., as lavriu, itirsS, for
Ifixurtu and axvreu. This has been perfectly ascertained and is acknowledged by
the ancient grammarians, (see Timams with the Note of Ruhnken, p. 92.) and ex
tends likewise to prose ; but the passages occurring in prose-writers are still open
to critical examination. The Attic tenariut is an instance in point, ex. gr. Soph.
CEd. T. 138.
'YTtf yk^ cii^t ruv avevr'tfu
'.\/.>.' aitrit atvrav, tout aorotrxiiu fjLVffos,
for the take of mytelf, for my take. Other Poets go still farther ; not only use rfiTi{ without any distinction of pert, or number in the sense of one's own, but also i,
T, Us, Apoll. partly (like the Latin e) for the pi., and partly as a pronoun reflective
of the 1 and 2 pert, (see Wolf. Proleg. ad Horn. 247-)
4. The pronoun indefinite tit is also used for the German man,
French on, English one, they, people, ex. gr."AvSpaitoii avails-ego*
ovx at Tir tvpoi, one cannot find a more impudent man; even when
it refers to a whole assembly, ex. gr. "HSn ns stt^sikvutco Ixvtov,
now one must distinguish one's self, (every one of you must dis
tinguish himself.) See about the neut. ri, ^ 150. The pronoun
interrog. ris, ri, is also used as in English for an indirect interro
gation : riQojrx y.i ris ewiv, he asked me who J was.
Obs. 6. Hence rlt, ri, is likewise employed with some verbt denoting merely
inquiry or investigation, instead of SW/j, o m, Xen. Anab. 3, 3, 18. "H <wt lowu^wfuBa, tint aiiTut tr'txxtrai n<pii%'mts, if we now inquire or examine ivhich of them have
tlings.'
5. "A\\os without any article is the Latin alius, 'another;'
'Inpos without the article is the same, but denotes a stronger diffe
rence, but 5 erepos always makes a distinction only between two
objects ; it is the Latin alter, ' the other,' see 78. 4. In the pi.
aWot means others, and ol aXXoi the others, ' ceteri;' ol erspoi sup
poses a more distinct separation into two parts, the other party.
The sing, h a\\os denotes a whole exclusively and in opposition
to a definite part : r> aXk-n y^Lpa, the ivhole remaining country,
the rest of the country, all the other parts of the country.
SYNTAX.
327
6. Most pronouns and the adj. nas and a.<nas come either be
fore the article or behind the subst., ex. gr. rovruv rav avo/v, of
these men ; b avrig ovros, this man ; Hum stive ravvnv, he suffered
this punishment; nivrss ol "EXAwer, all the Greeks; ra Sti/aw
airavrt, to the whole people. But seldom and rather emphatically
iras is between the article and subst. ol iravrEs,
re xa! <Woi,
Plato. When <kxs is without an article in the sing., it is com
monly used for exaarot, ex. gr. irat avhp, (the French tout homme,)
every man.
7. The pronouns possessive of the 3 pers. (or, atpere^os,) are
seldom employed ; the genitives of the pronoun avrbs are pre
ferred, ex. gr. ri y^riy-tira avrov, avr-ns, olutuv, his, her, their for
tune. The gen. is also frequently used instead of the pronoun
possessive of the other two persons, but in the sing, merely the
enclitic one, ex. gr. 5 vlis /xoi/. If there be any stress in the idea,
the possessive pronoun must be used ; but if there be a strong
emphasis, liMtvrdu, &c. may be employed.
124. Obs. 1.) See,
for instance, Demosth. Mid. 36. where it occurs twice. Some
times a gen. is added to the pronoun possessive, as an apposition,
ex. gr. li&piti'CpvtH ri hy.i, rov xaxoSa/^ovor, they plunder my
effects, (the effects) of an ill-fated man. But with words expres
sive of constantly relative ideas, as a son, father, friend, master,
the hand, foot, &c. the pronoun possessive never is used, but sup
plied by the article alone.
See about the premised enclitic gen. y.ov, aov, 133. Obs. 4.
$ 128.O/fAe Neuter Adjective.
1. The neuter of all kinds of adj. is used alone without a subst.
or even as a subst. for any indefinite or vague object, and in many
instances it is, as in Latin, in the pi. when we should use the
sing.: eiWe ravra, he said this ; ri xoCKi, (the beauty, the beautiful,
viz. all which is beautiful ;) oils ri avayxaTx SiWvrai woieiv, they
cannot even procure the needful, (the necessary things.) Hence,
ra e/xa, for instance, signifies not only my effects, but also more
indefinitely whatever concerns myself.
2. The neuter in the sing, rather denotes the abstract idea of
objects, ex. gr. to xaXov, the beauty, (the beautiful abstractedly
considered in itself;) to Sstov, the divinity, (any divine nature, of
which we have but an obscure notion;) to rws yvvutxbs JoSAov xal
328
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
329
330
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
331
332
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
dat., ex. gr. I (jive the money to the man, he assured me ok his
benevolence.
4. But languages differ greatly in this respect ; what is ex
pressed in one by one case, is rendered in another language by
another case ; and very frequently one language employs a prep.,
where the other simply uses a case, or some may use either the
prep, or the casus: ex. gr. in English, / gave the letter to him, or
/ gave to him (he letter.
Obs. 1. This must be steadily kept in view to form a correct judgment of the
nstances, where a relation is expressed in Greek by a case, which in the English
and oilier languages requires a prep. These instances are commonly explained, as
if there were a prep, omitted, which formerly governed that case. This may often
explain such a sentence, but it is by no means necessary that such a prep, should
always have been actually employed in that connection, and that it was omitted
only for brevity's sake ; and very often it is not even possible to specify the exact
Greek prep., which in that instance governed precisely that case. It will, therefore,
suffice to bear such a prep, in the mind, and to assume that it is comprised in the
form of the casus. All the three oblique casus are used in Greek in the way stated
in the following Sections.
5. Nothing, however, is more common in the ancient lan
guages, (and it may be considered as one of their fundamental
principles,) than that, whenever the object has already been
named, and the reference to it is abundantly apparent from the
verb itself, (hey do not express either of the two objects, (just as
in other instances they do not express the subject and the pronoun
possessive,) and thus avoid that multiplicity of pronouns, which
greatly obstructs our modern languages. It will be sufficient to
direct the attention of the learner to this particular nature of the
ancient languages with the addition of a] few examples : 'Ev ri
S' at rut tyvXwv zsXeTaroi watv &v$ptxojraTo.i, liraiwvam oi zsoXTtxi, (here
we must mentally supply ra-vrnv before inawovait, Xenoph. Hell.
3, 4, 3.) 'EwayyEiXa/AEVoy tov 'AynatXdou rfa ar^rslxv, (when
Agesilaus offered himself to command the army,) SiSdauiv oi AaxeSai/xovioi (viz. avrcf) ooairegi rrrnati : Athen. 339. *Ov fa '.'fy, Tar
Xiiquf ow dyif-treu (viz. avrov.) But in this, as in all other in
stances, where it produces an emphasis, or harmonious fulness,
the pronouns may be equally well used.
OLs. 2. Another kind of omission of the object is that of the refleeiive 'utvni,
ifiicu<rc>, &c. which may take place or be understood, whenever a verb, which else is
altogether transitive, becomes intrans. in particular combinations, as, for instance,
several compounds of a5.11>, to lead, where the intrans. idea of going is the fundamen
tal meaning, commonly, however, with the accessary idea of going with pomp, or in a
crowd, ex. gr. 'i'v^^i rns
rfttiyems rsii rveamp, he went out of the road, when
SYNTAX.
333
the tyrant approached, (as if it were, moved toward) him.) Such cases belong to Dic
tionaries, and we must remember 1.) not to be too ready with this explanation, and
not to adopt it in prose-writers in particular, but when we are fully convinced that
the phrase in question is really customary ; nor 2.) ought we to consider the omission
of iauriv as necessary in every instance, since in a great many verbt the assumption
of their primitive, immcdiative, and causative signif. (according to 113. 2.) is the
most philosophically correct, ex. gr. in if/up*' to ruth forth, excite.
Obs. 3. Properly it is only the part, of a verb, which can he construed with the
same case, as that verb governs. Subtt. and adj. derived from a verb, convert the
case of the latter into the gen., or necessitate a circumlocution. But we frequently
find in the Attic Writers the accus. as well as dat. of the verb joined to the noun
with a peculiar energy and precision, ex. gr. ixuXsuBnrixii rm, prone to, Si ixari? Jivfuftt, the action ofdistributing to each, Tfls Wftifyi rois
fora display to strangers ;
rk puriuett ffnnrvs, one who meditates on superhuman things, Plato Apol. 2. from
^mti'i/ n, to meditate on ;'Aviizmv ittat iw ys %3tT^a. ti xai trg&ij*a yiyunftiia, not
hearing ofsomething, which had occurred, Plato Alcib. II. 7. (usually utvixmj utai t/.)
The adj. !{<mmi is always construed in this manner, and hence combined with the
verb subtt., it signifies to deny, and, (like ijnj"V3a/,) governs not only the infiu. (i'>si;
situ ToTyirat,') but also the accus., ex. gr. %-xus l\a^vos ifit a *vv Xtyus, Plato Eulhyd.
283.
O'js. 4. Many verbs may be construed either with an object, or in its stead with
another sentence or proposition by means of a conjunction. Sometimes both con
structions are found together with one verb, Plato Gorg.TJ. Kai xfipaT* rxsxrxwdZvraj xai Qt\vt, xtti ovu; etv Zfftv ui T&Mwrttrst Xiyuv, Rep, 6. p. 490. T> ToXXut
ixavuf, iiotrt; rtit pMvlav, xai ert eiiius alrui wiU vytis f^arTU.
131.Accusative.
1. The most natural use of the accus. to denote the proximate
or immediate object of the verb, ( 130. 2.) requires no further
explanation. We will merely state the instances, in which the
Greek deviates in this respect from other languages.
Obs. 1. Individual instances, where the object is in the accut. in one language as
proximate to the verb, and in the other as more remote in the yen. or dat., or con
strued with a prep., can be learned only by practice, and from Dictionaries ; as, for
instance, to imitate a person requires in German {nachahmeii) the dat., while in Greek,
Latin, French, and English, it governs the accus., ex. gr. tufuTrsu r 'H^axXia,
imitatur Herculem ; or when we say in English, he swore by the Gads, the Greek has
Tils Bull S/ism. The following are a few of those Greek verbs, of which the go
vernment differs from that of the same verbs in German: xtXaxiCtn, to flatter,
XavSavuv {rivit,) to be concealed from, atiixuv, to do injustice to, uQtXiiv to be useful to,
[sXan-Tuv, to hurt, uvalfyufxuv (t(v,) to run away from ; all of which govern the
accus. in Greek.
2. Verbs, which properly have no transitive signif., (verba
neutra, intransitiva,) may sometimes be taken in a transitive
sense, and then govern the accus., ex. gr. of piTv, to flotv, you may
say in Greek, al wrr/ai piovn yikct xai /xeXt, while we should say,
331
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
335
33G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
337
to leave off the chace ; ufj-xprtTv o'Sov, (to miss one's way ;)
Siz/pepeiv ruv aXKuv, to differ from the others ; ap%m aya&or
ouSev iiatpipei zwrpbs dya&ov, (see about this ofiSev 131. 7.)
2.) With expressions denoting selection or choice, excep
tion, and in general portion or pari of a whole, consequently,
a.) with adj. and pronouns, when they serve to sepa
rate or distinguish an object from others ; ex. gr, ptovosdv^quvuv, the only one of all men ; oiiStis 'Exkmuv, not one
of the Greeks ; ol pgovi/aoi ruv dvSqunruv, properly the sen
sible part of mankind, i. e. barely sensible people ; ruv
dv&puv rots xaXo'iV jtaya&oTV oupsrurspov S"( &avsiv *> SouX.ei/Eiv.
See also above, 130. 5. the instance, *Ev ri S' ay ruv
tyvhuv, in which of the (different) tribes, i. e. in which
tribe.
Hither belong also naturally all superlatives; ex. gr.
rt y.ty'wn ruv viauv dvaiinx :xmyidruv ssivruv rifj.iura.rav
EffTJV dvvip tyikos avvtros re xgu evvous.
Obs. 2. Just as in the proposition expressed in the pi. u
rZ, it3(*rm, the
genders agree, so they do in the sing., when part of a whole likewise in the ting, is
to be expressed. This part, then, is not in the neut. gender, but in the gender of
the word expressive of the whole in the gen., ex. gr. i nXXh rrjt TliXavmnfu, molt
part or the greatest part of the Peloponnesus ; o nft-tws *ov %f>ovov, half of the time ; and
also with superlatives, ex. gr. h SfShrirn rnt fxi^uit, the most correct investigation,
Plato Crat. 18.
Obs. 3. The phrase ismrxTis mturiZ
you vjere superior to yourself, is likewise
conformable to this rule.
b.) with adverbs of time, and adverbs ofplace, consi
dered as parts of a more extensive time or place, ex. gr.
rqU rns vfJiipas, three times a day ; Swote rov %rovs, at what
time of the year ? zsoX yris dtyixofAviv ; whither on earth have
I got ? (like the Latin ubi terrarum ?) nxvrxyzjni rSr
dyoqai, everywhere in the market ; zsip'pu rrn n'Kixlxs, far
advanced in years.
Obs. 4. Hither belongs also the expression, E/'f D tttutjffnrUst rfifiifinzt, to this
degree of impudence :T^is rmra zai/ev Txeiri rk ^rfiyfiarx, to this crisis are matters
arrived, and the like.
c.) with a limitation to a part or portion, (jt,enari /moi
ruv zsqacyfj.iruv, I have a share in the affairs of the state,
am a partner in the business; and hence in all expressions,
where the idea of a part or share is understood, or can be
supplied, ex. gr. sluxx aoi ruv yjpvuA.iruv, I have given to
you of my money, (viz. some or part of my money,) and
338
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
xxrixyx rris xztyaXrts, (properly I am broken in pari of my
head,) i. e. / have a fracture in the head '.
d.) in verbs denoting eating, drinking, and enjoying in
general, or deriving a benefit from, ivhenever the thing
enjoyed is mentioned; ex. gr. Io-SYeiv x^ewv, to eat meat,
wiveiv vSaros, to drink water, (eo-SVeiv ra xpia, would signify
to eat the meat tip, and wi'vEiy Sitvp might mean to drink
water habitually,' ' to be a water-drinker /') airokavnv twos,
to enjoy something, (French jou'ir de,) &vho~&xi nvos, to
derive benefit from.
3.) The gen. is further used to denote the material or stuff
of which something consists, ex. gr. o-TEpavoj uaxi'v&wv, a gar
land of hyacinths, or made of hyacinths ; ex. gr. Ivor \&ov
zsav TtzirotnTzi, the whole is made of one stone.
4. ) The circumstances or peculiarities, on which things are,
as it were, dependent, are expressed in the gen. Xe'vSov zjoWwv
erav, a tree of many years (standing;)
yip i^iufAaros
tuyakou, for he was of great distinction, of high rank.
5. ) The following kinds of words are generally construed
with the gen. :
1.) Adjectives derived from verbs, have the object of the verb
in the gen., ex. gr. from liriaraSai ri, to understand something,
comes s9rr?iju.aiv rivoy, experienced in a thing ; from E^ra^siv
t, to investigate something, comes E^sraanxos nvos, skilled in
investigating any thing ; oi Wfaxnxol t<2v Sixxlaiv, (from ra
Sixaict.)
The exceptions, when the adj. retains the case of the verb,
are stated above 130. Obs. 3.
2. ) All words denoting plenty or want, worthiness or unworthiness, ex. gr. ^eros- op6j3ou, filled with troubles, full of
tumult ; (A?iv In to tiv (pgovriSoJv :SeXa^ai yl^viij.aruv, to be
in want ofmoney ; aior T(/x?jr, worthy of honor.
Owing to the idea of wanting, needing, Seio-&i in the sense
We may in this way understand many instances of gen., by which a verb refers
rather indefinitely to an object, (Henri, ad tiger. 881.) especially the Homeric
as if it were to run through part of the plain. Thus also the expression
}Uki Ttv *-for<u, to goforwards, onwards, as if it were to go part of the farthermost road,
Xen. Anab. 1, 3, 1. Soph. Aj. 731. with Lobeck's Note But it would be rather
overstraining to explain the Homeric expressions, ex. gr. *t'irS Mtaftoie, vrfirxi
vru^U, as a part or portion, and it is probably more accurate to say of these, and other
similar Poetical expressions, that the gen. in the old language denoted any general
relation, whenever the proximate one was obvious of itself, pretty nearly as is the
case with the prep, **tA and the accus.
SYNTAX.
339
340
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
341
Obt. 8. Sometimes the omission of the word, to which the gen. refers, is very
plain to the understanding, and easily supplied ; ex. gr. in the following expressions :
nun o'uk itnir\is rnQoi, (exactly the French, Cela n'esl pas a"un homme sage,) this is
not the pari, the act of a wise man ;>h txiris utm, not to be every man's business,
(i. e. not to be so easily done;) rut ii/xJy is-iir, it is one of the unjust things, (i.e. sim
ply, it is an injustice.) Hither belong also the instances above, 4. 2. c. d.
Obs. 9. The word >'*, house, is most commonly omitted on putting the name of
the owner or tenant in the gen.; ex.gr. u-'?u..\ us 'AXKifiie&ov, we went to Ahibiades's
{house.) Hence the expression iv Shiv, us Stw, properly in or to the house of Hades,
(i.e. in or to the shades below. )The instances, where the article of the word omitted,
(<,
&c.) is retained, are stated above, 125. 5.
Obs. 10. The omission is not so evident with exclamations ofastonishment or sorrow,
sometimes with an interjection, ex.gr. oif&ai rm xotxuv, alas, what misfortunes ! Z Ztv,
rns rxtsotyias, O Jupiter, what cunning ! and sometimes without, rns rv%ns, 0 fate !
(0 wretched fate!) rUs Ka-^irrirat, " w^at stupidity !
See about the gen. ftto, trsv, &c. before their subst. instead of the dativus commodi,
133. Obs. 4.
133. The Dative.
1. The dat. properly is the opposite of the yen., since it denotes
an approximation. It is pretty nearly the same in Greek as in
English, and comprises like this several relations, which are more
distinctly expressed by the prep, for, towards, to, &c. and require
no explanation, as lowxi rm, to give to one; tyfi^os rm, hostile to
one ; nifota'Sai toIV toi^ois, and the like.
2. But the dat. is used in Greek
1.) with verbs denoting coming together, meeting, oixikw
rivi, to have intercourse with one ; i^iy^a^ai rm, to fight with
one.
2. ) with words, which signify equality, similarity ; ex, gr.
o[aoi6s rm, like one. Hence the dat. is put with
6 auras, the same :
olros Efiv o avros exefaui, this is the same as that, similar to
that.
Obs. 1. Just as we have seen above that with compar. even the indirect object of
the comparison is in the gen., i ubris also takes the dat., when this pronoun simply
refers to a common third object ; ex. gr. rk mirk tiox"
I experience the same us
you ; tivu* etra StiXr,;, xark raiirk, (for rk aura,) rais fyiptrit, to suck the breast as
infants ; Gvtrtvs Kara, rot etvrot xgo'tot 'H^az\ii yitofittos, Theseus, who lived at the same
time as Hercules. But here too ambiguities may arise, as rk airk xiyu \ntltf, I say
th esame to him, or the same as he says.
3. ) with words denoting any action, which has a tendency
to be useful or hurtful, (dativus commodi et incommodi,) see
Obs. 2. 3.
342
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
the proportion instead of the gen. belonging to the subst. ; Herod. 1, 81. 'E) <rns
apifyis 3> eft *xSlv* r> pwiit 1 them, instead of their mother sat on the waggon. Hence
there is sometimes a real gen., as if it were carelessly put after such a flat. : see Od.
j. 231. 232. And a dat., which does not at all belong to the proposition, is some
times used with words expressive of relationship and kindred, instead of the gen.,
(such as a relation, friend, guest,} Plato Soph. 216. Too %t*v ^n> tiitui y *ruv$tzvoi/iiiv.
Obs. i. But frequently the gen. of a pronoun personal belonging to a subsequent
subst., is used instead of the dalitms commodi or incommodi, Plato Phardo, towards the
end, 'Ey env fixgos iv rois e-xiXtei yivrtrtti, where rev, which belongs to ffKiXttri, stands
instead of rot with the verb.Again, A/ rS fttv av$*s u xurtu irvvBctvovrxi, here pou
has its full signif., but it comes before, because it stands at the same time for /til.
See the Index to Plat. Meno., Sfc. under Genitivus; aud about the dat. with the
pass, the following Section, No. 4.
\M.Of the Verb. The Passive Voice.
1. The influence of the verb in its primitive and simple form,
that is to say in the act. voice, having been sufficiently shown in
what has been observed of the construction of the noun, we have
now only to notice the pass, and the middle voice.
2. The pass, from its nature has as subject in the nomin., what
ever is as object in the accus. with the active voice. The subject
or nomin. of the act. now becomes the object, by which I suffer,
and when this is mentioned with the pass, in Greek, it is generally
done by the help of the prep, viio with the gen. ; b 'A^iUrof ktsivej
tov "Exroga, is in the pass, b "Kxruq xreiysrai irno rov 'AyjXkius,
Hector is killed by Achilles.
3. Instead of u-no the prep, mps likewise with the gen., is fre
quently used ; Trgos- anitrm SteqzirEveoSixi, to be respected by all;
and sometimes mapa, Plato Symp. 175. Ol^at yxp y.E <n<xp aov
cosines usX-nqcah-ni^xt, and 1% especially by the Ionians, Herod.
El' ri o-oi xe^agioYxivov e| e/xou e&wg-nbn, when something agreeable
has been given to you by me ; ibid. To mmSrlv ix. rov av&qos.
4. But very often the pass, is construed with the dat. only,
without any prep. ; Demosth. Oh yap {is iCE^ouaiat litpirmo avroTs ra rr,s nokitas, the affairs of the state were transacted by them
not to their own advantage :Mamv fiixiv nina. Trovsirai.This
construction is most usual with the perf. pass. KaXus xiXtxrzl
aoi, it has been beautifully said by you, i. e. you have beautifully
said.
Obs. 1. The Greeks make a very frequent use of this pass, construction to supply
the per/, act., which in many vrrbs occurs little or not at all, as just now xixi^a,
which would have been required in the above expression ; see 97- Obs. 6.That
this construction is liable to frequent ambiguities, is unquestionable, (trr n
344
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Xta.i*r<u, you have said all f all hat been taid to you ?)but a careful attention to
the context easily removes the ambiguity.
5. According to the general rule it is only the nearest object,
in the accus. with the act. voice, which can become the subject of
the pass., and this rule is strictly observed by the German, Latin,
and other languages. But as many an object, which in Greek
stands with the act. in the gen. or dat., actually is from its nature
its nearest object, or at least can readily be understood as such,
a/AeXtTv Tivor, to be neglectful of one, wirsi/Eiv nvl, to give credit to
one, the Greeks allow themselves to say likewise in the pass, ri
rovrov Trpxy/AccTac ifjkiXciTat viro ruv &e<v, (are neylected by the Gods,)
o \J/Et/jK oil mriverxi, (the liar is not credited,) whilst in German
we must say, to the liar no credit is given, &c.
6. The pass, in Greek may also be construed with an accus.
Whenever the act. (according to 131 . 5.) has two accus., and
the accus. of the person becomes the subject of the pass., the
accus. of the thing continues to be used for the object of the joass. ;
ex. gr. o! irxtSu JiSaoxovrai aoj^oautm, the boys are taught modesty ;
a(paige&is- rv apyjhv, who has had the command taken from him.
7. The two last-mentioned instances are frequently found com
bined in one proposition, so that the dat. of the person, which
stands as the more remote object with the act. becomes the nomin.
of the pass., and the accus. of the act. continues to be the object
of the pass., ex. gr. effiTgeVeiv to? 2,wxpa.rtt rw Siairav, (to entrust
the arbitration to Socrates,) becomes, h "Luxpa-rns ewiTge'irsTai tm
S/aiTav, Eurip. tw 5' ex %sg<Jv ocp^xi^o^xt, she is snatched away
from my hands, Plato Tim. 60. Tb 5e uito nu>s to vorepov max
ii,apirxa^h, this from which all moisture has been withdrawn by
the fire ; Se'Xtoj- iyyeypaix^iyn %v&v)IJmtx :faro -aoKius rr,y nyt/j.ovi'ctv mit'^ivTO :n^oiMfibei/s vti derov EKelpsro to fiftctp, (where xei'^eiv
signifies to tear from :) exkoweij robr otp^aX/x-ovi.
Obs. 2. In some instances belonging to No. 6. the construction of the accus. with
the pass, may also be considered in the way described in 131. 6. where kxtx is
usually supplied; rktTTt/iai rii> xifukti*, lam beaten on the head.In others the
verb, (like the act. according to $ 131 . 3.) governs even as paw. an accus., which con
tains the import of the verb as subtt., to add an additional determination adjectivety j
Ti/ari-iTKi trXnyif r,kkit, he is struck many strokes.Lastly the aor. pass, too fre
quently governs the accus.ia its medial signif. : see 136. 2.
8. The verbal adjectives in reoi and tos are pass, by their
nature, and correspond to the part. pass. The verbal adj. in teo*
conveys the idea of necessity, and corresponds to the Latin part.
SYNTAX.
345
346
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
proceeds from the real active, and that which proceeds from the past, or med.; rutin,
one must convince, from xiiSv, and one must obey, from rti3np.ni.But it is very
remarkable that in Tfirepai, (I turn to, go to,) the aor. 2. past. \r^irr,i forms a par
ticular verbal adj. in this sense r^amr'uy.
35. The Middle Voice.
1. Before we enter on the use of the middle voice, we must first
distinguish its signif. from its form, because the particular mean
ings of the pass, and 7iiiddle voice are not regularly distributed
even among those tenses, which have a double form, and the
middle voice does not always immediately convey a distinct idea
of its form and signif. But with regard to syntax, the Greek
verb called medium or middle voice is a verb, which along with a
pass, form, has a medial signif.
Obs. 1. Hence the aor. pass., which, as we shall presently see, has in many verbt
the medial signif., is in all such instances comprised in the middle voice. For, though
its form, according to the most general analogy, is not a pass., but an act. one, yet it
is completely removed from the act. by its use, and ought to be considered as a real
aor. pass., which, like other tenses of the pass., is again susceptible of the medial
signif.
2. We have seen above 89. 1. that the main signif. of the
medium is reflective, and that this very naturally proceeds from
the pass. A verb has a complete reflective signif., whenever the
subject of that verb is at the same time its nearest object, which,
in the act. stands in the accus. Thus, for instance, of Xouu nua),
I wash any one, the pass, is Xouju-ai, / am washed, and this as
medium means / wash myself or bathe. Again aitayy^a, anay%xi
riva, to strangle, hang one, medium anzyyiahai, duxy^scahai, to
hang one's self;o\tik%u\, anoay/iv, to keep off, medium atnixtabai,
to keep one's self off", abstain from. But it must be remembered
that this first and proper meaning, though apparently the basis of
the use of the middle voice, constitutes a real medium in a very
limited number of such verbs only, as commonly occur in this
reflective sense, viz. besides the above-mentioned verbs, chiefly
those which denote an usual operation on one's own body, like
clothing, cleaning, shaving, brushing, crowning, &c. When the
same relation is to be expressed in any other verb, it can be done
only by means of the reflective pronoun i/uavrbv, ia.vrov, &c,
3. The reflective sense may very often easily be conceived as
a new simple meaning, that is to say, as not reflected on the sub
ject ; oriWtiv, to send, ariKKeabxi properly to send one's self to
some place, i.e, to travel, and thus the medium in several verbs,
SYNTAX.
347
348
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
propose laws, (said of a state, which gives to itself its own laws, or of a ruler who sub
mits to his own taws.) This difference, however, is not always strictly observed by
the Greek Writers.
6. Thus the most common signif. of the medium is that of the
act., with the addition that the action is for the speaker or agent
himself. And a verb, which has two accus. in the act., may retain
both in the middle voice ; aWw <te rovro, I ask this of you, (leaving
it undetermined whether it be for me, or for another person,) but
aiTovixal <te rovro, (positively,) I request this of you for myself.
7. In general any distant reference of the action of the verb to
the subject may be expressed by the medium; InoxtTivw, I con
duct the water up by means of pipes, iitoy^revo^oLi, I draw to
myself; xXaisiv ra ttabn twos, to bewail the sufferings of any one,
exXavadf^w to. nxSv), I bewailed my sufferings ; ov/x^Mt^oy xoieToSxI
rtva, to make an ally or confederate of any one, and the like ;
xaraarriaa^ai QvXxxas, to place guards over one's own effects ;
ai'gEiv n, to lift something up, ai'gEff&ai n, to lift up something icith
the vieto to keep it ; iuqlma>, I find, Ei5giVxo/u.ai, / find for my own
me, i. e. / get, (' nanciscor.')
8. Another kind of reflective action is tohen something is done
to me or for me by my orders, which is expressed in English by
the verb ' to get,' ' to get a thing done.' Thus xsiponxi signifies
I shave myself, but also I get myself shaved, the pass, xapwai
refers only to a state of passiveness, ' to be shorn,' like a sheep.
Here too the more remote relation occurs ; itdparfotiMti rpivE^av,
I get a table set before me ; fua^ow, I let out for hire, (HKj&oC/xai rt,
J hirefor myself; SiSa|a7&ai u'tov, to get one's son taught ; xara5<xa'ffai rivet, to condemn one, xoLTtSixotaxwt aurov, as it were, / have
<jot him condemned to my advantage, i. e. I had him cast, I won
a law-suit against him. But we also meet with a medium of this
kind even without any reference to the subject, when it ought to
be rendered simply by the infin. act. with the verb * to cause' or
' to get;' Cyrop. I, 4, 18. where it is said that the young Cyrus
took the arms, a o vaicnos iittnomro, which his grandfather had got
made. Hence n^afcuw, I go as ambassador, v^eo-fieuofjixi, I send
ambassadors.
06s. 4. The above instances are sufficient to give a general idea of the refteetive
power of the middle voice, and to shew that the nature of the relation to the sub
ject always is determined by the nature of the verb, and by the context, which must
be learned by practice and comparison. But it must be observed that the relation
to the subject frequently is very remote and weak, so that its designation might be
omitted without impairing the sense, especially when it is pointed out by the nature
SYNTAX.
349
of the verb itself ; and in some verba and individual instances, the relation has com
pletely vanished ; ex.gr. Hut and the Poetical MirSai are exactly the same, and so
are in prose kartQtutm and ofToQatmrSxi, to manifest, prove; vaptxtiv and Tcti%iffett,
to afford. The medium is also often used to express some shades of meaning, or in
combination with collateral signif., as in mirth, to take, alpirSxi, to telect: XstfriTf and
XMjiir&tu. and others. But these instances must be particularly treasured in the
memory, like other peculiarities and anomalies of the language ; this requires a care
ful attention, because a relation may be imperceptible to us, which was instantly
perceived by the Greeks.
Obs. a. But it must not be supposed that there actually is a middle voice for every
verb, which from its nature and signif. is susceptible of one. The best Dictionaries
must be consulted whether a verb has a medium,' and whether this medium has &
particular signif.
Obs. 6. When the more remote relation to the subject is, for the sake of distinct
ness or emphasis, expressed by a pronoun, (like t^uurou, ipls, &c.) the medium, if
there be any, is still employed, though it is not requisite in that case. Thus
Demosth. for instance (i Mid.) says, Viyexftfitci Xulivtu TnZra, I have noted that
down.
Obs. 7. The reflective signif. comprises also the reciprocal. Thus (ItuXiitit signifies
to advise, plan, favktuieSai, to consult together, (but likewise, as usual in the middle
voice, ' to follow one's own counsel,' ' come to a resolution,') iixXvut, to reconcile others,
make peace, ^luXvtffSm, to get reconciled.
Obs. 8. But those mediums, of which there is no active verb, must be considered
simply as deponents of the old pass, form, as li^sfuti, (/ take,)
xirSuvs/ixi,
{I am sensible of,) rifSJ/itiv.
136.
1. We have seen above, 89. that the tenses, which commonly
constitute a real medium, are, the pres., imperf, perf, and plusq.
pass. ; and the fid. and aor. with a particular medial form.
2. With respect to this medial form, it must be observed that it
has nothing whatever to do with the pass, voice in point of signif.
But the aor. pass, has at the same time the signif. of the med. in
many verbs ; xxrecxXiveaSrtii, lo lie down, xoctixX&w, aitxXKirTcff&ai, to get away, iTtrXXa.yrti,irsxrfrrwui, 'JtXayyfirivat, (from
wXa^sT^ai,) Ei3o<x.)!)^vai, 7[epaiai6r,)iat, tyofcrfivuiai, WEitf&rvai, havTiojSSvai, xoi/xn^rivai, o^&r,vai, xaranXaymxi, and others : ex. gr.
Kims T-hv TroXtopKia.v ScnrikXayn, he raised the siege, and marched
off,xoi//.7)07)-n, go to sleep,ri<rx.ri8wv rayy/m, I exercised myself in
that art,xa.mc\iyn tov <J>iXi7T7rov, he was afraid of Philippus.
Obs. 1. The medial form of the aor. in such verbs is obsolete or antiquated ; in
some it has a peculiar signif. : rriAXir&u, to travel, rraXmcu:oriXXiirSai, lo clothe
one's self, and also to sendfor, mikarSm.
Obs. 2. Several of these verbs, of which the signif. is rather pass., as Qtfrue&xt,
xnrtiTXtrrttrSai, might be considered as pass, verbs with an accus. ( 134. 6.) But
such passives always have a third object in the accus., while those, of which we
speak, -have the subject of the act. in the accus., ex. gr. 'o
xetrtrXonm
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
(frightened) xlrn ; if xarirXiynr, in the sense of he leaf frightened, afraid, were a
real pan., it would in this instance be, KktitA>>i Iri rtv tiXlrro,
Obs. 3. When the aor. med. is in use, the aor. pan. may also be used as the pass.
of a peculiar signif. of Ihe med. ; yfafsU, written, from yfafuy, but also accused,
from yfifirBm, ysi^tttSai, to accuse.
Obs. 4. The use of the fut. med., and even in some few cases of the aor. med. in
stead of that of the pais., has been stated above, 113. 5.
3. That the per/, and plusq. pass, exactly like the pres. are the
real per/, and jylusq. med., is unquestionable from a great many
examples, of which we had two in the preceding Section, 8.
tTrsTiolriro, and Obs. 6. yEygapt^aii : Cyrop. 7, 3, 14. 'Axivzxnv
watXai ffageffXEt/aiTfAcVr) aQzrrei ia.vrr,v, having long before provided
herself with a sword, she killed herself, 7, 2, 12. Siawew^ayjAai,
I have obtained, accomplished, Isocr. eiriSfSEiypievor t^v ttwng/av,
having given a specimen of his malice, Xenoph. Symp. 8, 25.
fAE/AKTS-avxEvor x^ov' one tt/'^ ^as 'a&era apiece of land in farm, &c.
See 1 13. Obs, 3. and 4. compared with 97. 5. and 06s. 5.
about the perf. 2. commonly called perf. med.
137. Of the Tenses.
1. As the pres., imperf, perf , plusq., and the fit. of the Greek
verb, agree in the main with the same tenses in other languages,
we shall only elucidate the aor. and the fut. 3. of the pass.
2. To know the aor. we must compare the other proeterites.
The perf. does not narrate at all ; it merely connects what has
happened, as past, with {he present time, {ex. gr. I know it, for I
have seen it,) though this connection is not always expressed, but
the perf. itself conveys the idea of it, / have seen it, i. e. / am one
of those who saw it. Now that I speak it is already over, it has
happened i. The aor. leaves the pres. entirely out of the ques
tion ; it carries us to the past, and relates successively what has
happened'; Hippos b fiaaiXEi/s oSei/ojv eve'tu%e xuvi <p$ou%ov)/ri vexpbv
xxl exiXtuaz puE&" iauTov xo/x/^eiv, and so on. But in the midst of
the narrative it is sometimes necessary to state the circumstances,
It will always be found that the pure perf, such as it has particularly main,
tained itself in Greek, is used only when the consequences of the performed aclion,
or even of its ceasing, are still connected with the present time. He who says,
/ have known it, says at the same time, / do not know it any longer. He who says,
liipvxx, conveys the idea of the house bring still standing ; but if he says,
iKoiiunirtt, he leaves it at least undecided, and he uses the same expression, when he
positively knows that the house is no longer stamlmg.
2 Thus the Greek aor. alone expresses by itself what less copious languages express
by one of the other pratentes, the Latin by the perf, the English by the imperf
SYNTAX.
351
352
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
353
354
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
say, for the relation of momentary occurrences, of which the existence with other
events does not necessarily appear from the context, 3, 28. ixXu, UtXti/i, and fre
quently (ra, if/ufrm, &c.
Obs. S. Whenever any habitual occurrence, or any cvttomary event, is mentioned,
without its being an express narrative, the Greeks frequently have, instead of the
fret., by which it is stated in other languages and even the Greek itself, the aor.
(which then marks an indefinite time in the strictest sense,) Demosth. O/ynlh. 2.
M/xffiv vraiefia <KvijViri xeu iiiXvei -ratm, a small mistake overthrows and destroys all
affaui ; Mid. 21. Oil yi( ttxXnyn rufiemri vlir i^yh*, AXX' i itifjtia, tl%t to Ti*rnrd*M
S#ri inter, i>.>.i ri if' ifyu, where Irri shews how the preceding racirrr.ri is to be
understood. Isocr. J'aneg. 12. (speaking uf the great games and meetings of the
Greeks contrasted with the continual concourse of people at Athens,) A p\t 5xxi
wartiyvfitic 3we TsXXoy %ce*ov cvWiyutrttt Ta%lvt liiXbStiraii, r. Vi x. r. >.. See also Heiud.
ad rial. Phced. 49.
Obs. 6. There is another instance, where the aor. seems to lie used instead of the
pres., viz. the indie. aor. after the question ri
ex. gr. T< six iT<ii^i ; literally,
' why have we not done this ?' i.e. let us do this .' Ti six extras, i. e. tell me instantly.
(See Heind. ad Plat. Oorg. 120.)
Obs. 1. The Greeks obtained a great latitude in the choice of tenses by intro
ducing again the pres. in a narration, whenever the true time is evident from the
context, and not only in whole passages, as is done in French, to. add to the liveli
ness of the narrative, but in the midst of a proposition, nay even iu the midst of
the sentiments of another, which are obliquely introduced ; viz. the pres. indie.
Anub. 1, 3, 14. Elf ii tin, trTgurryaii ix/rdffj XXw vs **XierM,i u ftr) ficvXtrm
Kxio{xf iriyui. The same Author, 1, 7, 10. relates that the army of Cyrus came
to a ditch, and then he immediately adds, T<turn> it rht riftn fimriXtls p'iyi <rui7
ivrt l(vftm<r*s, iru3* ruySuvirat Kvoev x^eeiXnvvavrx. Any other language would
necessarily have used the plusq. twice.
Obs. 8. But some verbs have something in them, which seems to disturb the
succession of the lenses. Especially nxu, I eome, Is constantly to be considered as a
praterite, 1 am come, that is to say, I am here ; Plato Criton. init. "Ajti n xu; <rXa/.
In the same way
properly I go away, stands commonly for lam gone, am off",
whereby the imperf. *xirt has the appearance of the plusq. Again, t/*tii tni has,
besides the signif. of begetting, that of being the parent of any one, whence it must
frequently be understood as a per/. : UtXXtv rt 9>utm> Syn r'usm xxrif.
Obs. 9. And just as there are in every language certain expressions introduced
particularly in daily intercourse, which appear contrary to its general laws, because
their natural origin has been obscured by time, there are in Greek expressions,
which cannot be brought under the rules stated about the use of the tenses ; they
must be remembered without disturbing the rules derived from the agreement of
the language in all the rest. Hither belong the h (x instead of the pres. in argu
mentative observations. See Heind. ad Plat. Phtrd. 36. originally probably, ' thus it
always was, (and is still,). . .and I observed it not,' and farther in conversation some
isolated aor. 1 pers. instead of the usual pres. as nrSxi, \wr,nm, to express the decided
sensation or feeling attendant on the action. See Herm. ad fig. 102. and Buttm.'s
Mote to Soph. Pkiioct. 1289. 1314. See also the Epic irXir in the Anom. v'tXtu
Obs. 10. The circumstance, that the pres. and imperf. constantly denote a duration
without completion, has given birth to the custom, by which several verbs, of which
the action is only completed through the concurrence of another individual, as one'*
giving by another accepting, one's sending away by another going away, are used in
those tenses merely of one part of the action, or as is said de conutu, (which expres
SYNTAX.
lion, however, is neither accurate, nor sufficient,) Herod. 7) 221. Asmiin: pi(<ff lm,
(here tantamount to m according to Obs. 7.) <r} pixiriv imn'/itrtir, 'list in ttmuiiXnrsii
ffQtj 0 St ckroTtpTifiive; eturos fitv tux arriXiiri, (forsook him no/,) ran il Krouiai^rt^rs/t^t,
where the last aor. forms the antithesis or contrast to the preceding pres. Thus
Viivei, iiiitu, must frequently be rendered by offering ; z?u'3ti is properly only suadet,
not pertuadet. Consult the examples stated in the Index to Demosth. Mid. sub voce
Prasens.
Obs. 1 1 . The per/, has also a conj. and opt., and the future has an optative, which
are really used, whenever that kind of uncertainty or contingency, which is peculiar
to these moods, (see} 139.) agrees with the time of these tenses. For instance, E"9i
vits titixnm, OA that my ion had conquered .' 1" mte uViXuXi/duH, if (by cAance) some
had entered, ti^rtv Srt r&i h^ioa. r^irri, he said that he should come the third day. But
the moods of the pres. and of the aor. assisted by the context being sufficient in most
of these instances, and the indie, being also very frequently employed in sermone
obliquo, (compare Obs. 70 the former are used only for the sake of distinctness, and
therefore require no particular elucidation here. And even then the periphrastic
form, ex.gr. mfiinxu! Z and tint is generally preferred to the conj. and opt. perf^
ex. gr. vifikr.xii; Z and wish. The imper. perf. occurs in its principal 2 pert, chiefly
in such verbs only, of which the perf. has the signif. of the pres., as xixfjifcSi, xix'f
pin, (see the Anom. %u<rxv,) fti^ntt : the 3 pers. especially of the perf. pass., marks a
conclusive resolution, let it then be done .' and frequently supplies an energetic ex
pression, ex. gr. NJ h rturc rirekftir^u iWur, be it dared, Aristoph. Vesp. 1 129.
mxhivdaSu, be it attempted, i. e. attempt it.
With regard to some other peculiarities in the use of the aor., imperf., and fut.,
see below in the Moods.
138.Futurum 3.
1, The fut. 3. in both form and signif. is properly composed of
the perf. and fut. ; it transfers into futurity what is completely
past and accomplished ; Plato Rep. 6. 'H YoKirdx teXsW xtxoaf/.riairxi, lav 0 roiovros avrm eariuxowp (puXa, ike state will have
been perfectly arranged, (not be arranged, Lat. adornata erit
civitas, not adornabitur.) when it is superintended by such a
governor. Aristoph. Nub. 1436. ilsltw 6/1*0! xexXavosTat, (com
pare 121. 4.) then shall I have wept in vain. The perf. fre
quently denotes a situation ivhich is still continuing, ex. gr. eyyiyga/xju-ai does not mean simply J have been inscribed, but also
/ am inscribed, am on the list. The case is the same with this
fut., Aristoph. Eq. 1371. OiJSslr xztcc anovliai tiTeyyi>ixQno~eT<xit
*AXX' Siantq riv to zsqarov, iyyiypz^zrai, none shall for any consi
deration be transferred from one list to another, but every one
shall continue inscribed as he was at first.
2. Hence this is the proper fut. of such perf. as obtain a par
ticular signif., which may be conceived as that of a pres. ; Ju'Xeiwrai, it is a remnant, XeXei'4/iTai, it will be a remnant, (XeitpSwtTat,
2 A 2
356
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
357
Obs. 1. Seethe exceptions to this rule in Ilerm. ad figer. n. 250. Helnd. ad Plat.
Prolog. 29. But they cannot shake the rule. The same liveliness in narrating,
which, as we bave seen above, introduces the pres. tense into past occurrences, must
also frequently betray the speaker into forgetting that his proposition depends on
time past.
3. And it is for the same reason that the particles and pro
nouns, which in sermone recto are construed with the indie, gene
rally have in sermone obliquo of a narration the opt. : "Hgs-ro
si oirus ex01' he asked whether it were so; e\ei jaoi, 3t w bibs
ps'goi eis ttiv -noKtv, riWEg bptom, &c. (See the exception in 137.
OAs. 7.)
4. The conjunction titois, when it refers to the fut., has either
the conj. or the fut. indie. and retains them even in connection
with time past, Thuc. 2, 3. HuveXeVovtootra/s i^ft lii tZv bluv
(favepol umv litres, 3, 4. "Eirgstvabii otzus Tir /Sori&Eist vOfiy Hley
managed so that assistance should arrive ; 1, 65, Ki/vE/3oi/Xt/Ev ovra>
TtoieTv, few? b airos &vTrjj7i ^e etdvised to do this that the provi
sions might be sufficient. The case is the same with the strength
ened negation ov ixri in every sense, ( 148. Obs. 6.) ex. gr. in a
request, Eurip. Med. 1151. ov
oW/aevt)* saei <pl\ois, be not illaffected to your friends, I pray ; Soph. El. 1035. *AXX' ovwot e
e/xov ye iJ.ii ixtiSris toSe, you shall never learn that from me1.
Obs. 2. The conj. may, however, become an opt. in a narration, as with ",
Xenoph. Laced. 2, 2. "E'it/xiv hlvtv pMrriyt^o^ous, *V*f Tip.u^o!ti (t(Js iraf3f,) ti Sim.
See also the example below, 06. 3.
5. An accurate knowledge of the two particles e! and at is
highly necessary for the proper use of the moods. These par
ticles are variously employed, either singly or in compounds.
6. The conjunction si has two principal meanings, if and
whether. Correct Writers construe it in both signif. with the
1 Compare the Note below to Obs. 8.
* In consequence of remarks, which were however of too narrow a compass,
Dawes bad laid down as a rule that the particles ins and ei fib never are construed
in good Attic Writers with the conj. aor. 1. act. and med., but constantly with the
fut. indie. This rule was found to be frequently confirmed by MSS., and in conse
quence many passages have been altered in modern editions even without the au
thority of any Codex, the alteration being but trifling, rji into rut, mf.it into n/itr,
&c. But it was soon discovered that there would be no end to correcting, and that
there are passages, which arc not so easily mended. Hermann and others have
raised considerable doubts against Dawes' rule. The employment of the conj. aor.
lias unquestionably been owing to the necessity of expressing completion : Eur. Troad.
445. strut ytifitwp.tf)x, Plato Rep. 6'09. Ov ya^ to yi ayaScrfiwrsri n a-'xaXir^. And 1 so
far agree with Dawes, that I think that the con;', aor. 2. at least was employed with
a kind of predilection, and that, where there was not any such tense, the/W. of the
indie, was used preferably to the conj. aor. 1.
358
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
indie, and opt. only, not with the conj. ; excepting, however, the
Epics and the non-Attic Poets.
7. The particle av, (instead of which the Epics also use the
enclitic xev or xe, which has exactly the same signif..) may some
times be rendered by the English by chance, but cannot be fully
translated in any language. It gives to the proposition a shade
of uncertainty and bare possibility, which partly modifies, and
partly strengthens the conj. and opt., but influences likewise the
indie, and other verbal forms, (except in most instances the pres.
and per/.) This particle always comes after one or a few
words, and thereby distinguishes itself from av, the abbreviation
of eav, of which we are going to speak immediately.
8. The particle av is annexed to all pronouns relative, and to
certain particles, with some of which it forms but one word, as
especially, oteoVav, eweiS^EWEiSav, and with tl it makes liv,
which is abbreviated into the perfectly synonymous ojv or av.s
The Epics combine the above words likewise with xe, 8te xev, &c,
and instead of lav they have also ti xev, (or al xev.) The addition
of av to all these words, gives to them the idea of a bare possi
bility ; they are generally construed with the conj., and the pro
positions, when connected with the time past, or an oblique
speech, either remain unaltered, or the simple words, (e<, ote,
EffsiS'r), or, tarts, ouor, &c.) supply their place with the opt. ; napigo/axi sa'v ti Se'ti :<pn irxpiaeaSoii e" ti Jeoi or Se^^oi. Thus in the
example quoted above Obs. 2. we have ote Seoi, instead of oVav Ji-n,
which would be required in a direct speech.
Oii. 3. The Epics have also the conj. with tl, and the opt. with the particles com
bined with it or 1, Oil. n. 315. But there are instances in the Attic Writers, where
particlei and pronouns relative combined with St have the opt. in a dependent sen
tence without throwing their it off : Cgrop. 5, 5. mil. 'ZrirnkXtt airy
!*n
rvufioukts ylytura, a, <ri av "itxem vpetrruv, he sent word to him to come to advise what
might appear to him proper to be done. See also Demosth. Mid. 5. not. 2. and cm in
.flSsch. Pers. 448. The passages, however, are scarce, and particular attention must
be paid to see whether the opt. is not used in one of its peculiar senses, viz. 1. with
the idea of the action of the past having been repeated, see below Obs. 6. for this
cpt.it not altered by it, see the examples in Mattbise's Greek Grammar. ( 521. 06*.
1. p. 715. Engl. Transl. 4th ed.) 2. when the opt. with it forms the ful. conditional,
(which we shall see below, text 13.) as in Plato Eulhyd. 9. 'Tpus Irri, {' St it
xikXirrd tis aM fiiSei, here ftaSsi St belong together, might or could learn.
9. The Greek has an uncommon variety of expression in hypo8 See j 117. 2. As tliis| shortened i< is generally placed like ii at the head of a
sentence, it prevents its being mistaken for the radical particle it.
SYNTAX.
359
3G0
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
361
see that ; d\\' ovv eYmi tu av, but some one might say, iWs- ay ouv
rives iirmit-nauzv rots eipnpiroir, some perhaps may find fault with
what has been said.Hence it comes that, owing to that modesty
or moderation peculiar to the Attic Writers, this construction is
used for the most positive assertions and predictions ; Ou yi% av
ra ye nSy yeyevnueva tti vuvl jOior&eip. xuXuaai oW/i&eitipc.ev, for we
probably can no longer hinder what has been done, by giving now
our assistance ; Owe av Qevyois, you will not flee : and this expres
sion is very commonly employed for the usual fut. The case is
the same with the imper. Xiyoa av for \tye.
14. Any conditional contingent, or uncertain expression, or any
thought, Avhich is expressed hypothetically, may, owing to its con
struction, be rendered in Greek by the infin. and the part, with
the addition of av. This advantage of imparting the power of the
opt. or conj. to the part, and infin. gives to the Greek a great
superiority over all known languages ; Oi'ovrai dvocfAax^ccaiat <*v
gviaiaxxous TrpovXafiovres, they think that they should repair their
defeat, if they had allies, {iyatAa%eaai.tr' av, el Xifiotev,)Tk\x
aiunZ, noW' aveyuiv eliretv, while I have yet much to say, whilst
I could yet say a great deal more; Herod. 7, 139. Nyv Se 'Ab-nvzious civ rts \{yojv, {one who might say,) aurr^as yeviahai r'rts
'EXKaSos oux. av \%aix.aqTot : Plato Crilon. 9. Ol paSiais dnoxrivvuvrer xat dv*$iaax.iiA.evoi y av, el oioi r r\aav, who lightly put to
death, and would probably restore again to life, if they bu t could,
(avE/SiwirxovT av.) This addition of av often gives the sense of an
infin. and past fut. ; Demosth. Phil. 1. Oux. euriv eva avSg* av
o^uYr&rivai nore inxvrz rxvra wga^ai, it is not to be supposed that
any man should ever be able to perform all this, (SuvriSwvai itare
without av would allude to time past.) See also the example
from Isocr. below 144. 4. a. This is the usual way of express
ing the fut. after ofto-9ai, eXirifytv, and the like.
Obt. 4. The place of it in the sentence depends entirely on euphony, or also on
the intention of rendering the uncertainty sensible cither a little sooner, or a little
later. This requires particular attention, that the it may always be referred to the
word, to which it belongs according to the context ; Plato Phadon. 116". Olfi*i it,
is
Aiya*, *r/V, here the it belongs to the opt. wtwt, thus, ttfuu, iremt it, is \yi
\tyu. The case is the same with, 'Eisxu it b/ut hilvf rr 3ja<r;oa/, where it be
longs to the infin., it appeared to ut that he would gladly perform all, (iiar^i^utt it :)
Demosth. Olynth. 1, VA. Ti alt it tis tl-rai rctvrx X'tyus bftiit tvt ; for, Tj alt, iur tis
it, Tuvra X. b. t., where, if there were the requisite comma after ovt, it would seem
to be employed instead of tit, which, however, cannot govern the opt. : Plato Tim.
3G2
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
p. 2G. 6. Outt it tit ii ionti/ttit ixettret it fi*r,fity trmXn XafZttt, whether / could, 11 J*
mlfitit it, viz. if I were asked ; Demosth. c. Aristocr. 680. 'Ex rtvrtv rill ^vflr/ixnt
xvgwS'v/Tae it, ii fin it hft-Bti, tiUxritrs d /3riXiiV, i.e. 11 r Tf/nQurfttclxtiguSri, (without by,
compare above 10.) ! (SxriXtTi iiUxntr' J, (would be injured or wronged.) uptn ii tiftit,
(if it were not for us, see J 150.) In a complicated proposition it is often repeated
two or three times without any additional strength to the sense, merely to render
the limitation of the proposition more sensible, several parts of the assertion being
affected by it at the same time. See Heind. at/ Plat. Pliadr. 130. Herm. ad Figer.
n. 283.
Obs. 5. The part, it frequently gives to the indie, the signif. of being habitual, cus
tomary ; Demosth. pro Cor. 301. None of the ancient orators has been of such a
various influence, aAX* e pit y^a^ut ovx it itrf'iefiivit, i Si zoio-frii.wv vx it iy^tttyt, it
was not usualfor him, who proposed laws, to be an ambassador, and versa vice*.
Obs. G. Another particular use of the opt. Is that of being employed in the first
part of a proposition instead of the indie, of the past for something, which had hap
pened several times ; Ots fait liei ti/raxrvs xai rm^eti letras, T^ietXauvuit auroie, olrmt
iTi sfaira, *i (tii friStin\rr\tu, which he saw, i.e. as often as he saw any, to which
the itii <xfonrt must be joined ; Il.fi. 108. "O* 3' &Z ijpeu r avi^x i3i, (itt*tra r ipiv(H, whatever individual of the people he saw, i.e. every man as often as he saw one;
iX{TTi> i SJ<m xbri, he did whatever every time appeared proper to him;Cyrop.
1) 4, 3. Or lr({*T/T, rx^u xxix(tvxrt, he every time replied quichly to whatever he
was asked; Antipho, "ttrifSn ii%it hrir it atrru iixrtiflu, he had an upper chamber,
whenever (as often as) he stayed in town. See also above Obs. 3. The uncertainty of
the opt. in gucli cases serves merely to prevent being understood as speaking posi
tively ; hence when the circumstance has still its duration in the present time, the
conj. is used. See the two corresponding examples in Herm. ad figer. p. 900.
Obs. 7. The conj. is never used alone in Greek, but in the 1 pers. by way of
encouragement, as 1-pu, let us go, (to which the 2 and 3 pers. opt. correspond ;)
and also in the sing., when the verb is generally preceded by tp'tti, well then! Kurip.
Hipp. 865. f'tfi1i, well then ! I will see, and in doubtful questions partly with,
and partly without being preceded by fitiku or 9i\Hf, (will you.) BsiiXn olt e-xorafttt,
will you that we examine f Tlfoiy /Wxti xo%a>[jtxi ; by what will you have me to begin ?
Anacr. Ti e-oi 3i?.ns Tamrst ; what will you have me do tri *row\ what shall I do?
rjj fieU ; wot rca.Tbip.cti ; whither shall I go t which way shall I turn? itrai ovt am tI
x"ti; shall I tell yuu the cause t (Plato Theml. 17-) tot axiom aid,;, must I hear
again ? (Iiucian Dial. Murt. 30, 1.) These examples are to prevent mistaking
the 1 pers. conj. aor. 1. for the ful., which the sense of these phrases approximates;
hence we sometimes meet with both tenses together ; eje.gr. urip./u. 758. utru/m
n ciyufut; H ti iexrt/ut. Such instances do not readily occur in the 2 and 3 pers.,
but in general expressions, such as *o7 tii Sxiri : whither is one to go ? Demosth. Mid.
10. 'Oroiouros xinox ftt] it ilxnt ; is such a man not to be punished ?
Obs. 8. In Homer there is a still greater relationship between the conj. aor. and
the fut. ; he freely uses the conj. of the aor. for the real fat., II. a. 262. Ob yie <r
rfvi fist ititxs, mil ftu/uu. In several cases of this kiud these conj. may indeed be
considered as doubtful fut. (I probably may not see any more,) and the origin of this
usage may thus be explained. But this conj. is in many passages in the midst of the
most decided fut., Od. /*. 383. iorc/cxi lis 'Alius, xxi ir nmnm fxuni. Hence also
with the shortening of the long vowel, (see Obs. V. 15. to J 103.) which sometimes
5 Compare also Soph. Philoct. 29002. Aristoph. Pac. 640. Anab. 1, 5, 2. Sehn.
SYNTAX.
3G3
gives rise to a form corresponding to the indie,fut. and pre*.; //. 52931ixx'
wrot St* rvxri Qt/k*%0fii9,
iliy.iaifjtiv ezi/v "A^ija8.
Obs. 0. There are some other peculiarities on this head, at which we merely hint,
by remarking in general
1.) that the pari, ii is also frequently omitted, whereby a mood sometimes gets
into a construction, to which it is -a stranger, and the opt. in particular is
used alone instead of the fut. conditional, and the imperf. instead of the suppotitious pret. See Heind. ad Plat. Goig. 37. Schsefer Melet. 55. Ind. in
Plat. Mem. &c. V. t.
2.) that in Homer and the Epic Poets the distinction between these moods is
not yet so marked ; they are frequently confounded one with the other in
many of the above-mentioned expressions. The conj. often is construed with
t Instead of the opt. with it for both the futures simple and conditional, (//.
. 184.)
140. Of the Infinitive.
1. The infin. is used in Greek in all the instances where it is
used in Latin, and where we often have in German and Engl, the
conjunction (dasz,) that, (expressed or understood,) or the par
ticle (zu,) to, with the infin.
2. The Greek infin. is also frequently used, where the Latin
language has ad with the gerund or participle in dus to denote a
jmrposc, object, or destination ; "ESwxsv auro SovKoj tpoprtaai, he gave
it to a slave to carry ; b avSfwwor iriQuxi tpiteTv, man is born to love ;
ntxQiyjii 1/jLdcvrov ipurfv, I produce myself to be examined ; 'iirmv
waqiifoe ra oivtipi dvafi-nvoci!*.$ov iSsiv as : Anab. 2, 2, 3. 'E/xo!
&fo/xhci) livxi Effl tov ftaaihia. ovk lylyviro ra. hqi, when I sacrificed
to march against the king, (ivhen I made the usual sacrifice before
the march,) the sacrifice was not auspicious, and farther on, 'Is'vai
Se traqai rovs K.vpov <pl\ous, it&vu xotka. n/ji.Tv ra) lepo) r!v, but to go to
the friends of Cyrus, (to join the friends,) the sacrifice was very
propitious to us ; taken from the common expression, txaXXifyei
ravrx mpirrui, Herod. 6, 76.
3. Allied to this is the infin., which is construed with an adj.
* I take this opportunity to adopt Hermann's sagacious remark, that the Greek
future rather comes from the aor. than the latter from the former, and I clearly
trace this derivation in Homer's way of using these tenses. The usual Greek fut.
is unquestionably nothing but the conj. of the aor., which it approximates in both
forms. A doubting prediction, which is the most natural, gradually became a de
termined one, through which this conj. became an indie. There is, I think, a ves
tige of this primitive identity in the double construction of the particles %<rvs and fiM
with the conj. and fut.; and the Latin confirms this theory by the almost per.
feet agreement of the fut. of the third conjugation with the conjunctive. But this
remark ought not to do away with the grammatical derivation of the aor. from the
fut. i this has greater facility and uniformity in its favor, and all grammatical de
rivations, as we have frequently observed, are merely practical.
364
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
365
'A&nva eppt^e tow au\ous Sia to twv o\J>iv avrfif woieTv aixoqtpov,
Minerva threw the flute away {for its rendering her face ugly,)
became it deformed her face.
6. They are besides at liberty to insert subordinate propositions
between the article and its infin. ; To Se, oaa y' ^SeW v \J>i/xr> Si'x6ra.i, TauTx ixavui exttoveiv i$oxif/.afy, but that as much as nature
takes with pleasure, should be sufficiently worked out (by exercise,)
that (is what) he approved of.
Obs. 1. The infin. with the article in the gen., sometimes, but generally only in
whole propositions, denotes a motive, purpose ; Oix isr*\Si, nd /tii itxiir i/aiiit, (not
to seem neglectful.') "Ehjs* is commonly considered as omitted and understood. See
Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 30, and compare 132. 6. I.
Obi. 2. The infin. of some short interpolated expressions may be derived from the
alKjve-mentioned constructions ; ex. gr. from_Text 2. ia-xif UTiTr, to be short. Thus
\/t*1 ItxCt, in my opinion, which infin., though without re, supplies the place of an
accus., (compare 131. G. and Obs. 6.)ixaurat fiiv tvwtrl, va.yxa.Xu; i%u, to hear it
thus, it is excellent. These expressions may also be introduced more or less with
its, "fit yt vTua\ axsvrai, and the like.
141.
1. Whenever the infin. has a subject of its own, the rule is that
this subject is in the accus. This is the case with the infin. with
to, To ecfjfiQrdvetv dvbpujtovi ov Sxv/jLaoToii, that men do err, is not
to be wondered at ; Oi5Sev eirpiy^ri, Six to exE~vov ixvi wagsiVaci, because
the other was not present; OuSinore oft&s ej^ei, (see 150. s'xeiv,)
to xaxui trdaypvToc a/LAuvEd&ai avriSpuvrx xaxus, that ivhen one has
suffered wrongs, one be revenged by returning the evil.
2. The Greeks have, like the Latins, a peculiar construction of
the accus. with the infin.
after verbs, on which another proposition is immediately dependent,
especially after verbs denoting to say, believe, &c. they put the
subject of the dependent proposition in the accus. and its own verb
in the infin., whilst in German and Engl, we use the nomin. with
the con/., or either conj. or indie, with the conjunction, (dasz,)
that ; Ol iA.v$o\6yot <paa\, tov Ovpavov Suvaortvaai vqurov rov tlxvros,
mythologisls say that Uranus first ruled over the universe.
3. But very often the subject of the infin. is not mentioned, if
it be already stated in any way with the first or preceding verb.
This is done not only where other languages do the same, (the
Germ . and Eng. at least, with zu, to, Aioixai aou ttx^xixivay, I intreut
you to stay, Suveiweiv 6/A0X07&/, I confess to have assented,) but also
in general, almost always when the preceding proposition has the
366
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
367
3G8
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obt. 1. From these statement!!, it is obviously incorrect to suppose that the sub
ject of the infin. is a nomin. in expressions like, 'Tsri^in atirit vewm. In all such
instances the subject of the injin. is not expressed ; what is in the nomin., is merely
its modification or determination as here, uut'is i the noun omitted is the subject,
and can be supplied only by a pronoun perianal, which is likewise w anting.
Obt. 2. Whenever the Writers think proper to add the pronoun persona/ itself, it
stands, in spite of the nomin. belonging to the antecedent verb, in the accut. ; at/**,
/t\v Xv(i7y fit, Plato Charm. 45. (Heind. ad Eulhyd. 79.) but it is as seldom done in
Greek, as in Latin. In general, however, it must be borne in remembrance that,
whatever is stated here of the attraction of the infin. and of other peculiarities of
the Greek language, is always subject to the exigencies of emphasis, euphony, and
distinctness. Thus in the following proposition there is yet an accus. after a decided
gen. merely for distinctness' sake: Iaocr. Aitfjttu ifjtut, Juuivtu rih Xtyt/tltiv USuftndfpwf iniAllah. 3, 2, 1. "E)ip twvitt 9r?s$vXM*Ms nwrttf^twmt rvyuuXut <rus f*g*rtirttf, Memor. 1 , 1 , 9. "E<p %u<t, & fCu fLtAttrut trtiCt tittntn el
ftmvdtinn. Here
rut ktifiwtH must be mentally supplied as added to ftaxtn, but for all that the
accut. fixSitrct; is not altered here. Compare below 144. Obs. 5. an almost similar
proposition in the same passage, in which proposition kt&ptwtu is expressed, and the
attraction attended to.
Obt. 3. On the other hand the attraction really is sometimes so strong, that the
express pronoun personal is with the infin. in the nomin.; but I know of no other
instances than where two infin. are dependent on one verb with different subjects,
of which one only is the same with the subject of the first verb. Demosth. Mid. 55.
(p. 579. Reishe,) 'Eui slirS? ifiTt tSrsSrtn, i/uTi 8 tstuirBsu, (here on construing the sen
tence t'u-St must come first alone, which then has the same subject with the second
infin. vtfiurSai,) you think that I am always to contribute, and you always to consume ?
and farther on : Na/ti iifh^S? pit ttrtiptrftsUStti, ?v 3i tvVt <rauffis%ai, but such in
stances belong to the very numerous cases, in which Attic Writers were induced by
a specious analogy to carry any peculiarity of the language beyond the proper bounds
of its nature. Compare Sehaef. ad Soph. Old. R. 958.
Obs. 4. Whenever Tumuli*, rtlStrBu! rm, is followed by a proposition, of which
the subject is the object of the above mentioned verbs, it is also construed in the
infin., and the pronoun alri; is omitted ; Plato Charm. 18. 'O/itnp/ runuus xaxit
xiyut, Pkcedr. 124. Mn <ru9/2tS' nuriii, r'x*>i yoifyui. But whatever belongs to
the omitted word of the subject, is likewise in the attraction ; Cyrop. 3, 3, 24. OiS*
it roureis X-Xivrxutt ip-po'tais utoit.
Obt. 5. The infin. is sometimes used in a quite independent way instead of a wish,
request, command, in the 3 pers. either with the subject in the accut. //. y. 285. T^Zxs
Wiiovtcti, then are the Trojansto give bach, Hesiod, yuju.no* ttrsi^ut, yvfivot St {souruv,
where the subject is to be supposed an indefinite 3 pertonr)iwhich is omitted,
though Virgil has the same recommendation in the 2 pen. ' nudut ara,tere nudus,'
or with the verb being impersonal, Herod. 5, 105. Tfl Ziu ixytvifSat pot 1ASnttttavs
rirmrStu, that I might be allowed. But we have still more frequently the
infin. instead of the imper.
of the 2 pert., and in this case the subject, and what belongs to it, if it be expressed,
always is in the nomin. 11. {. 692. 'AXki eiy T^' 'A^iXii', Su>> iwi twt 'AxtuZi,
EiTtTvPlato Soph. 218. *At 2' SiBot ri Tif fttiMU trttSt ^3tj, ph
ainafBtu toutm,
(then do not impute it to me.) Verbt like hi, uifttari, &c are usually supplied, but it
is better to do without them. See Dorv. Vann. 341. Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 18.
Matthias's Or. Gr. 544. p. 824. Engl. Trans. 4th ed.
Obt'. 6. The infin. with and jvithout t, sometimes serves as an exclamation ex
pressive of surprise : 2i ruura d^ieta, ' that thou couldst do such a thing !' Ti A/*
SYNTAX.
t/tlZut, Sir* mXMiuTn), ' that thou, being ofsuch an age, canst still believe in Jupiter."
Aristopb. Nub. 816.
143.Construction with the Pronoun Relative.
1. The construction with the pronouns relative oV, ovas, oTor, &c.
(of which the construction with the part, is but an abbreviation,)
is not always used by the Greeks for a mere connecting purpose;
the relatives sometimes shew the cause, reason, motive, or any
thing, which might properly be expressed by a conjunction;
seu/Aayov iroieTf, or vifjuv ot/Ssv o\'5W, thou behavest oddly, who
givest to us nothing, i. e. by giving to us nothing ; Herod. Al
'AqysTxi E/xaxasgi^ov rriv fjunrigx, olojv texvwv ex.vpvi'ss, i. e. on toioutojv
t. e. the women of Argos esteemed the mother happy for having
such children. And especially with the conj. or fut. (in the same
way as formerly 7v,) to denote a purpose or utility ; ' H vuvs wqlo-fisis
ayei, o'luep rot atfirepx (ppotacuaw
ktwvtcci, oIr dfAvvovvrxt rovs
dSixovvrxf:
Obs. 1. The pronoun relative is not so frequently used in Greek, as in Latin,
instead of the corresponding demonstrative, and of a connection with what went
before, and probably always is expressive of some emotion, 07 itw isxmtn *le%mn
Tn trokn rifiixnn, Plato Apol. p. 35. and other examples quoted by Matthias, $ 477.
whilst passages like that of Apollod. 1, 1, 3. Kjo> <rr> /tit 'Eriat tannu, it
Anfjinr^et* *a) "Hja*, ft&' as XlXourma km Xlsruivva, where this form simply serves to
vary the connection, belong to a period, when the Greek language had already lost
its purity.Instances, like the following, are somewhat different :T(!x tj.t
cSwxir,
nrnffttrt avrov, here we should say being as much us he had requested of
him.
2. The nature of the construction with the pronoun relative
requires properly that there should be with the first verb a noun,
and with the second the pronoun relative, which refers to it, and
each in the casus, which the proposition demands, to which it
belongs ; Ourdr sfiv b avrtq, ov il^Ei :MeteSo/kev
hzvtojv, oux
Vaqriv :<fri'Xoy ovk z%oj, wtiw ittstvaxi av Suvxlfxnv. But the subst.
of the first verb is frequently omitted, and added to the second
part of the proposition with the pronoun relative in the same
casus ;
OVTOS EflV, OV ElOEf otVOQX,
ovk eViv, Tjvriva oi/x vtf^it aqyjhv, there is no magistracy but
what he has exercised,
and the last sentence is very often put first for the sake of em
phasis :
ov ifJef aiipx, ovrof ify,
2 B
370
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. Here too an
Attraction
takes place, similar to that of the construction with the infin.
When the pronoun relative on account of its verb should be in
the accus., but the noun, to which it refers, is in the gen. or dat.
and is not attended with any pronoun demonstrative, (like q&tos,
exenw,) the pronoun relative is attracted by it, and takes the
same case instead of the accus.:
MtretSiSas ahru rov ui'tou, oSarej avyos s%siy, thou givesl to
him of the bread, which thou hast (thyself,)
where oSweg stands also in the gen. on account of alrov, to which
jt refers, instead of being in the accus. oymp, which the verb t^fiv
required ; again
Eu wgou^egETai toils <pl\ois, oh 'x> he conducts himself well
towards the friends, which he has.
Anab. 1,3, 16, Tw wyE/Acm aririiino^tsv, c3 v Kvgor Sd!, for Sv an
K. J. : Expdrwe //.eyxkm yrffnfj.if.rm, Siv 6 J?i\uv entrtzaniTO aura.
Even when the requisite accus. properly is that of the remote
object, Demos-th. Mid. 35. AUm <Sv av dSitcrdri ns Xapt/3avEiv, of
the expression a aJixoD/xai, by which I am injured.
Obt. 2. The ear being once accustomed to this construction, the pronoun relative
was mostly put in the same case as the pronoun demonstrative, even when the latter
was expressed in the first part of the proposition ; Plato Gvrg. 452. Ol tnftuuty)
vovrm, uv Iwyviru i to uko>.i6i tro/sVaf JTenoph. (Ec. 2. 'Tt* y\ tcvrw, uv rv o*ts<ranu*
*Xi~e ei xiXveptui, which is at the same time an instance of the accut. (iirtrunis,)
which is dependent on the second proposition, being also placed in the attraction.
4. In this instance too the noun frequently is removed from the
first part of the proposition to the second, so that it remains along
with the pronoun relative in the casus, which the word governs, on
which it is dependent :
MfTaoVoW aura, oiireq xvros Xe,y airav '
EJ WgOffpe'gETCtl, oh ejei <p&ots :
iltoKavu, ait tyja aya&cJv :jrJpaii/.etoi ols efffov irc.oard.Tais, i5Sa///.ovEf
%oat, (from %7iT&ai irpoardr'n, to have a leader, patron,) whilst
they had the leaders, whom I mentioned, they were happy. This
1 This form of the proposition as the most perfect is usually considered as the
fundamental one, but through my investigation of the attraction in general, I at
least am arrived at the conviction that this is erroneous : (see $ 151. I ) It was the
omission of the pronoun demomtrative, which alone could be an inducement to con
strue the pronoun re/ative with the preceding word, and thus to round the whole
expression. But when the Attic Writer, to whom this construction was familiar,
still added the pronoun demonstrative for emphasis's sake, we can very easily conceive
that he had no occasion to recur on that account to his original combination.
SYNTAX.
371
372
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
144.Construction with the Participle.
SYNTAX.
373
374
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
375
376
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
377
378
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
parenti keep their children from wicked men, tince {they are convinced) internum
with them it dettructive of virtue; Plato PAtcd. 'EtixO.ivh ^tutixhi <rui>, it fiKtnfietf fityierrtis ourtis fttwiKns '. Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 3. Tarn HtXfSt apiXtZetr, vmg 1* tmJrut aii yiympitout QiXevt, as if no friends were to be made of them.
Obs. 6. Any real impersonal verb, i.e. of those, which have but a mysterious sub
ject, ($ 129. 9. 10.) becomes as casus abtolulut the gen. ting, of the part. ;
o,-,
at (the trumpeter) sounded the trumpet, ilovrot to\>.u, (from iiu srXX, viz. Spfigy,)
at it rained much, Xenoph.
Obs. 1. Those impersonal verbs, or impersonal constructions, where the proposition
dependent on such a verb, (commonly an in/in. or a sentence with Sri, and the like,)
properly is the actual subject of the verb, ( 129. 1 1.) are treated as catut absoluti
in two different ways :
1.) When it is a mere relation of time, it is fhe gen. This happens chiefly
with pats, verbt, denoting to say, announce, declare, and then is the gen. pi.,
(where t3i of t?i may be mentally supplied ;) 'O nijixXSt xit ir) Kki!,
IrayyiXSivrajv oti bohiftrat itits itrtarKisvnr, at it had been announced, (ifyiyyixStt,)
Thuc. 1, 116.
2.) In any other combination we have the accus. neut., Ei;n^i aimit ruftTtut) tb% Hxtvri, they do not come, though they have been told, (ilfnrxi,) to be pre
sent, and this is the case with all verbs commonly called impersonal ; Oik ri pout,
ueriiveu, why do you stay, when you are at liberty, (it is allowed to you,) to go f
(i|$rr;: irufti -riXn, Ui/>a> itxtSr, (viz. l/t\ t-riittu,) I thall go back, because it
seemt good to him, (loxu.) Plato Pheed. 28. Ais recti rt)s t nvrk tifnxtf, is tu
vritv ivTtemn true oiaiv auru plkoi rov rttovTou. Hence it happens that the
part. rti%it, (from Itv-^i; it happened,) is used as adverb, properly since it to
happened, by chance, and consequently also perhaps. Even the adj. ivtttrit, (with
the part. St omitted,) is used thus, Plato Rep. p. 019. Utirrcfttt
ivvotrot aifToTt etpHivat, (viz. ?,) we will contrive that they thall live worse, while
they might have lived better. Herm.orf Viger. n. 214.
Of the Particles.% 146.
1. Adverbs partly have, like the adj., which they resemble, the
noun, to which they refer, in a particular case, 'A%lu>s hfAuv <nokili.wo(jLtv, (we will carry on the war in a manner worthy of our
selves.) They do the same in the compar. and stiperl. ; Madras
TtdvTuv, most of all; Ol ifivnrts run tiSaiptovoiv iJjaXKov iuvxvrxi
ieStetv te xxi xaSevtiitv, (better than the rich,) see 132. 5. 4.
2. Prepositions properly are adv. having a constant reference
to a noun, (while with adverbs, this is only partially the case,)
and merely denoting a certain relation without any other power
or energy. Thus we have particles, which sometimes are mere
adverbs, and sometimes real prepositions. For instance, o^tou and
a/Act both signify together as adverbs; but they frequently are
construed with the dative, (like the kindred prep, abv,) and they
then, as prep., signify together with. Others, and especially the
adverbs of time and place, govern the gen. ; iyyvs, near, eyyvi
rnos, close by one ; %up\s, apart, separately, -/aipis rims, except
SYNTAX.
379
One; Sifca, doubly, apart, Si'x nibs, apart from, i.e. without;
tvSii, straight-forward, euSu twos, in the way to meet one, Lat.
obviam. (see 117. 1.) &c. There is a great difference between
the particle us, 1.) when adverb and conjunction signifying that,
as, &c. of which see 136. ; and 2.) when a prep, signifying to
in answer to the question whither ? but referring constantly to
persons', ElfrijX&ev diis eft,e, he came in to me, atriy^-naoLi us tov
fiao-i\ix, they went, (journeyed,) to the king.
3. There are adverbs referring to verbs and whole propositions,
which serve to connect two sentences, especially the relative;
ITagsVofAat oTroTa Ke\evaeis, I shall be there, whenever you bid me.
This is the origin of conjunctions ; any connecting particle should
properly be called a conjunction, especially when it has on (he
verb an influence similar to that of the preposition on the noun,
and requires one of the dependent moods according to circum
stances. Thus
or ms'xs'j **>* and sari, (both in the sense of
until, and in that of so long as,) govern the conj. or opt., when
there is any uncertainty, and when there is none, the indie. Yleqt(/.etu, eats av or f^ty^pis av eX&ti, {until he comes ;) Ylolnaov tovto teas
en e%e<JTi, do this so long as it is allowed ; At rotavrat SeWoivaj
oinrore "Kvtyovatv aixi^o/tAEvai ris -^v%as ear' av apyjuatM avTvv, Xen,
CEc. I. extr.
Obs.l.*A%ai and pixv properly signify at once, at a continuance, without inter
ruption; in connection with a verb ' as far at, until,' in connection with a gen.
' continually up to,' or simply ' until.'IlXn> means except, and may be connected
with a proposition, ri.m il, except if; but it also takes the gen, : HXb> tin ixiyuw,
with the exception of very few.
Ob>. 2. Strictly speaking, those particles only, which commonly are used alone, and
without any reference, should be called adverbs; those, which usually are construed
with a particular case of the noun, prepositions ; and those, which generally connect
whole propositions, conjunctions. Thus, fur instance, inv and iru, without, ittUrm,
before, (in later Authors,) and x*t"i " account of, (the latter of which, like the
Latin gratia, almost always comes after the gen., as well as inn*,) and others, are
real prepositions governing the gen. It is true that x*(" properlyis asubst* as well
as iixm, in the manner of, Lat. ' instar,' (llxnt vrerxpZt, and the like ;) such words
are not adverbial suhst., but rather subst., which are become prep. Those mentioned
above never occur without the case of a noun, and therefore are still more justly
called prepositions, than some of the single words thus named, which sometimes are
employed adverbially without governing any case, 147- Obs. 8.)
1 Modern critics make it evident that, whenever passages occur in good Wl iters,
in which if does not refer to persons, they are probably corrupt ; u; is the correct
reading in such instances. The particle v;, however, is not one of the old prep.
strictly so called, which are stated in the following Section ; it does not make any
compound verb : see 115.2.
* Hence Poets also] ay i/thf, rhr x*("i U"or m3 'ahe, your sake,) instead of l/uv, ?
380
A GRKEK GRAMMAR.
4. Some adverbs serve at (he same lime -as adj. ; TlXnalov tori,
oTycL uti, he is near, he is silent ; Horn, axw iyhoiro, they were
silent. That particles by being construed with the article become
noun*, has been noticed above, 125. 6. 7.
147.Of the Prepositions.
1. Besides those mentioned in the preceding Section, the fol
lowing are the old prep, expressive of locality in general, with
their cases :
avri, into, e, (ex,) nph, govern the gen.
ev, ouv, the dat.
iti, sir,1 the accus.
the gen. and accus.
fj.<pl, il, peri, ita^i, irep!, wgbr, ifoo, the yen. dative and
accus.
2. Those, which govern different cases, generally have the
accus. to the question whither? and the dat. to the question
where ? The jren. suits most significations, but chiefly conveys
the idea of a removal, (from, off, out.)
Obt. 1. The most simple and easiest of the above prepositions, in point of signif.
are
iri, from, of,
ig, out of, from,
ill, in, into, to the question whilker,
it, in, to the question where,
rrfi, before,
e'vt, with,
for though they have many collateral meanings, these, with the exception of a fenpeculiarities, are easily deduced from the radical signif.: as when t denotes a
cause, and may lie rendered because of, ix tsutsu, on thai account, or when it merely
denotes a succession of time, Kvv yt\au.iy ix <rr TjerSiv httcfvir : again when us, like
the Latin in, denotes towards, against, or when it simply means with respect to, T*
til <r>Xi^u> iTiirrr.fuM itrlt : lastly when
is the Latin pro, for, (hut only in the
sense of protection or advantage,) biaxiihutiCut <r{i tsu /W/Aur. Cyrop. 4, 5, 44.
Ovk ioxirs* T^drrw, v(t vpvj, 'i, ti at Sir, I shall not be able to do what is needfulfor
you,for your advantage. Compare Tfivfyw, 6 1 15. OA*. 4. See below Obt. 7- a
very particular signif. of tit.
Obs. 2. The signif. of the following prepositiont must he more particularly remem
bered :
iti is originally up, (compare &tv, and the compounds,) and in this sense it is
also construed with the dative by the Poets, (//. a. 15. Od. k. 128.) But the most
usual signif. in prose is in, on, through, both in point of time and place; 'Ati
rnt yyt, all over the country ; 'H ftp* r.^Btt iti ens xs\tt, the report spread through the
city ; i iti tI triiitt, those iti the open fields; 'Ati Tarat viit tiftifxt, the whole day
through. But when there is no article, and Sf consequently is tantamount to
ixams, ( 127. C.) it refers to a number of days, years, Sic : iti tytt{r, daily,
every day ; Cyrop. \, 2, 8. iti nit trat, every year. Herod. 5, 114.
1 See about the prep. if, $ 146. 2.
SYNTAX.
361
ari as a single prep., has lost its original meaning of towardi, against, (see
Obs. 10. about compounds,) and most commonly signifies instead of, for, in the sense
of exchanging, bartering, buying, valuing, &c.
iut rev, through, in point of space and of ways and means ;3*i ra, o/i account of,
Aia. AuxihaifinUvs ifuysv, they were driven into exile on account of the Lacedemonians ;
Aii si nXScr, I came for your sake ; hut also through as a cause, A;x nit Sui; il crtarra,
through the Gods lam doing well, I am well off.
fii-i ts, after, Lat. post;fitra no, with;pith rS, only with Poets among,
Lat. inter.
i/if) and !{! rh, about, to both questions where and whither, for the dal. to the
question where is rather uncommon. Hence they denote any approximation ; 'A/up)
Tet Isn Xyiitn, he was about the mountain ; and ktt*)\ or trtst rt or rni 1%m or Jmsi
mean to belong to something, to be busy about something, &c. ( 150. t%ui :) rtt) rf
conveys the idea of care, and is used with the verbs to fear, contend, to be easy, &c. :
i/Lipi and (Tif! no mean of, Lat. de, to tali about something ; farther ftpus-Sai, pXtMinus <ri{i' rmt, and the like. But ipfi is less frequently used in this sense than <rt(l.
M( t, over, beyond, Lat. supra, ultra:Jtrij no, over, above. Hence the latter
also conveys the idea of for, chiefly in the sense of protection, defence, or care, &c.
troarrut, iivut ofrij no xsnw, to act, speak for the public welfare; urtSecrtir iwtf no
qtiXtv, to diefor one's friend.
Obs. 3. That the gen. preferably conveys the idea of proceeding from is particu
larly evident from these three prep. {, T(it, M.With the accus. and dal. they
retain their principal signif., but with the gen. they are mostly to be rendered of or
from. The following particulars must be remembered about them, viz.
trmfi ris, to, towards; but to the question where, near, close by. It is also the
Latin prater, besides ; "Extn tyn <rji rit &(nr, to have vegetables besides bread ;
'Ertiu
nil iXXto;, he performed more labor than the others ; TaZri trn
not rZr df*7y Strftelii, that is against the divine laws, against the order of things esta
blished by the Gods ; Htt(i 5|, beyond expectation, (Lat. prater opinionem ;) Hafi
ru is merely near;{* rsi is from with the verbs ' to come, bring, receive, learn,'
&c. and sometimes with the pass. ( 134. 3.)
trsit, to, near, has preferably the accus. to the question whither, and the dot. to
the question where .- trfii <riv is towards in both senses ;
no, from, by, with the
verbs ' to hear, to be praised or blamed,' and frequently with the pass. (v 134. 3.)It
is also used in the form of asseverations ; lifts tjJv 3i, by the Gods !
litri rir, under, (with motion ;) inrt ry, close under ;ivi no, from under, by,
most commonly with pass. ( 134. 2.) but likewise with act. having a pass, signif.
as tr*r%ut itself, and ex.gr. Haiti* Inri vntt, to meet one's death by one;futStut It'
aviyxnt, to be taught by necessity ; Demosth. Cherson. 94. *A S* utriruv tniv/iaruv pit
iuttifttt*, prevented by the winds. Even actions can thus assume a pass, form ; 'Emlwi
nvn iftri iUot, he did it out of fear ;If' iftrvs vfotrrun rt, Herod. 8, 1. or if the
pass, state of the object is uppermost in the mind, Soph. Philoct. 11 17. tiii yi isXn
tsx u99 Xtioo; ifta;, (the same with s-vyt irx&ns itXv.)And even with the gen. iiTt
sometimes retains its principal signif. under, iri triiit, Plato Protag, 321.
Obs. 4. The prep, ttrt and xt require the most careful attention :
iri chiefly signifies on, to the question where f commonly with the gen., some
times also with the dat., \<p' 'Ixrto i^tisStti, and, Kwi; ip' 'Artru i-rtaivm: to the ques
tion whither, with the accus. 'Eri Xtfn rnu xantQiiyu, he flies on a hill. But at the
same time its signif. becomes more general, and it may be used for near, into, and
to the question whither, for to, towards, whenever the context suggests this mean
ing; and with the accus. in particular it denotes the direction to, and towards. Instauces will occur to the learner iu his readings. We will only observe that the
382
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
gen. is also used to the question whither in the sense of to ; 'Erestvevre isri isleiim
'Anyevre, (thej/ tailed,) iri ris Xiev :'A*rier\turtv it' tixev :It) rev frequently fixes the
time by some contemporary circumstance, and more especially by a contemporary person ;
if'
in aur time, (compare above 145. 2.) It) rm tifurifw ereeyevuv : it) , in
point of situation, denotes clou by ; itJ rn rdfey, on the brinh of the grave; Xlv'ytvs
1 r. rZ totoluk atxe$e/*ii. Like xgis it denotes to, in addition to, 'Erl xifj Tai/ra/f tXb^oV
iv'mni pM. Very often it means purpose, condition ; era^xjsxtva&atx.t it/ rm, to pre
pare for something i 'Et ivxlty xxvrx trovav IxCHiitq: 'Eti revrei; uewriv ieroinexvro, on
those conditions they made peace, (compare below J 150 if' .) Lastly ieri rZ expresses
power in such phrases as if' i/tiv irri, it rests with us. See examples 12!). 1. 142.
3. The accus. too often denotes purpose, but mostly with this difference, ikSuv St)
T*yry, to effect it, ikSiiv it) rtvre, to fetch it.
xxrx. The principal meaning of this prep., as appears from the comparison of
xa.ru and its compounds, is motion from above downwards, with the gen., down from;
Kxtx reev titjwv f'trrtiv rivi, to throw one downfrom the rocks ; "HXkavra xxrd too rujC'Vf. It is also under in connections like afavlZjeSai xxra rxs Sxkxreiis, (to tinh
under,) Herod. 7, 6. K<tr rev, however, occurs more frequently in the signif. of
against, chiefly with the verbs ' to speak, think,' and the like ; uViiV to ikniu xxrx
rival, to speak the truth against one, give a true evidence. It is less rarely used in the
sense of praising, "Etww xxrx rev evev, Plato Phadr. 200.
xxrx ret denotes any locality in general, when the particulars of the situation
are not to be, Or cannot be, attended to, or when they are sufficiently known ; xxrx
yiiv xxi xxra Sxkxrrxv, by land and by sea / el xxrx rtiv 'Ar'ixv vera f&xeiXti Herts, those
who are in Asia under the king. Hence in general, lime, place, and circumstances,
which are obvious, are denoted by xxrx, Olxevn xxrx xeifea;, they dwell in villages, Lat.
vicatim ; 'Ee-xxvevv xxrei rx%us, they were encamped ill battle-array ; hence xxri, ivs,
two by two ; Txvrx fjiie iyivire xxret rv)v v'evev, this happened during lite illness; Kxrel
raurnv rh> iixfeexv evreev Xaxibxifienav ere.es A^nvxtevs, during the dispute of the Lacede
monians with the Athenians ; At xxrx re eZfix r^evat, the pleasures of the body ; Kxrei
eravrx rtrfv^anrxt, they are in every respect worn out, and many other relations of this
kind. Kara frequently is the Latin 1 secundum,' according to, Kxrx revrev ret \'eyev
xfiuyev irrtv 3i, according to this statement it is better thus; Karat UXceruvu, according
to Plato, i.e. as Plato says: Kxrx rnv xxBirev, perpendicularly ; Uomeu xarei ret rsv
(Sanxim y^xfi/txra, I shall act according to the king's letter ; &u/ixi aiirti xxrx exavres
roe-rev, I want him every way, need his assistance in any way.
Obs. 5. The prep, us referring to persons, signifies to, but always meaning the
persons dwelling, Horn, its 'Ayxii'ipvovu, to Agamemnon, to his tent ; xaXtu ri ftiv us
I txxffres, every one inviles him to his house ; Lysias, EiftkSeev us rev erxri^a. rev ifitev,
coming to my father's house. Ei'f with the elliptical gen. (J 132. Obs. 9.) means more
generally, into lite house of Alcibiades, &c.
Obs. 6. The prep. U is also used by the Dorians instead of us, with the accus.
(Pind. I'yth. 2, 21. 5, 50. See Greg. Cor. Dor. 159. with the Notes.)See about
ieri employed seemingly for i>, 151. I. 8.
Obs. 7. \Ve shall see below, 151. III. 1. 6. that prep, are sometimes separated
from their cases by an intercalation. Sometimes the object of a prep, seems to be
wanting, when a reference has taken its place ; Soph. Philocl. 469.
wjii, tj(
it ri ret iariv fikev, where u n (according to 149. u,) is used for e, n and the requi
site gen. to wees (<rxvres) is wanting, by thy father, (I implore thee) byif any thing be
dear to lhec, \. e by all which is dear to thee.
Obs. 8. And sometimes the object is not expressed, because it would he repeating
what had gone before ; most languages then make an adverb of the prep, (wherein,
therein, etc.) and if the prep, itself is used, it is only adverbially. In prose this is
8YNTAX.
383
done in Greek only with the prep. tffis, ex. gr. xxi rel;,
il, und beside; &c. and by
the Ionians and later Writers also with fttri : pira it, but afterward: But Poets
have also ra(i, along with il, 1, within, and the like, and the prep. rtei or rt(i, fre
quently is with the Epics an adverb: very much, ery, ( 117. Ob*- 3.)
Obt. 9. All compounds with prtp. originated in this manner. They all consist
of the radical word with a prep, taken udverbiallg : imfiaitu, / pass through, cross
aver, and the like, 121.2. The meaning of all such compounds is easily discovered
from the signif. of the prep. We will only remark that the compounds with Atj
chiefly convey the idea of opposition, against ; imrdrnn, to oppose, &tri\iyut, to con
tradict:those with Awe mean up, and those with xari down ; itafialtut, xarafialtut,
to go up, down. Of the collateral signif. or of such compounds, which are not clearly
obvious through the meaning of the prep., we must particularly notice :
i/ifi, when it means on both sides ; afififieXes, ambiguous, equivocal ;
hti, frequently means back again ; itxriut, to sail back ;
tut, conveys the idea of the Lat. ' dil,' separation, taking apart, or aside ; iiatrat,
to pull asunder, iixZivytitai, Lat. ' disjungtrt,' to disjoin, separate ;
iy, frequently answers the question whither ; iyxitt, to pour into ;
xara, most commonly conveys the idea of accomplishing ; xxTxxeaTrut, Lat.
' perficere,' to accomplish ; rrttfin, to turn, <wr;i^iii, to finish ; n/treatxi,
to burn, xaTanp.rei.txi, to consume byfire. Hence the idea of ruin, destruc
tion ; xxTxxvfiivut rnt ebt'ixt, to lose one's fortune at dice. In both it corre
sponds to the Latin per, Germ. tier.
turi, denotes transposition, change, Lat. trant ; pint/3//3i, to transfer, remove ;
fitrxrait, to change one's mind ;
rasa, sometimes signifies, like the Lat. prater, the idea of missing, doing amiss,
in some compounds, as rx^afialtut rout tepevs, to transgress the laws ; ra^eeat,
to see wrong, overlook ; raeitratiet, who violates a treaty, (tretiai)
Obs. 10. It is because prep, are properly adverbs in compound words, that Poets
frequently separate the prep, from their verbs by putting other words between, which
is called a tmesis, eta n ptfextSai iri^ne. for xxi itapffiatSai, and even in the Ionic
prose, especially by instead of tit, Herod. 2, 39. 'Ar St ihtrt, for iriietTt eZt.
Homer in particular parts the prep, so completely from its verb and lets it follow
after, that that prep, sometimes comes before a case or noun, on which it has no in
fluence ; r'eXlfJut rift TttSt /fvyetTtf, for rteiQvyotTts refit ret cro?.isv :ix 3vp.it l\ioSxt,
for i%lXitSxi Hvpot IKara fievc vrtfietes 'HO.U.o "HtStetl i*apiZ.t ar' stTtx, (more
correctly are, see 117- Obs. 3.) for inti(iet Una, and the like. The reading of
Homer becomes less difficult by assuming that he has no compound verbs, only
simple ones with adverbial prep, more or less distant from the verb. Hence the
Ionic prose, in the moving repetition, which we shall state below in 6 150. under
put, merely repeats the prep, instead of the compound verb, Herod. 3, 126. 'O 3! xxri
p.it ixTtitt MfTfo/Secrtaxara it rot Mireefcartei raita. Even in the Attic prose the
intercalation of the limiting ri, (somewhat, in some degree,) coming after the prep,
ire, (Lat. SUB, a little,) which limits or diminishes the signif. of adj., belongs hither ;
ire ti iinfiii, somewhat irreligious, vt't rs ireret, and the like. Heind. ad Plat,
Phadr. 43.
Obs. 11. But even in common prose there arc some prep., which must be con
sidered as separate and distinct, though in compounds. This is particularly the
case with re}; and tit. Any verb, whether a compound or not, may receive the
addition of either of these prep, merely to shew that the thing happened in addition
to something, (r^ee,) or in connection with some one else, (tit nti,) tvtr^artvepixi tat,
I go to war along v-ith you; Hvti%atgii aiireie XiXXxtiat, helps them to conquer Sellasia,
(Xeuoph. Hell, 7, 4, 12.) 'Aja xxi -{sr5/3Xi til, but he has slandered me into the
384
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
bargain. Other prep, are less frequently used in this way ; ififuXirZi, \yyufniir3z<, to exercise or practise, Plato Phcedr. 6. 'O *i;3/'; iiByira.ru tji 'A>u>Sr inf
ytXafiur xej iiTii{*/"> 4>i/w5Km/, Phidias made his Minerva for Demosthenes to benefit
by her, and to commit perjury in her name, (.flSsch. c. Ctes.) Thus avireXifiuv, a
compound, which perhaps occurs nowhere else, means in Plato (Phaidr. 260.) ia
reference to a home, tofight on horseback, i.e. downfrom the horse, being seated on it;
r^S>, to live on, (see below, 150. #.) And afixraerx u, Demosth. Mid. 35.
srtufilkut, xritxiiKtit, ibid. 23. All other compounds with prep, or other words were
regulated by practice, or introduced, when a compound idea was particularly called
for.
Obs. 12. And not only in the above-mentioned compound expressions, but also
frequently in others the prep, governs, under certain combinations, its own proper
casus, though compounded ; iviTtmi t;w, to be in or within something ; afurrmttxi rntt,
to be separated or disjoined from something; dmtnintar Imgarar, they deserted
Socrates, and the like;whilst in the higher styles of writing the prep, is repeated
again before the case or noun. This occurs frequently in Homer, and confirms what
we observed before, that each compound verb in Homer must be considered as sepa
rated, so that the prep, sometimes is merely an adverb, which it properly is, as we
have seen above, and sometimes a real prep., II. -J*. 121. J$u n/ueav, they fastened
(the wood,) so that it hung down from the mules.
Obs. 13. That the Greek prep., on changing their accents are sometimes placed
behind their case or noun in the anastrophe, and sometimes used instead of com
pounds with iTmu, has been already remarked above 5 1 17- 4. To this must be
added the inversion of monosyllabic prep., as ig, 13. 4. 'AfTtfiiii %ir, Horn.
148. Of the Negative Particles.
1. There are in Greek two simple negative particles, ovx and
piv, with which all other more decided negations are compounded.
Any proposition, in which one or more of these negations occur,
negatives generally in the same manner as if the simple negative
particle was used alone. Hence, whatever is observed about ou,
applies alike to ol>5e, oul'sh, oilanHs, &c, and it is the same with
li-h, ^SEir, &c.
2. There is, however, a great difference in the use of oix and
n.ri, and of their respective compounds, which requires an atten
tive study, and of which we can only give the general basis '.
1 Compare Hermann's view of this distinction, which he has ingeniously deve
loped, ad Viger. n. 207. He states it as a general principle that dx always denies
the thing, and fin only the representation, which is made of it, or that box denies
objectively, and subjective/ij. I readily acknowledge that this theory may com
prise the greatest numlier of instances, where these negative particles are employed,
and that nothing can be more useful, or more calculated to sharpen the intellect in
grammatical investigations than soberly to pursue such a philosophical principle,
and even to endeavour to find it confirmed. But at the same time I must confess
that I have not yet succeeded in bending every occurring instance so completely to
this rule, as to render it impossible not to bend others, which do not occur, equally
to it. A comparison with my statements will shew that I have made use of Her
mann's views. To devise a better basis was not in my power, yet 1 did not wish to
force into it what in my opinion is not susceptible of admission. My collateral re
marks may be studied with those of Hermann, or be thrown into the shade.
SYNTAX.
385
38G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
c. As intention also has its foundation merely in the con
ception of the speaker, m-w is constantly used with the par
ticles ha., us, onus, urn, whenever they really announce a
purpose or design. It is also employed in any proposition,
containing a wish, request, or prohibition. In all these
instances it answers to the Latin ne, and begins the pro
position like this, the idea of a wish being mentally under
stood, Mri yhoiro, may it not happen !
d. Any thing, which is stated in sermone obliquo as the opi
nion, argument, or supposition of another, appears indeed
to he a dependent proposition, but as it distinguishes itself
only in form from a direct assertion, common usage pre
fers ovk in most instances, and we meet with No;u'ei ov
xaxbv tivai,Oux. e&e'Xeiv <pn<Tiv, and the like. Mw, however,
may be used in many such instances ; Xenoph. Hell. 3,
2, 19. 'EvoAtiuav avrov /xt> @ou\eaat piaXXov j fx?) Si/vauScti,
and the dependent or indirect question with eI, whether, is
commonly attended by /xve. To the conditions and suppositions mentioned at (b) be
long likewise all pronouns relative, when they refer not to
defined objects, but barely to the conceptions of the mind.
We thus have, for instance, Ovltis Xri^ETui j^'/Aara, BVir
ixv> TMcpirzi, no one shall receive money, who is not present ;
but, OStoi e3<tiv, o'i ovV otioDv rous woXe/xious- jSXavroi/n, Cyrop. 6, 1, 28. positively, these are those, who do not hurt
the enemy in the least.
H
> tin, ii o'i /tin ixiivAfv %ufiftu%at \rt lovXitx tyi aiiruv ^t'^avrif cvx Atttfevcn,
flfitil It iri t TiftMfwpivoi Tois KC'H6'^' *a' "'J~7'' *t** fvie$ett, tlx aou. i&vavnftfm ;
The tux here ia the first proposition is necessary and natural, because the fact is
notorious; hut in the second proposition evx is indeed strange and extraordinary,
the matter being actually considered as impossible, in which case pii appears as
necessary as in the similar proposition below, 149. (Alr%eb lrrn t)
/inH
Tttis xiyovf
.) The case is the same with the two passages of two very different
Writers quoted by Hermann, p. 361. which introduce similar double propositions
with imit (', in the second of which ob appears equally strange and extraordinary.
There must be a general cause for it, which I consider to be this : the proposition
Sum ii, which expresses some astonishment, insensibly becomes, after the first half,
an angry interrogative expressive of the utmost surprise, by means of ii. Hence
the proposition in Thuc. closes with the question, d* Ufa !twi/ii> ; in Herod.
7, 9. with"Exxjvf Siov Tifiuonffifit^a ; and in Andocides de Myxt. 13. *K v/it*
ai evSnrifim ; which appears to me a very natural ethos. Criticism will be able thus
to account for other similar cases, which are yet unexplained. In Herod. 6, 9.
(iim vnwwn,) the M SS. have ,itn'. In Eurip. Cyclop. 428. i"r' it X.(*X.tni >> "as
the signif. of whether, which is susceptible of both constructions. See the Note to
Plato Meno. 23. and Herm. ad Eurip. Med. p. 344. where in the passage quoted
from Plato Prolog. 77- "' tlx itir^Ctcfteii, whether I am not ashamed, six is suggested
by the direct question, tlx !r%m;
SYNTAX.
387
388
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
positions, 151.1V. 3.)
SYNTAX.
389
390
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
391
trary to the laws; Anab. 1, 3, 2. Mi*ga l%i$t/yt rou fin xxrx-rirp/Swsu, he scarcely
escaped the danger of being lapidated. See Ind. ad Plat. Mem. v. p.ri. Exc. XI. ad
Demosth. Mid.
Obs. 10. The expression il SI (A, but if nut, should properly come after affirmative
sentences ; but it is so familiar as a complete contradiction to the preceding pro
position, that it also stands after negative sentences, andconseijuently affirms in such
cases; Anab. 4, 3, 6. See Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. 134.
See the following Section about tbUi and finH.
149.Of some other Particles.
1. The use of the Greek particles is so various, and in part
attended with so many difficulties, that it will be proper to review
the most important ones with particular attention.
us as a relative adverb has the following signif. :
1 .) as, when ; hence 2.) in speaking of time, us II r,\%y, ov
ira$r,]i, when I arrived, he was not there; 3.) it strengthens
the superl. especially of adverbs, us rdx'^oc, as quickly as
possible, and also the positive of some, particularly us otknSus,
most truly, us eriqus, very differently, and some other ex
amples in Heind. ad Plat. Apol. S. 23. Prcef. The in
stances, where it comes after an adverb, hxvix^us us, vwzp(puus us, are explained below, 151. I. 5. 4.) About, nearly,
ois irevr-nxovra, about fifty. 5.) To prep, answering the ques
tion ivhither, ear}, ei's-, m^os, ex. gr. 'KTroqevero us in\ rot mora.f*ov, it gives the signif. towards, ' versus,' (properly, in the
direction as if he wanted to get to the river.)Thuc. 6, 61.
'AttsVXeov fAETa T7)s 2aXay.iviar ex rr,s 2ixi\ias us es 'A&ogvar.
This expression properly denotes merely the direction taken,
and leaves it undecided whether the place was reached.
Hence it may always be employed about a journey, which
is not yet finished, Soph. Philoct. 58. nXsis Fus irqos oTkoy,
you sail homewards.
As a conjunction, it means 1.) that, Yldvrss optoXoyo'y/x,6v, us
vi dpsrv) xpxTifov eVi : 2.) in order that with the conj., opt. or
fut. of the indie. 3.) so that with the infin. (more usually
aire,) see 140. 4. 4.) since, (see 145. Obs. 5.) hence
also 5.) the Latin ' quippe,' for, K^anyov sVai auy^upriasct, us
av SoxeIV owe afprjtreiv pes, it will be best to yield, for you seem
not to intend to release me.
About the prep, us, see 147. Obs. 6.
wf, (with the accent, 116. 5.) for ovrus, is very usual with
Poets, especially the Ionians ; but in prose it is chiefly used
392
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
393
eI mi, with the indie, though. But xa! si, and xiv el, if even,
suppose even. The last is construed with the indie, in spite
of av : see the Note to Demosth. Mid. 15. Hetnd. ad Plat.
Soph. 69.
tins, sin, properly if any one, any thing ; but this expression
emphatically supplies the pronoun oyir, ex. gr. "EtpSeipov em
Xew/jwv *Sv tv ru weSi'w, whatever. Compare 147. Obs. 8.
si yap is also used to express a wish, O that ! else e&e.
tvel, after, 2.) since, Lat. quoniam, French puisque.
before interrogatives and imper. it means for; 'Ewe! w&r
av Siax^iWi/xEv aci/to ; /or Aow e/se could we discriminate it ?
'Ewe! biacaai aurhs, for look only yourself.
otiov, where, (there where,) 2.) as a conjunction, since, if indeed,
Lat. siquidem.
oitbrt, is also often used for since, like the Lat. quanduquidem.
v, (Poetically xe, xev,) see above 139. 7. etc.
ixv, 59v, av, Srav, ETrsiSav, see the same Section.
Estv in particular has after verbs signifying to investigate, exa
mine, see, the power of the Latin an, ' whether, if;1 2xowe tav
Ixavov y, look whether it be sufficient. But frequently the
verb is wanting, and must be mentally supplied. MtiSe toDto
appwrov tsu ixoi, Eav <si icws itilau, neither will I leave this un
told, (to see) if I can prevail ivith you. See Ind. ad Plat.
Meno. &c. Schneid. ad Xenoph. Mem. 4, 4, 12. Homer's
ai'xE, ( 139. 8.) II. a. 420. is employed exactly in this way.
i, or, which signif. it always retains even in questions, Ovrus Eyiv,
% ovx om ; so it is, or do you not think so ? wo&ev wei ; }j SijXov
on e dyopas ; whence comes he ? or is it certain, (and then
the question is unnecessary,) that he comes from the market
place ? See Ind. ad Plat. Meno. in V.
In comparisons it is than, Lat. quam ; 2ol rovr'o /xSXXov a'gE(jxei, ij Ejtxol, this pleases you better than it does me.When
the compar. refers to a proportion, we have v) ic%bs or y)
xara, ex. gr. Me/^wv i) xar atv&giuwov, taller than a man usually
is ; 'H So^st Eyiv sXxttuv v) irp'os to xxt6$$wij.x, the glory is
less than is due to the deed, (Lat. ' quam pro.')
Quite different is
y\, which originally signifies truly, certainly ; it is most commonly
a mere interrogative particle, Lat. num ?
xal and te are exactly the Lat. el and que, and xz) afso signifies
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
also, even, &c. If re comes before xa!, it means not only,
and xa! then means but also ; Autos re rugavvos iyivero, xa!
ToTt ifmai rriv Tfpavvi'Sa xMrikintv : in other instances these
particles signify as ivellas. But this double connection
is often used where we simply have once and.
re is very frequently redundant in Epic poetry. This
arises from the circumstance, that in the old language this
particle imparted to several words the connecting power,
which these words retained in the more polished lunguage
without retaining the particle itself. Hence we frequently
meet in the old Poets with pte'v te, Se' te, ya te, and even
xai te, {also,) for fj.lv, Se, ya, aud xai alone. But the
particle re most commonly comes after all kinds of rela
tives, because in the old language they all were merely
forms of the pronoun demonstrative, which through this te
obtained the connecting power, and thus became the rela
tive, which. As soon, however, as these forms were ex
clusively allotted to the relative signif., the particle te was
dropped as superfluous. Hence we often find in Homer
3s- te, oitov te, &c. instead of os, 8<rov, and the like. The
particles use and are, and the expressions olos re and ef'
te ( 150.) of the common language 1 are a remnant from
the ancient usage. (Respecting r1 Ipx see toi.)
But xai alone in the sense of also is often introduced
in familiar conversation, seemingly without any necessity ;
Plato Alcib. \, 6. (I admit all your questions,) "vol xai e'tlu,
o, ti xa! EgtIV, where we should use different particles, ' that
I may know what you will say.'
Before jj.i\x and wdvu it has a peculiar energy; ToCto
ya xa! /xatXa axpifius, I know this, and indeed very accu
rately.
xi, in comparisons, like the Latin atque, see Ind. ad Plat
Meno. cet.
xa!Se, see after Se.
Se, (but,) is far from having a constant adversative power ; in most
instances it is a mere transition and connection to announce
1 This is, in my opinion, the best way of accounting for the above-mentioned
Epic expressions. Yet I readily grant that there may be other suppositions to
account for them. But I cannot agree with Hermann in explaining all this by an
hypothesis of Ms own, that xcu and ti, and the Latin et and ciUE, were originally
different, and that rt signified the Latin forte.
SYNTAX.
395
30G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Two propositions often are united by ix.lv and 8e, of
which the second alone belongs to the context, the first
being premised merely to give more effect to the second
by its contrast; Demosth. Olynth. II. 'A\X.' exeTvo $xuImx^oj, e! (that) AttxeSaifx,oviots /ae'v iron, Z avSgEj 'AOmaToi,
vniq ruiv 'Ex\nvixtc<v Sixxiuv avrriqtxre, xacl,"na o< &Wot
rv^uat ruv Sixatwv, ri vft,ers^x avrZv dv/ikioxirs e\atyi%ovrts,
wit S' oxveite ejeWi, xal /xeWsrs (delay) elatyeqgiv vitlp
rut vfj^Tipaiv avruv xm/*iTOv. Demosth. here is not sur
prised at the first proposition, that the Athenians once
defended the rights of all the Greeks against the Lacede
monians, but at the second proposition, that they, who
once acted thus, would not take proper measures for the
protection of their own properly. Alaygbv lanv, si eya)
p.lv robs icbvovs, vfj.eTs Se /xj5e robs \6yovs abruv &VE%iaE,
pro Cor. 281 : it is obvious that the first proposition here
is praiseworthy, and the second alone shameful, not in
itself, but in contrast with the first. The following ex
ample, which is misunderstood by most Interpreters,
shews what attention it is necessary to pay to such con
nections, Eurip. Iph. T. 115.
Ovroi /Aaxgov fj.lv %\ofjLev xdnrrt itopov,
'Ex TEffAStTftIV Se VOUTOV dgOl)fJ.iV waXiv.
Here the negation properly belongs only to the second
proposition, and the first as a contrast may come after,
we will not, when ice are at the goal, sail back again, after
having performed such a long voyage. The connection of
the two propositions is still more striking in this sense, it
shall not be said of us, that we performed a long voyage,
and went back again, when we had reached our destina
tion. It is the same if we take the whole for a disap
proving question. See Seidler2.
This jA.lv SI affords an emphatic way of connecting
two ideas belonging to the same proposition instead of the
more usual rl x%\ so that one word of the proposition
is repeated ; Xenoph. Mem. 2, 1, 32. 'F.yu 5e ctuvei/xi fj.lv
8 The same phrase is also used sometimes in Latin, but agreeably to the syntax
of that language, without such pallida: Horace, Sat. 1, 2, 4.
Quod venale hubvt, ostendit ; ncc, si quid Aonesti est,
Jactal, hubclqu* palam ; qvarit quo turpia cclfi.
SYNTAX.
397
398
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
399
selled them tvhat was necessary, &c. (See also Plato Lys.
14. Heind.) In these cases ya% only explains what has
been stated before, as is sometimes done in German and
English with namely,
olv, consequently, therefore, follows only after other words. See
about the o2v, which is annexed, as Iothjouv, &c. SO. I. and
116. 9. From this are derived
ovxovv, ovxovv. The particles ovx and ovv used affirm
atively, imply a conclusive negative, ' consequently not,
therefore not.' Hence in familiar language they were ap
plied in different ways, which appear from the context,
and are partly denoted by the accentuation. 1.) When
used interrogatively, the negative conveys the affirmative
opinion of the speaker. Eurip. Orest. 1238. Ovxovv oveiStj
TceSg xkvm pvau rixva ; will you then, hearing these re
proaches, not save your children? Plato Phcedr. 258.
Ovxovv, sav fjiev ovros i/j^/xivri, yeyn^as ifigj^trat ix row &Easrqou ', does not he then, when this is abided hy, go pleased
from the theatre? This question, in consequence of being
heard habitually as meaning the negative affirmatively,
became itself 2.) an affirmation without interrogative.
Soph. Antig. 91. Ovxovv, orav M
aShat, ittTtavooiAxi,
I therefore shall give over, when I am no longer able.
Plato Phadr. 274. Ovxovv to
Tty^vnt ts xa\ areyylocs
Xoycuv iTEgi \xxtus ey^irco, thus then we have said enough of
skill, and want of skill in speeches. Very different from
this is 3.) ovxovv, when, without being conclusive, it merely
is an intensive negation. Soph. Aj. 1336. 'Ak\' avrov
tunas ovt' eyw ToiovSt fx.oi Ovxovv xTi/Advai//.' ai, but though
he behaved to me in this manner, I should not like to insult
him by any means; Philoct. 872. Ovxovv 'ArgeTSai tout'
trXnoav tvnoQCDS Ovvcos Iveyxiiv, cuyxdol arpxrriXolrai, the
Atridce did not bear this easily, &c. The similarity of
the accent in the first and second ovxovv, as contradistin
guished from the third ovxovv, has been traditionally handed
down to us by the generality of editions; and (he state
ment of the ancient Grammarians agrees with it. See
Herm. ad Viger. n. 261. to which may be added Apollon.
de Conjunctione p. 496. 9.Phrynichus Bekkeri p. 57.
All admit a different accentuation only for the conclusive,
400
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
401
402
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
403
xai toi, and certainly, and truly, 2.) and yet, 3.) although.
//ivroi, to be sure7, hence 2.) but indeed, however; it is a more
emphatic form for Xe'.
t'
r' ag, (see 29. O&x. 8.) with Poets apa. strengthened by rot.
properly at present, now, (for which
is used )) hence it
serves in various ways to enliven a speech ; aye M, come on
then; ri Syi, what then?It also means forsooth, truly, and
After the pronoun relatives, <S<rnr
%icou M,8 whosoever
it may be, wherever it may be, &c. ; or any one, I know
not where.
(Doric niv, Epic /xev and //.av,) is l.)an affirmation, truly,
indeed, 2.) but indeed, yet, Plato Soph. 1. Kai'^oi SoxsrSeor
(xev ovSa^Zs eivai, SiTos j^wjv.
Te pew, (Epic ye ij.h,) true, certainly ; hence it is also a more
powerful St, see Exc. 1. ad Aral. Ki f/.w, Lat. immo, yes,
by all means ! and opposed to a contradiction, it is the Latin
atgui, and yet.
After interrogatives following an interlocutor's negation
wore fim, when then 9 ris /aw, who then ? (i. e. when, who
else then ?) whence ri /aw is as much as why not ?
w /ativ, (Ionic and Epic % fx.h,) is the common formule
of asseverations and protestations, sometimes with the
indie. ?! fj.w eyu eW&ov rovro, (I swear that I have suffered
this,) sometimes with the infin. dependent on other verbs,
as oimvim v (Am Swo-eiv, (/ faithfully promise to give ;) and
also in the 3 pers. 'fYwel'e,aro r> /xw pri diropeTv avrovr rqoiprtt, he took it on himself, faithfully promised that they
should not want food.
oil /xw, 1.) yet not, 2.) a negative protestation, answering
to the affirmative r> y.w : in a dependent proposition pit pwiv.
(enclitic, peculiar to the Ion. and Dor. Poets,) is also an
affirmation, conveying pretty nearly the idea of / should think
so ; hence it is used especially in an ironical and sarcastical
sense : 3
ov m, even so, not so I should think,
w, vwv, short and enclitic, used only in the Ionic dialect and in
poetry, 1.) properly the same with vuv, for which it is some' This particle is derived from /trit, (Epic
and ), compare 150. 1.
6 They are generally written separate, but whenever they receive the addition of
the strengthening ttri, (see <} 80. Obs. 1., and 118. 7.) they are most usually
written as a single word.
2 D 2
404
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
times used ; 2.) for ouv, therefore, now ; 3.) like the English
too, Qvnros Ss vo x%\ ou rerufa, thou too art born mortal,
K it. 622.
v\p, (enclitic, and probably derived from ntpi in the sense of very,
147. Obs. 9.) quite;hence uowep properly means entirely
asKxiwep, though ever so much, i. e. although, in which
sense we also have wiq, alone.
r<m, (enclitic,) at any time ; used interrogatively, it expresses
surprise : Tif itork eutiv ouros ; who can this be, who may
this be ?
vou, (enclitic,) 1.) somewhere, anywhere; 2.) by chance, perhaps ;
3.) in conversing on putting indirect questions to found an
argument on the affirmative answer of the interlocutor. See
Ind. in Plat. Menon. in v.
A-nmv is the same as <noh, but more emphatical, and if
a little irony is used so as to hint that the opposite is impos
sible, it is SrivovStv. Demosth. Mid. 26. 'Eordvai yx$
e^EUTai SnrrouSev aurai, for I should think that he ivill be
allowed to stand there.
150. Of some particular Locutions.
SYNTAX.
405
406
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
2, 3, 35. Ot5Se wXeiv, M.'n 3ti avaigei<xS'ai Tot/r avS2ir SVvsttov 3v :Lucian has ob% %vus in the same sense, Dial.
Mort. 27, 5. OuS' iaravai ja/jiail ox avus /3a5i'iv ISiJvaTO.
oux oti sometimes serves to introduce a seeming objec
tion, which is immediately after refuted, (commonly with
a\\a,) not thatbut; when there is no refutation, ov% on
also signihes although : Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 37.
Protag. 66.
3ti f*7i after negations means except.
to oe, an elliptical expression, not easily supplied, which
introduces a proposition opposed to what has been stated
before, nearly like the English as however, but as yet,
Heind. ad Plat. Theact. 37. Buttm. ad Menon. 37.
to iu.i, more commonly to
oi, with the infin. as much
as wan yuri, so that not, that not, Lat. ' quo minus, quin.'
See Exc. 11. ad Demosth. Mid. 142. Compare also too
ni>, 148. Obs. 9.
t1 frequently becomes a limiting or also generalising particle, * in
one degree,'' in anything hence oSti, p.in, no< a
;
but these particles may be separated, oSVe ti ^<y*, II, a. 115.
See about the tmesis with ti, (ward t,) 147. 06*. 10.
fATiTi yt, mucA. Zes, Lat. nedum, probably derived from (tri on.
oi5 steoi, eat. gfr. Ov irepl rod rifjLupyiaaa'bai, dXKi xal, to say no
thing of revenge, (i.e. revenge is out of the question,) but we
will even, (Thuc. 4, 63.)
8<rov oi or boovou, (Lat. ' tantum non') nearly, almost ; Tov /xix*.ovt xl bo-ovou <xxp6ir stoXe/aov, the war which is imminent
and almost at hand, i.e. only just so much is wanting, that
we are not actually at war.
oo-ov alone is used elliptically with an infin. in the following man
ner, AiavEipi-Ev exdaru oaov ao^v, he distributed to each as
much as each could live on :Thuc. 3, 49. 'H ^te'o vavt
slpSaae tououtov, '6aov Yldx'nra avEyvwxEvai ro xJ/ijipio'pMt, the first
vessel arrived only a very little earlier, as Paches had already
proclaimed the decree of the people,
oaos, ti, ov, in SaufAaorot otrov, and the like, is the Lat. ' mirum quan
tum,' wonderfully much, i.e. a very great deal. It is used in
the same way before or after superl. of words expressive of a
quantity; nKiiara. cW, oW nXsTara, Lat. ' quamplurima,' a
great many. See 151. 1. 5.
SYNTAX.
407
facet foipai, daily, (Plato Charm. 51. extr.) and also oaos with any
limitations of time. The former is also written close toge
ther, and contracted oroptigoei.
v&' <5v, (according to the rule of 143. 5.) is used for avri exe/vo/v
aex. gr. ActCs rovro xvb' wv e'Sojxar j^ol, take this for that,
which you have given to me. But it is also used for dvri
rourov on, for this, that, Xagiv aoi olla, av&' Sin tjX&ej-, I thank
you for this, that you are come,
etp' a, is properly for iiti rovru, o, but commonly for ir rovru
iis ; and as etti with the dat. conveys the idea of a condi
tion, Eip' S> means on condition that; \k%u aoi e<p' S> aiynatis,
I will tell it to yon on condition that you be silent.
E<f>' wte is the same, (for ewi rovru, elan,) but is more
usually construed with the infin. ; ex. gr. 'Htp&wotv i<p'
wte avyypd^/ai vo/aous, they were chosen on condition that
they should make laws,
tare, (not eY te, for it is used instead of es ore, Dor. eute,) until, as
long as, 146. 3.
oios, before an infin. means of such a nature that, such as; O!
wgd<T&v oSdvTEr Tteiai t^aiois oToi refj.veiv eiViv, o'i Se yd/xpioi 0101 Iraqi
rovraiv SslaptEvoi Xebiveiv, (of such a nature that they cutthat
they receive of those and bruise,) or with a negative, Ou yip
i?v ohs aitb wowtos xe^Soc/veiv, he was not one (not such a one)
who is ready to do anything for the sake of gain,
oios te (oIotte, oIoute,) means, in speaking of persons, able,of
things, possible ; Oios te etti jrdvr d<jrohT^a.i, he is able to do
any thing ; d\\' ovy^ oldv te toSto, but that is not possible.
This phrase differs a little from the preceding one only in
practice, for oios and oios te are, properly speaking, the same.
See in the preceding Section te.
olov slxus, as may be imagined, as may be supposed,
oilcv oTov properly there is nothing like, (French, 4 il n'y a rien de
tel,') whence, for instance, OiJSev oTov dxouaai rSii \vya>v avrav,
i.e. the best thing we can do, is to hear him, there is nothing
like hearing him.
aXKo is used negatively or interrogatively to strengthen
an affirmative proposition, in which case there generally
is a verb omitted, Cyrop. 1, 4, 24. 'ExeTvos ovoiv aXXo r
rovs veitruxoras neqitXavwn t^taro, Memor. Socr. 2, 3, 17.
408
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
409
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
410
SYNTAX.
411
6UTI, comes before pronouns relative of all kinds : tarn ore, Lat.
'est cum,' i.e. sometimes; ejtiv or, Lat. 'est qui,' i.e. someone.
It is even used in this way before a pi. ; Ki tarn 6t avrwv
iTirpdaicavTo, and some of them were wounded; "Eo-rtv oTr
oii% ovrus e'SoI-ev, to some it did not appear so, (but we may
also say eialv o'i,) Anab. 1, 5, 7. THv Se run aro&(j,u\, 6vs itaw
fjLz.x%ovs riKuvKt, he made some of these halting stations very
long. This phrase was afterwards considered as a single
word, and thus interwoven in the speech ; Ei ya b r^ircos
iVriv o!r duatxpeaTeT, for if the manner displeases some ; xXewtiiv Se EpiixEvifo-nv a, but he allowed them to steal some things,
(Xenoph. Laced. 2, 7.) OUavrep etSov e<ttiv ottov, which I have
seen somewhere.And as an interrogative, "Eo-nv oven-tats
thfopw'jiovs rs^av/jiaxas ewj ootplgc ; have you ever admired any
man for his wisdom? Xenoph. Mem. 1, 4, 2.
owe eartv onus, it is impossible, inconceivable; 'H dfiKampny^oavvn,
vtf-hs owe eunv onus kavyja.v ayjnoei, the great attention to busi
ness, which will not let him remain quiet. (Compare about
i5<p" is, 147. Obs. 3.
eVnv, e^Eo-Tiv, Eveo-Ti, sra'gEffTi npxrreiv, (with the dat. of the person,
or in general,) all signify, it is allowed, in one's power. But
eveo-ti alludes to physical power, it is possible, E&sriv to the
moral power, it is lawful; san is between the two, and
means indefinitely it will do, it may be done ; ndpeartv the
same, only that it conveys the additional idea offacility, ' it
is at hand, may be done without ceremony, any difficulty.'
Whenever e^eo-tiv and htan are used one for the other, it is
merely from rhetorical motives, just as we say by way of
strengthening the expression, J cannot possibly do it, instead
of dare not or may not do it ; and J am allowed to do it, may
do it.
us hi. In this expression eh, (according to 117. 4.) is used
for titan, it is possible; hence before superl. its eh y.i\iort*,
as far as it is any way possible,
is twos eiwelv, so to speak, Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. Maj. 11.
us tovsXovti [sc. Xoya") eiweTv, also without us, (compare 140.
Obs. 2.) and simply avnXovri without e'nrew, to be short.
iy rots. When these words come before a superl., they mean the
Latin ' omnium,' of all ; 'Ev rots wpurot <na.%haa.v ol 'ASnwot,
412
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the Athenians were there the first of all; Touto lyii ev toit
fSaqvratra. av syeyxxiuu, I should be the greatest sufferer ofall.
To resolve this expression we must supply after h rots a
participle suggested by the sequel of the proposition, here in
the first instance ev roTs vx^ouain, in the second cv rots {ixpius
(pepovow avro. But when the superl. is an adverb as here in
the second instance, we must be careful not to construe thus,
'Kyw rovro av eveyxaiixi ev rots fiaqi/rara tpipouaiv avrb, which
would weaken the idea, (I should be one of those, who suffer
the most,) and which is incorrect, as is evident from the in
stances, where this construction is inadmissible, as in ev toIV
itpairoi.This ev rots is used even before nouns fern. ; Thuc.
'Ev toiV <n\ttarai vrtts Trap' avrots kyivovro, and, 'H ardats ev rots
mpwm Eys'vETo.
ol dn.<pt, or ol wept, with an aceus. ; ol iptpi "Awrov, commonly
means not only those who were about or with him, but,
Anytus with his followers, party, &c. ; ol d/Aipi a\riv, Thales
and other wise men of his time, (Plato Hipp. Maj. 2.)
Attic Writers employ this indefinite expression, even when
they chiefly allude to only one individual, leaving it at the
same time for some reason undecided and in the dark,
whether they mean that individual alone. Thus ol a/xp Eu$u<p$ova, (Plato Crat. 36.) means only Euthyphro, but hints at
the same time that there may be others of his opinion and
party : ol dfttpl i/xiaroxXix, (Menon. towards the end,) like
the French, ' les Themistocle ;' again ol irspl Ke'xgoara, (Xen.
Memor. 3, 5, 10.) Cecrops only, but the obscurity of the old
tradition seems to be hinted at.
t! /xt) Sia, with the accus., literally if not for, had it. not been for ;
Ka! dn&avtv av e<
5ia rov xuva, he would have perished,
had it not been for his dog. See also 139. Obs. 4.
(jLtraZu, among, between. This particle commonly stands as ad
verb before a participle in this manner : /xsra^v iripiTtarut,
while walking; iMrafcu Semvovvra ttpoveuoev avrov, he killed
him, ivhile he was at supper ; (Lat. inter ambulandum, inter
cwnandum.)
evexo!, often means as far as concerns ; "Avbv rov rikiov, Ivsxa rat
triquv aur^uv vv% av v>v &el, without the sun it would always
be night, as far as the other constellations are concerned.
SYNTAX.
413
414
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
415
41G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
to fail, which imparts to the verb in the part, an idea of
unavoidablencss and rapidity. <D&avEjv in this sense occurs
only in the opt. with av ,s, and that a.) instead of the im-
SYNTAX.
417
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the object, which is wanting with na&iv, were to be supplied,
it might be, "On /xaStov ouk ofS" o, ti, ritvyjav oix. e?)(,ov. Not
that the complete idea of ptaJhiv, such as we have just de
veloped it, was in the mind of every speaker, who used the
expression ; this or something similar only gave rise to it,
and 3t n*a&wv became a more passionate on. Compare the
remaining passages in Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. 30. Com
pare also in Herod. 3, 119. TiW '%ovsx yvciiMnveiXei/,
x. t. >.., which is nothing but a gentler t wSovsa, how do
you come to think so? 14
fe'goiy also appears redundant in some expressions, but always
denotes a vehemence of purpose, not altogether free from
blame; 'YwEjSaXEv lat/rov (pEgwv n^a/oir, he pit himself
(rashly) into the power of the Thebans, (^Eschin. 482. ;)
Ely rovro tyiqav Teeqii^nae rot irpdy/xxnc, he has (irresistibly)
brought affairs to that point, (474.) Compare Herm. ad
Viger. n. 228. 15
14 As it is obvious that the three upbraiding expressions, rl ix*">
fLt&iv, are
essentially the same, and must be resolved in the same manner, the most natural
explanation of on (uLn is that, which, without stripping on of its connective nature,
treats paSi*, when considered alone, in the same way as i%ar alone. This is the
reason why I cannot alter my statement, notwithstanding all which has been since
said of this expression, and which I have duly weighed. Were I to make any alter
ation, it would be simply this, that I would no longer attempt to fill the chasm after
in fu&in, but should barely observe that in such phrases as ri 1%** tmrtifiut ; v!
/tx9in r(triyfa^*i roZro ; nothing was thought of but the moral power of the par
ticiple, and no particular regard paid to the grammatical connection, so that the same
turn of expression was adopted in other combinations, in which it is not exactly
grammatical, but to which the same energy was to be imparted, which distinguishes
those interrogative expressions.
1 [ " il>>y irifiirrwi. Taylob thinks that the participle fiem in such cases
implies a change of things to the contrary, effected by the contrivance of the speaker,
and thus it may be translated contra. He refers to . 45. Tav Si ,- yr.v fiyi/tmut
afiti*
anSnxi BnQetlat;, Ab Atheniensibus ab/alum impcrium Thebanis e contra
deluiit : 46. H^ori/*t^i ty'ioui roy xlv^vvov UTetgccrxtva/ t55 to\u : 33. TlaXir vixt Qtfo'u-sves
lit rm invrtu Quffiv, and, 'Aitxnffxs 'h/irrr.. xaxiih* a-xti^as, L*'&el\iv lauroi $iauv
&i)xtete. He particularly refers to Luciah Hermol. Zxrouvrnj yag rtfiZv, o'lrms aXrthuourn/ It QiXoraQliz, ffv rovro vrpox^vcLgx;, tl&xxf Qtgur rots Ztru'txoif. VlGER 6, 2, 5.
improperly considers Qifm as redundant iu this passage of j95schines, but adds :
Ubi tamen notandum ett participium illud, nescio quam verbo significationem addere,
aliquando VolunTaBU, aliquando pr.kcipitis, aliquando fatalis impetus. This
participle, as well as ayur and lx.tn, are only so used with verbs signifying motion
towards tomething ; and when tpivyut and tji^ are so used, celerity of movement is
indicated. See the Notes on ViaBO."
E. H. B.'s Select Orations of Demosthenes, p. 98.
So ViRo. /En. 8, 609.
At Venus athereos inter dea Candida nimbos
Dona FJEBEXS ADKBAT.
E. H. B ]
8VNTAX.
419
420
A GRF.EK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
421
same form ; as, for instance, the neuter xvv.x<>ov becomes fern.,
ayju-ats-^ tan -h Trgoy^dpvws avrov, and the proposition may be
inverted, 'Hv 5e ri ir^oyjli^nais avrov bav/jt-sc^ Znv\, and thus the
same form was adopted in other phrases, which are not so easily
resolved, or are incapable of being resolved ; 'AXV iv f xvtov
ojtf.os vvepQvw oaos, (Aristoph. Plut. 750.) EWev avT& <n\t7tx.
oux, and the like.But if the adverb as is the relative, the same
adj. assume the adverbial form ; xvuxaiiv (eViv,) as &\ios ysyovs,
becomes Savuxolas as a&Xior yiyo-jsv, and in the same way virtp<pvs as, and the like. This is confirmed by the unaltered form
really occurring, Herod. 3, 113. 'Airify1$***ioto* if wiv.
6. There is another kind of attraction, when to such words as
o?Sa, dxovco, Xiya, if they be not followed by an arms, wilh the
infin., the subject of the following verb is joined as object in the
accus. OrS* 7?iv, onom eW, instead of olox, ovoavt eV! yv, I know
how great the earth is, Aristoph. Pac. 603. E! 6ov>.eoS' xxovaxt
ttivS1, otcws xitaKero, for dxovaxi, oitas noe d.nu'KzTo: see also an
instance above 138. Obs. and ad Plat. Menon.21.This attrac
tion is very different from those mentioned above, since there are
actually two propositions, and we only have, instead of the casus
of the one, which is in its natural connection, a new casus, which
must be mentally supplied with the first word. Yet yv is evi
dently attracted by ol$x, and thus two propositions, which were
merely in juxta-position, become as it were interwoven, so as to
be nearly one proposition, especially when they are placed in the
following order, T^v buian es-Iv EiSs'vai, Xenoph. to know how
great the earth is ; tovtov oW e! ytyovev $Seiv, Dernosth. Mid.
' of him, I did not even know that he existed.'
7. It is likewise an attraction, when certain cdj with so-tiv, in
stead of being in the neuter, also receive the subject of the follow
ing verb as their subject. This is most striking with Sixxtos: for
A/xaiov euTiv ejae tovto h^xttui, becomes Sixaior si/j-t tovto irgarTEiy, (I am just in doing this, for, it isJust, it is right for me to
do so /) Demosth. pro Cor. Tovtov Tr,v x'nlxv ovros <m Slxxios e%eiv,
it is just that the blame should fall on him, Cyrop.i, 1, 20.
Alxaios it avTixag/^Eff&ai riiMt, it is just that you should do us a
favor in turn. The case is the same with aO-ios, 5, 4, 20. "AO-tol
ye ixitroi eit/juv rov yeytYniAtvov irpayitaros tovtov, (of a mishap
occasioned by imprudence,) dvoXxvaat ti dyxSh, to /^abtTv, x. t. X.
422
A GREER GRAMMAR.
8YNTAX.
423
ToiJraiv ixaarof oiout' ettiv, luv sir Ixafrwiv .toiv noXiun, rovt tkovs, ots
tfcvri rav izurcJv nokiruv TtqoTxa %uve'Am c5 av f&ov\wra.i, rourovs
vreQovsiopitfi ^t/veivau. Here the toutoiv in the beginning refers
to some sophists named before, and both the process of the
speech and its emphasis required the new period to commence
with, Any one of them is capable of persuading young people,
&c. The following proposition must then have had the infin.
wei'&eiv to correspond to oioar eartv. But farther on, the mention
of the young people being interpolated with circumstances ren
dered necessary to establish a contrast, (the young people, who
are at liberty to have a gratuitous intercourse with any of their
fellow citizens, whom they like,) the Writer forsakes his first con
struction, of which the grammatical junction is now obscured, and
finds it more natural to refer with a second rourovs to the ve'oit,
and to commence a new construction, rourovs vsfoovaii. e. those
sophists persuade the young people, &c.
3. We will take another example from Plato Pheedr. 17.
(p. 207. Heind.) Toiavra. yaq o 'epois ittiS&lxvvrai' $varu%ouvras m.ev
a fj.rj \i)<nm rots StXkois "juxqi^ei, dvizpa ttoieT vo/iiieiv' evruypvvrats Se
xal ra (Jj-h vi&ows a|ia itap' kxslvm Eltalvov dvayxscQet rvy/JoiW. such
are the effects of love, it makes the unfortunate consider as sad,
that which gives no displeasure to othersthe Writer now wishing
emphatically to establish the contrast, (it forcibly causes even in
different things to be praised.) But the logical order in that case
required the second proposition to begin with, Flag' evrvxovvruv
Sethis, however, would have destroyed the symmetry, At/art/Xovvrxs /xevmap1 tvrvyovvrtav 5ethe Writer, unwilling to sacri
fice either symmetry or emphasis to logical order, retains the
accus. ivrw/j>X)vra.s, which the analogy of the first proposition
demanded, as an accus. absolute, and refers by means of itap' exsivuv to the same object to be enabled to close energetically with
htaUov dvayxi^st rvyyjivuv. It is only to us, who are not accus
tomed to such transitions from one construction to another, that
such a double reference seems obscure.
4. The motive of the following short anacoluthon is still more
obvious; (Plato Alcib. I. p. 134.) *XL yd% v eipvaia. fx.lt r wii
o QovKtrax, voDv Se ix-h ejM1> T' e'*f ovijifixfaiiv ; Here two propo
sitions are dependent on one relative, which each requires to be
in a different casus ; to put it twice (&S /aevos St) would have
impaired the symmetry and distinctness of the speech. The
424
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
SYNTAX.
425
III. Inversion.
1. Inversions and involved constructions are on the whole far
less common in Greek, even with Poets, than in Latin. In some
instances, however, the inversions even in prose are more strained.
This arises from the anxiety, peculiar to Attic Writers, to place
together the words of one or two propositions, which resemble,
oppose, or refer one to another. Thus, for instance, they would
say, riavnwv yip nasi irivrcs ej^&kttoj eiui Ka^7)Jdnoi 'P&i/xaioir,
for TravTsr K. itivruii syftiaroi e!<ti itdai 'P.Plato Phadr. 141.
Tloixi'kri /u.ev sroix/Xour ^vy^ xai iravaqixoviovs SiSouj- \iyovs, air).ovf Se
x<n\y. To attain this, they even sever the article from its noun,
K\<jyjjvii Tti\tv Try avrbs aiirovand prep, from their casus, ev
aXhore aXXr), for aWore ev ciXXri : 7ra' olx.
iSehoviD, Od. e.
155.
2. Inversions are also caused by the very natural endeavour to
enounce first that part of a proposition, on which the stress is to
be laid ; Demosth. Olynth. III. p. 37. To niv vqSroviyammov
r,t irupa. Toy Syj/Aoy TiSv aXKuv Ixavru xal Ti/Lcijr xxi a.pyr,s xai dyzSov
Tivor lAtTotkctfitiv, vSv Se ruivavr'm. Here the dat. txiaru is depen
dent on dyxTrifiTov rfv, (formerly each of the other citizens was
highly pleased, when he obtained honors from the people, now it
is quite the reverse,) but nxpi rov 1-nn.ov, which is dependent on
m.etsiXj!/3eTv, has the greatest stress, and therefore comes before it.
3. Thus the emphasis sometimes removes the adverb, which
should come after the relative, before it, NDv iti a. eXtyov, ichat I
said before, Plato Euthyd. 288. which sometimes may cause
ambiguity, Theocr. 10, 17. e%eis- itikqn uv tiriSvixtis, where itaKai
does not belong to ty&is, but to lnt%(ni.ns, (compare Spalding ad
Demosth. Mid. 30.)
4. In the following instance obscurity is avoided by the inver
sion, Demosth. 01. III. towards the end, 'Ai<2 vyLxs/xti sragaj<yE~v rris rd%eus, w v/mi ol Wgoyovoi rris d^errii /xerd noWwv xai
xaXwy xivSuvwv xmadixsw xare\tirov, here the gen. rrts apery; is
dependent on the other gen. ri%eus, (raj-is- Tr,r d^ryts, the order of
virtue,) but both together would have created confusion.
5. But it frequently happens that we perfectly feel that a pro
position has gained by being inverted, though we cannot elucidate
it by any of the above observations. Take for example that
beautiful passage of Plato Phcedr. 10. Tlaireq ydq ol rd iretvuvra
426
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
PYNTAX.
427
428
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
xosi o nxvrui ytkoibrxroi, xxi tov ximx rri( 'Hgiyovnr xvriyxytv,
but what is the most laughable ofall, he has even raised
vp the dog of Erigone, Lucian Deor. Cone. 5.
APPENDIX.
iytfx, market-place,
'Ayx'ms, ('">)
h?iir%nt, prattler,
'Adjra, JHincrva,
Amixs, jEneas,
HxxvSx, thorn,
aftiXXx, contest.
if(X, ploughedfield,
ifx'Xlx, busineu,
yxXr,, weasel,
y*, earth,
yXurax, tongue,
Mix, opinion,
f^Srit, viper,
%vtn, girdle, J
i^ija, dag,
SxXxrru, sea,
Si^x, (,) door,
Kixperllm, (?,)
xtfxXtt, head,
xXitrrni, thief,
*'ti 9'rli
xtirh{, judge,
xrirhs, founder,
Xxifx, lane,
xintn, (5,) grief
fix^tirhs, disciple,
(tiXim, bee,
FIRST DECLENSION.
pAftftrm, care,
m;j,, (,-,)
ft-ti^x, share,
tlxn, (I,) victory,
wfupn% bride,
i(*iSt3f,(x{, gen. x,fowlef,
nifirjif, Persian,
TXiuea, side,
*ixrr,i, pugilist,
info*, (,) gate,
f'Z*. root,
nm, shade,
2xi/9>!S, (p,) Scythian,
vTiyn, roof,
ffrtx, portico,
rtyxifx, globe,
ffipZ^x, hammer,
rx'Xtl, leisure,
rurnfix, preservation,
rxuixt, steward,
ng'K, artist,
Sx, (,) wood,
piX'i*, friendship,
Xx,a,joy,
XXxhx, upper garment,
X^C) country,
tux*, soul.
SECOND DECLENSION.
Feminines in .
1. Besides the trees, (see 32. 3.) the following plants,
It /3<0X, or fivfiXif, and
i, i, TxTv^a;, papyrus,
* The lists of examples for declensions and conjugations are arranged in alpha
betical order, that the learner [may exercise his own judgment, which of the rules
stated in the Grammar lie is to apply to each word.
430
APPENDIX.
h xixxst, kermes, but i xixxtt, any berry, and especially the tcarltl terry of
the kermes,
rx<"">s, rush,
spikenard, fafanf, cabbage.
431
APPENDIX.
LIST OF WORDS TO BE DECLINED,
ti pnXos, apple-tree,
iyyiXt, messenger.
fuXifat or piXutfits, lead,
itrtt, eagle,
ftifim, small part,
contest,
tiros, south-wind,
iSXn, reward of a contest,
vX, wood,
h afiTiXos, vine.
Sixes, house,
a&oefjpos, man,
trtutin, young child,
igyvMt and
polo*, rose,
aoyve,e, silver,
triongtf, iron,
i'fym, work,
ffTxfffiof, spasm,
tops, east-wind,
<rroa.Tos, army,
Zfyvfos, west-wind,
bull,
iftanav, garment,
Qayiitxn, medicine,
In, violet,
h ifttyis, beech-tree,
xa^xivos, crab-fish,
Qodt'hv, load,
KMrriTipt, tin,
X*Xxis, brass,
xi(xns, cherry-tree,
X^ocris and
x'vrnes, wild olive-lree,
Xior'ui, gold.
/tfact, apple,
THIRD DECLENSION.
List of the Words, in whichthc Syllablepreceding the termination ofthe Casus, t' long*,
in is and us those which have a J in their inflection,
yi xyriftts, shin-bone,
h ->pis, vault, arch,
xgnsris, pedestal,
fi*>.,l',s, barrier,
f'tpavi;, radish,
xtefis, sea-crabfish,
^*$is, little stone,
xnxts, moisture, juice,
iayt/f, doll :
xrtkis, blot,
xXriic, (Ion. for xXtts,) key,
those which have a
ri HyXis, cloves ofgarlic,
ri ft'ifus, cord, siring,
i Ki{, Carian :
8 Teachers must here pay a particular attention to the accent with respect to loth
its place and its mark according to the general rules, and to those stated 38.
432
APPENDIX.
in , gen. rti,
ri f(>*(, well,
ri rTietf, suet :
in {, gen. xn,
/jxij, /5X*, simpleton,
Z, tiller of the rudder,
i 3 . ; tl. armour for the breast,
eu^a^, filth,
i tit t~. hawk,
^.'t-. impostor,
i xifiui-, hind of dance,
bettetZ, Phteacian,
i XufyaQ, pike, voraciousfish,
i "J, insect,
n
S/ihinr.
>'. Pf&j, shuddering,
n i\, wave,
i /. j. branch,
. /3i,u/5i*, whirlwind,
i e k \, chervil,
i A;, partridge,
.,ti vffTtthz.
1 '. J- -,, branch
V/ III ofthe palm-tree,
i
Phoenician, palm-tree, purple-colur,
I :.'u.',:l. silk-worm,
I
sea-bird,
i Sjj'Sy!*, pestle,
*r>S"li herald:
in J, gen. yiy
*i
grape-stone,
in pant, scourge, h Tip^t*, bubble, I r'ttri^, cricket,
i v. ,y y.~':_. Cuckoo :
in I, gen. x't, i
crumb :
in gen. rtt,
i lip,
are the names or some insects,
i fty, twig of the willow-tree,
I y'v-i', vulture,
I yfl\f; griffin, gryphon.
WORDS TO BE DECLINED.
The tatters before the termination of the cases, which are not known ffrtri tnt rules
given in the Grammar, are stated in a parenthesis.
The vowels a, /, v, before the termination of the cases, are short; [thf Words, in
which they are long, are in the preceding List.
1. Examples of words, which have a consonant before the ter
mination of the cases :
i etyxui, elbow,
c fyixvv, (t,) dragon,
v) ittiwr, (#,) nightingale,
ii'EXXai, (3,) Greece,
i an(, (,) air,
'"EA.Xr, Greek,
i >3i{, (i,) pure air,
ii iX.Tii, (S,) hope,
*
(>->) 9al>
i t(n, (5,) strife,
i u>fyui, (it,) statue,
e lr.
(ovt,) servant,
i |<wv, (9f) axle of a wheel,
i
ipas,
(rr,)
teather-strap/
auXag, (*,) furrow,
(f,)
ladder,
i fcl<
cough,
i x\*i, twig,
v'f*"> ("ri) "Id man,
xi^oi, (3,) helmet,
i
(<r,) griffin,
e
xrtif, (if,) Comb,
iaif, (t,) feast,
i xvXj\, (*,) chalice, cup,
ri lit, (J,) torch,
to xvua. billow,
APPENDIX.
433
(x,)fM,
fi rifl, (,) flesh,
fi nji. Siren,
to trre/m, mouth,
fi 2tu|, (7,)
* sf>'?S> (y>)
A T,'{1/f, (9,)
i pSi/, louse,
fi pxty, (/?,) vein,
fi
(y,)flame,
0 tpatfi, thief,
to Qui, (r,) light,
1 X"*-"^! (0>) '')
c xt'rl*'yt winter, storm,
fi ^iXiS**, (0,) swallow,
i x*', goose,
fi x3"i ()) tar/A, ground,
"
(>) "o,
^Xac/ni/f, (5,) military garment,
fi
eye, face.
2. Examples of such words, as have a vowel before the
ter.
mination of the cases, and are more or less contracted.
Ta a&ag, flowerj
I ittlt, mule,
0 fiirgvt, bunch ofgrapes,
to ops, mountain,
ro ytns, race, family,
fi o\ffis, face, sense of seeing,
* yhvs, jaw,
fl sri/3v, persuasion,
to cx'i-ra.;, covering,
a trtXsxpf, axe, ( 51.)
it fyvf, oak,
to rrtvt^i, pepper,
0 iTTtusj horseman,
fl v'itvs, pine,
r xouut, gum,
fi voinfis, poetry,
v Aij-ri, Latona,
fi v^u^is, action, deed,
e ficams, prophet,
a rotx"*, ear of corn,
0 pus, mouse,
fi Qvo-is, nature.
ADJECTIVES.
Examples in or of two and three terminations, to apply the rules
of 60. 2. and 4.
All Adjectives, which are not of two terminations by any fixed rule, may be assumed
to have the three terminations.
ayettnTOi, beloved,
right,of the right side, (dexter,)
udtx.',; . Unjust,
SjjAaf, manifest, evident,
*SXms, wretched,
hetk&ot, ornamented with precious stones,
afia^ofj invincible,
ttcttpetiee, diverse, different,
mfyof, worthy,
ViKOLiaS, just,
m^'irtpos, what is on the left hand,
2i/*Ttff, possible,
tXatpfo, light, nimble,
^affiXiKU, kingly^ royal,
iftrdg^f, red,
yivgyixos, belonging to agriculture,
tuxouiioi, opportune, seasonable,
yvfivoj, naked,
^nXorvtoi, jealous,
2F
431
APPENDIX.
fifiiyv/aaf, half-naked,
Uxttuunn, wonderful,
Si7s, divine,
Sjj^it, warm, hot,
Btfirof, mortal,
JSf, proper, peculiar,
h(is, holy, sacred,
xxSafSt, clean, pure,
xanot, common, general,
XaXts, loquaciom, talkative,
Xitts, tmooth,
Xuixit, white,
futXaxit, toft, tender,
filvos, alone,
liw, strange,foreign,
c^vSvpcf, irascible,
straight,
rtXvtyiyot, voracious,
*(i$vfut, willing,
nftvlf, venerable,
exXnsit, hard, rough,
rsfts, wise,
erxms, rare, scarce,
rrtiw, narrow,
nXxirign, miserable, harassing,
rvfXii, blind,
fiXinxrn, loving children,
%*xit, lame.
APPENDIX.
435
syllable MED. alone announces a middle voice, its aor. and its
flit, are made after the same tenses in the act.
6. All verbs are considered regular, of which the forms conform
to the above rules, without attending to their signif., or any ano
maly in their signif. Hence we have admitted, not only the
deponents of the pass, and med. form, ( 113. 3.) but also those
verbs, in which some single tenses deviate from the form in point
of meaning. This, however, has been noticed in all cases of some
importance.
7. The statement-fut. med.immediately after the act. de
notes that such a verb takes (according to 113. 4.) its fut. from
the middle voice, though in an act. sense.
8. The expressionpass, takes the aalludes everywhere to
the perf. and aor. 1., but is used only of verbs, where it is not a
matter of course, ( 98. and 100.)
VERBA BARYTONA.
iyslkkm, I adorn ; Med. I strut about.
UkXc/tin,dep. med.Ileap, see 101. Obs.2.
ayy'iWu, I announce.Med.aor. 2. act.
and compare Anom.
and med. are little used.
i/tfiXvm, I blunt.
uyiUw, 1 assemble.Redupl. Att.Med. i/ui/Su, I alternateMed.
*7Xui l'tranyle, trans.; Med./ choke, ipXXy*, I milk.
intrant.
ip.it*, 1 ward off.Perf. is wanting.
Sin, contr. of iill*, I sing, fut. med.
Med.
afyoiZu, I collect.
irw, / complete, finish, 05. Obs. 3.
iSifti, I play, sport.
Pass, takes the a.Med.
Hwra, I light, kindle,
u'ik'.'Coi, I use ill, mutilate.
aW.aaijj.ui, TTefittt, dep. med. 1 speah ambi ifrn, 1 bind together, Med- / attack,
touch.
guously or enigmatically.
aflat, I water, moisten. Pass, only pres.
m1(n, I lift up, see 101 . Obs. 2. and com
and imperf.
pare Amn.-^MlD,
itm, act. and pass. dep. I rush out, sally ifftorroi and iop'o^u, I join, adapt,
Med.
out ; Att. eteau or ttrrv.
BiV^i/re, / shame ; pass. I am ashamed. iai*, I draw up, goes like <>iw-Med.
ifX*, I rule overM ED. I begin.
See $ 101. Obs. 8.
it*, I hear, only pres. and imperf.Aug autTxl^ifia.i, dtp. med. I embrace, greet,
ment 84. Obs. 2.
aavx'i^u, I palpitate, struggle.
ixovu, I hear, listen to, fut. med. perf. iav^ixT*, I dart lightning.
ixqxoa, plutq. nxsixtsu,
85. 2. 3.) &&%*, 1 walk, fut. med.
Pass, takes the a, perf'. past, with $i*Tu, I plunge, charact. <ppass, aor. 2.
out redupl.
l&ctXX*, / milk.
>
iXu/.utu, to thout for joy, fut.
92. fcnaau, ttu, I cough.
Obs. 1.
fsuigifuti, dep. med. Iforce, pass, see ^113.
Obs. 6.
ikiif*, I anoint, perf. 85. 2.Med.
ixxitr*, 7Ti, J change.Pass. aor. 2.
jikaxru, 1 hurt, charact. /3.past, aor, 2.
2F2
43G
APPENDIX.
APPENDIX.
437
otofedt^tv, / name,
trXlZv, I arm, furnish with arms, Med.
Ifiyu, / stretch forth, reach, redupl. Alt.
Med.
lf%", / mark bounds or limits, Med.
sfvrest, ttu, / dig, redupl. Att. Med.
trxilivu, / educate, Med.
fretXmtu, / wrestle, pass, takes the
vaXXu, / brandish, pass. aor. 2.
vaveu, / sprinkle, fut. au, Med.
vttTttgeu, see the Anom.
txuu, /put an end to, pass. aor. 1. 100.
Obs. 1.Med.
ruStv, see the Anom.
xt'.^u, / pierce, pass. aor. 2.
*lfiTu, / send, perf. 97- Obs. 1. perf.
pass. 98. Obs. 8. Med.
mtc/iai, / am poor, only the pres. and
imperf.
rsfitst, / accomplish, aor. 1. 101. 4.
Med.
/ press.
rjmw, /believe.
xXioru, ttu, / form, fashion, fut. ru,
Med.
tx'ixu, /plait, twine, pass. aor. 2.Med.
trxitu, / wash, 101.9.
mlyu, / suffocate, trans,fut. med.pass.,
/ choke, inlrans. aor. 2. $ 100.
Obs. 6.
irnfivu, / transport, conduct, pass. / travel
by land.
rsfll^tt, / procure, Med. / acquire,
x/tttffffbv, ttu, I do, act, find myself, has
everywhere the long, $ 1. Obs. 4.
perf. 1 . / have dune, perf. 2. trtr^iy, / have found myself, (see, how.
ever, Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr.)
Med.
Tf>i<ru, / am becoming, only act.
r^u, I saw, pass, takes the i.
crrxiu, / stumble, trip.pass, takes the r.
xrwau, / shrink through fear.
tffTtecu, / pound, fut. eu.
XTvetru, Ifold, Med.
ttiju, / spit, pass, takes the <r,
m$u, / putrefy, (i,) pass. / rot.
fdrru, / sew, stitch.
fi*u, / incline to.
fi*ru, see Anom.
438
APPENDIX.
APPENDIX.
4guw, / dance,
xtfi&i 1 have ne'd of, wish for, only the
pres. and imperf. (compare Anom.
Xt'"y I anoint, pan. takes the r, Med.
^xXXx, I play on the guitar, ting,
^tciv, I touch, pat. takes the tr.
439
VERBA CONTRACTA.
poxv, J cry out, bawl, 95. 5.fut. med.
1' AycLTiiat, I love,
fcouxoXiu, Ifeed herds,
ayvoi*, I know not, fut. med.
fyovrcZa, I thunder,
iiixlu, / do injustice,
athioft*,. pass, and dep. med. lam ashamed, yiXetu, I laugh, fut. med.the a. is short
in the conjug.pass, takes tr,
fut. utfixi, perf. and aor. pass, take
ytvveiv, I beget, Med.
the t,
^Taiiiw, act. and pass. dep. I consume,
nSfUtrsst, I stain with blood,
spend,
alaiv, see Anom.
Itfyiaftxi, dep. med. I take by the right
alriv, I demand, Mr. I).
hand, receive hindly,
,V<*V*., dep. med. I criminate,
ixUftni, dep. med. I heal, cure, fut. Ire $ta>, see Anom.
ItiX'm, I hurt, Med.
/mi, perf. takes the tr,
'cr./-'-'v, I make known,
etxaXav^tai, Ifollow,
iicurau, (no compound,) / arbitrate, past.
axgtfia*, I know accurately, Med.
I live or dwell in a certain place,
axgoetopeu, Med. / hear, listen,
augm. 86. Obs. 6.
aXtu/iai, pass. dep. I stray,
hxxmai, (no compound,) Iserve, waiton,
iXy'm, I am in pain,
augm. $ 86. Obs. 6. Med. with the
iXetxei, I thrash, 95. 5.
same sign if.
iftatu, 1 mow, Med.
i/ifurfinTim, I dispute, am of a different 'hr\ -/.u, I am thirsty, 105. Obs. 5.
"iauXov, J reduce to slavery, Med.
opinion,augm. before,
ittau, (no compound,) pass, with thefut. 3{, / do, perform, different from the
Anom. i.doarTKM,
med. I am grieved,
iuvrvx'ia*, I am unhappy,
alii*, I value, think worthy,
itravrx*, J meet, fut. med.augm. in the laai, I let, leave, augm. u,
lyyvav, I pledge, Med. / make myself
middle,
responsible for another,
nr. (no compound,) / deceive,
tyxuotv, 1 deliver into any one's hands,
itruX'm, (no compound.) I threaten,
augm. (> 86. Obs. 5.
Kfaefttti, dep. med. J pray,
ikiw, I pity,
agiSfi'to/, I count, number, Med.
a^xiu, I suffice,i in the conjug.pass. ifisi, 1 vomit, in the conjug.redupl.
Alt.pass, takes r,
(with the same signif.) takes the t,
httvriaep.ui, dep. pass. I oppose, resist,^
apUficti, dep. pass. I deny,
augm. before,
&eiti, J plough, retains the t in the conjug.
t.w;,st/. dep. pass. Irevolve in mind,
redupt. All. pass, without r,
augm. 86. Obs. 5.
a^reiv, I suspend, fasten, Med.
\:<y ~/,\u>. I molest, augm. 86. Obs. 6.
afx'tu, I exercise, practise,
ixiBtift'ui, I desire, augm. 86. Obs. 5.
aixiu, I play on theflute,
i(i"> see Anom.
(iiiti, see Anom.
440
APPENDIX.
APPENDIX.
**iuv, I leap, fill. med.
T>.aidw, I mislead, pass. I wander about,
TXsav'ttr'tu, I am eagerfor gain,
nt'ui, act. and vied. 1 labor, toil, fut.
viru and tffu,
rrsfttj, Ifurnish with wings,
Taik'tv, I sell,
['{J*, I cause to take root, pass. I take
root,
nfuiiv, J designate, Med.
ciyiu, I keep silence, fut. med.
rnitfuu, dep. med. J eat, dine,
twiti*, J am silent, fut. med.
ffxi^rttu, I leap, hop,
fffidcai, see Anom.
esrxu, I drag,the a is short in the
conjug.pass, takes the r, Med.
ffrtQavoot, I crown, Med.
cv\uu, I plunder,
ffip^iyeiat, I swell with rage,
rik'tv, Ifinish, retains i in the conjug.,
pass, takes the <r. Med.
441
442
APPENDIX.
positivus,) /xetoj^, participle, priixa, verb, sitlppnixa, adverb, irpo&e<Tir, preposition, avili^ixos, conjunction. {Interjections are com
prised among adverbs.)
yhos aguEvixov, bri\uxov, oi/Serepov, masculine, feminine, neuter
gender, dp&ixos Ivixor, Jui'xbr, tiKdSuvtixos, singular, dual, plural
number; xXims, declension, icrdxus, case ; ipri or idSzTa, or also
ovo/xaffTiJcri, nominative, yevixij, genitive, Sonx^, dative, ainxrixri,
accusative, xXwnxw, vocative, itruans ic\ayixi, casus obliqui.
ovoy.0, anoKiKviximy or aitoKvrov, also awXoi/v and &etixov, the
positive, avyx.piTvx.ov, comparative, vitip'SiTixov, superlative.
ovZvylx., conjugation, which in Greek means only the different
classes of verbs, which are conjugated alike ; ex. gr. the verbs
K **> i ? : what we call to conjugate and conjugation, is injSreek
the same as declining, xX/veiv, xKiais.Siixa, tkema, see 92. 6.
itpboojnoc, persons.
av%ri<sis ovKkapixw xal %%wixri, augmentum syllab. et temp. d\aSfwXaffiaupiof, reduplication.
Sia&suir, the nature of the verb, in consequence of which it is a
prifj-a EVEgynTixov, itahrinxbt, /ae'<tov, activum, passivum, medium,
aiiroTtxhes, intransitivum, aXXowaSsr, transitioum.
tyx\l<sus, moods ; bptanxvi, indicative, vnoraxTixr,, conjunctive,
Evxnxri, optative, Trpouraxrixri, imjierative, aTiapiy-tpxros, infinitive.
^pomi, tenses ; hearais, present, na.%oiyjriy.ims, prccterite, y.iW<vv,
future; ita.pa.xiiy.ws, perfect, wagstto; rixor, imperfect, vnspauvriXixbr, plusquarnperfectum, dipiaros, aorist, (itapirxais, duration,
extension, avvreXna, consummation, perfection, momentaneous
action.)
auvbsan, composition, nx^i'^isis, juxtaposition, jrapocavv^erx,
words derived from compounds.
APPENDIX.
443
I. >v
yap
ST
v.
TV
TO
odx
Tta^a.
yfrT yy
tsri
Hip
)S yaq
etti
ft) y
*
T
y
8
nr.
T
SO
if
>e VP'
xarx
(J
TfO
TW
TtSv
T
/XE&
G
car
fWV
ftev
G>
yutnos
2^ 5*
row
/AET
y
r
(1*T
THE END.
Ttt/
til
Iff
&m
OJT
JV5 H
TOO
tj)
iro
at
(*
t>
ft
TO
too*
XElpaiXaioy
ri
oTov
hrl
VI.
V
V
TTtf
OVTOS
$>
Se
IXMV
MTI
cufb *iro
C
MM*
n
HHP Mretor,
if
fM)
1*81/
>^
(T
that
?)
a
oX>.
s
eX
IV.
HI.
X3.
oV^
yap
f
tr
\
ei
H
V
iu/ <T
*
ov
Ml
X*
reu
X"
a/
rats
6>
* It is by no means the author's intention that this and the following Index
should save to the learner the highly useful and necessary task of making himself
familiarly acquainted with every part of the Grammar, so as to be enabled readily
to turn to any subject, on which he is occasionally desirous of information. Either
Index is merely to afford to him a little assistance on topics, to which it is not easy
to assign a systematical place, and the finding of which, by means of the Table of
Content! in front of the work, might be attended with some difficulty.
440
Coronis, 15. p. 30
Correlative 78. p. IOC. ; J 1 16. p. 284
Dative with the pass., 134. p. 343
Declensions, originally identical, 50.
p. 75
their difference, 33. p. 49
Demomtrativa strengthened, J 79. P- 107
Deponens, 113. p. 232
Derivation of verbs from substantives,
o 119. p. 292.; of subst. 119. p.
295.; of adj. 119. p. 304
Desideraliva, 119. pp.294. 295
Diaresis, 15. p. 30
Dialects, 1. p. 1.; $16. p. 30; 27p. 39. ; 28. p. 42. ; 34. p. 52. ;
35. p. 54.; 116. p. 288. ; 117.
p. 289
Diastole, 15. p. 30
Digamma, 6. p. 14
Diminutives, i 119. p. 303. 304
Diphthongs, 5. p. 12
Double themes, 56. p. 73
Double letters, 21. p. 34
Doubling of consonants, J 21. p. 34. ;
95. p. 133
g of vowels, 528. p. 42. ; 105. p. 187,;
M 11 4. p. 260.
flpial instead of the plural, 33. p. 50.
Obs. 8
Syntax, 129. p. 329
Ejection of a consonant, 28. 'p. 42.
Elision in the middle of a word, 53. p. 71
on the meeting of words, 29. p. 45.
Obs. 10
Ellipsis, 151. p. 426
Epiccenum, 32. p. 48, Obs. 3
Epic, Epics, 1, pp. 2,6.; 114. p. 236.
237
Extension, 28. p. 43. Obs. 3
Feminine gender, see Dual
Final letters, 20. p. 37
Frequentativa, 119. p. 295
Futurum, derived from the conj. aor.,
139. p. 363. Note
Syntax, 139. p. 357
Futurum Atticum, 95. p. 134
Futurum secundum, 95. p. 135
447
448
GREEK INDEX.
The Numerals refer to the Paget.
A, *, Doricum, 52. fiXa.au, 134. Obt. 8, aarts, 243
, changed intoi, 187. Obt. 8
>>. in romp. 37- Obs. 3
, after i, i, f, 50. 84. 132
tyt it,, 403
a and o, before vowel in tu and n, 39. ctyWriru, 283
Obt. 2
aiixt7t, with accus., 333. Obs. 1.; with a
, for n, 39. Obs. 6.; 51. Obt. 2. ; 133.
double accus. 335. Obs. 4
OA*. 7
iii, *it), 289.; Its), 413. with the Edi
S, for n, 39. Obt. 6
tor's Note
, for i, 39. Obt. 9t with Note by the
inflect. 128. Obs. 1., derivation, and
Editor
signif. 178. 294. d
a, privativum, 310. ; with adj. fem. 85. iniiir, 75. Obs. 7
Obt. 5
'aSamrtf;, 20. OAs. 15
_ augmentative, 310. Obs. 11
'ASfi.S, 51. OAs. 1
a, quantity, 61. 62., in the accus. -aSir, -3i/y, (verbs,) 228
sing. 70. 52. Obs. 1., in the adj. <, pronunciation, 12
-at, elided, 46. OA*. 5. ; three similar
fem. 84
verbal forms in tu, 173. Hole 3
-, as adverb, 282. Obs. 3
ui and short, 25
aixTcs, 237
GRKEK INDEX.
449
450
GREEK INDEX.
QREEK INDEX.
451
u, with indie, and opt., 359. 392. ; u fiMt, Uixx,it>}.ru, &c, 115. 04J.6. J fx, Txk,
214. Note
385.; <; 3i fill', 391. Obi. 10.; u (A
iio, 412.; :.' yao, t* xai, 393.: use, XoXnre, 250. li'Aa/
iof, a, iy, 100
(nomina,) 52. 298. 301
tlx, lias, &c, opt., 174. 06s. 4
la-apii, 33. 06s. 3
Us), 393. ; iTf, 289. 06s. 1
signif., 234. Obi. 10
'Itsitx, lintrn, 289. ; after participles 374.
At, 205. Note 5
06s. 6.; compare 400
t"y, from lT/u, to go, 208
<Z9i, 24. Obt. 2
Xwtm, 140. 06s. 9
'ixi, for irtm, 290
u'xaai, augm., 118. Obs. 2
lixan, y, 37. 2G
'f' r,
fn 407
ir/Ji^f, 331. 06s. 7
i/*iy, 75. Obs. 7
217. 06s. 1
114. 06s. 1
in, instead of -m, 203
fy and p/iury, 339. Note 2
iTmm, rerbum omitted, 331. ; uyai, infm., ' ]' :': ;. "Ejttyjf, 51
Syntax, 41C; iW< and iirri, 206.;, i'/iiti;, 251. lijw
if ci, 329. ; itj, phrases, 41 1
ippdo'arai, 175
ifiiafiat, 133. ATote 8
i"<r>;, elliptical, 426
IfXuHmi with particip. fut, 415
lit, with persons, 382. 06s. 5
-irt (,) im (,) 05. J 46. 06s. 2
tVSa, 208
r, 374. 400
Irnmi and iffrajay, 199
lira, icrs/ra, after particip., 374
Im, 407 .
tin,, 393
Im, see flyou
(augm.,) 114. 06s. 1.; 143. Obs. 2 Ux*<ns, 94. 69 . .
l*,seeij, in unaltered before all the con
lTi{rf, 108. 06s. 2
sonants, 34. J 20. ; 36. 22
Vt{, 106. ; Syntax, 326.; with gen,
\xartaos, 'ixnSTHi, 106
339. 06s. 6
Xxaffriou, 283
1
tmrtsu, si, 52
1*3S;ki, 249 . Note 22
in, 401
tru/us, Syntax, 331. 06s. 7
Ixl7, txtrdty, Xxtiffi, 286
Sxi/vn, Utrwfi 288. 06s. 7
-iS and -r, (vocat.) 24
ixi^n{<'a, 33. 06s. 3. ; 262. Note 44
w, for m, 42. 06s. 5.; 136. 06s. 17.;
iTyX, 262. JVott 44
149. 06s. 1
to, instead of n in the fut., 134. Obs. 9
Sx>iXii3a, 143. 06*. 3
il, words compounded with, 117
U/u>s, 37. 06. 3
I/a) imut, 365. Obs. 2
t
241. a '
i, remains unaltered before r and f, 37. ti$v and ivS&c, 282. 288
06s. 3
iff, 42. Note
iy, instead of ils, Syntax, 382. 06s. 6.; -tin, (verba,) 178. 292
it nTf, 411
iXia, 18G. Note
\y}oTarSj 94. Note; iyW&rw, 203
lxui, "tXuv, Syntax, 416.417
iv'r>u'ji rivec ri, 334
tfny, prat., 21 1
ixa, 289. 412. ; omitted, see prspos.
i^Jy, accent, 280. Note 68
%nxn, before consonants, 289
i^vym, 148. 06s. 8
tu, 39. 06s. 10.; 53. 06s. 5.; 280. Note
f, fnrri, 289. 411
Ma, Mil, 287
57
S|, (V?,) 27. ; If and !x, 38. 288. ; with the -iu, 178.292. ; disyllable not contracted,
pass., 343. o 134
186. 06s. 2. ; instead of 226
it}tun, etc., 115. 06s. 9.; 215. AW*.
t|ef, 333. 06s. 3
JJim, 289. 411. j
378. 04s. 7
'ins, Syntax, 379
452
creek Index.
GREEK INDEX.
xxim, 282. Oi>. 5
xxi, (crasis,) 45. ; Syntax, 393. ; xxipxXx,
xxi xxw, 394. ; xxi is, 323. OAs. 2. ;
xxi ii, xx* ii, 393.; xxiii, 395. J xxi
txutx, 409. ; xx) /tiit, 403. ; xa/xtf,
104 ; xxi s, 392
xx'm, inflection, 134. Obs. 9
xxxlu, inflection, 135. Oil. 12. ; 222
xxXTx, 19. Obt. 10
xixis, 20. Obs. 14
xowcs, shortened, 289. Oil. 2. ; supplied,
344. Obs. 2
xxrxtxirlxi, passive, 234
xxTixyx <rrts xityxXns, 338
xi, xiv, 289. Obs.
xixXeQx, 142 Obs. 1
xixrnpat, 113. 04*. 16
xsXaive;, p'iXxs, 31. OAs. 2
x/jotf, 71. tj 54
xijjim;, 149. Obs. 2
xwf, 101. OAs. 2
-xi and -ju, 38. OAs. 2
xXS), 75- OS*. 8
x\xlv, inflection, 134, Obs. 9
-xXin,*, xXfff, 71
KXu/3j, 43. Obs. 11
xXitst, 151
xXSA, 218. Oil. 2
xvaa>, xvj)*, 186. Obs. 5
xgiXxvxi, 149. 06f. 2
uXmivw, with accus., 333. 131. OAs. 1
xmx, 19. Oil. 10
Kirn, numeral, 9
inflection, 129. Obs. 5
*{!{, 72
xj7, 77- OAs. 3
xpmy rx xfirix, 80
x^iiu, 151
Kfoxw, xfoxx, 75. Oil. 8
{, 129. Oil. 5
XTl/cW, 151
xcfxiwr, 73. Obs.
xuvrlgoy, 95. OAs. 2
xvftTt, with particip. 375. OAs. 8
x, dropped, 262. ; XiXupuu.
X5a, X2f, 64. 44. Obs. I
\xiixmi, with accus. 333. Obs. I. ; with
particip. 375. Obt. 8
XIXT9, 219.
453
454
UREEK INDEX.
OKEEK INDEX.
Iras, 406. ; tnt tb, 406
ofat, elliptically, 406 .
irm, with opt. 358. 04s. 3
, 288. 04s. 9
trim, irttiji, 105. 06s. 4
im, T;ii, 392. ; ?rj pn, 406
w, diphth. 13. 06*. 3
oi, six, tix, 38. ; Syntax, 384. ; ti before
a subst. 388. Obs. 3. ; tb pti, 357. 390.
06s. 6. ; tb pttn, 403. ; tbfiht ixxi, i
^iTsi iXXi, 404. ; sravi/, tu tftfn,
388. 06s. 2.; tb
Syntax, 406
J, see !
Syntax, 397. ; tbii A, 95. j
fa,
392
JJi!f, Wiif, 95.; tbhis imi tb, 390.
Obt. 8. ; ev2i ,, 407. i
sU*- b,
407
tbxin, Syntax, 401
oukouv, tbxtit, Syntax, 399
tit, 399
tut, 287
titixa, 45. ; Syntax, 392
titrtri, cSxtj, 287- ; Syntax, 401
-flyf, 0uvrdf, 60. 06*. 5
-mm, names of places contracted from
40. 04s. 17
Sri, Syntax, 397
tin, Syntax, 400
tuns, heut! 104. Obi. 3.; Syntax, (as
adv.) 324. ; phrases with, 409
tint, after particip. 374. Obt. 6
bx ^T'y '"X ""-i 1 405. 406
ov^j, 289
175. 04*. 3
em, forms lengthened with, 188. Obs. 11
(verbs,) 178.293.; in the 1 pers. not
contracted, 186
trnlut, t'i, 417
9aXit, before a consonant, 37. 06s. 3
trofi, shortened, 289. ; a-oji with the
pass. 343. ; ttiftt, 290. ; trofmi, 289.
OA*. 1
xtLattxiiLi.a., 282. 04s. 5
nifim, Syntax, 411
Syntax, 327. > trmra, every one, 336.
Obt. 3
van;, 64. 45. 04*. 1,
irniwim, with particip, 374. Oi, 3
455
45G
GREEK INDEX.
C5. 04*. 3
my, 89
t, see t
rS.kl.ic, Syntax, 408
rir, 45. 06*. 8
TVj * T8f, 82
r" and {*, 45. ; Syntax, 403
Titi TsJro, just so, 336. 04*. G
ri, 394
Tifadrai, 144. compare 110
rtym-w, 32- 04*. 2
ti<V, ti, 99
nltm, 151
nxufffeu, 136. 04*. 16
ti, raw, 105. 04*. 3
-ri**, verbal, 152. 344
*i, <t, , 100. 06*. 7
TtfUl, 71
rirXafto, &C., 220
riT;!f, 143. AW
titjShu, 149. 04. 2
TiTfjja, 143. 04i. 1
t5, 101. 06*. 2
-Tvts, rik*, rwf, subst. 298
-TWfwv, rf*,, 299
r, Syntax, 406. ; t< ^in, 403. ; rid with
aor. 354. 06*. 6. ; tj %g/isu aurm,
335. ; ti **, Tipxiin, 417
rixnn, Syntax, 354. 06*. 8
rU, Syntax, 326. 331. ; indirect, 326. ;
between article and subst. 319.
125. 06*. 1. ; omitted 331. 04*. 6
r!t,'ri, accent, 27. 04*. 2. ; quantity, 60.
06*. 3
ri, ri, Syntax, 322. a;?. 328. 04*. 1. ; ad
verbially, 321. 04*. 5. ; 328. 04*. 4. ;
joined with] the gen. 328. 04*. 2. ;
ri firi, reu /uii, 387* sqq. ; ra Ti, 406. ;
re H fiXytcrat, 428. ; ri fytw, instead
of iym, 328. 06*. 2.; ri Xtyi/utit, ri
nv mmreu, 336. 06*. 6. ; with the
infill. 361. ; ri xm ri, 323. 06*. 5
n), (crasis,) 45. Syntax, 402. ; rt). rt! tut,
&c, ibid.
rMtcci, 104. 06*. 2
-ris, verbal, 152.344
rmM, 288. Obs. 9
rmmr'm, on the contrary, 336. 06*. 6
GREEK INDEX.
nZm, with gen. 337. OAs. 4
<rgau/ix, Tfuu/at, 39. Obi. 1 1
T{"f>if> gen. pi. 68
tt, see rr
Tuyxatti, with particip. 375. 04s. 8
rims, rvmlni, 108. Obi. 1
ti/t, 13C. Note'0
ti>X"i Syntax, 378. Obi. ^
u, in the augra. 114.; instead of to in the
perf. pass. 145. Obi. 4
vi, diphth. 12
-upi, (conj. and opt.) 200
-KM;, quantity, 59. Obi. 1
-via, (verbs,) 178. 294. ; from verbs in
in, 228, ; quantity, ibid.
l**i, 289. Obi. 1
bii, shortened, 290. ; with the pass. 343. ;
u<T9 for vTim, 290
-0(e;, adj. (;,) 18
-on, (verbs ending in,) quantity, 19.
Obi. 10. 132. 133
<fu>xi, as prteterilum, 21 1
<fyi(is ilfii, Syntax, 422
(pifrt*9f, ipiftrref, 95. Obi. 2
fifn, Syntax, 418, with the Editor's
Note.
f(linn, Syntax, 415
-<fi, fit, 37. 76. Obi. 9
4>/g, GO. Obi. 2
fji,-, imper. 218. Obi. 2
129. OAs. 5
Qavly.tOY, 32. Note,
/ppsZits, 32. Obi. 2.; Syntax, 413
x, before ft 34
Xu(i, with particip. 375. OAs. 8
and %0mf*uXii, 34. OAs. 3
Syntax, 379. OAs. 2, with AWc
ij./5i, 75. Obi. 7
457
93
inflection, 133. Obi. C. ; contrac
tion, 186
indeol. 77. 280.; Syntax, 331.
Obi. 7
gen. 83. Ab/es
Xftemt, 52. III. 1
V-i ?, origin, 35, 22
^iv, <^fir, 18C. OAs. 5
inflection, 148. OAs. 8
in the Attic termination, short, 25. ;
compared with the 3d dec]. 75. Ab/e;
for a, 40, OAs. 13. ; for a and au, 39.
OAs. 4.; in the particip. perf. 176.;
contracted from , 244. fitiv; in
composition, 309.. Obs. 2. ; - for -us,
(adverbial termination,) 283
-u, uv, us, nomina, 75. OAs. 6
and "> 891. OAs. 4.; <S pixt, see
- t>, see rat
ZxXm, 45. OAs. 6
kmrmsi, (decl.) 72. 75. OAs. 6. 7. ; 301
<ra, &c. 45. OAs. 10
ayrnait, (accent,) 29. OAs. 2
-, (2 decl.) 55. OAs. 3
a , 291. OAs. 4
-(, -if> (adv.) 281
-us, nomina, 55
<lf, us, 27. ; Syntax, 391. ; prsepos. 379. ;
with casus abiol. 377- ; "s tti, us ins
urCi, 411. j i'j
404. ; Jm, 392
-sJs-m, shortened and contracted, 135.
OAs. 13
an, diphth. 12. 101. OAs. 4
firif, 40. OAs. 11
ufiXuf, with accns. 333. ; with double
accus. 335. OAs. 4
tftXn, 284. OAs. 7.; Syntax, 410
ERRATA.
The following Errata have escaped the Editor's eye in reading the Proofs for
the Printer :
Pago
Pfipe
Pago
vi. I am informed that 239. SAX,
268. i;Wn
270. also
Mil. Keic.hti.ey has
Lexitogus, II. 86.
abandoned his inten 239. <u( should have been 2734. ffrignru
tion.
printed in the same 278. *tir
vii. to judge of it."
type as ai^iu.
287. ulait *
9. Obs, 3, after the 1 the r, 242.gTa&;;i]id augushould
tjjretvry
(here railed Bav, I'uu,
have been printed in 288. i*'
not rr,) after the 1
the same type as 297. p-npm
the
(Kcrra,) and
312. ivi :
after
should have been 315. aratg
(J^um.)the* ti the J 245. yniiai
printed in the same 321. triXit
10. V* ,
type as yivroy and 322. walnut.like
17-, cur.v.uttcv. mulberry
ynpuu in the same as 325. fftAuratavror
it
rig
28.
yafttai.
331 . T TAfV
29.
246. ia/txai should have 332. instances
"EBtGeflt, StOffTl
been printed in the
Tyjv ffT^aTltttv
40. places in ifrra
same type as laxw. 334. WifiiXomrtti
41.
247- him should have been 346. read $ 135.
printed in the same 352. fivtis
42. <pi\iriipiXn: ( 103.)
43. instances"Afytur
type as hlitjwfu.
44. finii its
248. 5i should have been 354. Jjxt/f 11 vciXttt
45. Ctffii- I CTU CI/T VI- I 61;
printed in the same 360. f/A/wrra;
55. Obs. 3. flirt*;, T7lri*'
rl 'Ekkai iylvirc
type as 2<^?y.
50. S{.
253. Vfp* should have been 301. fl/ t* ng'av
65. "Ageup,
printed in the same 362. T0VT6V TOU
78. 'ArcXXm,
type as fpirteu.
'O toiovtos
79. yovurtv,
254.
and tuplex* 373. T5t
80. Dor. G%ittros$'t{*>il4t
should have heen 377- Oi rsri(i;
printed in the same 386. "H 3i/va
82. . <I fm,
type as %^afim.
390. uiSiit (c. fora)
258. xivnu should have been
ij i.
83. x'f>,
printed in the same
Svrtrlt 8
88.
$iVtft/,
type as xxirvpuu.
394. Aid. arf P/af.
91. affray/Vrartfj,
W}.l$u\u should have been 401. "Agtffret
93. fttyiffrofj
printed in the same 405. iXX'
105. or'tonrtv
aXX* us
type as tvr&tt.
\QR. TOiOS 1 OTOffOSy
269. <rtpshould have been 406. 7 Ara/.
133. xgdofitecij
printed in the same 420. relative
135. Oi*. 14. w.
type as vivfoputt.
421. "E3vx
146. TiTU^Otlj
258. (as 11.)
422. 'JEVt;
160.
262. Xtyiknfuu
trtXt/tuf
106. lervftai,
266. &ftt;v
424. (rXflw-T'tfi'Tif "
215. Sfl"T(,
428. t<
irlj
267. fjwfh (compare^i^ij- 431.
217. V;>i,
226. fr7 7W.
432. T*TTi| f
237. aaamf, (.--.,)
ADVERTISEMENTS.
I.
A GREEK and ENGLISH LEXICON, for the Use of Schools and
Colleges, containing a variety of Critical, Philological, and Scientific Matter, not
hitherto found in any Greek Dictionary. Also, an ENGLISH and GREEK LEXI
CON, comprising a Number of Idiomatic Phrases, for the Use of more Advanced
Students. By George Dunbar, A.M. F.R.S.E., and Professor of Greek in the
University of Edinburgh ; and E. H. Barker, Esq., of Thetford, Norfolk.
Edinburgh, 1831. Maclachlan and Stewart; London, Simpkin and Marshall; Dublin,
III.
Complete in Two Volumes, Ato. Price 5Z. 10*.
Dr. WEBSTER'S DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE,
INTENDED TO EXHIBIT
1. The Origin and the Affinities of every English Word, as far as they have been
ascertained, with its Primary Signification, as now generally established; 2. The
Orthography and the Pronunciation of Words, as sanctioned by reputable usage,
and where this usage is divided, as determinable by a reference to the principle of
analogy ; 3. Accurate and Discriminating Definitions of Technical and Scientific
Terms, with numerous Authorities and Illustrations. To which are prefixed an
Introductory Dissertation on the Origin, History, and Connection of the Languages of
Western Asia, and of Europe, and a Concise Grammar of the English Language.
Edited by E. H. Barker, Esq., of Thetford. Norfolk, with MS. Additions and Corrections, communicated by Dr. Webster.
It is not a mere improvement on Johnson's Dictionary, but an original work, the
labor of forty years, and contains 12,000 words more than any other similar Work.
In respect to etymology and affinities, it supplies the grand desideratum in English
Lexicography.
ADVERTISEMENTS.
IV.BIBLIOTIIECA CLASSICA, or CLASSICAL DICTIONARY,
containing a Copious Account of the Proper Names, mentioned in Ancient Au
thors, with the Value of Coins, Weights, and Measures, by the late J. Lemprieke,
D.D. The 3d Edition, 1797. Re-edited and Revised by E. H. Barker, with the
Extensive and Valuable Corrections, Improvements, and Additions, above 4000 in
Number, indicated by Brackets, from the 1th American Edition by Charles Anthon, Adjunct Professor ofLanguages and Ancient Geography, in Columbia-College,
New-York :To which is Subjoined by the present EniTOK an Appendix, containing
1 . A Table of the Greek Calendar, 2. A List of Places, in Latin and English, in which
Classical Presses have been established, 3. Notices of the Arabian Medical Writers.
The 2d. Edition, Corrected, Improved and Enlarged.
London, 1832, Black, Young, and YouNff. Price \Ss. bound.
" Very considerable corrections and alterations, improvements and additions, have
been made to it, and the Editor believes that the literary community will view with
much satisfaction the changes, which have been effected. Many verbal substitutions
have removed gross or coarse expressionshave given more perspicuity to what
was ambiguous or obscureand conferred more elegance and harmony on what had
little pretension to either. Much, which concerned bibliography, has been rectified
or added ; and much, which related to chronology, has been put into a more authen
tic form. Further sources of information on the several topics discussed, have
been indicated, and the reader can hardly fail to observe the desire to verify facts
by referring to authorities with scrupulous accuracy. That Tearfulness, which
men of erudition were accustomed to feel in quoting this work, from the careless
ness of facts, the imperfections of narrative, the errors of chronology, biography,
and bibliography, and other defects, which they discerned in it, may now be dis
missed, and the work merits honorable mention for the several purposes, to which
they make it subservient in reference." " With alterations so numerous, and
additions so extensive, the Editor may be excused for the presumption of thinking
that the large improvements in this Edition almost entitle it to be considered as a
netowork; and therefore the purchasers of the first edition should not be deemed
worthy of much sympathy, if their desire to avail themselves of these improvements
oblige them to purchase the reprint, as the Editor has often found himself in the
same situation, and never demanded the commiseration of his friends, but rejoiced
to displace one edition by another, if the latter were much better suited to his literary
wants and purposes."Preface to the Edition of 1832.
V.
BOUCHER AND STEVENSON'S GLOSSARY OF ARCHAIC AND
PROVINCIAL WORDS. :
Part I. price 7s. 6d. of
A SUPPLEMENT to the DICTIONAEIES of the ENGLISH
LANGUAGE, particularly those of Dr. Johnson and Dr. Webster, containing
1. A Large Collection of Words, occurring in early English Authors of reputation,
not to be found in the Dictionaries of Dr. Johnson and Dr. Webster, with Authori
ties and Illustrations.
2. Additional Illustrations of some Words, which are found in those Dictionaries.
3. A Large Collection of Words still used in many parts of England, though not
admitted into the Dictionaries, relics of the old Language of the English Nation,
with ample Illustrations.
4. An Introductory Essay on the Origin and History of the English Language.
Edited, by the Rev. Joseph Hunter, F.S.A.
London: Printed by W. Ciowiss, Stamford-street.
I .. ,